Home

Mercedes-Benz 2003 C 320 Sport Automobile User Manual

1. aa gt Release the respective seat backrest 1 Anchorage ring cover gt page 133 gt Remove anchorage ring cover Q from seat backrest of the seat on which a child seat is to be installed The seat backrest folds down Safety and Security Occupant safety P91 20 2142 31 2 Anchorage ring 3 Hook 4 Top tether strap gt Guide top tether strap G between head restraint and top of seat backrest For safety make sure hook has attached to anchorage ring 2 beyond the safety catch as illustrated gt page 95 gt gt Safety and Security Occupant safety gt gt Securely fasten hook which is part of top tether strap to anchorage ring 2 Make sure e the top tether strap is not twisted e the head restraint is installed and positioned such that the top tether strap can pass freely between the head restraint and top of seat back rest e top tether strap is positioned be tween the seat backrest and the cargo compartment cover blind if installed e the top tether strap is positioned between the seat backrest and the partition net if installed A When installing a child seat on a third row seat do not fasten hook 8 to the strap below anchorage ring 2 Otherwise the child seat will not be securely fastened A child s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child seat is not properly secured in the vehicle Warni
2. page 104 be fore setting the vehicle in motion This will im prove the vehicle s traction Snow chains should only be driven on snow covered roads at speeds not to exceed 30 mph 50 km h Remove chains as soon as possible when driving on roads without snow Please observe the following guidelines when using snow chains e Use of snow chains is not permissible with all wheel tire combinations gt page 532 e Snow chains should only be used on the rear wheels Follow the manufac turers mounting instructions e Only use snow chains that are approved by Mercedes Benz Your authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center will be glad to advise you on this subject e Use of snow chains may be prohibited depending on location Always check local and state laws before installing snow chains e Do not use snow chains on the spare wheel gt page 534 Y Maintenance We strongly recommend that you have your vehicle serviced by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center in accordance with the Maintenance Booklet at the times called for by the maintenance service indicator Failure to have the vehicle maintained in accordance with the Maintenance Booklet and maintenance service indicator at the designated times mileage will result in vehicle damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Maintenance service indicator message The maintenance service indicator message will notify you when you
3. gt If you are starting the engine with KEYLESS GO Close any doors that may be open to allow for better detection of the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO or gt Remove KEYLESS GO start stop button from starter switch gt Start the engine with the SmartKey as radio signals from another source may be interfering with the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO gt Repeat the starting procedure gt page 55 Remember that extended starting attempts can drain the battery gt Geta jump start gt page 514 If the engine does not start after several starting attempts there could be a mal function in the engine electronics or in the fuel supply system gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Parking brake P42 20 2769 31 i 1 Parking brake pedal 2 Release handle Getting started Driving A When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could release the parking brake which could result in an accident and or serious injury Warning gt Release the parking brake by pulling on release handle 2 The warning lamp USA only or Canada only in the instrument cluster goes out Getting started Driving Driving off gt Depress the brake pedal The gear selector le
4. A The cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation The driver is and must always remain responsible for the vehicle s speed and for safe brake operation Warning Only use the cruise control if the road traffic and weather conditions make it advisable to travel at a constant speed e The use of the cruise control can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a constant speed e The use of the cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads Rapid changes in tire traction can result in wheel spin and loss of control e Deactivate the cruise control when driving in fog The Resume function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this particular preset speed Warning AN The cruise control brakes automatically so that the set speed is not exceeded The brake pedal depresses automatically when the cruise control engages the brakes Keep driver s foot area clear at all times including the area under the brake pedal Objects stored in this area may impair pedal movement which could interfere with the braking ability of the cruise control system Do not place your foot under the brake pedal your foot could become caught Keep in mind that the cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation
5. Control system Available languages Selecting display digital speedometer Press button or E to select 5 Caman ee temperature for status the desired setting e English nee The selected display is then shown gt Move the selection marker with continuously in the status indicator e French button or ESB to the Instr lower display e Italian isto SEU The other display now appears in the e Spanish gt Press button PAM or Reg repeatedly menu of the standard display until the message Status line gt page 167 e Dutch disp play appears in the multifunction e Digital speedometer e Danish display or e Swedish The selection marker is on the current setting e Outside temperature e Portuguese e Turkish Status line display e Russian Canada only Speed Outside temperature 5 Time Date submenu Access the Time Date submenu via the Settings menu Use the Time Date submenu to change the time and date settings The following functions are available Function Page Setting the time hours 181 Setting the time minutes 181 Setting the date month 182 Setting the date day 182 Setting the date year 182 If your vehicle is equipped with the COMAND system and navigation module see separate COMAND operating instructions for information on how to set the date and time Controls in detail Setting the time hour This function is not available if your vehicle is equipped with the COMAND s
6. Controls in detail 3 zone automatic climate control Using driver side settings for all temperature zones E You can use the settings of the driver s side such as temperature air volume and air distribution for all temperature zones These settings only need to be made once and the automatic climate control system will automatically regulate the settings for all temperature zones quickly and comfort ably Activating gt Adjust the temperature air volume and air distribution gt page 234 gt Press button RZJ gt page 234 The indicator lamp on the button comes on The driver side settings are used for all temperature zones Deactivating gt Press button J gt page 234 again The indicator lamp on the button goes out p If you manually set the temperature air volume or air distribution for the passenger side or the rear passenger compartment when the MONO setting is active the MONO setting will be switched off Residual heat and ventilation With the engine switched off it is possible to continue to heat or ventilate the interior for up to 30 minutes This feature makes use of the residual heat produced by the engine i How long the system will provide heating depends on e the coolant temperature e the battery voltage Regardless of the temperature and air volume set on the automatic climate control panel an interior temperature is aimed at by 72 F 22 C and the b
7. Do not release the button gt Indicator lamp Q will begin to flash after 20 seconds Without releasing the signal transmitter button proceed with programming starting with step 3 Operation of integrated remote control gt Switch on the ignition gt page 39 gt Select and press the appropriate integrated signal transmitter button or to activate the remote controlled device The integrated remote control trans mitter continues to send the signal as long as the button is pressed up to 20 seconds Erasing the integrated remote control memory gt Switch on the ignition gt page 39 gt Simultaneously press and hold outer signal transmitter buttons 2 and for approximately 20 seconds until the indicator lamp flashes rapidly Do not hold for longer than 30 seconds The codes of all three channels are erased 0 Ifyou sell your vehicle erase the codes of all three channels Controls in detail Useful features Programming tips If you are having difficulty programming the integrated remote control here are some helpful tips e Check the frequency of the hand held remote control typically located on the reverse side of the remote The integrated remote control is com patible with radio frequency devices operating between 280 390 MHZ e Puta new battery in hand held remote control This will increase the likeli hood of the hand held remote control sending
8. For more information see Trailer tongue load gt page 380 Occupants weight Occupant 1 Occupant 2 Occupant 3 Occupant 4 Occupant 5 Occupant 1 Occupant 2 Occupant 3 Occupant 1 150 Ibs 180 Ibs 160 Ibs 140 Ibs 120 Ibs 200 Ibs 190 Ibs 150 Ibs 150 Ibs Combined weight of all occupants 750 Ibs 540 Ibs 150 Ibs Operation Tires and wheels Available cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight total load limit from placard minus combined weight of all occupants 1500 Ibs 750 Ibs 750 Ibs 1500 Ibs 540 Ibs 960 Ibs 1500 Ibs 150 Ibs 1350 Ibs Operation Tires and wheels Certification label Even after careful determination of the combined weight of all occupants cargo and the trailer tongue load if applicable gt page 380 as to not exceed the permis sible load limit you must make sure that your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR and the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for either the front or rear axle You can obtain the GVWR and GAWR from the certification label The certification label can be found on the driver s door B pillar see Technical data gt page 526 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The total weight of the vehicle all occupants all cargo and the trailer tongue load gt page 380 must never exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The to tal allowable weight that can be carried by
9. If necessary replace the wheel gt page 497 Reactivate the Run Flat Indicator after adjusting the tire inflation pressure values gt page 384 Tire pressure Vehicles with Advanced TPMS gt Drive the vehicle for a few minutes displayed after Cv vanes ior a few minutes The tire inflation pressure is being checked Practical hints What to do if Display message Possible cause consequence Possible solution Tire pressure monitor The TPMS or Advanced TPMS is gt Have the TPMS or Advanced TPMS checked by an inoperative malfunctioning authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Tire pressure monitor There are wheels without appropriate wheel gt Have the TPMS or Advanced TPMS checked by an inoperative sensors mounted e g winter tires authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center HO Tite E gt Have the wheel sensors installed by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Tire pressure monitor One or more sensors are defect e g gt Have the TPMS or Advanced TPMS checked by an Wheel sensor missing battery is empty authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center One or more wheels without appropriate gt Have the wheel sensors installed by an authorized wheel sensors mounted e g spare tire Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Vehicles with Advanced TPMS The tire pressure for the respective tire is shown in the multifunction display Tire pressure monitor The TPMS or Advanced TPMS is u
10. T Damage resulting from mixing gasoline with diesel fuel is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty The fuel filler flap is located on the right hand side of the vehicle towards the rear Locking unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO automatically locks unlocks the fuel filler flap T Diesel engine When filling the diesel fuel tank using fuel containers place a filling filter a suede cloth or a clean flannel cloth as a filter Otherwise particles from the fuel container could clog the fuel lines and or the diesel injec tion system gt Turn off the engine e by turning the SmartKey to position 0 gt page 39 Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch e by pressing the KEYLESS GO start stop button gt page 41 Open the driver s door with the driver s door open starter switch Is now in position 0 same as SmartKey removed from starter switch gt Briefly push on fuel filler flap at the position indicated the arrow The fuel filler flap opens slightly Open the fuel filler flap completely Turn the fuel cap to the counterclock wise and hold on to it until possible pressure is released gt Take off the fuel cap i The fuel filler cap is tethered to the fuel filler neck Do not drop the cap It could damage the vehicle paint finish gt To prevent fuel vapors from escaping into open air fully insert filler nozzle unit gt Only fill you
11. The rear center console contains e Storage compartment gt page 314 e Cupholder gt page 318 e DVD player see separate COMAND operating instructions i When fully expanding the cargo compart ment the rear center console has to be removed from the vehicle in order for the cargo compart ment floor to be an even plane gt page 302 Controls in detail Useful features Removing A Remove all containers that may be stored in the cupholders of the rear center console Otherwise liquids could spill on vehicle occupants and or vehicle equipment Hot liquids spilled on vehicle occupants may cause serious personal injury Liquids spilled on vehicle equipment may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Warning T To prevent damage to the rear center console and or its components make sure the storage compartment gt page 314 and the DVD console lid see separate COMAND oper ating instructions are closed before removing the rear center console Remove all items from the storage compart ment gt page 314 of the rear center console to reduce the weight of the rear center console a gt pot 2034 1 Rear center console 2 Release handle 3 Rear center console base 4 Folding back Handle 6 Anchorage points 4 g Eh gt Pull release handle 2 The front part of center console 1 is released from base 3 gt Lift center conso
12. gt The resulting figure equals the avail able amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 1400 750 5 x 150 650 Ibs Step 5 gt Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4 Step 6 if applicable gt If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be trans ferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle gt page 380 The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configura tions and number and size of occupants The following examples use a load limit of 1500 Ibs This is for illustration purposes only Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on the vehicle s placard gt page 377 Example Combined Numberof Seating weight limit occupants configura of occu driver and tion pants and passengers cargo from placard 1 1500 Ibs 5 front 2 rear 3 2 1500 Ibs 3 front 1 rear 2 3 1500 Ibs 1 front 1 The higher the weight of all occupants the less cargo and luggage load capacity is available
13. i Do not position the jack on the body of the vehicle as this may cause damage to the vehicle Practical hints Warning A N The jack is intended only for lifting the vehicle briefly for wheel changes It is not suited for performing maintenance work under the vehicle e Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised e Never lie down under the raised vehicle P40 10 3697 31 2 Take up bracket 3 Jack 4 Crank Flat tire Place jack 3 on firm ground Position jack 3 under the take up bracket 2 so that it is always vertical plumb line as seen from the side even if the vehicle is parked on an incline P40 00 2040 31 Turn crank clockwise until jack is fully seated in take up bracket and the jack base evenly meets the ground Continue to turn crank until the wheel is a maximum of 1 2 in 3 cm from the ground Practical hints Flat tire Removing the wheel Mounting the spare wheel BE 7o avoid paint damage place wheel flat E j against hub and hold it there while installing first wheel bolt Warning A N Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged or rusted Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts P40 10 3966 31 P40 10 3705 31 Damaged wheel hub threads should be Alignment bolt C Wheel bolt for 18 19 20 and 21 repaired immediately Do not continue to light alloy wheels and R 63 AMG spare drive under these circumstances Contact BE Cre
14. For your protection and the protection of others when scrapping the air bag unit or emergency tensioning device our safety instructions must be fol lowed These instructions are available from your authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Given the considerable deployment speed required inflation volume and the textile structure of the air bags there is the possibility of abrasions or potentially more serious injuries result ing from air bag deployment Safety and Security Warning AN Only use seat covers which have been test ed and approved by Mercedes Benz for your vehicle model Using other seat covers may interfere with or prevent the deployment of the front side impact air bags or the rear side impact air bags Contact your autho rized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center for availability When you sell your vehicle we strongly urge you to give notice to the subsequent owner that it is equipped with an SRS by alerting them to the applicable section in the Operator s Manual Occupant safety Front air bags d 1 Driver air bag 2 Passenger air bag Driver and front passenger air bags are deployed e inthe event of certain frontal impacts e if impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold e independently of the side impact air bags Safety and Security Occupant safety The front air bags in this vehicle have been designed to inflate in two stages This allows the air bag to have
15. O OF E 7 oO PIs 22 213 7 31 6 P13 227 2096 31 6 5 4 P1g 22 2049 31 1 Coolant pump 1 Idler pulley 1 Automatic belt tensioner 2 Idler pulley 2 Idler pulley 2 Power steering pump 3 Automatic belt tensioner 3 Automatic belt tensioner 3 Air conditioning compressor 4 Power steering pump 4 Power steering pump 4 Crankshaft Air conditioning compressor Air conditioning compressor Coolant pump 6 Crankshaft 6 Crankshaft 6 Generator alternator 7 Idler pulley 7 Coolant pump 7 Idler pulley Generator alternator Generator alternator R 63 AMG P13 22 2132 31 1 Idler pulley 2 Idler pulley 3 Idler pulley 4 Automatic belt tensioner Power steering pump 6 Air conditioning compressor 7 Crankshaft Coolant pump 9 Generator alternator Technical data Layout of poly V belt drive Technical data Engine Model R 320 CDI 251 122 R 350 251 165 Engine 642 272 Mode of operation Diesel 4 stroke engine 4 stroke engine gasoline injection No of cylinders 6 6 Bore 3 27 in 83 00 mm 3 66 in 92 90 mm Stroke 3 62 in 92 00 mm 3 39 in 86 00 mm Total piston displacement 182 cu in 2987 cm 213 cu in 3498 cm Compression ratio 16 5 1 10 7 1 Output acc to SAE J 1349 221 hp 3800 rpm 268 hp 6000 rpm 165 kW 3800 rpm 200 kW 6000 rpm Maximum torque acc to SAE J 1349 398 Ib ft 1600 2400 rpm 258 Ib ft 2 400 5000 rom 540 Nm 1600 240
16. The currently set speed appears in the multifunction display for approximately 5 seconds aD On uphill grades the cruise control may not be able to maintain the set speed Once the grade eases the set speed will be resumed On downhill grades the cruise control maintains the set speed by braking with the vehicle s braking system In addition on longer downhill grades the automatic transmission will down shift automatically Canceling cruise control There are several ways to cancel the cruise control gt Step on the brake pedal The cruise control is canceled The last set speed is stored for later use or gt Briefly push the cruise control lever in direction of arrow gt page 267 The cruise control is canceled The last set speed is stored for later use a The last stored speed is canceled when you turn off the engine The cruise control switches off automatically when e you step on the brake pedal e you depress the parking brake pedal The cruise control switches off automatically and an acoustic warning will sound when e the vehicle speed is below 20 mph 30 km h e the ESP is in operation e the ESP is switched off with the ESP switch gt page 104 e the ESP has switched off due to a malfunction gt page 441 e you set the automatic transmission to N while driving Observe additional messages in the multifunction display that may appear T Setting the automa
17. Warning e Excessive speed especially in turns e Wet and slippery road surfaces e Following another vehicle too closely The ABS BAS ESP and 4 ETS cannot re duce this risk Always adjust your driving style to the pre vailing road and weather conditions n winter operation the maximum effective ness of the ABS the BAS the ESP the EBP and the 4 ETS is only achieved with winter tires gt page 405 or snow chains as required ABS A Do not pump the brake pedal Use firm steady brake pedal pressure instead Pump ing the brake pedal defeats the purpose of the ABS and significantly reduces braking effectiveness Warning The Antilock Brake System ABS regulates the brake pressure so that the wheels do not lock during braking This allows you to maintain the ability to steer your vehicle The ABS is functional above a speed of ap proximately 5 mph 8 km h independent of road surface conditions On slippery road surfaces the ABS will re spond even to light brake pressure The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster gt page 26 comes on when you switch on the ignition It goes out when the engine is running Braking At the instant one of the wheels is about to lock up a slight pulsation can be felt in the brake pedal indicating that the ABS is in the regulating mode gt Keep firm and steady pressure on the brake pedal while experiencing the pul sation Continuous steady b
18. e Do not attempt to slow the vehicle down by shifting to a lower gear using the gear selector lever Always obey applicable speed limits e Select gear ranges 3 2 or 1 gt page 205 only when driving at moderate speeds for hill driving e Select C as the preferred shift program gt page 206 for the first 1000 miles 1500 km Y Driving instructions Drive sensibly save fuel Fuel consumption to a great extent depends on driving habits and operating conditions To save fuel you should e Keep tires at the recommended inflation pressures e Remove unnecessary loads e Remove carriers when not in use e Allow engine to warm up under low load use e Avoid frequent acceleration and deceleration e Have all maintenance work performed at the intervals specified in the Maintenance Booklet and as required by the Maintenance System U S vehicles or FSS PLUS Canada vehicles Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Operation Fuel consumption is also increased by driving in cold weather in stop and go traffic on short trips and in hilly area Drinking and driving AN Drinking and driving and or taking drugs and driving are a very dangerous combina tion Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes perceptions and judgment Warning The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident are greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and
19. ers in the rear center console are only illuminat gt Press down on front of center ed when the rear center console is installed in console 6 until it audibly engages in the most rearward position position 0 latch or Controls in detail Useful features Heated steering wheel The steering wheel heating warms up the leather area of the steering wheel The stalk is located on the lower left hand side of the steering wheel 1 Switching on 2 Switching off 3 Indicator lamp Switching on gt Switch on the ignition gt page 39 gt Turn switch at the tip of stalk in the direction of arrow Q The steering wheel is heated Indicator lamp comes on a gt The steering wheel heating is temporarily suspended while indicator lamp 3 remains on when e the temperature of the vehicle interior is above 86 F 30 C e the temperature of the steering wheel is above 95 F 35 C When these conditions do not apply anymore steering wheel heating continues Switching off gt Turn switch at the tip of stalk in the direction of arrow 2 The heated steering wheel is switched off Indicator lamp goes out a Indicator lamp 8 flashes or goes out e incase of power surge or undervoltage e incase of a steering wheel heating malfunc tion The steering wheel heating switches off automatically when you remove the SmartKey from the starter switch or on vehicles with K
20. gt Have the system checked at an autho rized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible The yellow ESP warning lamp The ESP or traction control has come into When driving off apply as little throt flashes while driving operation because of detected traction loss tle as possible of at least one tire gt While driving ease up on the acceler ator gt Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather condi tions gt Do not deactivate the ESP Exceptions gt page 104 Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident Practical hints What to do if Problem m The red seat belt telltale comes on for a maximum of 6 seconds after starting the engine You hear a warning chime for a maximum of 6 seconds after starting the engine The red seat belt telltale comes on while the vehicle is standing still and the engine is running or during driving Possible cause consequence The seat belt telltale reminds you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts before driving off You have forgotten to fasten your seat belt You and or your front passenger have for gotten to fasten your seat belts There are items placed on the front passen ger seat and therefore the system senses the front passenger seat as being occupied Suggested solution gt Fasten your seat belts Regardless of whether the seat belts are fastened or no
21. gt Press and hold buttons and simultaneously for about 5 seconds until battery check lamp G gt page 112 flashes twice BEF you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey the batteries in the SmartKey are discharged the SmartKey is malfunctioning or the vehicle battery is drained e Check the batteries in the SmartKey and replace them if necessary gt page 483 e Use the mechanical key to unlock the driver s door gt page 478 e Lock the vehicle as described in the Practical hints section gt page 479 e Have the vehicle battery and the vehicle battery connections checked gt page 506 If the SmartKey is malfunctioning contact Roadside Assistance or an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Checking the batteries gt Press button or a Battery check lamp gt page 112 comes on briefly to indicate that the SmartKey batteries are in order i If battery check lamp 8 does not come on briefly during check the SmartKey batteries are discharged Replace the batteries gt page 483 You can obtain the required batteries at any authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center f the batteries are checked within signal range of the vehicle pressing the button or will lock or unlock the vehicle accordingly Unlocking and opening the tailgate Vehicles with power tailgate You can unlock and open the tailgate sep arately A minimum height clearance of
22. only the selected turn signal will operate Example illustration R 500 oe y 6 p the cover because the rear exhaust pipe is Upon canceling the turn signal the hazard warn Towing eye cover extremely hot ing flasher will operate again aD To signal turns while being towed with hazard warning flasher in use set the starter switch to position 2 and activate combination Ifthe battery is disconnected or discharged the automatic transmission will remain locked in position P and the SmartKey will not turn in the starter switch For more information see Bat tery gt page 506 and Jump starting gt page 514 Removing cover gt Press mark on cover Q as indicated by the arrow gt Lift off cover Q to reveal the threaded hole for towing eye bolt Installing towing eye bolt gt Take the towing eye bolt and wheel wrench from the vehicle toolkit gt page 473 gt Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and tighten with wheel wrench Practical hints Removing towing eye bolt gt Loosen towing eye bolt counterclock wise with wheel wrench Unscrew towing eye bolt gt Store the towing eye bolt and wheel wrench back into the vehicle toolkit gt page 473 gt Engage cover Q at top and press at bottom Installing cover gt Engage cover Q at top and press at bottom Towing the vehicle Stranded vehicle Freeing a stranded vehicle on which the wheels are dug into sand
23. Dimensional relationship between tire section height and section width expressed in percentage Operation Bar Another metric unit for air pressure There are 14 5038 pounds per square inch psi to 1 bar there are 100 kilopascals kPa to 1 bar Bead The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim Cold tire inflation pressure Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle has been sitting for at least 3 hours or driven no more than 1 mile 1 6 km Curb weight The weight of a motor vehicle with stan dard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel oil and coolant and if so equipped air conditioning and additional optional equipment but without passen gers and cargo Tires and wheels DOT Department of Transportation A tire branding symbol which denotes the tire meets requirements of the U S Department of Transportation GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating The GAWR is the maximum permissible axle weight The gross vehicle weight on each axle must never exceed the GAWR for the front and rear axle indicated on the certification label located on the driver s door B pillar GTW Gross Trailer Weight The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo equipment luggage etc loaded on the trailer Operation Tires and wheels GVW Gross Vehicle Weight The GVW comprises the weight of the vehicle including fuel tools spare w
24. Distronic had been deactivated and gt Activate Distronic gt page 277 is available again Distronic is deactivated because the functionality is impaired by external interferences e g high frequency sources such as toll stations soeed measuring systems etc Distronic is deactivated because the Distronic sensor has not sensed any other vehicles or objects e g road sign or such for a long time gt Leave the area of the external interfer ence Activate Distronic again gt page 277 when the message DISTRONIC available again appears Try to activate Distronic again gt page 277 when the message DISTRONIC available again appears Display message Possible cause consequence DISTRONIC currently unavailable Distronic is deactivated because see Operator s Manual the Distronic cover in the radiator grille is dirty e the functionality is impaired by heavy precipitation or fog Practical hints What to do if Possible solution gt Clean the Distronic cover in the radiator grille gt page 414 gt Restart the vehicle Distronic becomes operational again with out the engine being restarted when e dirt on the radiator grille has fallen off while driving e g slush or snow e the system recognizes full sensor availability due to lessening rain or because the road is drying for example e the message in the multifunction display disappears You can then operate Dis
25. Warning Regularly check the tires for damage Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres sure loss As a result you could lose control of your vehicle Worn old tires can cause accidents If the tire tread is badly worn or if the tires have sustained damage replace them Regularly check your tire inflation pressure at least once a month For more informa tion on checking tire inflation pressure see Recommended tire inflation pres sure gt page 380 Tire inspection Every time you check your tire inflation pressure you should also inspect your tires for the following e excessive treadwear gt page 375 e cord or fabric showing through the tire s rubber e bumps bulges cuts cracks or splits in the tread or side of the tire Replace the tire if you find any of the above conditions Make sure you also inspect the spare tire periodically for condition and inflation Spare tires will age and become worn over time even if never used and thus should be inspected and replaced when necessary Life of tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire inflation pressure e Distance driven A Tires and spare tire should be replaced after 6 years regardless of the remaining tread Warning Tread depth Do not allow your tires to wear down too far Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply reduced at tread de
26. You are responsible for safety at all times and must continue to pay attention to the immediate surroundings when parking and maneuvering This includes the area behind in front of and beside the vehicle Otherwise you could endanger yourself or others Controls in detail Warning AN Make sure that no persons or animals are in or near the area in which you are parking maneuvering Otherwise they could be injured Warning AN The rear view camera either will not function or will not function to its full capability if e the tailgate is open e it is raining very hard snowing or foggy e itis night or you are parking maneuver ing your vehicle in an area where it is very dark e the camera is exposed to a very bright white light e the immediate surroundings are illumi nated with fluorescent light the display may flicker Driving systems e there is a sudden change in tempera ture e g if you drive into a heated garage from the cold lens condensa tion e the camera lens is dirty or covered e the rear of your vehicle is damaged In this case have the position and set ting of the camera checked by a quali fied specialist workshop Mercedes Benz recommends that you contact a Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center for this purpose Do not use the rear view camera in these sit uations Otherwise you could injure yourself or others and or damage property including your vehicle while parking maneuvering
27. button on the SmartKey The tailgate stops moving a If the vehicle was previously centrally locked the tailgate will lock automatically after closing it gt page 125 The turn signals will flash three times to confirm locking The tailgate can also be opened using the button on the SmartKey gt page 115 or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO gt page 121 Locking and unlocking Opening the tailgate from the inside manually You can unlock the tailgate from the third row seats and then open it manually The handle is located on the right hand side of the tailgate s window trim 2 Push Lift gt Push handle in direction of arrow 2 and hold it there gt gt Controls in detail Locking and unlocking gt gt Lift handle Q in direction of arrow The tailgate is released and can be opened manually i If you do not open the tailgate within a few seconds the tailgate lock will automatically en gage again Additionally the tailgate will relock automatically if the vehicle was locked when the tailgate was released from the inside lf the tailgate lock does not engage automatically and if applicable the tailgate does not relock after a few seconds you have to close the tailgate manually gt page 125 Warning A N Only drive with the tailgate closed as among other dangers such as blocked visibility exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior Opening the tailgate from
28. gt Press the combination switch briefly in direction of arrow Q to the resistance point The windshield wipers wipe one time without washer fluid Getting started Driving Wiping with windshield washer fluid Rear window wiper washer gt Press the combination switch in direction of arrow 1 past the resis tance point The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column The windshield wipers operate with her fluid washer Tul 6 Rear window wiper indicator To prevent smears on the windshield wipe with windshield washer fluid every now and then even when it is raining gt Switch on the ignition gt page 40 The rear window wiper engages automatical ly when the automatic transmission is shifted to position R with the windshield wipers switched s FA on P54 25 5183 31 For information on filling up the washer reservoir see Windshield rear window washer system and headlamp cleaning system gt page 372 Combination switch Activating intermittent wipe Rear window wiper switch gt Turn rear window wiper switch to 2 Wiping rear window with washer fluid position gt page 62 3 Intermittent wiping 4 Rear window wiper off Wiping rear window with washer fluid In the lower multifunction display you will see indicator 6 indicating that the rear window wiper is activated Getting started Driving Deactivating inter
29. gt page 41 gt Open the drivers door this puts the starter switch in position O same as with the SmartKey re moved from the starter switch The driver s door then can be closed again gt Remove the fuse for the tilt sliding panel from the fuse box gt page 521 i For information on which fuse box contains the fuse for the power tilt sliding panel see the fuse chart provided with the vehicle tool kit gt page 473 Reinsert the fuse in the fuse box Switch on the ignition gt page 39 Push and hold the roof panel switch in direction of arrow 2 gt page 263 until the roller sunblinds are fully closed Keep holding the roof panel switch in direction of arrow 2 gt page 263 for approximately 1 second Pull and hold the roof panel switch in direction of arrow Q gt page 263 until the roller sunblinds are fully opened Keep holding the roof panel switch in direction of arrow Q gt page 263 for approximately 1 second gt Press and hold the roof panel switch in direction of arrow gt page 263 until the tilt sliding panel is fully raised at the rear gt Push and hold the roof panel switch in direction of arrow 2 gt page 263 until the tilt sliding panel is fully closed gt Keep holding the roof panel switch in direction of arrow 2 gt page 263 for approximately 1 second gt Open the tilt sliding panel using the Express open feature gt page 263 If
30. on electric air pump switch than 8 minutes without interruption Otherwise it s Gnenaw oncincie airpump The electric air pump should now may overheat l switch on and inflate the collapsible You may operate the electric air pump again gt Pull out electrical plug and air hose tire after it has cooled oft with pressure gauge gt Remove the valve cap from the collapsible tire valve Practical hints Flat tire BE Please compare the recommended tire in Lowering the vehicle flation pressure for your vehicle with the tire in Warning A flation pressure on the yellow label located on pe ne earning the spare wheel rim Follow recommend tire inflation pressures arning If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label Do not overinflate tires Overinflating tires ileuagalasatlathe erly atten the wheelie on the spare wheel rim differs from the values can result in sudden deflation blowout be given in this Operator s Manual inflate the tire to the recommended tire inflation pressure given on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim properly mounted cause they are more likely to become punc tured or damaged by road debris potholes etc gt Press 0 on electric air pump switch 2 vehicle Pome Do not underinflate tires Underinflated tires gt Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch wear unevenly adversely affect handling Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric air pump gt page 501 b
31. q Do not underinflate tires Underinflated tires 10 3137 3 wear excessively and or unevenly adverse Q Maximum permissible tire inflation ly affect handling and fuel economy and are pressure more likely to fail from being overheated i For illustration purposes only Actual data Do not overinflate tires Overinflated tires on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary can adversely affect handling and ride com from data shown in above illustration fort wear unevenly increase stopping dis tance and result in sudden deflation blowout because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road de bris potholes etc This is the maximum permissible tire inflation pressure for the tire Warning A N Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards U S vehicles Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors treadwear traction and temperature resistance 1 Treadwear 2 Traction 3 Temperature resistance Gp For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specitic to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear Traction Temperature 200 AA A All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The treadwear grade is a com
32. 2 Cruise control speed segments 3 Speed of the vehicle ahead If Distronic detects a vehicle directly ahead the cruise control speed segments 2 which represents the differ ence from the speed of the preceding vehicle 3 to the driver s selected set speed 1 appear in the speedometer If Distronic calculates that there is a dan ger of collision The distance warning lamp in the instrument cluster comes on gt page 26 An intermittent warning sounds Immediately apply the brake to avoid a collision Under no circumstances should the driver await the intermittent warning sound before braking See the follow ing warning note The intermittent warning sound ceases and the distance warning lamp goes out when the necessary distance to the vehicle ahead is again estab lished Controls in detail Warning AN An intermittent warning sounds and the distance warning lamp in the instru ment cluster is illuminated if the Distronic system calculates that the distance to the vehicle ahead and your vehicle s current speed indicate that Distronic will not be ca pable of slowing the vehicle sufficiently to maintain the preset following distance which creates a danger of a collision Immediately brake the vehicle to increase your distance to the preceding vehicle The warning sound is intended as a final caution in which you should intercede with your own braking inputs to avoid a potentially danger ous s
33. Add engine oil as required Be careful not to overfill with oil Be careful not to spill any oil when adding Avoid environmental damage caused by oil entering the ground or water i Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off It could cause damage to the engine or emission control system not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty gt Screw filler cap Q back on filler neck For more information on engine oil see Technical data section gt page 538 and gt page 540 Transmission fluid level The transmission fluid level does not need to be checked If you notice transmission fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions have an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center check the automatic trans mission Coolant level The engine coolant is a mixture of water and anticorrosion antifreeze To check the coolant level the vehicle must be parked on level ground A In order to avoid any possibly serious burns Warning e Use extreme caution when opening the hood if there are any signs of steam or coolant leaking from the cooling system or if the coolant temperature gauge indi cates that the coolant is overheated e Do not remove pressure cap on coolant reservoir if coolant temperature is above 158 F 70 C Allow engine to cool down before removing cap The coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and is under pressure Using a rag slowly open the cap approx imately turn to relieve
34. Clock 26 181 Vehicle status message memory 174 Messages in the multifunction Cockpit 24 Control system submenus 163 165 display 436 Cold tire inflation pressure 401 Comfort 189 Cup holders 316 Collapsible tire 475 534 Instrument cluster 179 Front center console 316 Collapsible wheel chock 475 Lighting 183 Rear center console 318 Combination switch 59 60 62 150 Time Date 181 Curb weight 401 Compass 342 Vehicle 186 Control system 186 Control and operation of radio transmitters 357 D Date display Setting 181 Daytime running lamp mode 148 Setting 183 Deep water see Standing water Defogging windshield 225 240 Defrosting Front 224 239 Defrosting Rear 217 Delayed shut off Exteriorlamps 185 Interior lighting 186 Department of Transportation see DOT Diesel engine Bleeding fuel system 505 Preglow indicator lamp 29 Diesel fuel see Fuel Difficulties While driving 63 With starting 57 Digital speedometer 159 167 Dimensions Vehicle 536 Direction of rotation tires 375 Displays Digital soeedometer 159 167 Distronic 174 274 Maintenance service indicator message 407 Messages in the multifunction display 433 471 Multifunction display 159 Outside temperature 158 159 167 Selecting 180 Showing malfunctions 175 Symbol messages 451 Text messages 435 Vehicle status message memory 174 Vehicle system settings Control system 163 165 176 Distance to empty range Trip computer 191 Distance warning function 191
35. Damaged or impact damaged child seats or child seat mounting fittings must be re placed Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle even if the children are secured in a child restraint system The LATCH anchors on the second row seats are covered with upholstery blends Fs ae s Ea 7 _ 1 Anchors second row seats 2 Indicates the position of the anchors gt Move the respective second row seat backrest to an upright position gt page 138 Push the upholstery blend to the side Install a LATCH type child seat accord ing to the manufacturer s instructions The LATCH anchors on the third row seats are blended with covers Fi x 4 gt m F al 4 ia 4 3 Anchorage ring covers third row seats gt Remove anchorage ring cover from third row seat on which a child seat is to be installed 4 Anchors third row seats gt Install a LATCH type child seat accord ing to the manufacturer s instructions i Non LATCH type child seats may also be used and can be installed using the vehicle s seat belt system Install child seat according to the manufacturer s instructions Installation of infant and child restraint system This vehicle is equipped with tether an chorages for a top tether strap at each of the rear seat backrests 2 Anchorage rings 3 Hook gt Move the respective head restraint to its uppermost position gt page 139
36. Doing so could damage the transfer case which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty All wheels must be on or off the ground Observe instructions for towing the vehicles with all wheels on the ground Practical hints When circumstances do not permit the recommended towing methods the vehicle may be towed with all wheels on the ground only so far as necessary to have the vehicle moved to a safe location where the recommended towing methods can be employed A If circumstances require towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground always tow with a tow bar if Warning e the engine will not run e there is a malfunction in the power supply or in the vehicle s electrical system Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground make sure the starter switch is in position 2 gt page 39 Towing the vehicle A With the engine not running there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems In this case it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle Adapt your driving accordingly Warning BE When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground the automatic transmission must be in position N and the starter switch must be in position 2 gt page 39 When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground the vehicle may be towed only for distances up to 30 miles 50 km and at a speed
37. Have the battery checked regularly by an autho rized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Disconnecting removing reinstalling and Contact your authorized Mercedes Benz Light reconnecting the battery is a complicated Truck Center for further information and technically demanding procedure that also requires safety precautions to avoid the Warning A risk of injury We strongly recommend that it be performed by a qualified technician or an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center only Please read the instructions fully before beginning operation and only undertake it if you feel fully capable of performing all of the tasks involved as described in these instructions Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries gt page 506 Performing the tasks involved incorrectly can cause damage to the vehicle and impair the operating safety of the vehicle and or cause severe injury to you or others Do not place metal objects on the battery as this could result in a short circuit Use leak proof battery only to avoid the risk of acid burns in the event of an accident a With a disconnected battery you will no long er be able to turn the SmartKey in the starter switch and pressing the KEYLESS GO start stop button will have no effect Step 1 Disconnecting If your battery is discharged the vehicle must be jump started gt page 514 using the jump start contacts in the engine compartment
38. If the battery is discharged the battery can be charged using the jump start contacts located in the engine compartment gt page 515 A Never charge a battery while still installed in the vehicle unless the accessory battery charge unit approved by Mercedes Benz is being used Gases may escape during charg ing and cause explosions that may result in paint damage corrosion or personal injury Warning An accessory battery charge unit specially adapted for Mercedes Benz vehicles and tested and approved by Mercedes Benz is available permitting the charging of the battery in its installed position Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center for information and availability Charge battery in accordance with the separate instructions for the accessory battery charger Battery gt Charge the battery in accordance with the instructions of the battery charger manufacturer Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly Large 12 volt storage batteries contain lead Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling Practical hints Jump starting Warning A N Failure to follow these directions will cause damage to the electronic components and can lead to a battery explosion and severe injury or death Never lean over batteries while connecting or jump starting you might g
39. Loading Warning A N Make sure e the seats are properly locked e the seat backrests are in an upright po sition and are properly locked A second row seat is properly locked only when lock status indicator Q is in hinged position and red marking is barely vies Second row seat unlocked Second row seat locked If a seat and seat backrest are not proper Ee ora eicaror Ts b aa a 2 Red marking 2 Red marking locked the seat could move forward and the seat backrest could fold You could slide un When the seat is unlocked When the seat is locked der the seat belt during braking vehicle ma e lock status indicator is extended e lock status indicator Q is in hinged neuvers orin an accident If you slide under l l B position it the belt would apply force at the abdomen e red marking is clearly visible e red marking 2 is barely visible or neck That could cause serious or even fa gt When the seat is unlocked push seat tal injuries backrest back until the seat audibly engages Controls in detail Loading Cargo compartment cover blind The cargo compartment cover blind can be installed behind the third row seats or the second row seats T With the cargo compartment cover blind installed do not pile luggage higher than the lower edges of the rear side windows The cargo compartment cover blind has two extensions which are connected to the cargo compartment cover blind by cords The cargo compart
40. One SmartKey with KEYLESS GO in the vehicle one SmartKey with KEYLESS GO outside the vehicle If you leave the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO behind when exiting and locking the vehicle no message appears in the multifunction display Possibility 2 One SmartKey with KEYLESS GO in the vehicle no SmartKey with KEYLESS GO outside the vehicle When exiting and trying to lock the vehicle the message Key detected in vehicle will appear in the multifunction display The vehicle will not be locked Factory setting Global unlocking gt Grasp an outside door handle All turn signal lamps flash once The locking knobs in the doors move up The anti theft alarm system is dis armed f the vehicle has been parked for more than 72 hours you must pull an outside door handle in order to activate the KEYLESS GO function The vehicle will lock again automatically and reactivate the anti theft alarm system within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking if e neither door nor tailgate is opened e the central locking switch is not activated Controls in detail The vehicle could be inadvertently unlocked if the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is within 3 ft 1 m of the vehicle and e an outside door handle is splashed with water or e you attempt to clean an outside door handle Global locking gt Press the lock button on an outside door handle gt page 69 With the tailgate and all doors closed the turn signal lamp
41. Press front reading lamp switch or gt page 153 to switch on the desired front reading lamp gt Press front reading lamp switch or again to switch off the respective front reading lamp Switching second row reading lamps on and off The second row reading lamps are located above the side windows 1 Second row reading lamp Press on reading lamp Q in direction of arrow The reading lamp comes on gt Press on reading lamp Q in direction of arrow once more The reading lamp goes out Controls in detail Lighting Switching third row reading lamps on gt Press rear reading lamp Door entry lamps and off switch 1 or to switch on the respective rear reading lamp For better orientation in the dark the The switches for the third row reading lamps are located in the rear overhead gt Press rear reading lamp control panel switch C or 2 again to switch off the See Tae SE SUE respective rear reading lamp corresponding door entry lamps will switch on in darkness when you open a door and the automatic control is activated The door entry lamps will switch off when 0 The rear interior lighting is switched on and the corresponding door is closed off using the switch on the front overhead con trol panel gt page 153 f you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 and switch off the headlamps the door entry lamps will remain lit for approximately 5 min
42. Replacing SmartKey batteries Replacing bulbs Replacing wiper blades Flat tire Bleeding the fuel system diesel engine only Battery Jump starting Towing the vehicle Fuses Practical hints What to do if Lamps in instrument cluster Problem The yellow ABS indicator lamp comes on while the engine is running General information bulb self check when switching on the If any of the following lamps in the instru ignition have the respective bulb checked ment cluster fails to come on during the and replaced if necessary Possible cause consequence Suggested solution ABS has detected a malfunction and has gt Continue driving with added caution switched off The BAS ESP EBP and 4 ETS Wheels may lock during hard braking are also switched off see messages in multi reducing steering capability function display gt Read and observe messages in the The brake system is still functioning normally multifunction display gt page 433 but without the ABS available gt Have the system checked at an If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning authorized Mercedes Benz Light other systems such as the navigation Truck Center as soon as possible system or the automatic transmission may E E E malfunctioning j i also be malfunctioning increases the risk of an accident The charging voltage has fallen below When the voltage is above this value 10 volts The ABS has switched off again the ABS
43. Step 5 Disconnecting 7 Battery cover mounting nuts gt Unfasten and remove battery cover mounting nuts 7 Practical hints Step 6 Disconnecting Battery cover with integrated air channel 9 Pulling battery cover out Lifting battery cover gt Lift battery cover 8 slightly in direc tion of arrow 0 gt Pull battery cover 8 in direction of arrow 9 gt Remove battery cover 8 Battery Step 7 Disconnecting QD Battery ventilation hose 2 Battery 3 Battery attachment Attachment nuts gt Pull battery ventilation hose G out of battery gt Unfasten and remove attachment nuts 4 Remove battery attachment 3 Push battery 2 to the left y Practical hints Battery Step 8 Disconnecting 5 Positive terminal with cover Negative terminal gt Disconnect battery negative lead from negative terminal 6 Make sure the negative lead does not come into contact with the positive lead gt Remove the cover from positive terminal 5 gt Disconnect battery positive lead from positive terminal 5 Step 9 Removing gt Take out battery Step 10 Reinstalling gt Carry out step 9 gt page 512 P54 10 2626 31 Battery shown removed for illustration QD Battery ventilation hose 7 Vent plug T The battery battery ventilation hose Q and vent plug must always be securely installed when the vehicle is in ope
44. The driver is and must always remain responsible for the vehicle s speed and for safe brake operation E A a54 25 4194 31 1 Setting current or higher speed Adjustment in 1 mph increments to the resistance point or 5 mph increments past the resistance point Canada 1 km h or 10 km h 2 Setting current or lower speed Adjustment in 1 mph increments to the resistance point or 5 mph increments past the resistance point Canada 1 km h or 10 km h 3 Canceling cruise control 4 Resuming to last set speed Controls in detail Driving systems Activating cruise control You can activate the cruise control when the vehicle speed is above 20 mph 30 km h In the following cases you cannot activate the cruise control e when you brake e when you have set the parking brake e when the automatic transmission is set to position P R or N if the ESP is switched off if the ESP has switched off due to a malfunction i The vehicle speed displayed in the speedo meter can briefly vary from the speed setting for the cruise control system Controls in detail Driving systems Setting current speed gt Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed gt Briefly lift the cruise control lever in direction of arrow Q or depress in direction of arrow 2 gt page 267 The current speed is set gt Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The cruise control is activated
45. The red brake warning lamp comes on while driving In addition the yellow ABS mal function indicator lamp and the yellow ESP warning lamp come on and an acoustic warn ing sounds Possible cause conse Suggested solution quence A malfunction in the Electronic gt Have the system checked at an autho Brake Proportioning rized Mercedes Benz Light Truck gt page 105 was detected Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident Problem Fras USA only The yellow engine malfunction y indicator lamp comes on while Canada only driving i Some states may by law require you to visit a workshop immediately as soon as the engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on Check local requirements Practical hints Possible cause conse quence There is a malfunction in The fuel management system e The ignition system e The emission control system e Systems which affect emissions Such malfunctions may result In excessive emissions values and may switch the engine to its limp home emergency operation mode What to do if Suggested solution gt Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center An on board diagnostic connector is used by the service station to link the vehicle to the shop diagnostics system It allows the accurate identifi cation of system malfunctions through the readou
46. Unlocking the vehicle see Key Upholstery Cleaning and care of 417 Useful features 311 V Vacuum line routing diagram label 527 Vehicle Battery 506 Break in period 346 Care 410 Control systems Settings menu 176 Dimensions 536 Locking unlocking 38 68 112 Locking unlocking in an emergency 478 Modifications and alterations Operation safety 16 Proper use of 16 Towing 517 Washing 412 Weights 537 Vehicle care 410 Vehicle Identification Number see VIN Vehicle jack 473 474 Vehicle lighting 363 Vehicle loading 297 Cargo compartment cover blind 306 Cargo tie down rings 299 Hooks 300 Loading instructions 298 Loading terminology 401 Parcel nets 315 Partition net 308 Roof rack 297 Vehicle maximum load on the tire 403 Vehicle Recovery services Stolen Tele Aid 337 Vehicle status message memory menu 174 Vehicle tool kit 472 Vehicle washing 412 VIN 527 W Warning indicators Parktronic 293 Warning lamps see Lamps Indicator and warning Warning sounds Distance warning function 284 Distronic 275 Exterior lamps 68 Parking brake 58 Parktronic system 293 Seat belt telltale 82 426 427 Warranty coverage 10 525 Washer fluid see Windshield washer fluid Washer reservoir level 372 Washing the vehicle 410 Wear pattern Tires 404 Weights Vehicle 537 Wheel Bolts 500 Change 497 Removing 500 Spare 534 Tightening torque 504 Wheels Winter driving Sizes 532 Snow chains 406 Wheels Tires and 373 Tire
47. a single axle front or rear To assure that your vehicle does not exceed the maximum permissible weight limits GVWR and GAWR for front and rear axle have the loaded vehicle including driver passengers and all cargo and if applicable trailer fully loaded weighed on a suitable commercial scale Trailer tongue load The tongue load of any trailer is an impor tant weight to measure because it affects the load you can carry in your vehicle If a trailer is towed the tongue load must be added to the weight of all occupants riding and any cargo you are carrying in the vehicle The tongue load typically is between 10 and 15 of the trailer weight and everything loaded in it Recommended tire inflation pressure A Warning Follow recommended tire inflation pressures Do not underinflate tires Underinflated tires wear excessively and or unevenly adversely affect handling and fuel economy and are more likely to fail from being over heated Do not overinflate tires Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort wear unevenly increase stopping distance and result in sudden deflation blowout because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris potholes etc Your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and Loading Information placard located on the driver s door B pillar gt page 376 The tire inflation pressure should be checked regularly and should only be
48. ar P68 00 3970 31 1 Cover 2 Chrome label gt Tab lightly on chrome label 2 of cover 1 Cover Q swings open 1 Unlocking glove box 2 Locking glove box gt Insert mechanical key into glove box lock gt Turn mechanical key to position 2 to lock the glove box Additional storage compartment in gt Turn mechanical key to position 4 to OnE Center COneole unlock the glove box A storage compartment is located in front of the armrest in the front center console a The glove box can only be locked or unlocked with the mechanical key Controls in detail Useful features Front armrest storage compartments Two storage compartments are located be low the armrest Both can be opened sep ale E Y i C Cover 2 Chrome label gt Tab lightly on chrome label 2 of cover 1 3 Storage tray telephone compartment 4 Coinholders Opening the storage compartment Cover swings open Q Button to open storage tray telephone Press button 2 and lift up armrest compartment i The storage compartment also contains a 2 Button to open storage compartment Opening the storage tray ower outlet gt page 322 j mea The Roadside Assistance button gt Press button and lift up armrest i If your vehicle is equipped with a smoking gt page 333 and the Information button Twio eon holders are locatedimntrontoi package the storage compartment containsan
49. automatically set to the highest level if activated via summer opening feature gt page 254 Switching off gt Press switch Q repeatedly until all indicator lamps go out Controls in detail Memory function Prior to operating the vehicle the driver should check and adjust the seat height seat position fore and aft and seat back rest angle if necessary to ensure adequate control reach and comfort The head restraint should also be adjusted for proper height See also the section on air bags gt page 74 for proper seat position ing In addition adjust the steering wheel to ensure adequate control reach operation and comfort Both the interior and exterior rear view mirrors should be adjusted for adequate rear vision Fasten seat belts Infants and small chil dren should be seated in a properly secured restraint system that complies with U S Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210 2 With the memory function you can store up to three different settings for each front seat The following settings are saved for each stored position on the entry side of the driver s seat e Drivers seat head restraint height and backrest position e Steering wheel position e Drivers side exterior rear view mirror position e Passenger side exterior rear view mirror position The following settings are saved for each stored position on
50. diminished due to snow rain or fog for example The distance control system functionality could be impaired Always pay attention to surrounding traffic conditions even while Distronic is switched on Otherwise you may not be able to recog nize dangerous situations until it is too late This could cause an accident in which you and others could be injured Warning AN The Resume function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this particular preset speed Warning AN Close attention to road and traffic condi tions is imperative at all times regardless of whether or not Distronic is activated Use of Distronic can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a continuous speed Distronic will not react to stationary objects in the roadway e g a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle Distronic will also not respond to oncoming vehicles Controls in detail Driving systems Switch off Distronic e when changing from the left to the right lane if vehicles are moving more slowly in the left lane e when entering a turn lane or highway off ramp e in complex driving situations such as in highway construction zones In these situations Distronic will continue to maintain the set speed unless deactivated Distronic is designed and intended only to maintain a set speed
51. e Vehicle level control gt page 286 Regulates the ride height of the vehicle A Warning R 63 AMG only When you turn off the engine the vehicle may be lowered gt page 288 To avoid personal injury make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel housing or under the vehicle when you turn off the engine T R 63 AMG only When you turn off the en gine the vehicle may be lowered page 288 When parking make sure there is sufficient clearance under the vehicle for it to lower with out making contact with the road curb for exam ple Otherwise the vehicle could be damaged Controls in detail Driving systems Adaptive Damping System ADS The following settings are available The fine tuning of the damping is depen dent on AUTO for normal driving situations Indicator lamps 2 and 8 are off SPORT for sporty driving Indicator lamp 2 comes on e COMEF for comfort driving Indicator lamp 3 comes on e road surface conditions e e your driving style e your personal settings The ADS switch is located on the upper part of the center console Start the engine gt page 54 Press ADS switch Q repeatedly until the desired suspension tuning Is reached a The setting is stored when you turn off the engine No P92 82 2061 31 C ADS switch 2 Indicator lamp for SPORT setting 3 Indicator lamp for COMF setting Vehicle level control The vehicle level cont
52. if the tilt sliding sunroof does not open smoothly Remove the fuse for the tilt sliding sunroof from the fuse box gt page 520 For information on which fuse box contains the fuse for the power tilt sliding sunroof see the fuse chart provided with the vehicle tool kit gt page 473 Reinsert the fuse in the main box Switch on the ignition gt page 39 Press and hold the sunroof switch in the direction of arrow 8 gt page 259 until the tilt sliding sunroof is fully raised at the rear gt Hold the sunroof switch in direction of arrow 3 for approximately 1 second gt Open the tilt sliding sunroof using the Express open feature gt page 259 If the tilt sliding sunroof opens com pletely it is synchronized If the tilt sliding sunroof does not open completely gt Repeat the above steps Controls in detail Panorama roof with power tilt sliding panel Y Panorama roof with power tilt sliding panel Roller sunblinds for the panorama roof with power tilt sliding panel The tilt sliding panel and the front and rear roller sunblinds are opened and closed electrically The switch for the tilt sliding panel and the roller sunblinds is located on the overhead control panel The roller sunblinds only operate with the tilt sliding panel closed The front and rear roller sunblind cannot be operated individ ually f O ON P54 25 5187 31 Roof panel switch 1 Open roller sunblinds
53. multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Int light delayed shut off gt Press button or E to switch the interior lighting delayed shut off feature On or Off Vehicle submenu Access the Vehicle submenu via the Settings menu Use the Vehicle submenu to make general vehicle settings The following functions are available Function Page Compass adjustment 186 Compass calibration 187 Audio search function 188 Setting automatic locking 189 Limiting opening height of 189 tailgate Compass adjustment This function is not available if your vehicle is equipped with the COMAND system with navigation module Determine your location on the basis of the following zone maps PB2 86 4817 31 Zone map North America PB2 86 4818 31 Zone map South America gt Press button or RSH to move the selection marker to the Vehicle submenu Controls in detail gt Press button EAN or R repeatedly until the message Compass setting appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting s button or E to set the respective compass ZONE For information on how to call up the compass see Compass gt page 342 Control system Compass calibration ep Make sure you are in an area where you can drive a full circle with your vehicle without dis turbing traffic in order to calibrate your compass This function is not
54. or when using KEYLESS GO e donot turn off the engine using the KEYLESS GO start stop button and open the driver s door Otherwise the transmission will shift to P and lock the wheels preventing the vehicle from being pulled through a car wash BE Make sure that the windshield wiper switch is set to O gt page 61 Otherwise the rain sensor could activate and cause the wipers to move unintentionally This may lead to vehicle damage Due to the width of the vehicle fold in exterior rear view mirrors prior to running the vehicle through an automatic car wash to prevent damage to the mirrors Operation After running the vehicle through an auto matic car wash wipe any wax off of the wind shield gt page 415 This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noise which can be caused by residual wax on the windshield When leaving the car wash make sure that the mirrors are folded out Otherwise they may vibrate Ornamental moldings For regular cleaning and care of ornamen tal moldings use a use damp cloth i Do not use chrome cleaner on ornamental moldings Although ornamental moldings may have chrome appearance they could be made of anodized aluminum that will be damaged when cleaned with chrome cleaner Instead use damp cloth to clean those ornamental moldings Very dirty ornamental moldings of which you are sure are chrome plated use a chrome cleaner If in doubt whether an ornamental molding is ch
55. page 484 Bi Xenon headlamp gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible Display symbol 10 oe I Display message License plate lamp Left License plate lamp Right Low beam Left Low beam Right Practical hints What to do if Possible cause consequence Possible solution The left license plate lamp is gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible malfunctioning gt page 484 The right license plate lamp is Replace the bulb as soon as possible malfunctioning gt page 484 The left low beam lamp is Halogen headlamp malfunctioning gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt page 484 Bi Xenon headlamp gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible The right low beam lamp is Halogen headlamp mel URENO ig gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt page 484 Bi Xenon headlamp gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible Practical hints What to do if Display symbol 10 eh 1 Display message Marker lamp Pront Lert Marker lamp FPCING ROAT Parking lamp Front left Parking lamp FONT riant Foglamp Rear Left Reverse lamp Ei Reverse lamp Right Possible cause consequence Possible solution The left front side markerlampis gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz malfunctioning Light Truck Center as soon as possible The right fr
56. placard or the tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire infla tion pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitor ing system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated Accord ingly when the low tire pressure telltale illu minates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significant ly underinflated tire causes the tire to over heat and can lead to tire failure Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehi cle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driv er s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale USA only Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is com bined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately 1 minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the mal function exists
57. please check installation Peri odically check the indi cator lamp while driving to make sure the indicator lamp is il luminated If the indica tor lamp goes out or remains out do not transport a child on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired A child in a rear facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be serious ly injured or even killed if the front pas senger front air bag inflates If you have to place a child in a forward facing child restraint on the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible use the proper child restraint recommended for the age size and weight of the child and se cure child restraint with the vehicle s seat belt according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions For children larger than the typical 12 month old child the front passenger front air bag may or may not be activat ed gt page 88 Safety and Security Occupant safety i Deployment of the driver front air bag does not mean that the front passenger front air bag also should have deployed The Occupant Classification System gt page 88 may have determined that the seat was empty or occupied by the weight up to or less than that of a typical 12 month old child seated in a standard child restraint both instances where the system suppresses deployment of the front passenger front air bag even though the im pact met the criteria and was of sufficient severit
58. started or running i Do not tow start the vehicle Ba Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts Do not attempt to start the engine using a battery quick charge unit If the engine does not run after several unsuc cessful starting attempts have it checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Excessive unburned fuel generated by repeated failed starting attempts may damage the cata lytic converter Make sure the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation Make sure the cable clamps do not touch any other metal part while the other end is still at tached to a battery Warning A N Keep flames or sparks away from battery Do not smoke Observe all safety instructions and precau tions when handling automotive batteries The jump start contacts are located in the engine compartment Practical hints 1 Negative terminal 2 Positive terminal gt Make sure the two vehicles do not touch Turn off all electrical consumers Apply parking brake Set automatic transmission to position P Open the hood gt page 364 Open cover of positive terminal Jump starting 1 Negative terminal of discharged battery 2 Positive terminal of discharged battery 3 Negative terminal of charged battery 4 Positive terminal of charged battery gt gt Practical hints Jump starting gt gt gt Connect positive terminals 2 and
59. with the jumper cable Clamp cable to charged battery 4 first gt Start engine of the vehicle with the charged battery and run at idle speed gt Connect negative terminals 1 and G of the batteries with the jumper cable Clamp cable to charged battery first i Never invert the terminal connections gt Start the engine of the disabled vehi cle You can now turn on the electrical con sumers Do not switch on the headlamps under any circumstances gt Remove the jumper cables first from negative terminals G and 3 and then from the positive terminals 2 and You can now switch on the headlamps gt Have the battery checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Y Towing the vehicle Mercedes Benz recommends that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift dolly equipment This method is preferable to other types of towing T Use flatbed or wheel lift dolly equipment with the SmartKey in starter switch turned to position 0 Do not tow with sling type equipment Towing with sling type equipment over bumpy roads will damage radiator and supports To prevent damage during transport do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or suspension parts Use the towing eyes Switch off the ESP gt page 104 and the automatic central locking page 130 i Do not tow start the vehicle BE Do not tow with one axle raised
60. 00 3275 31 1 Certification label on driver s B pillar Example certification label U S vehicles Example certification label Canada vehicles The Vehicle Identification Number VIN 2 Paintwork code a eoi can be found in the following locations 3 VIN 2 Paintwork code VIN Data shown on certification label are for illustration purposes only These data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustration Refer to certification label on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle e onthe certification label e embossed underneath the passenger side seat in the second seat row gt page 527 e onthe lower edge of the windshield gt page 527 Technical data Identification labels 4 Second row seat Carpet VIN gt Move second row seat 4 on pas senger side to the rear as far as possi ble gt page 138 7 Vacuum line routing diagram label Emission control information label gt Fold carpet in direction of arrow includes both federal and California certification exhaust emission stan You may have to cut the perforated carpet using a sharp object e g a knife dards 9 VIN lower edge of windshield Engine number engraved on engine i When ordering parts please specify vehicle identification and engine number Technical data Layout of poly V belt drive R 320 CDI R 350 R 500 Ff YA SE OF
61. 10 km h increments past the resistance point in direction of You can increase the set speed in two arrow 1 gt page 276 ways Warning A N gt Release the cruise control lever Adjustment in 1 mph Canada 1 km h increments You can increase the vehicle set speed in 5 mph Canada 10 km h increments When using this feature keep in mind that it may The vehicle set speed increases in increments of 5 mph a The set speed value is increased in 1 mph Canada 10 km h Canada 1 km h increments each time you lift the cruise control lever up to the resistance take a brief moment until the vehicle has The new speed is set and the vehicle will point reached the set speed accelerate Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has reached the set Increase the vehicle set speed to a value gt Briefly lift the cruise control lever up to that the prevailing road conditions permit the resistance point in direction of speed arrow gt page 276 Otherwise sudden and unexpected acceler l ation of the vehicle could cause an accident gt Release the cruise control lever and or serious injury to you and others The vehicle set speed increases in in crements of 1 mph Canada 1 km h i The set speed value is increased in 5 mph Canada 10 km h increments each time you lift the cruise control lever up past the resistance point Setting a lower speed You can reduce the set speed i
62. 113 Locking unlocking 38 68 112 Locking unlocking Global setting 114 Loss of 115 Messages in the multifunction display 461 462 Opening the power windows Summer opening feature 254 Opening the tilt sliding panel Summer opening feature 254 Opening the tilt sliding sunroof Summer opening feature 254 Remote control 11 Replacing batteries Selective settings Starter switch positions Starting the engine Turning off the engine 67 Unlocking and opening Power tailgate 115 2 483 114 54 39 Key SmartKey with KEYLESS GO Batteries 120 483 Battery check lamp Checking battery condition Closing the power windows Convenience closing feature Closing the tilt sliding panel 116 120 Convenience closing feature Closing the tilt sliding sunroof Convenience closing feature Closing locking Power tailgate Factory settings Important notes 128 119 117 Locking unlocking 39 68 116 Locking unlocking Global setting Loss of 119 121 Messages in the multifunction display 461 462 Opening the power windows Summer opening feature 254 Opening the tilt sliding panel Summer opening feature 254 Opening the tilt sliding sunroof Summer opening feature 254 Remote control 116 Replacing batteries 483 Selective settings 119 Start stop button 41 Starter switch positions 39 41 256 Starting the engine 55 Turning off engine 67 256 Unlocking and opening Power tailgat
63. 405 For additional general information on tire speed markings on the tire sidewall see Tire speed rating gt page 403 Winter driving instructions The most important rule for slippery or icy roads Is to drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt acceleration braking and steering maneuvers Do not use the cruise control system under such conditions When the vehicle is in danger of skidding shift the automatic transmission to position N Try to keep the vehicle under control by corrective steering action i For information on driving with snow chains see Snow chains page 406 A On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi cle control Your vehicle s ABS will not pre vent this type of control loss Warning Road salts and chemicals can adversely af fect braking efficiency Increased pedal force may become necessary to produce the normal brake effect Depressing the brake pedal periodically when traveling at length on salt strewn roads can bring road salt impaired braking efficiency back to normal If the vehicle is parked after being driven on salt treated roads the braking efficiency should be tested as soon as possible after driving is resumed A Make sure not to endanger any other road users when carrying out these braking maneuvers Warning Operation Warning AN If the vehicle become
64. Canada 1 0 liter e Add 1 5 qts to reach max oil level Canada 1 5 liters e Add 2 0 qts to reach max oil level Canada 2 0 liters Operation Aig If you want to interrupt the checking proce dure press the IRA or FM button on the multifunction steering wheel gt If necessary add engine oil For information on adding engine oil see gt page 369 For more information on engine oil see the Technical data section gt page 538 and gt page 540 Other display messages If the SmartKey is not turned to position 2 in the starter switch the following message will appear Switch ignition on to check engine oil level gt Switch on the ignition gt page 39 Engine compartment If you see the message Observe waiting period gt If the engine is at operating temperature wait 5 minutes before repeating check procedure gt If engine is not at operating tempera ture wait 30 minutes before repeating check procedure If you see the message Engine oil level Not when engine on gt Turn off the engine gt If the engine is at operating tempera ture wait 5 minutes before checking oil gt Ifthe engine is not at operating temper ature yet you must wait 30 minutes before checking oil Operation Engine compartment If there is excess engine oil with the engine at operating temperature the following message will appear Engine oil level Reduce oil le
65. Controls in detail Driving systems The rear view camera is an optical parking aid It shows you the area behind the vehi cle in the COMAND system display when reverse gear R is engaged for example during parallel parking The rear view camera is located near the tailgate handle 1 Rear view camera P54 00 2552 31 Switching the rear view camera on and off gt Switch on the ignition gt page 39 gt Shift the automatic transmission to position R gt page 197 The area behind the vehicle appears in the COMAND system display The area behind the vehicle is shown in the COMAND system display as a mirror image like in the rear view mirror The image from the rear view camera will no longer be displayed if you select another function on the COMAND system while reverse gear R is engaged To display the image again disengage and reengage reverse gear R gt Shift the automatic transmission to position P N or Dto switch off the rear view camera Vv Loading Roof rack A Warning Only use the roof rack when the basic carrier bars have been completely mounted The left and right roof rails are only stabilized by means of the basic carriers being mounted Follow the manufacturers installation instructions Otherwise an improperly attached roof rack system or its load could become detached from the vehicle Do not exceed the maximum roof load of 220 Ib 100 kg Take
66. Distronic 271 Activating 277 Cleaning system sensor 414 Control system 276 Deactivating 280 Distance warning function 284 Driving hints 282 Messages in the multifunction display 437 Warning and indicator lamps 274 Door Entry lamps 155 Locking Inan emergency 479 Locking unlocking KEYLESS GO 116 Locking unlocking SmartKey 112 Messages in the multifunction display 460 Opening from the inside 122 Opening from the outside 113 Remote door unlock Tele Aid 336 Unlocking Mechanical key 478 Door control panel 36 Door handle 36 Door windows see Power windows DOT 396 401 Drinking and driving 347 Driving 51 Abroad 356 Hydroplaning 352 Inwinter 354 405 Instructions 51 347 Problems 63 Safety systems 100 systems 266 Through standing water 355 With Distronic 282 Driving off 58 Driving safety systems 4 ETS 106 ABS 100 BAS 102 EBP 105 ESP 102 Driving systems 266 AIRMATIC 285 Cruise control 266 Distronic 271 Parktronic 291 Rear view camera 295 Driving tips 203 Kickdown 203 E Easy entry exit feature 132 Control system 190 EBP 105 Indicator and warning lamps 422 Electric air pump 502 Electrical fuses see Fuses Electrical system Technical data 535 Electronic Brake Proportioning see EBP Electronic Stability Program see ESP Electronic Traction System see 4 ETS Emergency calls Tele Aid 331 Emergency In case of Battery Jump starting 514 First aid kit 472 Flat tire 497
67. Even when permitted by law never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the maxi mum speed rating of the tires Warning Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and or serious injury and possible death for you and for others Operation Driving instructions R 320 CDI R 350 R 500 Your vehicle is factory equipped with H rated tires which have a speed rating of 130 mph 210 km h An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph 210 km h R 350 R 500 with Sport Package R 350 R 500 with AMG rims Your vehicle is factory equipped with W rated tires which have a speed rating of 168 mph 270 km h An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph 210 km h R 63 AMG Your vehicle is factory equipped with Y rated tires which have a speed rating of 186 mph 300 km h An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 155 mph 250 km h R 63 AMG with increased top speed Your vehicle is factory equipped with Y rated tires which have a speed rating of 186 mph 300 km h An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 171 mph 275 km h i For information on speed ratings for winter tires see Winter tires gt page
68. MILTLOMS cccceeeeeeeeeees 212 Power folding exterior rear view MITOS nanona teens 214 SUN VISORS annaia E 215 Rear door window sunshade 216 Rear window defroster 664 217 Climate CONTI ls scccctdseiceccecceaseictas veces 218 Deactivating the climate control system iicccsesorsseaetiateavacieates 222 Operating the climate control system in automatic mode 222 Setting the temperature 223 Adjusting air distribution 223 Adjusting air volume cceeeees 224 Front defroster c cccccsseseeeeees 224 Air recirculation mode 0066 226 Air COMGITONING seciuscsencssdcactecomdxentss 228 Residual heat and ventilation 229 Rear climate control 229 Deactivating the automatic climate control system 236 Operating the automatic climate control system in AUTOMATIC MOE eecceeseeeeeeees 237 Setting the temperature 237 Adjusting air distribution 238 Adjusting air volume 0 ccceeee 239 Front defroster ccscccccesesseees 239 Maximum cooling MAX COOL 240 Air recirculation mode 06 240 ALE CONGILIOMING Schl cpinnlancssgeatnancens 243 Using driver side settings for all temperature ZONES ccceecceees 244 Residual heat and ventilation 244 Rear automatic climate control second TOW wxsacinnevetinaaeschesteasarse
69. Possible cause consequence Possible solution SRS Restraint sys malfunction The system is malfunctioning Drive with added caution to the nearest Visit workshop authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Warning A N In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indi cated as outlined above the SRS may not be operational For your safety we strongly recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center immedi ately to have the system checked otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed in an accident which could result in serious or fatal injury or it might deploy unexpect edly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury Display message Front passenger airbag enabled See Operator s Manual Possible cause consequence Front passenger front air bag is activated while driving even though a child small individual or object below the system s weight threshold Is on the front passenger seat or the front pas senger seat is empty Objects on the seat or forces acting on the seat may make the system sense supple mental weight Practical hints What to do if Possible solution Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and check the front passen ger seat for the following gt gt gt Apply the parking brake gt page 66 Switch off the ignition gt page 39 Remove child and child restraint from front passenger seat and properly secur
70. Press button or repeatedly until the message From start appears in the multifunction display gt Press button JM or Re repeatedly until the message Range appears in the multifunction display The calculated remaining driving range based on the current fuel tank level appears in the multifunction display Range 269m Control system TEL menu Warning A N A driver s attention to the road must always be his her primary focus when driving For your safety and the safety of others we recommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a telephone call If you choose to use the tele phone while driving please use the hands free device and only use the tele phone when weather road and traffic conditions permit Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle Dp gt D Controls in detail Control system Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet approximately 14 m every second Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built in or attached antenna i e with out being connected to an external antenna from inside the vehicle while the engine is running Doing so could lead to a malfunc tion of the vehicle s electronic system possibly resulting in an accident and or personal injury You can use the functions in the TEL menu to oper
71. R 320 CDI R 350 R 500 R 63 AMG All except R 63 AMG R 63 AMG Technical data Capacity approx 1 3 US qt 1 2 I approx 1 5 oz 43 g each 10 0 US qt 10 0 US qt 11 1 US gt 10 51 12 2 US gt 11 51 21 1 US gal 80 0 I 9 5 1 9 5 1 SS Ne a approx 3 4 US gal 13 0 I approx 4 0 US gal 15 0 I 8 0 US gt 7 61 Fuels coolants lubricants etc Fuels coolants lubricants etc MB Power Steering Fluid High temperature roller bearing grease MB Brake Fluid DOT 4 MB Anticorrosion Antifreeze Premium unleaded gasoline Minimum Posted Octane 91 Avg of 96 RON 86 MON R 134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant oil never R 12 MB Windshield Washer Concentrate Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent antifreeze for temperatures below freezing Follow suggested mixing ratios gt page 546 Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Engine oils Engine oils are specifically tested for their suitability in our engines and durability for our service intervals Therefore only use approved engine oils and oil filters re quired for vehicles with Maintenance system U S vehicles or FSS PLUS Canada vehicles Fora listing of approved engine oils and oil filters refer to the Fac tory Approved Service Products pamphlet or con
72. TAPITI F Seemed I 1 Cover Find its location in the fuse chart R 500 Remove fuse 114 to shut down the engine Find its location in the fuse chart i Do not use sharp objects such as a screw driver to open fuse box cover Q as this could damage it Technical data Parts service Warranty coverage Identification labels Layout of poly V belt drive Engine Rims and tires Electrical system Main Dimensions Weights Fuels coolants lubricants etc Technical data Parts service The Technical data section provides the necessary technical data for your vehicle All authorized Mercedes Benz Centers maintain a stock of Genuine Mercedes Benz Parts required for mainte nance and repair work In addition strate gically located parts distribution centers provide quick and reliable parts service More than 300000 different parts for Mercedes Benz models are available Genuine Mercedes Benz Parts are sub jected to stringent quality inspections Each part has been specifically developed manufactured or selected for and adapted to Mercedes Benz vehicles Therefore Genuine Mercedes Benz Parts should be installed T The use of non genuine Mercedes Benz parts and accessories not authorized by Mercedes Benz could damage the vehicle which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty or could compromise the vehicle s durability or safety Technical data Y Warrant
73. Warranty T Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake reduces engine performance and causes premature brake and drivetrain wear Operation Parking Warning A N Do not park this vehicle in areas where com bustible materials such as grass hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire To reduce the risk of personal injury or dam age to the vehicle drivetrain as a result of vehicle movement before turning off the en gine and leaving the vehicle always Keep right foot on brake pedal Firmly depress parking brake pedal Shift the automatic transmission to position P Slowly release brake pedal When parked on an incline turn front wheel towards the road curb Driving instructions Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch or press the start stop button vehicles with KEYLESS GO Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO and lock vehicle when leaving Operation Driving instructions Tires Treadwear indicators TWI are required by law These indicators are located in six places on the tread circumference and Warning A N become visible at a tread depth of aaas approximately in 1 6 mm at which If you feel a sudden significant vibration or point the tire is considered worn and ride disturbance or you s
74. a standard child re straint or if the front passenger seat is sensed as being empty When the OCS senses that the front passen ger seat occupant is classified as being up to or less than the weight of a typical 12 month old child in a standard child restraint the indicator lamp will illuminate when the engine is started and remain illuminated indicating that the front passenger front air bag is de activated When the OCS senses that the front passen ger seat is classified as being empty the indicator lamp will illumi nate when the engine is started and remain illuminated indicating that the front passen ger front air bag is deactivated Safety and Security Occupant safety When the OCS senses that the front passen ger seat occupant is classified as being heavier than the weight of a typical 12 month old child seated in a standard child restraint or as being a small individual such as a young teenager or a small adult the indicator lamp will illu minate for approximately 6 seconds when the engine is started and then depending on occupant weight sensor readings from the seat remain illuminated or go out With the indicator lamp illuminated the front passenger front air bag is deacti vated With the indicator lamp out the front passenger front air bag is activated When the OCS senses that the front passen ger seat occupant is classified as an adult or someone larger than a small individual the indi
75. accident and or serious personal injury Gb When folding both rows of seats it is impor tant that you fold the second row seats first and then fold the third row seats Folding second row seats T When the second row seats are folded forward the front seats may not be moved to the rearmost position Otherwise you could damage the front and second row seats gt Move the seat to be folded to its rear most position gt page 138 gt Remove the rear center console if so equipped gt page 323 The rear center console can remain installed if installed in the most forward position gt page 325 However the cargo compartment floor will then not be an even plane The storage compartment and the cupholders in the rear center console are only illuminated when the rear center console is installed in the most rearward position position 0 gt page 325 Controls in detail Loading gt Remove the head restraint from the gt Fold seat backrest Q forward until it respective second row seat fully rests on seat cushion ina gt page 141 horizontal position pe Se 1 Seat backrest 1 Seat backrest 2 Seat cushion 2 Seat cushion REIRAS IENEr gt Push down on folded seat backrest gt Place the head restraint on the seat until seat cushion 2 engages in seat cushion base gt Relieve the load on seat backrest and pull release lever 3 past the resistance point in
76. adversely affect fuel economy e lead to tire failure from being overheated e adversely affect handling characteristics Warning A N Follow recommended tire inflation pressures Do not underinflate tires Underinflated tires wear excessively and or unevenly adversely affect handling and fuel economy and are more likely to fail from being overheated Overinflated tires Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling characteristics cause uneven tire wear be more prone to damage from road hazards adversely affect ride comfort increase stopping distance A Warning Follow recommended tire inflation pressures Do not overinflate tires Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort wear unevenly increase stopping distance and result in sudden deflation blowout because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris potholes etc Operation Tire labeling Besides tire name sales designation and manufacturer name a number of markings can be found on a tire Following are some explanations for the markings on your vehicle s tires P40 10 3561 31 Tires and wheels 1 Uniform Quality Grading Standards gt page 398 2 DOT Tire Identification Number TIN gt page 396 3 Maximum tire load gt page 397 4 Maximum tire inflation pressure gt page 398 Manufacturer 6 Tire ply material gt page 400 7 Tire siz
77. and intensity of the sun s rays the outside temperature and the selected tem perature You can operate the automatic climate control in either the automatic or manual mode Nearly all dust particles pollutants and odors are filtered out before outside air enters the passenger compartment through the air distribution system The air conditioning will not engage no cooling if the A C mode is deactivated gt page 243 Controls in detail 3 zone automatic climate control Deactivating the automatic climate Reactivating Warning AN coniro System gt Press button RA gt page 234 Follow the recommended settings for heat i You can also press button ing and cooling given on the following Warning A N page 234 on the automatic climate control pages Otherwise the windows could fog up A O3 C impairing visibility and endangering you and When the automatic climate control system If you press button gt page 234 to reacti others is switched off the outside air supply and vate the automatic climate control system the circulation are also switched off Only defrosting mode is activated i s a choose this setting for a short time evere conditions e g strong air pollution may require replacement of the filter before its Otherwise the windows could fog up scheduled interval A clogged filter will reduce impairing visibility and endangering you and the air volume to the interior others If the
78. approximately 50 km h your cle hi 5 7 j A fs hy Radio transmitters such as a portable Mente Ne Ge Be COHEN oeae E telephone or a citizens band unit should Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation 44 feet approximately 14 m every second should be repaired promptly Otherwise exces only be used inside the vehicle if they are l l 1 a sive unburned fuel may reach the catalytic con Observe all legal requirements connected to an antenna that is installed a verter causing it to overheat and potentially on the outside of the vehicle Siar a hire Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna Operation Driving instructions Warning A N As with any vehicle do not idle park or op erate this vehicle in areas where combusti ble materials such as grass hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire Oxidation catalyst diesel engine Your vehicle is equipped with an oxidation catalyst an important element in conjunc tion with the oxygen sensors to achieve substantial control of the pollutants in the exhaust emissions Keep your vehicle in proper operating condition by following our recommended maintenance instruc tions as outlined in your Maintenance Booklet A As with any vehicle do not idle park or operate this vehicle in areas where combus tible materials s
79. are rent ing or borrowing this vehicle Safety and Security Here you will find descriptions of the safety and security features of your vehicle Controls in detail Here you will find detailed information about the equipment installed on your ve hicle This section expands on the Getting started section and also describes techni cal innovations If you are already familiar with the basic functions of your vehicle this section will be of particular interest to you re Operation Here you will find all the information you need for the proper operation of your vehi cle ee Practical hints This section provides fast assistance for dealing with problems you may encounter E Technical data All important technical data for your vehi cle can be found in this section D Indexes The table of contents and the index are de signed to help you find information quickly and easily The following publications are part of your vehicle documentation e this Operators Manual e the Maintenance Booklet Separate operating instructions will be provided as required depending on the equipment options installed in your vehi cle Introduction Symbols Y Symbols Trademarks gt This symbol points to instructions for Warning AN you to follow gt A number of these symbols appearing in succession indicates a multiple step e ESP is a registered trademark of DaimlerChrysler Warning not
80. at high speeds gt page 381 or for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition page 382 If such information is provided it can be found on the placard located on the inside of the fuel filler flap The tire inflation pressure should be checked regularly and should only be adjusted on cold tires Follow tire manufacturer s maintenance recommendation included with vehicle i The following pages also list the approved wheel rim and tire sizes for equipping your vehi cles with winter tires Winter tires are not avail able as standard or optional factory equipment but can be purchased from an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Depending on vehicle model and the standard or optional factory equipped wheel rim tire configuration on your vehicle Appearance Package Sport Package etc equipping your vehicle with winter tires approved for your vehicle model may also require the purchase of two or four wheel rims of the recommended size for use with these winter tires See an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center for more information Technical data Rims and tires Same size tires R 320 CDI R 500 R 320 CDI Sport Package R 350 R 350 Sport Package R 500 Sport Package Rims light alloy 751x17 AZ 8 Jx 18 H2 8 Jx 19 H2 Wheel offset 2 20 in 56 mm 2 64 in 67 mm 2 64 in 67 mm All season tires 235 65 R17 104H M S 255 55 R18 105H M S 255 50 R19 107H XL Extra Load M S Winter t
81. changes from a slow to a rapidly flashing light release the hand held remote control button and the signal transmitter button Step 6 gt Press and hold the just trained signal transmitter button or and observe indicator lamp Q If indicator lamp 4 stays on constantly programming is complete and your device should activate when the respective signal transmitter button or is pressed and released findicator lamp flashes rapidly for about 2 seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with programming steps 8 through 12 as your garage door opener may be equipped with the rolling code feature Step 7 gt To program the remaining two signal transmitter buttons repeat the steps above starting with step 3 Useful features Rolling code programming To train a garage door opener or other rolling code devices with the rolling code feature follow these instructions after completing the Programming portion steps 1 through 6 of this text A second person may make the following training procedures quicker and easier Step 8 gt Locate training button on the garage door opener motor head unit Exact location and color of the button may vary by garage door opener brand Depending on manufacturer the training button may also be referred to as learn or smart button If there is difficulty locating the transmitting button refer to the
82. control system gt page 184 gt Enter the vehicle and insert the SmartKey in the starter switch For more information see Locking and unlocking gt page 112 Unlocking with KEYLESS GO With the KEYLESS GO function you can lock or unlock the vehicle without using the remote control buttons on the SmartKey and start the engine without inserting the SmartKey into the starter switch i To unlock the vehicle the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be outside the vehicle no further than approximately 3 feet 1 meter away from the respective door A When leaving the vehicle always take the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Warning Getting started gt Grasp an outside door handle or the tailgate handle All turn signal lamps flash once The vehicle unlocks The locking knobs in the doors move up The anti theft alarm system is disarmed The locator light ing comes on if the feature is enabled in the control system gt page 184 Ifthe vehicle has been parked for more than 72 hours you must pull an outside door handle in order to activate the KEYLESS GO function gt Enter the vehicle For more information see SmartKey with KEYLESS GO gt page 116 Unlocking Starter switc
83. cur tain air bags Only during these events will they provide their supplemental protection The driver and passengers should always wear their seat belts Otherwise it is not possible for air bags to provide their supplemental protec tion In case of other types of impacts and impacts be low air bag deployment thresholds air bags will not deploy The driver and passenger will then be protected to the extent possible by a properly fastened seat belt A properly fastened seat belt is also needed to provide the best possible pro tection in a rollover We caution you not to rely on the presence of the air bags in order to avoid wearing your seat belt It is important to your safety and that of your passengers that you replace deployed air bags and repair any malfunctioning air bags to make sure the vehicle will continue to provide supple mental crash protection for occupants Safety guidelines for the seat belt emergency tensioning device and air bag Warning JAN Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked Use only belts in stalled or supplied by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Air bags and pyrotechnic emergency tensioning devices ETDs are designed to function on a one time only basis An air bag or ETD that is deployed must be replaced Do not pass belts over sharp edges They could tear Do not ma
84. damage the cargo compartment cover blind You can now access the vehicle tool kit To remove the vehicle tool kit storage well casing proceed as described on gt page 476 Practical hints Where will I find 10 2104 31 6 Wheel bolt wrench 7 Electric air pump Jack 9 Spare fuses fuse extractor fuse chart Spare wheel collapsible tire i Alignment bolt 2 Towing eye bolt 3 Collapsible wheel chock Spare wheel bolts 5 Vehicle tool kit storage well casing gt To remove jack 8 loosen the hook and loop fastener Practical hints Where will I find Vehicle jack The vehicle jack is located underneath the storage compartment floor Warning A N The jack is designed exclusively for jacking D up the vehicle at the jack take up brackets built into both sides of the vehicle To help avoid personal injury use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change Never an E TES get beneath the vehicle while it is supported Operational position by the jack Keep hands and feet away from A l po the area under the lifted vehicle Always gt Turn crank handle clockwise until it firmly set parking brake and block wheels Storage position engages operational position before raising vehicle with jack gt Remove vehicle jack from its storage Before storing the vehicle jack in its stor Do not disengage parking brake while the compartment gt page 472 age c
85. describe opera tion of the steering wheel gearshift control when driving in program mode C or S Controls in detail Automatic transmission Limiting gear range Extending gear range Canceling gear range limit gt Briefly press right shift button gt Press and hold right shift button 2 Warning A N The teaneriecionnw chit othe nei until the cipher for the current gear sss range disappears from the multifunc higher gear as permitted by the shift program This action simultaneously MOnGIS Playa page ana On slippery road surfaces never downshift a el oe oaan mg e aaa extends the gear range of the transmis The transmission will shift from the result in drive wheel slip and reduced l ae l sion current gear range directly to gear vehicle control Your vehicle s ABS will not range D prevent this type of loss of control i If you press on the accelerator when the en gine has reached its rom limit the transmission will upshift beyond any gear range limit selected Shifting into optimal gear range A tele nis eye gt Press and hold left shift button Q The transmission will shift to the next lower gear as permitted by the shift program This action simultaneously limits the gear range of the transmis sion gt page 205 The transmission will automatically select the gear range suited for optimal acceleration and deceleration This will involve shifting down one or more gears i To avoid overrevving
86. different rates of inflation that are based on the rate of relevant vehicle decelera tion as assessed by the air bag control unit On the front passenger side the front air bag deployment is additionally influenced by the passenger s weight category as identified by the Occupant Classification System OCS gt page 88 The lighter the front passenger side occupant the higher the vehicle deceleration rate required for the second stage inflation of the air bag The air bags will not deploy in impacts which do not exceed the system s deploy ment thresholds You will then be protec ted by the fastened seat belts The passenger front air bag will only be deployed if e the system based on OCS weight sen sor readings senses that the front passenger seat is occupied e the indicator lamp in the center console is not lit gt page 92 e the impact exceeds a preset deploy ment threshold Side impact air bags window curtain air bags A The pressure sensors for side impact air bag control are located in the doors Do not modify any components of the doors or door trim panels including for example the addi tion of door speakers Warning Improper repair work on the doors or the modification or addition of components to the doors creates a risk of rendering the side impact air bags inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment Work on the doors must therefore only be performed by qualified
87. door nor the tailgate is opened The alarm system indicator lamp is located to the lower left of the hazard warning flasher e the tailgate e adoor Close the respective element and lock the vehicle again aa A i C ie alle at aT LE k 4 S A 7 z 7 1 e ba a s A k 1 Alarm system indicator lamp Canceling the alarm To cancel the alarm With the SmartKey gt Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch or gt Press the or button on the SmartKey With KEYLESS GO gt Grasp an outside door handle The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be within 3 ft 1 m of the vehicle or gt Press the KEYLESS GO start stop button gt page 41 The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be inside the vehicle Safety and Security Anti theft systems Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Seats Memory function Lighting Instrument cluster Control system Automatic transmission Good visibility Climate control 3 zone automatic climate control Power windows Power tilt sliding sunroof Panorama roof with power tilt slid ing panel Driving systems Loading Useful features Controls in detail Locking and unlocking In the Controls in detail section you will find detailed information on how to oper ate the equipment installed in your vehicle If you are already familiar with the basic func
88. door windows 216 Symbols used in this Operator s Manual 15 34 311 T Tachometer 29 157 Overspeed range 157 Taillamps 491 Cleaning lenses 413 Messages in the multifunction display 463 468 Replacing bulbs 485 Tailgate Closing 125 Closing from the inside electrically 125 Closing from the outside vehicles without KEYLESS GO 127 Opening 123 Opening from the inside Electrically 124 Opening from the inside Manually 123 Opening from the outside 123 Unlocking and opening with KEYLESS GO 121 Unlocking with SmartKey 115 Tar stains 411 Technical data 540 Air conditioning refrigerant 539 Brake fluid 539 541 Coolant 539 543 Dimensions Vehicle 536 Electrical system 535 Engine 530 Engine oil 538 540 Engine oil additives 540 Fuel requirements 542 Fuels coolants lubricants etc 538 Gasoline additives 542 Premium unleaded gasoline 541 Rims 532 Tires 532 Weights 537 Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system 539 546 Tele Aid 330 Call priority 336 Emergency calls 331 Hands free microphone 33 Information 334 Initiating an emergency call manually 332 Messages in the multifunction display 469 Remote door unlock 336 Roadside Assistance 333 SOS button 332 Stolen Vehicle Recovery services 337 System self check 331 Telephone cradle Changing 329 Telephone 327 Answering ending acall 194 195 Changing mobile phone cradle 329 Dialing a number from the phone book 195 Hands free microphone 3
89. drive faster than 50 mph 80 km h Have the vehicle checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Do not drive faster than 50 mph 80 km h depending on the set vehicle level Have the vehicle checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Do not drive faster than 50 mph 80 km h depending on the set vehicle level Have the vehicle checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Display symbol Display message es VAT Te1 silane wait briefly Compressor cooling down Level selection not permitted BE When the message Compressor cooling down appears in the multifunction display driv ing Is still possible Possible cause consequence The vehicle level is too low Level control was activated too long too frequently You are driving too fast for the desired level selection Keep in mind that the ride height of the vehicle is not yet reached and you could therefore damage the underbody of the vehicle The selected level will be set once the compres sor has cooled down Practical hints What to do if Possible solution gt vy Do not drive off The vehicle level control has not yet adjusted the vehicle level to the nec essary height required for driving Wait until the message disappears from the multifunction display You may then drive off Let the compressor cool until the message disappears The selected level will be set once th
90. engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248 F 120 C Doing so may cause seri ous engine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Operation Driving instructions Warning VAN e Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire You could be seriously burned e Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the engine hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Turn off the engine get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down Operation At the gas station Refueling A Gasoline and diesel fuels are highly flamma ble and poisonous They burn violently and can cause serious injury Warning Never allow sparks flame or smoking mate rials near gasoline or diesel fuel Turn off the engine before refueling Whenever you are around gasoline or diesel fuel avoid inhaling fumes and skin or cloth ing contact extinguish all smoking materi als Direct skin contact with gasoline or diesel fuels and the inhalation of gasoline or diesel fuel vapors can damage your health A Do not fill diesel tanks with gasoline Do not mix diesel fuel with gasoline Otherwise the fuel system and engine could be damaged In addition the vehicle could catch fire Warning
91. excess pres sure If opened immediately scalding hot fluid and steam will be blown out un der pressure Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts Antifreeze contains ethylene gly col which may burn if it comes into con tact with hot engine parts The coolant expansion tank is located on the passenger side of the engine compart ment Cap 2 Coolant expansion tank 3 Indicator wall 4 Coolant level gt gt gt Operation Engine compartment Using a rag turn cap Q slowly approx imately one half turn counterclockwise to release any excess pressure Continue turning cap 1 counterclock wise and remove it Coolant level is correct if the level for cold coolant reaches the top of indicator wall visible through the filling opening for warm coolant is approximately 0 6 in 1 5 cm higher Add coolant as required Replace and tighten cap 1 For more information on coolant see Coolants gt page 543 Operation Engine compartment Windshield rear window washer system and headlamp cleaning system The windshield washer reservoir is located in the engine compartment VATANEN it en Y Q Cap 2 Windshield washer reservoir Fluid for the windshield washer system and the headlamp cleaning system is supplied from the windshield washer reservoir It has a capacity of 8 0 US qt 7 6 I During all seasons add MB Windshield Washer Conce
92. exterior rear view mirror button 2 Adjustment button 3 Passenger side exterior rear view mirror button gt Switch on the ignition gt page 40 Press button for the driver s side exterior rear view mirror or button 3 for the passenger side exterior rear view mirror The indicator lamp on the respective button comes on for approximately 15 seconds P82 00 2310 31 Adjusting f you do not make adjustments to the selected exterior rear view mirror within 15 seconds the indicator lamp goes out You will then have to select the desired exterior rear view mirror again before any adjustments can be made Adjustments can only be made with the indicator lamp for the respective exterior rear view mirror button illuminated gt Push adjustment button 2 up down left or right according to the desired setting i If an exterior rear view mirror was forcibly pushed forward hit from the rear or forcibly pushed rearward hit from the front reposition it by applying firm pressure until it snaps into place The mirror housing is then properly positioned and you can adjust the mirror in the usual manner gt D Getting started Adjusting gt gt il Vehicles with power folding exterior rear view mirrors If an exterior rear view mirror housing is forcibly pushed forward hit from the rear or forcibly pushed rearward hit from the front press fold button Q gt page 214 to fold mirrors i
93. folding the wiper arm back V Flat tire Warning A N The dimensions of the spare wheel are different from those of the road wheels As a result the vehicle handling characteristics change when driving with a spare wheel mounted Adapt your driving style accord ingly The spare wheel is for temporary use only When driving with spare wheel mounted ensure proper tire inflation pressure and do not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph 80 km h Drive to the nearest Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible to have the spare wheel replaced with a regular road wheel Never operate the vehicle with more than one spare wheel mounted Do not switch off the ESP with a spare wheel mounted Practical hints Preparing the vehicle gt Park the vehicle in a safe distance from moving traffic on a hard flat surface when possible gt Turn on the hazard warning flasher gt page 152 gt Turn the steering wheel so that the front wheels are in a straight ahead position Set the parking brake gt page 66 Set the automatic transmission to position P gt page 197 Turn off the engine gt page 67 gt Have any passenger exit the vehicle at a safe distance from the roadway Open doors only when conditions are safe to do so gt Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch Flat tire Vehicles with KEYLESS GO gt Turn off the engine by pressing the KEYLESS GO button once
94. front passenger classification sensed by the OCS gt page 88 the indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out If above conditions are not met the system is not working properly Have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center main n after performing th individual he fron nger Warning ES al zou even after performing t e ADON i Ovaa EE e fro t passenge seat corrective steps do not have any children until the system has been repaired If the indicator lamp re 12 years old and under and other small 448 Practical hints What to do if Display message Possible cause consequence Possible solution Check tires There was a warning message about gt Make sure that the correct tire inflation pressure is set Then restart a loss in the tire inflation pressure for each tire Run Flat Indicator and the Run Flat Indicator has not gt Then reactivate the Run Flat Indicator gt page 384 been reactivated yet NUld E O err Run Flat Indicator is malfunctioning gt Have the Run Flat Indicator checked by an authorized inoperative Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Tire pressure The Run Flat Indicator indicates that gt Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt avoiding abrupt Check tires the pressure is too low in one or more steering and braking maneuvers Observe the traffic tires situation around you gt Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required gt page 382
95. guidance instructions current direction traveled Selecting satellite radio station USA only Operating CD player Control system Menu Airmatic Compass gt page 174 AIRMATIC Compass The first function displayed in each menu will show you which part of the system you are in Controls in detail Control system This is what you will see when you scroll The table on the next page provides an through the menus 6 to 1 overview of the individual menus re Press reret button For St unacoreds E hy DIS TRONIC i 2 messages ie i na A i Eee N Su I P54 32 4064 31 Controls in detail Control system Menus submenus and functions Menu 6 Menu 7 Menu Menu 9 Menu Menu 1 DISTRONIC Vehicle status Settings Distance warning Trip computer Telephone message memory function gt page 271 gt page 174 gt page 176 gt page 191 gt page 191 gt page 193 Status and settings Calling up Resetting to factory Distance warning Fuel consumption Loading phone book malfunction mes settings function on off statistics after start sages warning mes sages and system 3 status messages stored in memory E Instrument cluster Fuel consumption Searching for name submenu Statistics since the in phone book 2 last reset E Time Date Distance to empty amp submenu Lighting submenu Vehicle submenu Comfort submenu shown in the control system displays The firs
96. hot water or wash your vehicle in direct sunlight gt Only use a mild car wash detergent such as Mercedes Benz approved Car Shampoo gt Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a dif fused jet of water Direct only a very weak spray towards the ventilation intake gt Use plenty of water and rinse the sponge and chamois frequently gt Rinse with clean water and thoroughly dry with a chamois Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the finish T Do not use scouring agents on these parts Never apply strong force and only use a soft non scratching cloth when cleaning the vehicle Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry cloth or sponge Otherwise you may scratch or damage the paint Automatic car wash You can have your car washed in an auto matic car wash from the start Automatic car washes without brushes are prefera ble gt To protect the filter system switch the climate control system gt page 218 or the automatic climate control system gt page 232 to air recirculation mode i Do not clean your vehicle in an automatic touchless car wash which uses caustic spray Otherwise the caustic spray will damage the paint or ornamental moldings If the vehicle is very dirty prewash it before running it through the automatic car wash T If you want the gear position to remain in N for example when the vehicle is pulled through a car wash e donotremove the SmartKey from the starter switch
97. i If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks immediately Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center immediately Do not add brake fluid as this will not solve the problem For more information see Brake fluid gt page 541 Windshield rear window washer system and headlamp cleaning system For more information on refilling the wash er reservoir see Windshield rear window washer system and headlamp cleaning system gt page 372 Vehicle lighting Check function and cleanliness For infor mation on replacing light bulbs see Re placing bulbs gt page 484 For more information see Exterior lamp switch gt page 146 Tire inflation pressure For more information see Checking tire inflation pressure gt page 382 Operation At the gas station Operation Engine compartment Hood Warning A N Do not pull the release lever while the vehi cle is in motion Otherwise the hood could be forced open by passing air flow This could cause the hood to come loose and injure you and or others Opening Warning A N If you see flames or smoke coming from the engine compartment or if the coolant tem perature gauge indicates that the engine is overheated do not open the hood Move away from the vehicle and do not open the hoo
98. in front center console P6800404 contents especially hot liquids could spill A cupholder and a card ticket holder with Parcel net during braking vehicle maneuvers or an bottle opener are located in the front 2 Clips accident Liquids spilled on vehicle occu center console 3 Mounting openings pants may cause serious personal injury Mounting lug Liquids spilled on vehicle equipment may Rail cause damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty gt Take parcel net Q out of lower l clips When not in use keep rear cup holders i l aa l closed An open cup holder may cause injury gt Push rails up slightly in direction of to you or others when contacted during arrows braking vehicle maneuvers or in an gt Pull mounting lugs out of mounting accident openings 3 gt Install parcel net 1 in reverse order 1 Cup holders Controls in detail Card ticket holder with bottle opener The bottle opener is located underneath the card ticket holder and has openers for A card ticket holder and a bottle opener crown caps and screw caps are located in the cup holder of the front center console Cards and tickets can be inserted into the slot in the middle The card ticket holder is removable and has a bottle opener underneath Removing P68 00 4068 31 2 Opener for screw caps 3 Opener for crown caps L With the card ticket holder removed you can also t
99. in vehicles equipped with AIRMATIC depending on the selected damping settings gt page 285 and the current vehicle level page 286 Technical data Weights Y Weights Roof load max 220 Ib 100 kg Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Capacities Warning A N Vehicle components and their respective lubricants must match Therefore use only Comply with all valid regulations with re products tested and approved by spect to handling storing and disposing of Mercedes Benz service fluids Otherwise you could endan er persons or the environment Please refer to the Factory Approved ane Service Products pamphlet or inquire at Keep service fluids out of the reach of chil your Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center dren If a service fluid is swallowed contact a phy sician immediately Model Capacity Fuels coolants lubricants etc Engine with oil filter R 320 CDI 9 5 US qt 9 0 I Approved engine oils R 350 8 5 US qt 8 0 R 500 9 0 US qt 8 5 I R 63 AMG 10 1 US qt 9 6 I Automatic transmission 9 5 US qt 9 0 I MB Automatic Transmission Fluid Transfer case 0 53 US gt 0 5 1 MB Automatic Transmission Fluid Rear axle 1 2 US gt 1 1 I Hypoid gear oil Front axle 1 2 US gt 1 1 I Hypoid gear oll Power steering Front wheel hubs Brake system Cooling system Fuel Tank including a reserve of Air conditioning system Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system Model
100. into consideration that when the roof rack is loaded the handling characteristics are different from those when operating the vehicles without the roof rack loaded Controls in detail i Load the roof rack in such a way that the vehicle cannot be damaged while driving Make sure e you can completely raise the tilt sliding sunroof or tilt sliding panel at the rear e you can open the tilt sliding sunroof or tilt sliding panel completely e you can open the tailgate completely NE C Trim cover Loading gt Flip roof trim covers 4 open gt Attach the roof rack to the attachment points under roof trim covers 1 Follow roof rack manufacturer s installation instructions For further information inquire at your Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Controls in detail Loading Warning AN Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible using cargo tie down rings and fastening materials appropriate for the weight and size of the load In an accident during hard braking or sudden maneuvers loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle and can cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver always use tie down rings and if so equipped always use the partition net when transporting cargo Never drive vehicle with the tailgate open D
101. is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driv er s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale i Operating radio transmission equipment e g wireless headsets two way radios in or near the vehicle could cause the TPMS to mal function Tires and wheels Reactivating Advanced TPMS The TPMS must be reactivated when you have adjusted the tire inflation pressure to a new level e g because of different load or driving conditions The TPMS is then recalibrated to the current tire inflation pressures Warning A N It is the drivers responsibility to calibrate the TPMS on the recommended cold infla tion pressure Underinflated tires affect the ability to steer or brake the vehicle You might lose control over the vehicle gt Using the tire placard on the drivers door B pillar gt page 376 or if avail able the supplemental tire pressure information on the inside of the fuel filler flap gt page 360 make sure the tire inflation pressure of all four tires is correct Operation Tires and wheels gt gt Reactivate the TPMS after adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the inflation pressure rec ommended for the vehicle operating condition Tire pressure should only be adjusted on cold tires Observe the recommended tire inflation pressure on the placard on the d
102. is operational again and The battery might not be charged sufficiently the ABS indicator lamp should go out If the ABS indicator lamp does not go out gt Have the generator alternator and the battery checked Practical hints What to do if Problem Possible cause conse Suggested solution quence USA only The red brake warning lamp You are driving with the gt Release the parking brake S Canada only comes on while driving andan parking brake set gt page 57 acoustic warning sounds There is insufficient brake fluid gt Risk of accident Carefully stop the in the reservoir vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe to do so Apply the parking brake gt page 66 Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Do not add brake fluid This will not solve the problem BE if you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks AN Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system Overfilling the brake fluid res ervoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire You can be seriously burned Warning Driving with the brake warning lamp illumi nated can result in an accident Have your brake system checked immediately if the brake warning lamp stays on Practical hints What to do if USA only Canada only
103. level control 286 Shift program mode Automatic transmission 206 Shifting Automatic transmission 197 Side impact airbags 78 Side marker lamps Cleaning lenses 413 Messages in the multifunction display 466 Replacing bulbs 484 485 Side windows see Power windows Sidewall 403 SmartKey see Key SmartKey 112 SmartKey with KEYLESS GO see Key SmartKey with KEYLESS GO 116 Snow chains 406 Snow tires see Winter tires Spare fuses 472 Spare wheel 475 534 Inflating 501 Mounting 498 Wheel bolts 472 500 Speed settings Cruise control Distronic 277 Speedometer 27 Spinning see Tires Direction of rotation 270 SRS 81 Indicator lamp 430 Messages in the multifunction display 444 Standing lamps Replacing bulbs 484 485 Standing water Driving through 355 Starter switch 24 39 Positions 39 Starting difficulties Engine 57 Starting Engine 54 Steering column 46 47 Steering wheel Adjusting Electrically 47 Adjusting Manually 46 Buttons 160 Cleaning 417 Heating 326 Steering wheel gearshift control Automatic transmission 207 Stolen Vehicle Recovery services 337 Storage compartments Armrest Front 313 Armrest Rear 314 Cup holders 316 Door pockets 34 Front center console 312 Glove box 311 Parcel nets 315 Second row seats In front of 314 Third row 315 Storing tires 375 Stranded vehicle 519 Submenus see Control system submenus Sun visors 215 Sunroof see Power tilt sliding sunroof 258 Sunshades Rear
104. maximum water depth is 9 in 23 cm Operation Driving instructions T Do not drive through flooded areas or water of unknown depth Before driving through water determine its depth Never accelerate before driving into water The bow wave could force wa ter into the engine and auxiliary equipment thus damaging them If you must drive through standing water drive slowly to prevent water from entering the passenger compartment or the engine compart ment Water in these areas could cause damage to electrical components or wiring of the engine or transmission or could result in water being ingested by the engine through the air intake causing severe internal engine damage Any such damage is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Passenger compartment Warning A N Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible In an accident during hard braking or sud den maneuvers loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle and cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle The rear cargo compartment is the preferred place to carry objects Always use the parti tion net when transporting cargo The partition net cannot secure hard or heavy objects Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible using the cargo tie down rings in the cargo floor area and fastening materials Driving abroad Abroad there is an extensive Mercedes Be
105. messages can be cleared by pressing button or E on the multifunction steer ing wheel ey The vehicle level is set to highway level auto matically when the vehicle speed is exceeding 25 mph 40 km h Parktronic Parking assist Warning A N Parktronic is a supplemental system It is not intended to nor does it replace the need for extreme care The responsibility during parking and other critical maneuvers always rests with the driver Special attention must be paid to objects with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes e g trailer couplings painted posts or road curbs Such objects may not be detected by the system and can damage the vehicle The operational function of the Parktronic system can be affected by dirty sensors especially at times of snow and ice See Cleaning the Parktronic system sensors gt page 414 Interference caused by other ultrasonic signals e g working jackhammers car wash or the air brakes of trucks can cause the system to send erratic indications and should be taken into consideration Controls in detail Warning A N Make sure no persons or animals are in the area in which you are maneuvering You could otherwise injure them The Parktronic system is an electronic aid designed to assist the driver during parking maneuvers It visually and audibly indicates the relative distance between the vehicle and an obstacle The Parktronic system is automatically activate
106. movement of preceding vehicles Distronic can only apply a maximum of 20 of the vehicle s braking power It is the driver s responsibility at all times to be attentive to the road weather and traffic conditions Additionally the driver must provide the steering braking and other driving inputs necessary to remain in control of the vehicle High frequency sources such as toll stations speed measuring systems etc can cause the Distronic system to malfunction Warning A N Distronic requires familiarity with its opera tional characteristics We strongly recom mend that you review the following information carefully before operating the system Warning A N Distronic cannot take road and traffic condi tions into account Only use Distronic if the road weather and traffic conditions make it advisable to travel at a constant speed Warning A N Use of Distronic can be dangerous on slip pery roads Rapid changes in tire traction can result in wheel spin and loss of control Distronic does not act upon adverse sight and distance conditions Do not use Distronic during conditions of fog heavy rain snow or sleet Warning A N Distronic cannot take weather conditions into account Switch off Distronic or do not switch it on if e roads are slippery or covered with snow orice The wheels could lose traction while braking or accelerating and the vehicle could skid e the sensor is dirty or visibility is
107. of the third row seats C Cup holder Ashtrays Your vehicle is equipped with an ashtray and a cigarette lighter gt page 321 located in the front center console and an ashtray located in front of the second row seats gt page 320 If your vehicle is not equipped with a smoking package it has a storage compartment gt page 312 with a power outlet gt page 322 instead Controls in detail Useful features Ashtray in the front center console Opening the ashtray gt ve cover ca gt age 31 i NWN WAAAY i p NA AAAA 1 Cover plate 2 Ashtray insert Controls in detail Useful features Removing ashtray insert Warning A N Remove ashtray insert only with vehicle standing still Set the parking brake to secure vehicle from movement Set auto matic transmission to P With the automatic transmission set to P turn off the engine gt Grip ashtray insert 2 on the sides and pull it out upwards Reinstalling ashtray insert gt Insert ashtray insert 2 and push down until the ball catch engages gt Close ashtray cover plate 1 Rear seat ashtray second row a Vehicles with rear center console gt page 323 are not equipped with an ashtray in front of the second row seats BE Close the ashtray when not in use and be fore folding the second row seats 1 Ashtray cover 2 Ashtray insert gt Open ashtray cover 1 gt page 312 gt Pres
108. opening feature gt page 254 and Convenience closing feature gt page 256 i The tilt sliding panel may also open when using the air recirculation button Egon the control panel of the climate control gt page 220 or automatic climate control gt page 234 gt Switch on the ignition gt page 39 The tilt sliding panel is opened and closed electrically The switch for the tilt sliding panel is on the overhead control panel The tilt sliding panel only operates with the roller sunblinds opened l eS P54 25 5188 31 Roof panel switch 1 Push back to slide roof panel open 2 Push forward to slide roof panel closed 3 Push up to raise roof panel 4 Pull down to lower roof panel Opening gt Pull and hold the roof panel switch to resistance point in direction of arrow 1 gt page 263 Release the roof panel switch when the tilt sliding panel has reached the desired position Controls in detail Panorama roof with power tilt sliding panel Closing gt Press and hold the roof panel switch in direction of arrow 2 gt page 263 Release the roof panel switch when the tilt sliding panel has reached the desired position Raising You can raise the tilt sliding panel at the rear for better ventilation of the vehicle interior gt Press and hold the roof panel switch in direction of arrow gt page 263 Release the roof panel switch when the tilt sliding pane
109. operational When the SmartKey is removed from the starter switch and the automatic transmission Is in a position other than P the automatic transmission automatically shifts to P T If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the starter switch the battery may not be sufficiently charged e Check the battery and charge it if necessary gt page 506 e Geta jump start gt page 514 To prevent accelerated battery discharge or a completely discharged battery always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch when the engine is not in operation SmartKey with KEYLESS GO Vehicles equipped with the KEYLESS GO feature are supplied with a SmartKey with integrated KEYLESS GO function and a removable KEYLESS GO start stop button With the KEYLESS GO start stop button inserted and the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO present in the vehicle press ing the KEYLESS GO start stop button e without the brake pedal depressed corresponds to the various starter switch positions gt page 42 e with the brake pedal firmly depressed will start the engine gt page 55 If you wish or should there be a need to insert the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO in the starter switch the KEYLESS GO start stop button can be easily removed by pulling it out of the starter switch Getting started The KEYLESS GO start stop button does not need to be removed from the starter switch when you leave the vehicle However always take the SmartKey with KE
110. or tilt sliding sunroof or tilt sliding panel switch after it was closed with button REA Vehicles with tilt sliding sunroof Convenience closing gt Press button for approximately 2 seconds The windows and or tilt sliding sunroof will close You can release button once the closing proce dure has begun The windows and tilt sliding sunroof continue closing until they are fully closed The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air recirculation mode is activated Convenience opening gt Press button for approximately 2 seconds The windows and or tilt sliding sunroof will return to their previous positions You can release button once the opening procedure has begun The windows and tilt sliding sunroof continue opening until they have reached their previous positions The indicator lamp on the button goes out The air recirculation mode Is deactivated Vehicles with panorama roof Convenience closing gt Press and hold button until the windows and the tilt sliding panel are closed or have reached the desired po sition The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air recirculation mode is activated Convenience opening gt Press and hold button until the windows and the tilt sliding panel are opened or have reached the desired position The indicator lamp on the button goes out The air recirculation mode is deactivated Air conditioning The cooling function only operationa
111. or mud should be done with the greatest of care espe cially if the vehicle is heavily loaded Avoid pulling the vehicle abruptly or diago nally since it could result in damage to the chassis alignment Never try to free a vehicle that is still cou pled to a trailer If possible a vehicle equipped with trailer hitch receiver should be pulled backward in its own previously made tracks Practical hints Fuses The electrical fuses in your vehicle serve to switch off malfunctioning power circuits If a newly inserted fuse blows again have the cause determined and rectified by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Before replacing fuses gt Apply the parking brake gt page 66 If a fuse is blown the components and gt Make sure automatic transmission is systems secured by that fuse will stop The following aids are available to help you set to position P gt page 199 operating replace fuses They are included with the vehicle tool kit gt page 473 The gear position indicator in the multifunction display should be on P Warning A N e Fuse chart Turn off all electrical consumers Only use fuses approved by Mercedes Benz with the specified amperage for the system in question and do not attempt to repair or bridge a blown fuse Using other than approved fuses or using repaired or bridged The fuse chart explains the fuse alloca tion and fuse amperages Spare fuses Fuse extractor Turn
112. or serious personal injury Warning T To prevent possible malfunction avoid ex posing the SmartKey to high levels of electro magnetic radiation Controls in detail la USA only This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment i Canada only This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Locking and unlocking i You can also open and close the power win dows the tilt sliding sunroof or the tilt sliding panel using the SmartKey see Summer open ing feature gt page 254 and Convenience closing feature page 256 Factory setting Global unlocking gt Press button Ep All turn signal lamps flash once The locking knobs in the doors move up The anti theft alarm system is disarmed The vehicle will lock again a
113. other gb For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children see Children in the vehicle gt page 84 The SRS system conducts a self test when the ignition is switched on and in regular intervals while the engine is running This facilitates early detection of malfunctions The EGS indicator lamp in the instrument cluster gt page 26 comes on when the ignition is switched on and goes out no later than a few seconds after the engine was Started The SRS components are in operational readiness if the H indicator lamp is not lit when the engine is running A malfunction in the system has been detected if the EGS indicator lamp e fails to go out no later than approxi mately 4 seconds after the engine was started e does not come on at all e comes on after the engine was started or while driving Warning AN Modifications to or work improperly conducted on restraint systems such as seat belts and anchors emergency tension ing devices seat belt force limiters or air bags or their wiring as well as tampering with interconnected electronic systems can lead to the restraint systems no longer func tioning as intended Air bags or emergency tensioning devices for example could deploy inadvertently or fail to deploy in accidents although the deceleration threshold for air bag deploy ment is exceeded Therefore never modify the rest
114. others aware of various risks You should not remove any of these warning labels unless explicitly instructed to do so by information on the label itself Re moval of any of these labels may cause you and others to be unaware of certain risks which may result in an accident and or per sonal injury Warning Introduction Problems with your vehicle Y Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation we urge you to immediately contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required If the matter is not handled to your satisfaction please discuss the problem with the Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center management or if necessary contact us at one of the following addresses In the USA Customer Assistance Center Mercedes Benz USA LLC One Mercedes Drive Montvale NJ 07645 0350 In Canada Customer Relations Department Mercedes Benz Canada Inc 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto Ontario M4G 4C9 Introduction Reporting safety defects For the USA only The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49 Code of U S Federal Regulations Part 575 pursuant to the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966 Reporting safety defects If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or d
115. page 334 are located in storage tray 3 ashtray with cigarette lighter gt page 319 in storage tray stead Controls in detail Useful features Rear armrest storage compartment A storage compartment is located in the armrest of the rear center console ra gt between the second row seats Press button under armrest and lift up armrest ay Pin j d _ a OE er a ao E P g 00 4 We a Rear storage compartments Two storage compartments are located in front of the second row seats Upper storage compartment Depending on vehicle equipment the upper storage compartment may be replaced by a control panel for example in vehicles with rear climate control page 229 or rear automatic climate control gt page 245 Lower storage compartment C Storage compartment cover 2 Release button gt Press release button 2 on storage compartment cover Q The storage compartment cover opens automatically i If your vehicle is equipped with a smoking package the storage compartment contains an ashtray gt page 320 Controls in detail Useful features Third row storage compartment Parcel nets Parcel net in front passenger footwell Storage compartments are located on the side trims of the third row Warning A N ia Do not place objects with a combined weight of more than 4 4 Ibs 2 kg into the parcel net on the back of t
116. pressed Move gear selector lever up past the resistance point to select reverse gear R Move gear selector down past the resistance point to select drive position D The gear selector lever returns to its original position gt gt gt Release the parking brake gt page 57 Release the brake pedal Carefully depress the accelerator pedal to drive off when it is safe to do so Shifting from P to R gt With the vehicle at a standstill depress the brake pedal and keep it pressed gt Move gear selector lever up past the resistance point to select reverse gear R i The gear selector lever returns to its original position gt Release the parking brake gt page 57 gt Release the brake pedal gt Carefully depress the accelerator pedal to drive off when it is safe to do so Shifting from P to D gt With the vehicle at a standstill depress the brake pedal and keep it pressed gt Move gear selector lever down past the resistance point to select drive position D i The gear selector lever returns to its original position gt Release the parking brake gt page 57 gt Release the brake pedal gt Carefully depress the accelerator pedal to drive off when it is safe to do so Controls in detail Automatic transmission Shifting from D R or N to P If you want to select park position P with the transmission being in drive position D reverse gear R or neutral po
117. reducing their effec tiveness It may not be possible to stop the vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an accident be conducted on a two axle dynamometer If such tests are necessary contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center You could otherwise seriously damage the brake system or the transfer case which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty T Because the ESP operates automatically the engine and ignition must be shut off SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS GO start stop button in position 0 or 1 when testing the brakes on a brake test dynamometer and such testing should be no longer than 10 seconds Active braking action through ESP may other wise seriously damage the brake system which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty To help prevent brake disk corrosion after driving on wet road surfaces particularly salted roads it is advisable to brake the vehicle with considerable force prior to parking The heat generated serves to dry the brakes If your brake system is normally only subjected to moderate loads you should occasionally test the effectiveness of the brakes by applying above normal braking pressure at higher speeds This will also enhance the grip of the brake pads Warning A N Make sure not to endanger any other road users when carrying out these braking maneuvers Refer to the description of the Brake Assist System BAS gt page
118. shoulder portion is located as close as possible to the middle of the shoulder it should not touch the neck Never pass the shoulder portion of the seat belt under your arm For this purpose you can adjust the height of the seat belt outlet gt page 53 Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips over hip joint and not across the abdomen Place the seat backrest in a nearly upright position Driving Never use a Seat belt for more than one person at a time Do not fasten a seat belt around a per son and another object at the same time When using a seat belt to secure infant or toddler restraints or children in booster seats always follow the child seat manufacturer s instructions Check your seat belt periodically during travel to make sure that it Is properly positioned Make sure the seat belt is always fitted snugly Take special care of this when wearing loose clothing Getting started Driving Warning A N Do not pass belts over sharp edges They could tear Do not allow the belt to get caught in the door or in the seat adjustment mechanism This could damage the belt Never attempt to make modifications to seat belts This could impair the effective ness of the belts Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must b
119. step on the brake pedal e you depress the parking brake pedal In this case the Distronic speed segments in the speedometer page 274 will go out e the vehicle speed is below 20 mph 30 km h e the ESP is in operation e the ESP is switched off with the ESP switch gt page 104 e the ESP has switched off due to a malfunction gt page 441 e you set the automatic transmission to N while driving The Distronic speed segments in the speedome ter gt page 274 will go out and an acoustic warning will sound Warning A N Distronic switches off and releases the brakes when the vehicle decelerates below the minimum speed of 20 mph 30 km h by operation of the system At that time the driver must apply the brakes in order to reduce vehicle speed further or bring it to a stop T Setting the automatic transmission to N while driving cancels the Distronic However the automatic transmission should not be set to N while driving except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding e g on icy roads i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not deactivate the Distronic After a brief accelera tion e g for passing the Distronic will resume the last set speed Controls in detail Setting the following distance in Distronic You can set the specified following distance for Distronic by varying the time setting between 1 0 and 2 0 seconds Us ing this time setting and the current speed of your vehi
120. switch in any direction The tilt sliding sunroof is made out of glass In the event of an accident the glass may shatter This may result in an opening in the roof In a vehicle rollover occupants not wearing their seat belts or not wearing them properly may be thrown out of the opening Such an opening also presents a potential for injury for occupants wearing their seat belts prop erly as entire body parts or portions of them may protrude from the passenger compart ment When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock your vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and or serious personal injury T To avoid damaging the seals do not trans port any objects with sharp edges which can stick out of the tilt sliding sunroof Do not open the tilt sliding sunroof if there is snow or ice on the roof as this could result in malfunctions The tilt sliding sunroof can be opened or closed manually should an electrical malfunction occur page 481 When the tilt sliding sunroof is open resonance noises may result in addition to the usual wind noises They are caused by minimal pressure changes in the passenger compart ment To reduce or eliminate theses noises change the position of the tilt sliding sunroof or open a
121. switch off you can also press button or EGR gt page 220 Controls in detail Windshield fogged on the outside a Keep this setting selected only until the windshield is clear again gt Switch the windshield wipers on gt page 60 gt Press button gt page 220 The indicator lamp on the button comes on Climate control The climate control switches automatically to the following functions e maximum blower speed and heating power e air flows onto the windshield and the front side windows side air vents must be open e the air conditioning compressor switches on at outside temperatures above approximately 41 F 5 C for alr drying If the automatic air distribution is switched off gt Press air distribution button Q or gt page 220 Controls in detail Climate control Air recirculation mode p Eai Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle from the outside e g before driving through a tunnel This setting cuts off the intake of outside air and recirculates the air in the passenger compartment Warning A N Fogged windows impair visibility endanger ing you and others If the windows begin to fog on the inside switching off the air recirculation mode immediately should clear interior window fogging If interior window fogging persists make sure the air conditioning page 228 is activated or press
122. tail lamp is malfunction gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible ing A substitute bulb is being gt page 484 used The right tail lamp is malfunc Replace the bulb as soon as possible tioning A substitute bulb is gt page 484 being used Practical hints What to do if Display symbol 10 r 1 Display message Wea anel Rear Left Turn signal Rear Right Wea ST Cine Front Lett Turn ST cline Front VCE Turn signal Lett mirror Turn signal Right mirror Possible cause consequence The left rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning A substitute bulb is being used The right rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning A substitute bulb is being used The left front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning A substitute bulb is being used The right front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning A substitute bulb is being used The turn signal in the left exteri or rear view mirror is malfunc tioning This message will only appear if all light emitting diodes have stopped working The turn signal in the right exte rior rear view mirror is malfunc tioning This message will only appear if all light emitting diodes have stopped working Possible solution gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt page 484 gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt page 484 gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt page 484 gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible g
123. tempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the following oc curs 1 the same substantial defect or mal function results in a condition that is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven that de fect or malfunction has been subject to repair two or more times and you have directly notified Mercedes Benz USA LLC in writing of the need for its repair 2 the same substantial defect or mal function of a less serious nature than category 1 has been subject to repair four or more times and you have direct ly notified us in writing of the need for its repair or Introduction Operator s Manual 3 the vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of the same or different sub stantial defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days Written notification should not be sent to a dealer it should be addressed to Mercedes Benz USA LLC Customer Assistance Center One Mercedes Drive Montvale NJ 07645 0350 Introduction Operator s Manual Maintenance The Maintenance Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be performed at regular intervals Always have the Maintenance Booklet with you when you take the vehicle to your authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center for service The service advisor will record each service in the booklet for you Roadside Assistance The Mercedes Benz Road
124. the Settings menu instead of func The menus are described on the following tions you will find a number of submenus pages for calling up and changing settings For in structions on using these submenus see Settings menu gt page 176 The number of menus available in the sys tem depends on which optional equipment is installed in your vehicle Controls in detail Control system Menus This is what you will see when you scroll The table on the next page provides an through the menus Q to overview of the individual menus Settings D repat Press reret button For SU necoreds DISTRON an pr 20 2m 100 grt P54 32 4065 31 Menus submenus and functions Menu 1 Standard display gt page 166 Menu 2 AMG gt page 168 Trip and main odometer Engine oil temperature Checking tire inflation Vehicle supply voltage p ressure Checking coolant RACETIMER t emperature Calling up digital speedometer or outside temperature Overall analysis Commands submenus Calling up maintenance Lap analysis service indicator Checking engine oil level AMG vehicles only The headings used in the menus table are designed to facilitate navigation within the system and are not necessarily identical to those shown in the control system displays Controls in detail Menu Audio gt page 171 Menu 4 Navi gt page 173 Selecting radio station Route
125. the closing procedure gt With the windows and the tilt sliding panel completely closed press and hold button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO once more The roller sunblinds close Vehicles with KEYLESS GO Press and hold the lock button on an outside door handle gt page 69 until the windows and the tilt sliding panel are completely closed gt Release the lock button on the outside door handle to interrupt the closing procedure gt With the windows and the tilt sliding panel completely closed press and hold the lock button on an outside door handle gt page 69 once more The roller sunblinds close Controls in detail Power tilt sliding sunroof Opening and closing Warning AN When closing the tilt sliding sunroof make sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure If the tilt sliding sunroof encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circum stance where you are closing the tilt sliding sunroof by moving the tilt sliding sunroof switch past the resistance point or by pressing and holding button on the SmartKey by pressing and holding the lock button vehicles with KEYLESS GO on the door handle the automatic reversal function will not operate The opening closing procedure of the tilt sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or if the switch was moved past the resistance point and released by moving the
126. the engine when down Shifting the transmission will not shift to a lower gear if the engine s max speed would be exceeded Manual shift program R 63 AMG only In addition to the automatic shift program C or S your vehicle is equipped with the manual shift program M In the manual program mode M system controlled automatic gearshifting is switched off and you need to change the gears by manually upshifting or downshift ing using the steering wheel gearshift control buttons to the left and right of the steering wheel gt page 207 pg Allow engine to warm up under low load use Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only when the vehicle is stopped Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period when driving off on slippery road surfaces This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Controls in detail P54 25 5191 31 Program mode selector switch M Manual For manual gear shifting C Comfort For standard driving S Sport For sporty driving The selected program mode appears in the multifunction display gt page 206 a For information on automatic program modes C or S see Automatic shift program gt page 206 and Steering wheel gearshift con trol gt page 207 Automatic transmission Activating manual shift progr
127. the inside electrically In vehicles with power tailgate you can open the tailgate from the inside if the vehicle is stationary A minimum height clearance of 7 2 ft 2 20 m is required to open the tailgate The switch is located on the door control panel C Remote tailgate switch with indicator lamp P72 20 2412 31 gt Pull remote tailgate switch Q until tailgate begins to open The tailgate opens The indicator lamp in the remote tailgate switch comes on and remains lit until the tailgate is closed While the tailgate is opening an acoustic signal sounds Warning VAN Maintain sight of the area around the rear of the vehicle while operating the tailgate with the door mounted remote tailgate switch or with the button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO Monitor the opening procedure carefully to make sure no one is in danger of being injured To interrupt the opening procedure press or pull the door mounted remote tailgate switch or press the button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO T The tailgate swings open upwards automat ically Always make sure there is sufficient over head clearance To stop the opening procedure press or pull remote tailgate switch Q or press the button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO The tailgate stops moving The tailgate can also be opened using the button on the SmartKey gt page 115 or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO gt pa
128. the power outlets in the cargo compartment or in the second seat row even if the ignition is switched off An emergency shut off feature ensures that the vehicle s electrical voltage does not fall below a minimum level If the voltage drops to this mini mum level the power outlets are automatically switched off This ensures that enough power remains to start the engine Power outlets are located e inthe additional storage compartment in front center console gt page 322 e in the second row footwell gt page 323 e onthe right hand side of the cargo compartment gt page 323 1 Cover plate 2 Power outlet cover gt Open cover plate gt page 312 gt Switch on the ignition gt page 39 gt Pull out cover 2 and insert electrical plug cigarette lighter type d If your vehicle is equipped with a smoking package the storage compartment contains an ashtray with cigarette lighter gt page 319 instead Power outlet in second row footwell P54 10 4 gt Switch on the ignition gt page 39 gt Flip up cover and insert electrical plug cigarette lighter type Controls in detail Power outlet in cargo compartment i s ka a gt Switch on the ignition gt page 39 gt Flip up cover and insert electrical plug cigarette lighter type Useful features Rear center console The rear center console is located between the second row seats
129. the same make and have the same tread design Operation Winter driving A Warning Winter tires with a tread depth under 1 in 4 mm must be replaced They are no longer suitable for winter operation Always observe the speed rating of the winter tires installed on your vehicle If the maximum speed for which your tires are rated is below the speed rating of your vehicle you must place a notice to this effect where it will be seen by the driver Such notices are available at your tire dealer or any authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Operation Winter driving Warning A N If you use your spare tire when winter tires are fitted on the other wheels be aware that the difference in tire characteristics may very well impair turning stability and that overall driving stability may be reduced Adapt your driving style accordingly Have the spare tire replaced with a winter tire at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Snow chains i Even on vehicles with all wheel drive use snow chains on rear wheels only Some tire sizes do not leave adequate clearance for snow chains To help avoid serious damage to your vehicle or tires use of snow chains is not permissible with the spare wheel T Vehicles with Adaptive Damping System ADS When driving with snow chains do not select SPORT mode gt page 286 p When driving with snow chains you may wish to deactivate the ESP
130. the tilt sliding panel opens completely the roof is synchronized If the tilt sliding sunroof does not open completely gt Repeat the above steps Controls in detail Panorama roof with power tilt sliding panel Controls in detail Driving systems The driving systems of your vehicle are described on the following pages e Cruise control gt page 266 and Distronic gt page 271 with which the vehicle can maintain a preset speed e Distance warning function gt page 284 is only available with Distronic which warns of stationary obstacles or slower moving vehicles that you are closing in on too quickly e AIRMATIC gt page 285 adjusts the vehicle suspension characteristics automatically and controls the vehicle level e Parktronic gt page 291 and rear view camera gt page 295 which serve as a parking aid For information on the ABS BAS EBP ESP and 4 ETS see Driving safety sys tems gt page 100 Cruise control The cruise control automatically maintains the speed you set for your vehicle The use of cruise control is recommended for driving at a constant speed for extend ed periods of time You can set or resume cruise control at any speed above 20 mph 30 km h The cruise control function is operated by means of the cruise control lever The cruise control lever is the uppermost lever on the left hand side of the steering column gt page 24
131. view mirrors Automatic antiglare 213 Rear window defroster 217 Rear window wiper washer 62 Rear windows see Power windows Recommended tire inflation pressure 402 Recovery services Stolen vehicle Tele Aid 337 Refrigerant Air conditioning 540 Refueling 360 Regular checks 362 Reminder Seat belt see Seat belts Telltale Remote control SmartKey 112 SmartKey with KEYLESS GO Remote door unlock Tele Aid Replacing bulbs 484 Backup lamps 484 485 491 Brake lamps 484 485 491 Corner illuminating front fog lamps 484 485 487 489 Foglamp Rear 484 485 491 492 Headlamps 484 485 487 License plate lamps 484 485 491 493 Low beam headlamps 484 485 487 Parking lamps 484 485 487 489 491 492 Side marker lamps Front Side marker lamps Rear 491 492 Standing lamps 491 492 116 336 484 491 484 485 484 485 487 489 Taillamps 484 485 491 Turn signallamps 484 485 487 489 491 Reporting safety defects 18 Reset button In instrument cluster Reset tool Active head restraints Depository 482 Residual heat utilization Restraint system See Children in the vehicle See SRS Restraint system see Infant and child re straint systems Reverse gear position Automatic transmission 197 201 Rims 403 532 Roadside Assistance 12 Roadside Assistance button see Tele Aid Roller sunblinds Panorama roof 261 RON 542 Roof rack 297 Rubber parts Cleaning 416 Run Flat Indicator Canada only 1
132. will be reset approximately 4 hours after the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position 0 or removed from the starter switch Resetting will not occur if you turn the SmartKey back to position 1 or 2 within this time period Resetting fuel consumption statistics gt Press button or repeatedly until the message From start appears in the multifunction display gt Press and hold the reset button in the instrument cluster gt page 156 until the value is reset to 0 Fuel consumption statistics since last reset gt Press button or repeatedly until the message From start appears in the multifunction display gt Press button BA or Keg repeatedly until the message After reset appears in the multifunction display After reset 0m 13 00 n 20 mph o na 1 Distance driven since last reset 2 Time elapsed since last reset 3 Average speed since last reset 4 Average fuel consumption since last reset Resetting fuel consumption statistics manually gt Press button EAN or ed repeatedly until the message After reset appears in the multifunction display gt Press and hold the reset button in the instrument cluster gt page 156 until the value is reset to 0 The fuel consumption statistics reset auto matically to 0 when either of the following values is exceeded e distance covered 100000 miles e time elapsed 10000 hours Controls in detail Distance to empty gt
133. your protection drive only with properly positioned and engaged head restraints Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it is as close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation Adjusting T Do not attempt to remove front seat head restraints They can only be removed by qualified technicians We recommend that you have this work carried out by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Vehicles with memory function gt Press switch gt page 44 up or down in direction of arrow Q Vehicles without memory function 1 Head restraint 2 Release button gt gt Getting started Adjusting gt gt Raising Head restraint fore and aft adjustment Steering wheel gt Manually adjust the height of head restraint 1 by pulling it upward Steering wheel adjustment manual Warning A N Only adjust the steering wheel with the vehicle at a standstill and make sure the steering wheel is securely locked in place before driving off Manually adjust the angle of the head Driving without the steering wheel adjust If head restraint G is fully retracted push release button 2 in direction of arrow and pull head restraint upward Lowering gt To lower head restraint 4 press release button in direction o
134. 0 387 0100 in Canada Remote door unlock In case you have locked your vehicle unin tentionally e g SmartKey inside vehicle and the reserve SmartKey is not handy gt Contact the Mercedes Benz Response Center at 1 800 756 9018 in the USA or 1 888 923 8367 in Canada You will be asked to provide your pass word which you provided when you completed the subscriber agreement vy Then return to your vehicle at the time arranged with the Response Center and pull the tailgate recessed handle for a minimum of 20 seconds until the SOS button is flashing The message Connecting call appears in the multifunction display As an alternative you may unlock the vehi cle via Internet using the ID and password sent to you shortly after the completion of your acquaintance call The Response Center will then unlock your vehicle with the remote door unlocking feature i The remote door unlock feature is available if the relevant cellular phone network is available The SOS button will flash and the message Connecting call will appear in the multifunc tion display to indicate receipt of the door unlock command Once the vehicle is unlocked a Response Center specialist may attempt to establish voice contact with the vehicle occupants If the tailgate recessed handle was pulled for more than 20 seconds before door unlock autho rization was received by the Response Center you must wait 15 minutes before pulling t
135. 0 km h up to 118 mph 190 km h up to 130 mph 210 km h up to 149 mph 240 km h up to 168 mph 270 km h up to 186 mph 300 km h above 186 mph 300 km h above 149 mph 240 km h At the tire manufacturer s option any tire with a speed capability above 149 mph 240 km h can include a ZR in the size designation for exam ple 245 40 ZR18 To determine the maximum speed capability of the tire the service description for the tire must be referred to The service description is comprised of the tire load rating gt page 392 and the tire speed rating gt page 392 If your tire includes ZR in the size designation and no service description G and gt page 392 is given the tire manufacturer must be consulted for the maximum speed ca pability If a service description and gt page 392 is given the speed capa bility is limited by the speed symbol in the service description Example 245 40 ZR18 97Y In this example 97Y is the service description The letter Y designates the speed rating and the speed capabil ity of the tire is limited to 186 mph 300 km h Any tire with a speed capability above 186 mph 300 km h must include a ZR in the size designation AND the service description must be placed in parenthesis Example 275 40 ZR 18 99Y The Y speed rating in paren thesis designates the maximum speed capability of the ti
136. 0 rpm 350 Nm 2 400 5000 rpm Maximum engine speed 4500 rpm 6500 rpm Firing order 1 4 2 5 3 6 1 4 3 6 2 5 Poly V belt 2035 mm 2404 mm The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle See an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment 2 Premium fuel required Performance may vary with fuel octane rating Technical data Engine Model R 500 251 175 R 63 AMG 251 177 Engine 113 156 Mode of operation 4 stroke engine gasoline injection 4 stroke engine gasoline injection No of cylinders 8 8 Bore 3 82 in 97 00 mm 4 02 in 102 20 mm Stroke 3 31 in 84 00 mm 3 72 in 94 60 mm Total piston displacement 303 cu in 4966 cm 379 cu in 6208 cm Compression ratio 10 1 1331 Output acc to SAE J 1349 302 hp 5600 rpm 503 hp 6800 rpm 225 kW 5 600 rpm 375 kW 6800 rpm Maximum torque acc to SAE J 1349 339 b ft 2 700 4750 rom 465 b ft 5 200 rpm 460 Nm 2700 4750 rpm 630 Nm 5 200 rpm Maximum engine speed 6300 rpm 7200 rpm Firing order 1 5 4 2 6 3 7 8 1 5 4 2 6 3 7 8 Poly V belt 2370 mm 2369 mm The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle See an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment 2 Premium fuel required Performance may vary with fuel octane rating Technical data Rims and tires T Only use tires which have been tested and approved by Mercedes Benz Tir
137. 102 Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may be the reason for low brake fluid level in the reservoir The brake fluid level in the reservoir may be too low if the brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster comes on and an acoustic warning sounds although the parking brake is released gt page 421 Observe additional messages in the multi function display that may appear gt page 454 Have the brake system inspected immediately Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center All checks and service work on the brake system should be carried out by qualified technicians only Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Only install brake pads and brake fluid recommended by Mercedes Benz Operation Driving instructions A If other than recommended brake pads are installed or other than recommended brake fluid is used the braking properties of the vehicle can be degraded to an extent that safe braking is substantially impaired This could result in an accident Warning T When driving down long and steep grades relieve the load on the brakes by shifting into a lower gear to use the engine s braking power This helps prevent overheating of the brakes and reduces brake pad wear When using the engine s braking power a drive wheel may not spin for an extended period of time e g on slippery road surfaces This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered
138. 2 370 539 543 Safety guidelines 76 Engine oil 366 538 540 Extending cargo compartment 301 Power steering fluid 538 Exterior rear view mirrors 48 212 Windshield washer and headlamp Power folding 214 cleaning system 372 539 synchronizing 214 Fog lamp Front see Corner illuminating front fog lamps Fog lamp Rear 150 Messages in the multifunction display 466 Replacing bulbs 484 4 ETS 106 Front airbags 77 Front defroster 224 239 Front lamps see Headlamps Front passenger front airbag 77 88 93 431 Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp 31 77 88 93 431 Front seat head restraints see Head restraints Front towing eye 518 FSS PLUS Canada vehicles 407 Fuel 360 539 541 Additives 542 Capacities Fueltank 539 Consumption statistics 191 Filling the tank 360 Fuel filler flap and cap 360 Fuel gauge 29 Fuel reserve warning lamp 29 430 Premium unleaded gasoline 360 541 542 Requirements Octane rating 542 Fuel cap Messages in the multifunction display 460 Fuel filler flap 360 Locking unlocking 360 Opening 360 Opening in an emergency 479 Fuels coolants lubricants etc 538 Fuses 520 Fuse box Cargo compartment 521 Fuse box Engine compartment 521 Fuse box Passenger compartment 522 Fuse chart 472 520 Fuse extractor 472 520 Replacing 520 Spare fuses 472 520 G Garage door opener 337 Gasoline see Fuel GAWR 401 Gear range Automatic transmission 205 Limiting 205 Shifting into optimal 20
139. 2 Close roller sunblinds gt Switch on the ignition gt page 39 gt To open or close the roller sunblinds move the roof panel switch to the resis tance point in the required direction of arrow 1 or 2 Release the roof panel switch when the roller sunblinds have reached the desired position A When closing the roller sunblinds make sure that no one is in danger of being injured by the closing procedure The closing of the roller sunblinds can be immediately halted by releasing the switch Warning Fully opening the roller sunblinds Express open gt Move the roof panel switch past the re sistance point in direction of arrow Q and release The roller sunblinds opens completely Stopping the roller sunblinds during Express operation gt Move the roof panel switch in any direction Controls in detail Panorama roof with power tilt sliding panel Opening and closing the panorama roof with power tilt sliding panel A When opening or closing the tilt sliding panel make sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing procedure Warning The opening procedure of the tilt sliding panel can be immediately halted by releas ing the switch or if the switch was moved past the resistance point and released by moving the switch in any direction The closing procedure of the tilt sliding panel can be immediately halted by releas ing the switch The pan
140. 2 flashes The vehicle adjusts to the raised level The following message appears in the multifunction display while the level is being set Controls in detail Driving systems When the raised level is reached indicator lamp 2 comes on continuously and the following message appears in the multi function display Raised level Compass i The messages can be cleared by pressing button or E on the multifunction steer ing wheel Controls in detail Driving systems Highway level gt Close all doors and the tailgate gt Start the engine gt page 54 The switch is located on the upper part of the center console 1 Vehicle level control switch 2 Indicator lamp pa Keep in mind that in rough or uneven roads adjusting the vehicle to a lower level may cause the vehicle underbody to come in contact with the road and result in damage to the vehicle underbody Always make sure the vehicle has sufficient ground clearance before adjusting it to a lower level If indicator lamp 2 is on gt Press switch Q gt page 289 Indicator lamp 2 flashes The vehicle adjusts to the highway level The following message appears in the multifunction display while the level is being set being lowered Compass When the highway level is reached indica tor lamp 2 goes out and the following message appears in the multifunction dis play AIRMATIC Compass G o NE i The
141. 20 mph 30 km h and 110 mph 180 km h When Distronic is activated the multifunc tion display will show a message such as DISTRONIC 55 mph If Distronic has not been activated after pressing the cruise control lever you will see the message DISTRONIC Off in the multifunction display In the following cases you cannot activate Distronic e upto 2 minutes after starting the engine e when you brake e when you have set the parking brake e when the automatic transmission is set to position P R or N e if the ESP is switched off e if the ESP has switched off due to a malfunction Controls in detail Driving systems Setting the current speed gt Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed gt Briefly lift the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 4 or depress in direction of arrow 2 gt page 276 Distronic is activated and the current speed Is set gt Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal e If you do not take your foot off of the accel erator pedal but continue to accelerate past the set speed the following message will appear in the multifunction display DISTRONIC Override The distance to a slower moving vehicle in front of you will not be set Your vehicle speed will then be determined only by the accelerator pedal position Controls in detail Driving systems Setting a higher speed Adjustment in 5 mph gt Briefly lift the cruise control lever up Canada
142. 218 downward The corresponding center air vents on the left and right are closed Opening the side air vents gt Turn thumbwheels 2 and 7 gt page 218 upward The corresponding side air vents on the left and right are open Closing the side air vents gt Turn thumbwheels 2 and 7 gt page 218 downward The corresponding side air vents on the left and right are closed Front defroster You can use this setting to defrost the windshield for example if it is iced up You can also use it to defog the windshield and side windows i Keep this setting selected only until the windshield or the side windows are clear again When the defrost setting has been selected only the rear window defroster can be switched on No other settings are possible Activating gt Press button gt page 220 The indicator lamp on the button comes on The climate control switches to the follow ing functions automatically e maximum blower speed and heating power e air flows onto the windshield and the front side windows side air vents must be open e the air conditioning compressor switches on at outside temperatures above approximately 41 F 5 C for air drying Deactivating gt Press button gt page 220 once more The indicator lamp on the button goes out Defrosting is turned off The previous settings are in effect again The air conditioning compressor remains switched on i To
143. 3 Inserting in cradle 328 Installing a different mobile phone cradle 329 Messages in the multifunction display 469 Operation 193 Phone book 195 Redialing 196 Removing from cradle 329 Temperature Coolant 166 Display mode Status indicator 180 Interior temperature setting see Climate control or Automatic climate control 3 zone Outside temperature 167 Sensor Interior temperature 235 Sensor Outside temperature 158 Tether attachment points Children in the vehicle 84 3 zone automatic climate control 232 Ticket holder 317 Tie down rings 299 Tightening torque Wheel bolts 504 Tilt sliding panel see Panorama roof with power tilt sliding panel Tilt sliding sunroof see Power tilt sliding sunroof Time 181 TIN 396 403 Tire and Loading Information Placard 377 Terminology 401 Tire Identification Number see TIN Tire inflation pressure Important notes Tire inflation TPMS malfunction telltale USA Checking 382 pressure 381 only 428 Checking manually 383 Inflation pressure 380 382 Traction 353 399 403 Checking tire pressure electronically Inspection 374 Tread depth 375 405 Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring Load rating 392 393 403 Treadwear indicators 375 system Advanced TPMS Canada Loading terminology 401 Vehicle maximum load on 403 only 388 Loading the vehicle 376 Wear pattern 404 Checking tire pressure electronically Low tire pressure telltale 27 428 Winter tires 405 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Ply com
144. 56 245 383 S Safety Driving safety systems Occupant safety 72 Reporting safety defects 18 Safety belts see Seat belts Satellite radio 172 Seat belt force limiter 82 Seat belt height adjustment 53 Seat belts 79 Children in the vehicle 84 Cleaning 417 Fastening 51 Height adjustment 53 Proper use of 53 81 Safety guidelines 76 Telltale 29 79 426 Seat heating see Seats 143 Seat ventilation see Seats Seating capacity 377 100 Seats 132 Adjusting 43 Easy entry exit feature 132 Heating 142 Memory function 144 Multicontour seat 136 Ventilation 143 Securing cargo 299 Selector lever see Gear selector lever Self test Lamps in the instrument cluster OCS 93 Tele Aid 331 Service and warranty information 10 Service intervals see Maintenance Service 420 indicator 409 Service life Tires 374 Vehicle battery 506 Service Parts 524 service see Maintenance Service system see FSS PLUS Canada vehicles or Maintenance System U S vehicles Settings AIRMATIC 285 Clock 181 Comfort functions 189 Control system menus 162 164 Control system submenus 163 165 177 Date 181 182 Distance warning function 191 Factory SmartKey 113 Factory SmartKey with KEYLESS GO 119 Individual Vehicle 176 Instrument cluster 179 Language multifunction display 180 Lighting 183 Memory function 144 Resetting all Control system 176 Selective SmartKey 114 Selective SmartKey with KEYLESS GO 119 Time 181 Vehicle
145. 57 159 Oil level see Engine oil Checking level Oil see Engine oil One touch gearshifting 207 Operating safety 16 Operator s Manual 10 Ornamental moldings Cleaning 413 Outside temperature see Displays Overdue maintenance service term 408 Overhead control panel 33 Oxidation catalyst diesel engine 358 P Paintwork code 526 Paintwork Cleaning 411 Panic alarm 99 Panorama roof with power tilt sliding panel 261 Cleaning 416 Convenience closing feature 256 Opening closing 262 Roller sunblinds 261 Stopping 262 Summer opening feature Synchronizing 264 Parcel nets 315 Parking 65 351 Parking brake 57 66 Lamps Indicator and warning 421 Messages in the multifunction display 453 Releasing 57 254 Parking lamps 485 Messages in the multifunction display 466 Replacing bulbs 484 Parktronic Parking assist 291 Cleaning system sensors 414 Minimum distance 292 Range 292 Sensor cover 414 Switching on off 294 System malfunction 294 System sensors 291 Warning indicators 293 Partition net 308 Parts service 524 PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp see Front passenger front air bag of indicator lamp Passenger compartment 356 Fuse box 522 Interior lighting 153 Passenger safety see Occupant safety Pedals 347 Phone see Telephone Plastic and rubber parts Cleaning 416 Poly V belt drive Layout 528 Positions Memory function see Seats 145 Power assistance 348 Power outlets 322 Power seats see Seats Power
146. 7 2 ft 2 20 m is required to open the tailgate gt Press and hold button on the SmartKey until the tailgate unlocks and begins to open T The tailgate swings open upwards automat ically Always make sure there is sufficient over head clearance To stop the opening procedure press button on the SmartKey The tailgate stops moving If the vehicle was previously centrally locked with the SmartKey the tailgate will lock automat ically when closed The turn signals will flash three times to confirm locking Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key you should do the following gt Have the SmartKey deactivated by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center gt Report the loss of the SmartKey or the mechanical key immediately to your car insurance company gt If necessary have the mechanical lock replaced Your authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center will be glad to supply you with a replacement Controls in detail Locking and unlocking SmartKey with KEYLESS GO F Vehicles equipped with KEYLESS GO come with two SmartKeys with KEYLESS GO each with remote control and a removable mechanical key The locking tabs for the mechanical key portion of the two SmartKeys with KEYLESS GO are a different color to help distinguish each SmartKey with KEYLESS GO unit The KEYLESS GO function is i
147. 8 Gear selector lever 25 54 197 Gearshift pattern 54 197 Message inthe display 443 Messages in the multifunction display 443 Position 200 Shifting procedure 200 Transmission position 201 Global locking unlocking see Key SmartKey Glove box 311 Good visibility 212 Gross Axle Weight Rating see GAWR Gross Trailer Weight see GTW Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight see GVW GTW 401 GVW 402 GVWR 402 H Halogen headlamps see Headlamps Hands free microphone 33 Hard plastic trim items cleaning 417 Hazard warning flasher 152 Head restraints Active head restraint 83 137 Front seats 45 Rear seats 139 140 Headlamp cleaning system Reservoir capacity 539 Headlamp shut off delay see Delayed shut off Exterior lamps 212 372 Headlamps Automatic headlamp mode 147 Bi Xenon 485 Cleaning lenses 413 Cleaning system 212 372 Halogen 485 Light sensor Messages in the multi function display 463 Manual headlamp mode 147 Messages in the multifunction display 463 468 Replacing bulbs 484 485 Switch 59 146 Headliner Cleaning 417 Heated seats see Seat heating Heated steering wheel 326 High beam flasher 59 150 High beam headlamps Indicatorlamp 29 Messages in the multifunction display 464 Replacing 484 Switching on 59 150 High mounted brake lamp 485 High performance brake system AMG ve hicles only 350 Hinged quarter windows see Power win dows Hood 364 Messages in the multifunction displa
148. B pillar or if available the supplemental tire pressure in formation on the inside of the fuel filler flap Warning The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure e g tire blowout caused by a foreign object In this case bring the vehicle to a halt by care fully applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering maneuvers Operation Tires and wheels Warning A N Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recom mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or the tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or the tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire infla tion pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitor ing system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated Accord ingly when the low tire pressure telltale illu minates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significant ly underinflated tire causes the tire to over heat and can lead to tire failure Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehi cle s handling and stoppin
149. C see AIRMATIC gt page 285 For information on the compass see Vehicle submenu gt page 186 and Compass gt page 342 Vehicle status message memory menu Use the vehicle status message memory menu to scan malfunction and warning messages that may be stored in the system Such messages appear in the multifunction display and are based on conditions or system status the vehicle s system has recorded The vehicle status message memory menu only appears if messages have been stored Warning A N Malfunction and warning messages are only indicated for certain systems and are inten tionally not very detailed The malfunction and warning messages are simply a remind er with respect to the operation of certain systems and do not replace the owner s and or driver s responsibility to maintain the vehicle s operating safety by having all required maintenance and safety checks performed on the vehicle and by bringing the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center to address the malfunc tion and warning messages gt page 433 gt Press button or repeatedly until the vehicle status message memory appears in the multifunction display If conditions have occurred causing status messages to be recorded the number of messages appears in the multifunction display gt Press button BV or Ba The stored messages will now be displayed in the order in which th
150. C 470 471 Brake fluid 454 Brake pads 452 Coolant 455 457 Cruise control 436 Doors 460 EBP 453 Engine coolant 455 457 Engine oil 366 367 458 ESP 436 441 442 Fog lamps Front 464 Fog lamps Rear 466 Front passenger front air bag 445 448 Fuelcap 460 Gear selector lever 443 Headlamps 463 468 Hood 460 Key SmartKey 462 Key SmartKey with KEYLESS GO 461 462 Lamps 465 Lamps exterior 463 Low tire pressure 449 Parking brake 443 453 Parking lamps 466 SmartKey with KEYLESS GO 461 SRS 444 Tele Aid 469 Telephone 469 Windshield washer fluid 469 Multifunction steering wheel 30 160 Button operation 160 N Navigation system 173 See separate COMAND system operat ing instructions Net Parcel 315 Net Partition 308 Neutral gear position Automatic transmission 197 201 New vehicle Break in period 346 Night security illumination 149 185 Normal occupant weight 402 Number Vehicle Identification VIN 526 527 O Occupant Classification System see OCS Occupant distribution 402 Occupant safety 72 Active head restraint 83 Air bags 74 Children and air bags 75 86 Children in the vehicle 84 Fastening the seat belts 51 Front passenger front air bag of indicator lamp 88 92 93 Infant and child restraint systems 85 LATCH type child seat anchors 93 OCS 88 OCS Messages in the multifunction display 445 448 Seat belts 51 76 OCS 88 Messages in the multifunction display 445 Self test 93 Odometer 1
151. CS may not be able to properly approximate the occupant s weight category Furthermore the occupant weight may appear to increase or decrease due to objects hanging on the seat other passen gers pushing on the seat objects lodged underneath the seat or stuffed between seat and middle console or between seat and door or due to objects applying pres sure on the back of the seat Always make sure the seat has clearance in all direc tions at all times i If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way take the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Only seat accessories approved by Mercedes Benz may be used Both driver and the front passenger should always use the in dicator lamp as an indication of whether or not the front passenger is properly posi tioned Warning A N If the indicator lamp illumi nates when an adult or someone larger than a small individual is in the front passenger seat have the front passenger reposition himself or herself in the seat until the indicator lamp goes out or check whether objects are caught under or around the seat More information about air bag display messages gt page 445 In the event of a collision the air bag control unit will not allow front passenger front air bag deployment when the OCS classified the front passenger seat occupant as being up to or less than the weight of a typical 12 month old child in
152. Children too big for a toddler restraint must ride in seats using regular seat belts Posi tion shoulder belt across chest and shoul der not face or neck A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper belt positioning for children over 41 Ibs until they reach a height where a lap shoulder belt fits proper ly without a booster When the child restraint is not in use re move it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat belt to prevent the child restraint from becoming a projectile in the event of an ac cident Do not leave children unattended in the ve hicle even if the children are secured in a child restraint system Unsupervised chil dren in a child restraint system may use vehicle equipment and may cause an acci dent and or serious personal injury Occupant Classification System The Occupant Classification System OCS automatically turns the front passenger front air bag on or off based on the classi fied occupant weight category determined by weight sensor readings from the front passenger seat ap The system does not deactivate the front passenger Side impact air bag the window cur tain air bag and the emergency tensioning de vice Occupants must sit properly belted in a nearly upright position with their back against the seat backrest and feet on the floor to be correctly classified If the occu pant s weight is transferred to another object in the vehicle e g by leaning on armrests the O
153. Do not stuff objects such as books be tween the middle console and the front passenger seat Do not move the front passenger seat backwards against stiff objects Sit properly belted in a nearly upright position with your back against the seat backrest Do not lean on the armrests or lift your self from the seat by using the handle over the door as this may cause the OCS to be unable to correctly approximate the occupant weight category Only have the seat repaired or replaced by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Read and observe all warnings in this chapter Self test Occupant Classification Sys tem After turning the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the KEYLESS GO start stop button once or twice the indicator lamp gt page 92 located in the center console illuminates If an adult occupant is properly sitting on the front passenger seat and the system senses the occupant as being an adult the indicator lamp will illuminate and go out after approxi mately 6 seconds If the seat is not occupied and the system senses the front passenger seat as being empty the indicator lamp will illuminate and not go out Safety and Security Warning AN If the indicator lamp should not illuminate the system is not functioning You must see an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center before seating any child on the front passenger seat For more information see th
154. ESS GO Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO and lock vehicle when leaving Getting started Parking and locking Parking brake Warning A N Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle is in motion can cause the rear wheels to lock up You could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident In addition the vehicle s brake lights do not light up when the parking brake is engaged Make sure not to endanger any other road users when you engage the parking brake o 1 Parking brake pedal 2 Release handle P42 20 2769 31 gt Step firmly on parking brake pedal Q When the engine Is running the warn ing lamp USA only or Canada only in the instrument cluster comes on Warning A N When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could release the parking brake and or shift the automatic transmission out of position P either of which could result in an accident and or serious personal injury Warning A N Getting out of your vehicle with the auto matic transmission not fully engaged in position P is dangerous Also when parked on an incline position P alone may not prevent your vehicle from moving possibly hitting people or objects Always set the parking brake
155. ESS GO start stop button must be inserted in the starter switch gt page 41 e The brake pedal must be firmly de pressed Do not depress the accel erator If the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is positioned farther away from the vehi cle the system may no longer recog nize the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO The vehicle then cannot be locked or the engine started via the KEYLESS GO system Controls in detail Locking and unlocking If the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is removed from the vehicle e g if a passenger exits the vehicle with the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO e when pressing the KEYLESS GO start stop button or trying to lock the vehicle with the lock button on an outside door handle the mes sage Key not detected appears in the multifunction display e with the engine running the mes sage Key not detected appears in the multifunction display while driving off Find the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO or change its present location immediate ly e g place it on the front passenger seat or insert it in shirt pocket If you have started the engine with the KEYLESS GO start stop button gt page 55 you can turn it off again with e the KEYLESS GO start stop button gt page 67 e the SmartKey inserted inthe starter switch when the automatic trans mission is in position P Remember that the engine can be started by anyone with a SmartKey with KEYLESS GO that is left inside the vehicle Possibility 1
156. EYLESS GO when you switch off the ignition gt page 39 and open the driver s door For information on the steering wheel see Multifunction steering wheel gt page 160 Telephone Warning A N Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built in or attached antenna i e with out being connected to an external antenna from inside the vehicle while the engine is running Doing so could lead to a malfunc tion of the vehicle s electronic system possibly resulting in an accident and or serious personal injury Radio transmitters such as a portable tele phone or a citizens band unit should only be used inside the vehicle if they are con nected to an antenna that is installed on the outside of the vehicle The external antenna must be approved by Mercedes Benz Please contact an autho rized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center for information on the installation of an approved external antenna Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna Controls in detail Warning AN Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle A driver s attention to the road must always be his her primary focus when driving For your safety and the safety of others we recommend that you pull over to a safe loca tion and stop before placing or taking a telephone call If you choose to use the telephone while driving please use the hands f
157. Front defroster You can use this setting to defrost the windshield such as when it is iced up You can also use it to defog the windshield and side windows a Keep this setting selected only until the windshield or the side windows are clear again When the defrost setting has been selected only the rear window defroster can be switched on No other settings are possible Activating gt Press button gt page 234 The indicator lamp on the button comes on 3 zone automatic climate control The automatic climate control switches to the following functions automatically e maximum blower speed and heating power e air flows onto the windshield and the front side windows side air vents must be open e the air conditioning compressor switches on at outside temperatures above approximately 41 F 5 C for alr drying Deactivating gt Press button gt page 234 The indicator lamp on the button goes out Defrosting is turned off The previous settings are once again in effect i To switch off you can also press button or BGR gt page 234 Controls in detail 3 zone automatic climate control Windshield fogged on the outside Maximum cooling MAX COOL _ Air recirculation mode L Keep this setting selected only until the i P l If the air distribution control as well as the Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent windshield is clear again airflow volume control are set to R and unple
158. Fuses 520 Hazard warning flasher 152 Instrument cluster Indicator lamps 420 428 Roadside Assistance 12 333 Towing the vehicle 517 Emergency operation Locking unlocking the vehicle 478 Power tilt sliding sunroof Manual operation 481 Remote door unlock Tele Aid 336 Tailgate Opening from the inside 123 Emergency operation Limp Home Mode 211 Emergency tensioning device see ETD Emission control 358 Engine oil 366 540 F Information label 527 Adding 369 540 Fastening the seat belts 51 System warranties 10 Additives 540 Filler neck Engine oil 369 Vacuum routing diagram label 527 Changing 369 540 First aid kit 472 Engine Checking level 366 Flat tire 497 Belt layout 528 Checking level Control system 366 Collapsible tire 475 500 534 Break in recommendations 346 Checking level Dipstick 368 Jacking up the vehicle 498 Cleaning 412 Consumption 366 Lowering the vehicle 503 Compartment 364 Filler neck 369 Mounting the spare wheel 500 Malfunction indicator lamp 29 423 Messages in the multifunction Preparing the vehicle 498 Maximum engine speed 157 530 display 366 367 458 Spare wheel 475 500 534 Number 527 Recommended engine oils and Floormats 343 Starting 54 filters 540 Fluids Tachometer 29 157 ESP 102 Automatic transmission fluid 370 Technical data 530 Messages in the multifunction 538 Turning off 67 display 441 442 Brake fluid 362 538 541 Engine coolant see Coolant Warning lamp 27 425 Capacities 538 ETD 82 Engine coolant 36
159. GO 110 LS DVI scopcvatacsemenanpideaseadancameieuseastact 146 Active head restraints 0006 83 Opening the doors from the Exterior lamp switch 008 146 Rear head restraints ccsseeeees 84 MOO erien EEEa 122 Combination switch 066 150 Children in the vehicle 00 84 Opening the tailgate 08 123 Corner illuminating front Blocking of rear door window Closing the tailgate eee 125 FOS NURI 3 see 151 Operation cscccccsssccceesseceeeeeeees 97 Automatic central locking 130 Hazard warning flasher 152 Panie alar iessen 99 Locking and unlocking from the Interior lighting ee eeeeeeeeeees 153 POUINAUIMS a 99 UV e e E E 130 DOOr entry AMPS eeann 155 Deactivating ccccccssescceeeeccneeees DF DOA eni a E OON 132 Cargo compartment lamp 155 Driving safety SySteMS cccceeeeeee 100 Easy entry exit feature 132 Instrument cluster eee eeee 156 BBS EATE T E TA 100 Lumbar SUPPOFt ccccceeeeeeeees 136 Adjusting instrument cluster DA aere E 102 Multicontour seat seses 136 illumination 5 sncspccnsesteadvadieesbenssionaes 157 OP a E 102 Front seat active head Resetting the trip odometer 157 E S E E AE EEEE 105 FOStIAINTS cccccseccescceneceeeeeenecees 137 TACNOMEATEL cccceccesccesccesceescees 157 AE ee Oe ee ae 106 Rear Seats cccceseceesccescceec
160. O CK IN 2 sinine ES 38 Unlocking with the SmartKey 38 Unlocking with KEYLESS GO 39 Starter switch positions 0 39 POI US TVS rennene a 43 ES E E S 43 Steering WhEEl ccccsesccresseceeees 46 IVIL Sins zxsateaeoensancoresscancetedehaccutasa 48 TIVE cies sirexeqswacee nore tisancdeapianaseeaaetnrict 51 Fastening the seat belts 51 Starting the engine sssenssenseseess 54 Parking brake ssecccsesceneesseees 57 DIVINE Ol sessie 58 Switching on headlamps 59 Turn Sianal sssncsssncanntvcdteioncsants ener 60 Windshield WIDePS ccseeceeeeeees 60 Rear window wiper washer 62 Problems while driving 00068 63 Parking and lOCKING ccccccseeeceeeeee 65 Parking Drake ccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeees 66 Switching off headlamps 66 Turning off the engine 006 67 Releasing seat belts ccce 68 ee Memory function o ae 144 Safety and Security 0 71 Controls in detail 0000000000000n 111 Storing positions into memory 145 Occupant Safety ccsssesccesssseeeeees 72 Locking and unlocking cseeeee 112 Recalling positions from Air bags sreectrtorcnedyecetsncutavnamnennas 74 SmartKey cccccccsssssceeceeseeeeeees 112 RUS ONY so cecteoneceeuteaeseconsapseeteonnceecees 145 Seat Dell en ee 79 SmartKey with KEYLESS
161. Pull release lever Q downwards The hood is unlocked Handle 2 pro trudes slightly from the radiator grille If not lift the hood slightly T To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or hood never open the hood if the wiper arms are folded forward away from the windshield Operation Engine compartment P88 40 2522 31 2 Handle for opening the hood gt Press and hold handle 2 The hood is unlocked gt Pull up on the hood in direction of arrow and then release it The hood will be automatically held open at shoulder height by gas filled struts Operation Engine compartment Closing Engine oil Checking engine oil level with the control system R 500 only The amount of oil your engine needs will l j l Warning A depend on a number of factors including MIE NEES ME GHNENG driving style Increased oil consumption e the vehicle must be parked on level When closing the hood use extreme caution not to catch hand or fingers Be careful that you do not close the hood on anyone e the vehicle is new e with the engine at operating tempera ture the vehicle must have been stationary for at least 5 minutes with the engine turned off can occur when ground Make sure the hood is securely engaged be e the vehicle is driven frequently at fore driving Do not continue driving if the higher engine speeds pe a a e scelgent Engine oil consumption checks should only l for example The hood could otherwise
162. Sommer Corporate Media AG Operator s Manual k Class S Mercedes Benz 515 2 845281 Order No 6515 1809 13 Part No 251 584 52 81 USA Edition A 2007 Operator s Manual R Class R 320 CDI R 350 R 500 R 63 AMG Our company and staff congratulate you on the purchase of your new Mercedes Benz Your selection of our product is a demon stration of your trust in our company name Furthermore it exemplifies your de sire to own an automobile that will be as easy as possible to operate and provide years of service Your Mercedes Benz represents the ef forts of many skilled engineers and crafts men To help assure your driving pleasure and also the safety of you and your passen gers we ask you to make a small invest ment of time e Please read this manual carefully then return it to your vehicle where it will be handy for your reference e Please follow the recommendations contained in this manual They are de signed to acquaint you with the opera tion of your Mercedes Benz Please pay attention to the warnings and cautions contained in this manual They are designed to help improve the safety of the vehicle operator and oc cupants We extend our best wishes for many miles of safe pleasurable driving Mercedes Benz USA LLC A DaimlerChrysler Company Introduction cc eeecccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 9 Product information cccccssseeeeeeeeeees 9 Operators Manual cccc
163. Suggested solution USA only The TPMS USA only or Advanced TPMS gt Carefully bring the vehicle to a Combination low tire Canada only detects a loss of pressure in at halt avoiding abrupt steering and pressure TPMS malfunction least one tire braking maneuvers Observe the telltale for the TPMS illuminates traffic situation around you SOMEM OLE y gt Read and observe messages in Canada only the multifunction display Low tire pressure telltale for the Advanced TPMS illuminates continuously If the tire inflation pressure in the respective tire s has have been corrected the combination low tire pressure TPMS malfunction telltale goes out after few minutes driving USA only There is a malfunction in the TPMS gt Read and observe messages in Combination low tire the multifunction display pressure TPMS malfunction gt Have the TPMS checked by an telltale for the TPMS flashes 60 seconds and then stays illuminated authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center After the malfunction has been remedied the combination low tire pressure TPMS malfunction telltale goes out after few minutes driving Warning A N Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recom mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or the tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle
164. Upper neal WEEDON and wheel an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck news 2 Wheel bolt for 17 light alloy wheels or Center or call Roadside Assistance P EP eS eh EE Ee 18 spare wheel located in trunk with Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tight bolt supplied in the vehicle tool kit spare wheel ened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to gt page 472 3 T Wheel bolts 2 must be used when mount come off This could cause an accident gt Remove the remaining wheel bolts ing 17 wheels or the 18 spare wheel with Make sure to use the correct wheel bolts collapsible tire The use of any wheel bolts other than wheel bolts 2 for 17 wheels or the 18 spare wheel with collapsible tire will physi cally damage the vehicle s brakes T Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt This could result in damage to the bolts and wheel hub threads gt Remove the wheel gt Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel hub P40 10 3967 31 gt Guide spare wheel onto the alignment bolt and push it on gt Insert wheel bolts and tighten them slightly gt Unscrew the alignment bolt install last wheel bolt and tighten slightly Practical hints Flat tire Inflating the collapsible tire Warning A N Only use genuine equipment Warning A Mercedes Benz wheel bolts Other wheel Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is bolts may come loose properly mounted Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the
165. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended Practical hints What to do if TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of in compatible replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing One or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly Practical hints What to do if Problem Possible cause consequence Suggested solution The yellow fuel tank reserve warning lamp in The fuel level has gone below the reserve mark gt Refuel at the next gas station the fuel gauge comes on while driving gt page 360 E The red SRS indicator lamp comes There is a malfunction in the restraint systems Drive with added caution to the on while driving The air bags or emergency tensioning device nearest authorized ETDs could deploy unexpectedly or fail to Mercedes Benz Light Truck deploy unexpectedly in an accident Center Warning A N In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indi cated as outlined above the SRS may not be operational For your safety we strongly recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center immedi ately to have the system checked otherwise the SRS may no
166. YLESS GO with you when you leave the vehicle As long as the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is in the vehicle the vehicle s electrical systems can be switched on or the engine can be started using the KEYLESS GO start stop button f ex V nni e C KEYLESS GO start stop button 2 Starter switch Unlocking TIRT p 5 E i ee a 2 mn y es KEYLESS GO start stop button 3 USA only 4 Canada only The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be located in the vehicle gt Insert KEYLESS GO start stop button Q into starter switch 2 if not inserted already gt Make sure the automatic transmission is set to P gt Do not depress the brake pedal Getting started Unlocking Position 0 Before you press the KEYLESS GO start stop button the vehicle s on board electronics have status O as with SmartKey removed Position 1 gt Press the KEYLESS GO start stop button once This supplies power for some electrical consumers such as seat adjustment i If you now press the KEYLESS GO start stop button e once more the ignition position 2 is switched on e twice more the power supply is again switched off Ignition or Position 2 gt Press the KEYLESS GO start stop button twice This supplies power for all electrical consumers All lamps except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated in the instru me
167. a 10 km h increments each time you lift the cruise control lever past the resistance point Controls in detail Driving systems gt Briefly lift the cruise control lever up past the resistance point in direction of arrow 1 gt page 267 gt Release the cruise control lever The vehicle set speed increases in increments of 5 mph Canada 10 km h i The new speed is set and the vehicle will accelerate Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has reached the set speed Setting a lower speed You can reduce the set speed in two ways i When you use the cruise control lever to decelerate the brake system will automatically brake the vehicle if the engine s braking power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently Adjustment in 1 mph Canada 1 km h increments The set speed value is decreased in 1 mph Canada 1 km h increments each time you press the cruise control lever down to the resis tance point gt Briefly press the cruise control lever down to the resistance point in direc tion of arrow 2 gt page 267 gt Release the cruise control lever The vehicle set speed decreases in in crements of 1 mph Canada 1 km h Adjustment in 5 mph Canada 10 km h increments AN You can decrease the vehicle set speed in 5 mph Canada 10 km h increments When using this feature keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has reached the set sp
168. a faster and more accurate sig nal to the integrated remote control While performing step 3 hold hand held remote control at differ ent lengths and angles from the signal transmitter button or you are programming Attempt varying angles at the distance of 2 to 5 inches 5 to 12 cm away or the same angle at varying distances Controls in detail Useful features e fanother hand held remote control is available for the same device try the programming steps again using that other hand held remote control Make sure new batteries are in the hand held remote control before beginning the procedure e Straighten the antenna wire from the garage door opener assembly This may help improve transmitting and or receiving signals i Certain types of garage door openers are incompatible with the integrated remote control If you should experience further difficulties with programming the integrated remote control contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center or call Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Center in the USA only at 1 800 FOR MERCedes or Customer Service in Canada at 1 800 387 0100 USA only This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any interference re ceived including interference that may cause undesired operation An
169. acard on the driver s door B pillar or if available the supplemental tire pressure in formation on the inside of the fuel filler flap Warning The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure e g tire blowout caused by a foreign object In this case bring the vehicle to a halt by care fully applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering maneuvers Warning A N Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recom mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or the tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or the tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire infla tion pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitor ing system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated Accord ingly when the low tire pressure telltale illu minates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible Driving on a signif icantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Operation Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may effect the vehi cle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS
170. aced with a regular road wheel P40 10 2776 31 4 Tilt the plate upward 2 Fold the lower plate outward l l Never operate the vehicle with more than 3 Insert the plate one spare wheel mounted Do not switch off the ESP with a spare wheel mounted Practical hints Where will I find Your vehicle is equipped with a spare gt Remove the jack from the vehicle tool Reinstalling the spare wheel after use wheel with collapsible tire The spare kit gt page 473 wheel is located underneath the cargo compartment floor gt page 472 There are two guide pins in the spare wheel gt Loosen retaining screw Q by turning it well that serve to hold the spare wheel in counterclockwise place Q For information on how to mount the spare wheel see Mounting the spare wheel gt page 498 a If retaining screw Q does not come loose turn vehicle tool kit storing well casing 3 slightly counterclockwise Retaining screw Q should then come loose easily Removing the spare wheel l l l gt Turn vehicle tool kit storing well casing 3 by approximately 180 The electric air pump gt page 473 points towards the rear ka a P58 10 2113 31 Ti i gt Remove vehicle tool kit storage well casing 3 gt Remove spare wheel 2 1 Guide pins st SE e e P58 10 2119 31 1 Retaining screw 2 Spare wheel 3 Vehicle tool kit storage well casing Practical hin
171. ad justed on cold tires The tires can be con sidered cold if the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km Follow recommended cold tire inflation pressures listed on placard Keeping the tires properly inflated provides the best handling tread life and riding comfort In addition to the tire placard on the driver s door B pillar also consult the fuel filler flap for any additional information pertaining to special driving situations For more information see Important notes on tire inflation pressure gt page 381 Q Data shown on placard example are for illustration purposes only Load limit data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the following illustration Refer to plac ard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR 2o0KPA 29Ps UL TB sini P40 00 2064 31 FRONT P195 70R14 ZO0KPA 29PSI PI9S 7OR 14 ZO0KPA 29P5 1 Tire and Loading Information placard with recommended cold tire inflation pressures The Tire and Loading Information placard lists the recommended cold tire inflation pressures for maximum loaded vehicle weight The tire inflation pressures listed apply to the tires installed as original equipment Operation Tires and wheels Important notes on tire inflation pressure A Warning If the tire inflation pressure drops repeatedly e Check the tires for punc
172. ading terminology 401 Locator lighting 149 184 Lock buttons KEYLESS GO Outside door handle 69 Loss of keys Mechanical key 115 Loss of keys SmartKey 115 Loss of keys SmartKey with KEYLESS GO 121 Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet 525 Low beam headlamps Messages in the multifunction display 463 468 Replacing bulbs 487 switching on 59 146 Lubricants 538 M Maintenance 12 407 Calling up service indicator display 409 Clearing service indicator message 408 FSS PLUS Canada vehicles 407 Maintenance System U S vehicles 407 Resetting service indicator 409 Service indicator message 407 Service term exceeded 408 Manual headlamp mode see Headlamps Manual shift program R 63 AMG only 209 Deactivating 211 Maximum cooling MAX COOL see Automatic climate control 3 zone Maximum inflation pressure Tires 402 Maximum load rating Tires 402 Maximum loaded vehicle weight Tires 402 Mechanical key 478 Memory function 144 Menus see Control system menus Messages in display see Multifunction display messages Microphone Hands free 33 Mirrors Adjusting 48 Auto dimming 213 Exterior rear view mirrors 49 Interior rear view mirror 48 212 Mobile phone see Telephone MON 542 Multicontour seats 136 Multifunction display 159 Changing settings see Control system menus and Control system sub menus Selecting language 179 Standard display 163 Multifunction display messages 433 471 ABS 4835 442 AIRMATI
173. ag side impact air bags head protection window curtain air bags for side windows and ETD seat belt emergency tensioning device and front seat knee bolsters The system is designed to enhance the protection of fered to properly belted occupants in certain frontal front air bags and ETD and side side impact window curtain air bags and ETD impacts which exceed preset deployment thresholds and in certain rollovers window curtain air bags and ETD Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm against your neck or off your shoul der In a frontal crash your body would move too far forward That would in crease the chance of head and neck in juries The belt would also apply too much force to the ribs or abdomen which could severely injure internal or gans such as your liver or spleen Never wear belts over rigid or breakable objects in or on your clothing such as eyeglasses pens SmartKeys etc as these might cause injuries Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips and not across the abdo men If the belt is positioned across your abdomen it could cause serious injuries in a crash Never use a seat belt for more than one person at time Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another person or other objects Safety and Security Occupant safety Belts should not be worn twisted In a crash you would not have the full width of the belt to distribute impact forces The twisted belt a
174. ail Automatic transmission Stopping When you stop briefly e g at traffic lights gt Leave the transmission in gear gt Hold the vehicle with the brake When you stop for a longer period of time with the engine idling and or on a hill gt Set the parking brake gt Shift into park position P Maneuvering When you maneuver in tight areas e g when pulling into a parking space gt Control the vehicle speed by gradually releasing the brakes Accelerate gently Never abruptly step on the accelerator Controls in detail Automatic transmission Rocking the vehicle Hill start assist system The hill start assist system is inactive Rocking the vehicle by shifting between e when starting off on a level road or drive position D and reverse gear R can Warning A N downhill grades help free a vehicle stuck in mud or snow s iieiaei oneutral The engine control system of this vehicle The hill start assist system is not designed position N electronically limits shifting between drive to function as a parking brake and does not position D and reverse gear R to very low prevent the vehicle from moving when e with the parking brake set speeds i e approx 5 mph 9 km h To parked on an incline e if the ESP has switched off due to a shift between drive position D and reverse Always set the parking brake in addition to malfunction gear R move the gear selector lever past the resistance point up or down sh
175. ake sure the tires rotate in the direction specified An arrow on the sidewall indicates the intended direction of rotation spinning of the tire Operation Tires and wheels amp Spare wheels may be mounted against the direction of rotation spinning even with a unidirectional tire for temporary use only until the regular drive wheel has been repaired or replaced Always observe and follow applicable temporary use restrictions and speed limitations indicated on the spare wheel Loading the vehicle Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry e The Tire and Loading Information placard can be found on the drivers door B pillar This placard tells you im portant information about the number of people that can be in the vehicle and the total weight that can be carried in the vehicle It also contains information The certification label also found on the driver s door B pillar tells you about the gross weight capacity of your vehi cle called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle all occupants fuel and cargo The certification label also tells you about the front and rear axle weight capacity called the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the total allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle front or rear Never exceed the GVWR or GAWR for either the front axle or rear axle a POO 10 3875 31 1 Driver s
176. ake the rubber inlet from the cupholder for cleaning P68 00 4067 3 1 Card ticket holder with bottle opener gt Lift card ticket holder G at the rear and take it out Useful features Reinserting 1 Tabs 2 Card ticket holder gt Guide tabs into openings gt Guide rear of card ticket holder 2 into the cupholder Controls in detail Useful features Cup holder in front of second row seats gt Open storage compartment Closing cup holder A cupholder is located in front of the cover 1 gt page 314 gt Make sure you have removed all second row seats gt Press storage compartment cover 1 containers from the cup holder down in direction of arrow as far as it Push cup holder in until it engages will go P an BE Close the cup holder when not in use and before folding the second row seats gt Close storage compartment cover i Vehicles with rear center console page 323 are not equipped with cupholders in front of the second row seats Cupholders in rear center console Cupholders are located on the rear center console between the second row seats Opening cup holder _ 1 Storage compartment cover 2 Cup holder gt Pull out cup holder 2 in direction of arrow as far as it will go 1 Cup holders 1 Storage compartment cover Cupholders in third row side trim Cupholders are located in the side trims
177. am gt Press program mode selector switch repeatedly until the M for manual pro gram mode M appears in the multifunc tion display The transmission switches to the manual program mode M Automatic shifting is switched off The gear range is not limited You can change the gears manually with drive position D selected You can upshift or downshift through the gears in succes sion The manual program mode M will not be stored When the engine is turned off with the manual program mode M selected the transmis sion will go to the automatic program mode C or S when the engine is restarted Controls in detail Automatic transmission Upshifting T In the manual program mode M the trans mission will not upshift even if the engine has reached its overrevving range Shift up to the next gear before the engine has reached its over revving range Make absolutely certain that the engine speed does not reach the red marking on the tachometer page 157 Otherwise the engine could be damaged which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty gt Briefly press right shift button gt page 207 The transmission shifts to the next higher gear If you have selected the AMG menu in the control system gt page 168 and you are driving in the manual program mode M upshift indicator 2 in the multifunction display advises you to upshift before the engine reaches the overspeed range Thus you can d
178. am headlamps on gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to position ey The low beam headlamps come on Getting started Driving High beam The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column Combination switch 1 High beam 2 High beam flasher gt Push the combination switch in direction of arrow Q The high beam headlamps and the highbeam indicator lamp Ep j in the instrument cluster come on gt page 26 For more information on headlamps see Combination switch gt page 150 Getting started Driving Turn signals The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column Combination switch 1 Turn signals right 2 Turn signals left gt Press the combination switch in direction of arrow 4 or The corresponding turn signal indicator lamp EN or SM in the instrument cluster flashes The combination switch resets automati cally after major steering wheel move ment f the combination switch is pressed to the point of resistance and released the corre sponding turn signals flash three times Windshield wipers The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column PF 54 25 5182 31 Combination switch 1 Single wipe Wiping with windshield washer fluid 2 Switching on windshield wipers gt Switch on the ignition gt page 40 T Do not operate the windshield wipers when the windshi
179. amp S illuminated continuously the ESP is switched off or is not operational due to a malfunction Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail ing road conditions and to the non operating status of the ESP T Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period of time with the ESP switched off This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Safety and Security Switching on the ESP gt Press ESP switch Q The ESP warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out You are now again in normal driving mode with the ESP switched on For more information see the Practical hints section gt page 420 Driving safety systems EBP The EBP enhances braking effectiveness by allowing the rear brakes to supply a greater proportion of the braking effort without a loss of vehicle stability Warning A N If the EBP is malfunctioning the brake sys tem is still functioning However the rear wheels may lock during hard braking caus ing you to lose control over the vehicle and possibly causing an accident Adjust your driving style to the non operating status of the EBP For more information see the Practical hints section gt page 422 and gt page 453 Safety and Security Driving safety systems 4 ETS The 4 Electronic Traction System 4 ETS improves the vehicle s ability to utilize available traction es
180. anced TPMS Do not activate the tire inflation pressure moni tor until a full size wheel tire with functioning sensor has been placed back into service on the vehicle Bleeding the fuel system diesel engine only Y Bleeding the fuel system diesel engine only Driving the vehicle until the fuel tank is empty is not recommended Otherwise air may be sucked into the fuel system If this happens the Kase malfunction indicator lamp USA only or the ge malfunction indicator lamp Canada only comes on and the engine may not start immediately after refueling the vehicle After refueling gt Make sure the automatic transmission is set to P The gear position indicator in the multi function display should be on P gt Do not depress the accelerator i Vehicles with KEYLESS GO If necessary remove the KEYLESS GO start stop button from the starter switch gt page 41 gt Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 2 for at least 10 seconds gt page 40 gt Return the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 gt page 40 gt Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 3 gt page 41 and hold it there for a maximum of 40 seconds or until the engine runs surge free If the engine does not start gt Wait for approximately 2 minutes gt Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 3 gt page 41 and hold it there for a maximum of 40 seconds or until the engin
181. and rear door windows Rear door window override switch Hinged quarter window switch Remote tailgate release switch power tailgate Page 122 130 49 49 214 251 97 253 124 125 a ss LL Getting started Unlocking Adjusting Driving Parking and locking Getting started Unlocking The Getting started section provides an overview of the vehicle s most basic func tions First time Mercedes Benz owners should pay special attention to the infor mation given here If you are already familiar with the basic functions described here the Controls in detail section will provide you with further information The corresponding page references are located at the end of each segment Unlocking with the SmartKey Warning A N When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsuper vised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury P80 35 2281 31 SmartKey gt Press button on the SmartKey Lock button All turn signal lamps flash once The Unlock button for tailgate vehicle unlocks The locking knobs in Unlock button the doors move up The anti theft alarm D Panic button gt page 99 system is disarmed The locator light ing comes on if the feature is enabled in the
182. and cause injury T Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back If released the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the rear window Do not allow the wiper arms to contact the rear window glass without a wiper blade inserted For your convenience we recommend that you have this work carried out by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Make sure the wiper blades are properly in stalled Improperly installed wiper blades may cause rear window damage Practical hints Replacing wiper blades Removing i Do not pull on the wiper blade insert It Installing gt Remove the SmartKey fromthe starter COW tear switch gt Fold wiper arm Q away from the rear Vehicles with KEYLESS GO window until it engages gt Make sure the vehicle s on board electronics have status 0 gt page 41 gt Hold wiper arm and disengage wiper blade 2 by carefully sliding it in direction of arrow gt Remove wiper blade Wiper ar 2 Wiper blade gt Insert wiper blade 2 into wiper arm 1 gt Hold wiper arm Q and engage wiper blade 2 by pushing it in direction of gt Turn wiper blade to form a right angle with wiper arm 1 as shown aaa sys Wiper arm arrow until it locks into place 2 Wiper blade gt Check whether the wiper blade is securely fastened gt Fold the wiper arm to rest on the rear window Make sure to hold on to the wiper when
183. and keep a set dis tance from moving objects in front of it Controls in detail Driving systems USA only This device has been approved by the FCC as a Vehicular Radar System The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only Removal tampering or altering of the de vice will void any warranties and is not permitted by the FCC Do not tamper with alter or use in any non approved way Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment i Canada only This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Removal tampering or altering of the device will void any warranties and is not permitted Do not tamper with alter or use in any non approved way Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment 274 Distronic displays in the speedometer dial P54 32 4141 31 1 Set speed If Distronic is activated one or two cruise control speed segments come on around the set speed a The vehicle speed displayed on the speed ometer can briefly vary from the speed setting on the Distronic system P54 32 4142 31 1 Set speed
184. ar view mirrors The reflection brightness of the exterior rear view mirror on the driver s side and the interior rear view mirror will respond automatically to glare when e the ignition is switched on and e incoming light from headlamps falls on the sensor in the interior rear view mirror The rear view mirror will not react if e the automatic transmission is set to position R e the interior lighting is turned on Controls in detail Warning AN The auto dimming function does not react if incoming light is not aimed directly at sen sors in the interior rear view mirror The interior rear view mirror and the exterior rear view mirror on the driver s side do not react for example when transporting cargo which covers the rear window Light hitting the mirror s at certain angles incident light could blind you As a result you may not be able to observe the traffic conditions and could cause an accident Warning A N In case of an accident liquid electrolyte may escape from the mirror housing if the mirror glass breaks Good visibility Electrolyte has an irritating effect Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with eyes skin clothing or respiratory system In case it does immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary T Electrolyte drops coming into contact with the vehicle paint finish can be completely removed only while in the liquid state and by a
185. ard items which they replace not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight including heavy duty brakes ride levelers roof rack heavy duty battery and special trim PSI Pounds per square inch A standard unit of measure for air pressure gt bar kilopascal kPa Recommended tire inflation pressure Recommended tire inflation pressure listed on placard located on driver s door B pillar for normal driving conditions Provides best handling tread life and riding comfort Rim A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated Sidewall The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead TIN Tire Identification Number Unique identifier which facilitates efforts by tire manufacturers to notify purchasers in recall situations or other safety matters concerning tires and gives purchases the means to easily identify such tires The TIN is comprised of Manufacturer s identifica tion mark Tire size Tire type code and Date of manufacture Tire load rating Numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can support Tire ply composition and material used This indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall Tire manufac turers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and sidewall which include steel nylon polyester and others Tire spe
186. are located in the left and right side trim below the rear quarter windows i _ a gt Move air vent slider to the left right up or down to direct the air in the de sired direction Rear automatic climate control second and third row The rear automatic climate control for the second and third row is operated in the same manner as the rear automatic climate control for the second row gt page 245 1 Defrost air vent for rear quarter window fixed 2 Air vent adjustable 3 Thumbwheel for air volume control Controls in detail 3 zone automatic climate control Adjusting air volume gt Turn thumbwheel downwards to increase the air volume or gt Turn thumbwheel 3 upwards to decrease the air volume Adjusting air distribution gt Move air vent slider 2 to the left right up or down The air is directed in the desired direction Y Power windows Opening and closing The door windows and the hinged quarter windows are opened and closed electri cally The switches for all door windows and the hinged quarter windows are located on the driver s door control panel gt page 36 The switches for the respec tive door windows are located on the control panels of the front passenger door and the rear doors The hinged quarter windows can be operated from the driver s seat only Controls in detail C Left front door window 2 Right fro
187. as reached the desired position To make sure the seat backrest has en gaged lean firmly against the backrest Head restraint height A Warning A N Q Adjustment handle For your protection drive only with properly gt While seated pull handle in positioned head restraints direction of arrow and hold it there Adjust the head restraint in such a way that itis as close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level This will re duce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation gt To move seat backrest back lean lightly against backrest Controls in detail Seats Second row seat head restraint 1 Head restraint 2 Release button Raising gt Manually adjust the height of head restraint 4 by pulling it upward to the desired position Lowering gt To lower head restraint 4 press release button 2 and push down on head restraint Qe The third row seat head restraints are ad justed in the same manner a The tilt of the second row head restraints is adjusted in the same manner as the front seat head restraints see Head restraint fore and aft adjustment gt page 46 The tilt of the third row head restraints cannot be adjusted Head restraints A Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints installed when the rear seats are occupied Head restraint
188. asant odors from entering the vehicle gt Switch the windshield wipers on there is a high need for cooling the from the outside e g before driving gt page 60 MAX COOL function is activated through a tunnel This setting cuts off the gt Press button EYER gt page 234 MAX COOL appears in the front and rear intake of outside air and recirculates the display air in the passenger compartment AUTO appears in the display gt page 234 Air volume and air This provides the fastest possible cooling distribution are controlled separately ol the vehicle interior when windows and Warning A orea zone tilt sliding sunroof or tilt sliding panel are closed Fogged windows impair visibility endanger If the automatic air distribution and air ing you and others If the windows begin to volume are switched off fog on the inside switching off the air gt Press buttons and recirculation mode immediately should clear gt page 234 interior window fogging If interior window fogging persists make sure the air conditioning gt page 243 is activated or press button KA Activating gt Press button gt page 234 The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air recirculation mode is activated automatically at high outside temperatures The indicator lamp on button is not lit when the air recirculation mode is switched on automatically A quantity of outside air is added after approximately 30 minu
189. ashing continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an emergency call e g the rele vant cellular phone network is not available The message Call failed appears in the multifunction display for approximately 10 seconds Should this occur assistance must be summoned by other means Initiating an emergency call manually P82 95 2648 31 1 Cover 2 SOS button gt Briefly press on cover Q The cover opens gt Press SOS button briefly The indicator lamp in SOS button 2 will flash until the emergency call is concluded gt Wait for a voice connection to the Response Center gt Close cover Q after the emergency call is concluded Warning A N If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the vehicle e g smoke or fire in the vehicle vehicle in a dangerous road location please do not wait for voice contact after you have pressed the emergency button Carefully leave the vehicle and move to a safe loca tion The Response Center will automatically contact local emergency officials with the vehicle s approximate location if they receive an automatic SOS signal and cannot make voice contact with the vehicle occupants Roadside Assistance button The Roadside Assistance button S 1 Roadside Assistance button gt Open the storage tray gt page 313 gt Press and hold button Q for longer than 2 s
190. at may Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the seat are present e g ob make the system jects such as books briefcases etc lodged underneath behind or around the sense a decrease in seat Such forces may cause the system to sense that an occupant of a lesser weight weight than actually present is on the front passenger seat gt Keep the seat unoccupied close the front passenger door and switch on the ignition gt page 39 Continued on next page Practical hints What to do if Display message Possible Possible solution cause consequence Front passenger airbag Monitor the indicator lamp on the center console gt page 92 and disabled the multifunction display in the instrument cluster gt page 26 for the following see Operator s Manual With the seat unoccupied and the ignition turned on e the indicator lamp on the center console should illuminate and remain illuminated indicating that the OCS gt page 88 has deactivated the air bag e the message Front passenger airbag enabled see Operator s Manual or the message Front passenger airbag disabled see Operator s Manual should not appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied Wait at last 60 seconds for the system to complete the necessary check cycles and to make sure neither message appears in the multifunction display If above conditions are met you can occupy the front passenger seat again Depending on the
191. ate your telephone provided it is connected to a hands free system and switched on gt Switch on the telephone and COMAND system gt Press button or on the multifunction steering wheel repeat edly until the message Tel appears in the multifunction display Which messages will appear in the multi function display depends on whether your telephone is switched on or off e If the telephone is off the message Phone off appears in the multifunction display e lf the telephone is on The telephone will then search for a network During this time the multi function display is empty As soon as the telephone has found a network the message Ready appears In the multifunction display This standby message indicates that your telephone is ready for use and you can operate it using the control system Answering a call When your telephone is ready to receive calls you can answer a call at any time In the multifunction display you will then see the message gt Incoming Call Press button F You have answered the call The duration of the call appears in the multifunction display i If you do not wish to accept a call press button J Ending a call gt Press button Fay You have ended the call The standby message appears in the multifunction display Dialing a number from the phone book If your telephone is ready to receive calls you may select and dial a number from t
192. ated in the rear center console The seat heating automatically switches off after approximately 20 minutes off No indicator lamp on gt Switch on the ignition gt page 39 Switching on p gt Press switch Q Three red indicator lamps 2 in the switch come on gt Continue pressing switch Q until desired seat heating level is reached Switching off gt Press switch Q repeatedly until all indicator lamps 2 go out f one or more of the indicator lamps on seat heating switch Q gt page 142 are flash ing there is insufficient voltage due to too many electrical consumers being switched on The seat heating switches off automatically The seat heating will switch back on again auto matically as soon as sufficient voltage is avail able Controls in detail Seat ventilation The switches for the seat ventilation are located in the center console G 1 Seat ventilation switch front seats 2 Indicator lamps L P54 25 5184 31 Seats The blue indicator lamps in the switch come on to show which ventilation level you have selected Level 3 Three indicator lamps on highest level 2 Two indicator lamps on 1 One indicator lamp on lowest level off No indicator lamp on gt Switch on the ignition gt page 39 Switching on gt Press switch Q repeatedly until the desired ventilation level is set The seat ventilation for the driver s seat is
193. ately 41 F 5 C e after 5 minutes if the air conditioning and air drying is turned off e after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above approximately 41 F 5 C At outside temperatures above 79 F 26 C the system will not automati cally switch back to outside air A quantity of outside air is added after approximately 30 minutes Controls in detail 3 zone automatic climate control Air recirculation mode with convenience closing and opening feature Warning A N Never operate the windows and tilt sliding sunroof or tilt sliding panel if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing procedure In case the procedure causes potential danger Vehicles with or without tilt sliding sunroof The closing of the windows can be immediately halted by pressing or pulling the respective window switch The closing of the tilt sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by moving the switch for the tilt sliding sunroof in any direction The closing of the windows and the tilt sliding sunroof can be reversed by again pressing and holding the button Vehicles with panorama roof The closing of the windows and tilt sliding panel can be immediately halted by releasing the button amp A window the tilt sliding sunroof or the tilt sliding panel will only return to its previous position if it has not been moved to another position using the respective window switch
194. ation pressures are displayed only after a few minutes travel time i Possible differences between the readings of a tire pressure gauge of an air hose e g gas station equipment and the vehicle s control system can occur Usually the readings issued by the control system are more precise gt Switch on the ignition gt page 39 Press the EAN or R button on the multifunction steering wheel until the current inflation pressures for each tire appear in the multifunction display Tire pressure 30 sea 33 32 Sim 34 psi When the message Tire pressure displayed after driving for a few minutes appears in the multifunction display the individual inflation pressure values are matched with the tires The individual values are displayed after a few minutes driving VAN It is the drivers responsibility to calibrate the TPMS on the recommended cold infla tion pressure Underinflated tires affect the ability to steer or brake the vehicle You might lose control over the vehicle Warning i With a spare wheel mounted the system may still indicate the tire inflation pressure of the removed road wheel for some minutes If this happens keep in mind that the indicated value where the spare wheel is mounted does not re flect the actual spare tire inflation pressure A The TPMS does not indicate a warning for wrongly selected inflation pressures Always adjust tire inflation pressure according to the pl
195. ator alternator Starter motor Battery Spark plugs Electrode gap Tightening torque Model Generator alternator Starter motor Battery R 350 14V 150 A 12 V 1 4 kW 12 V 70 Ah NGK PLKR 6A 0 031 in 0 8 mm 15 22 lb ft 20 30 Nm R 320 CDI 14 V 220 A 12 V 2 2 kW 12 V 95 Ah R 500 14 V 180 A 12 V 1 7 kW 12 V 95 Ah NGK PFR 5R 11 0 031 in 0 8 mm 15 22 lb ft 20 30 Nm Technical data Electrical system R 63 AMG 14V 180A 12 V 2 2 kW 12 V 95 Ah NGK T20036N 0 039 in 1 0 mm 15 18 Ib ft 20 25 Nm Technical data Main Dimensions Model Overall vehicle length Overall vehicle width exterior mirrors folded out Overall vehicle width exterior mirrors folded in Overall vehicle height Wheelbase Track front Track rear Ground clearance Turning circle R 320 CDI R 350 203 0 in 5157 mm 85 4 in 2 168 mm 79 7 in 1922 mm 65 4 in 1661 mm 126 6 in 3215 mm 65 6 in 1665 mm 65 3 in 1658 mm 5 8 in 148 mm 40 7 ft 12 4 m R 500 203 0 in 5157 mm 85 4 in 2 168 mm 75 7 in 1922 mm 65 4 in 1663 mm 126 6 in 3215 mm 64 7 in 1643 mm 64 4 in 1636 mm 5 9 in 150 mm 40 7 ft 12 4 m R 63 AMG 203 0 in 5 157 mm 85 4 in 2 168 mm 77 5 in 1922 mm 64 3 in 1634 mm 126 6 in 3215 mm 65 6 in 1665 mm 65 0 in 1652 mm 5 9 in 150 mm 40 7 ft 12 4 m Data apply to unladen vehicles with standard equipment Data may vary
196. available if your vehicle is equipped with the COMAND system with navigation module In order to calibrate the compass properly mind the following e Calibrate the compass in open terrain Nearby buildings bridges power lines and large antenna masts for example could impair compass calibration e Switch off electrical consumers e g climate control windshield wipers or rear window defroster e Close all doors and the tailgate Start the engine gt page 54 Press button or E to move the selection marker to the Vehicle submenu gt D Controls in detail Control system gt gt Press button EAN or R repeatedly until the message Compass Calibra tion appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on setting switched off Compass Calibration Start switched off gt Press button to set the selection marker to Start The following message appears in the multifunction display Compass Calibration active Please drive in a full circle gt Drive a full circle at a vehicle speed of between 3 mph and 6 mph 5 km h and 10 km h When calibration was successful the following message appears in the multifunction display Compass calibration Completed successfully if the message Compass calibration Completed successful ly does not appear in the multifunction display drive another full circle If calibration does not succeed within 3 minutes the message C
197. be noted that with respect to both front side impact air bags or the rear side impact air bags there is a possibility for a side impact air bag related injury if occu pants especially children are not properly seated or restrained when next to a side im pact air bag which needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in order to do its job Occupant safety To help avoid the possibility of injury please follow these guidelines 1 Always sit nearly upright properly use the seat belts and for children 12 years old and under use an appropriately sized infant or toddler restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child 2 Always wear seat belts properly If you believe that even with the use of these guidelines it would be safer for your rear seat occupants to have the rear seat mounted side impact air bags deactivated then deactivation can be accomplished upon your written request to do so at an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center at an additional cost Please contact your local authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center or call our Customer Assistance Center at 1 800 FOR MERCedes 1 800 367 6372 for details Safety and Security Occupant safety i Air bags are designed to deploy only in cer tain frontal impacts front air bags side impacts side impact and head protection window curtain air bags which exceed preset thresholds and in certain rollovers head protection window
198. bject may result Corners approx 6 in 15 cm Ultrasonic signals from outside sources e g working jackhammers car wash or the air brakes of trucks may impair the operation of the If the system detects an obstacle in this Parktronic system 3D 20 Olin o 24 ain range all the distance warning segments illuminate and you hear a warning signal If the obstacle is closer than the minimum distance the actual distance may no longer be indicated by the system P54 65 2895 31 Warning indicators Visual signals indicate to the driver the relative distance between the sensors and an obstacle The warning indicator for the front area is located above the center air vents in the dashboard The warning indi cator for the rear area is located in the rear overhead control panel Front area warning indicator 1 Left side of the vehicle 2 Right side of the vehicle 3 Readiness indicators Each warning indicator is divided into five yellow and two red distance segments for either side of the vehicle The Parktronic system is ready when the yellow readiness indicators 3 are illuminated The current transmission position deter mines which warning indicator will be activated Transmission Warning indicator position D Front area activated RorN Front and rear area activated P Neither activated Controls in detail Driving systems As your vehicle approaches an object one or more distance segments will ill
199. button EA Activating gt Press button gt page 220 The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air recirculation mode is activated auto matically at high outside temperatures The indicator lamp on button is not lit when the air recirculation mode is switched on auto matically A quantity of outside air is added after approxi mately 30 minutes If you have turned off the air conditioning gt page 228 or the outside temperature is below 41 F 5 C the air recirculation mode will not switch on automatically To cool the interior as fast as possible the climate control automatically switches to air recirculation The indicator lamp on button is not lit when the air recirculation mode has been switched on automatically Deactivating gt Press button Bey The indicator lamp on the button goes out The air recirculation mode is deactivated automatically e after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is below approximately 41 F 5 C e after 5 minutes if the air conditioning and air drying are turned off e after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above approximately 41 F 5 C Air recirculation mode with convenience closing and opening feature Warning A N Never operate the windows and tilt sliding sunroof or tilt sliding panel if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing procedure In case the procedure causes potential dan g
200. button Jg The indicator lamp on the button comes on Controls in detail 3 zone automatic climate control JOT O8 80 Left side air vent adjustable Thumbwheel for air volume control for left side and door air vent Left center air vent adjustable Right center air vent adjustable Thumbwheel for air volume control for left center air vent Thumbwheel for air volume control for right center air vent Thumbwheel for air volume control for right side and door air vent Right side air vent adjustable Front passenger door air vent fixed Automatic climate control panel Driver s door air vent fixed e For draft free ventilation move the sliders for center air vents and side air vents to the middle position Controls in detail 3 zone automatic climate control Controls in detail 3 zone automatic climate control JOT Sle Temperature control driver s side Air distribution and air volume automatic manual Air distribution driver s side Front defroster Key Canada only Increasing air volume Rear window defroster USA only ray Canada only Air distribution passenger side Rear automatic climate control on off USA only Canada only OB PG OOO O 0000 Temperature control passenger side Automatic climate control on off Air distribution passenger side Air distribution passenger side AC cooling on off Residual heat venti
201. by the Mercedes Benz Limited War ranty After hard braking it is advisable to drive on for some time rather than immediately park so that the air stream will cool down the brakes faster Operation Driving instructions High performance brake system R 63 AMG only The high performance brake system is designed to operate under the extremely high operating demands required to accommodate the performance capabili ties of the vehicle The brakes may produce a squeaking type noise depending on the e vehicle speed e brake force applied e ambient conditions e g temperature and humidity As with any brake system the wear of indi vidual brake system components such as brake pads or disks strongly depends on your driving style and the conditions under which you operate the vehicle Thus a driv ing style calling for high demand braking will cause your vehicle s brakes to wear more quickly Warning VAN New vehicle brake pads and discs and replacement brake pads and discs may take several hundred miles of driving until they provide optimum braking efficiency Until that time you may need to use increased brake pedal pressure while braking Please be aware of this and adjust your driving and braking accordingly during this break in period Excessive high demand braking will cause correspondingly high brake wear Please be attentive to the brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster and brake condition me
202. c reversal will not operate Warning Fully opening the door windows Express open gt Press switch Q 2 or gt page 251 past the resistance point and release The corresponding door window opens completely Fully closing the door windows Express close gt Pull switch G or gt page 251 past the resistance point and release The corresponding door window closes completely AN Warning Drivers door only If within 5 seconds switch is again pulled past the resistance point and released the automatic reversal will not function Controls in detail If the upward movement of a door window is blocked during the closing procedure the door window will stop and open slightly gt Remove the obstruction gt Pull the respective power window switch past the resistance point again and release If the door window still does not close when there is no obstruction pull and hold the respec tive power window switch The door window will then close without the obstruction sensor function Stopping door windows during Express operation gt Press or pull the respective door window switch again Power windows Hinged quarter windows The switches for opening and closing the hinged quarter windows are located on the door control panel of the driver s door gt page 36 Q Hinged quarter uincone opening 2 Hinged quarter windows closing Control
203. cations and where proper installation will be performed Introduction Operator s Manual This Operator s Manual contains a great deal of useful information We urge you to read it carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving For your own safety and longer service life of the vehicle we urge you to follow the in structions and warnings contained in this manual Ignoring them could result in dam age to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others Vehicle damage caused by fail ure to follow instructions is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Your vehicle may have some or all of the equipment described in this manual Therefore you may find explanations for optional equipment not installed in your vehicle If you have any questions about the operation of any equipment your authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center will be glad to demonstrate the proper procedures We continuously strive to improve our product and ask for your understanding that we reserve the right to make changes in design and equipment Therefore infor mation illustrations and descriptions in this Operator s Manual might differ from your vehicle Optional equipment is also described in this manual including operating instruc tions wherever necessary Since they are special order items the descriptions and illustrations herein may vary slightly from the actual equipment of your vehicle I
204. cator lamp will illumi nate for approximately 6 seconds when the engine is started and then go out indicating that the front passenger front air bag is acti vated bob b gt Safety and Security Occupant safety If the indicator lamp is illu minated the front passenger front air bag is deactivated and will not be deployed If the indicator lamp is not illuminated the front passenger front air bag is activated and will be deployed e inthe event of certain frontal impacts e if impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold e independently of the side impact air bags If the front passenger front air bag is de ployed the rate of inflation will be influ enced by e the rate of relevant vehicle deceleration as assessed by the air bag control unit e the front passenger s weight category as identified by the Occupant Classifica tion System OCS Warning VAN According to accident statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seat ing position Thus we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats whenever possible Regardless of seating position children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant or child restraint recom mended for the size and weight of the child The infant or child restraint must be properly secured with the vehicle s seat belt the seat belt and top teth
205. cause injury Warning gt Fold wiper arms forward until they snap into place Vehicle care iH Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts They could tear gt Clean the wiper blade inserts with a clean cloth and detergent solution gt Use a soft clean cloth and a mild window cleaning solution on all outside and inside glass surfaces An automotive glass cleaner is recom mended T Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto the windshield before turning the SmartKey in the starter switch or pressing the KEYLESS GO start stop button vehicles with KEYLESS GO Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back If released the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield T To clean the window interior do not use a dry cloth abrasives solvents or cleaners con taining solvents Do not touch the inside of the front rear or side windows with hard objects such as an ice scraper or ring Doing so may damage the windows Operation Vehicle care Cleaning the panorama roof with tilt sliding panel The rear part of the panorama roof has a protective layer on the inside gt Use a soft clean cloth and a mild window cleaning solution An automotive glass cleaner is recom mended Ea Do not use a dry cloth abrasives solvents or cleaners containing solvents Do not touch the protective layer with hard objects such as an ice scraper or ring Never apply strong force and only u
206. ccupants during a crash Warning A N A pyrotechnic emergency tensioning device ETD that was activated must be replaced When disposing of the pyrotechnic emer gency tensioning device our safety instruc tions must be followed These are available at your authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Active head restraints The active head restraints are intended to offer the driver and front passenger increased protection from whiplash type injuries In the event of a rear end collision the active head restraints on the drivers and front passenger s seats are designed to move forward in the direction of travel providing the head with increased support earlier on in the collision sequence The active head restraints move forward whether the seat is occupied or not Warning A N Only use seat or head restraint covers which have been tested and approved by Mercedes Benz for your vehicle model Using other seat or head restraint covers may interfere with or prevent the activation of the active head restraint Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center for availability Safety and Security Occupant safety Do not attach any objects e g hangers to the head restraints posts Otherwise the active head restraints may not be able to function properly or offer the intended degree of protection in the event of an accident Warning A N For your protection drive only with properly positioned head res
207. cedes Benz vehicle literature pouch For information on active head restraints see Active head restraints gt page 83 For information on head restraint adjust ment see Seats gt page 43 Y Replacing SmartKey batteries If the batteries in the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO are discharged the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked It is recommended to have the batteries replaced at an autho rized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center A Keep the batteries out of reach of children Warning If a battery is swallowed seek medical help immediately Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling i When replacing batteries make sure they are clean and free of lint Practical hints ae When replacing batteries always replace both batteries The required replacement batteries are available at any Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Replacement batteries Lithium type CR 2025 or equivalent gt Remove the mechanical key from the SmartKey gt page 478 P80 35 2283 31 1 Mechanical key 2 Battery compartment gt Insert mechanical key Q into opening gt Press mechanical key Q in direction of arrow The battery compartment is unlatched Replacing SmartKey batteries gt Pull ba
208. ch exterior rear view mirror out completely gt page 215 When the exterior rear view mirrors fold properly upon locking the vehicle the exte rior mirrors are synchronized Otherwise repeat the above steps Folding the exterior rear view mirrors in and out manually i The exterior rear view mirrors can vibrate if they are not folded out completely The button is located on the door control panel f4 J p P82 00 231141 1 Button for folding exterior rear view mirrors in and out gt Switch on the ignition gt page 39 Folding in gt Briefly press button Q Both exterior rear view mirrors fold in i Ifyou are driving at more than approximately 30 mph 47 km h you will not be able to fold the exterior mirrors in Folding out gt Briefly press button Q again Both exterior rear view mirrors fold out i If an exterior rear view mirror housing is forcibly pushed forward hit from the rear or forcibly pushed rearward hit from the front press button Q to fold mirrors in then press button Q again to fold mirrors out Do not force mirrors by hand as this may damage the adjust ment mechanism The mirror housing is then properly positioned and you can adjust the mirror in the usual man ner Controls in detail Sun visors The sun visors protect you from sun glare while driving A Do not use the vanity mirror while driving Warning Keep the mirrors in the sun visors cl
209. child s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the child restraint A Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous You could slide under the seat belt in a collision If you slide under it the belt would apply force at the ab domen or neck That could cause serious or fatal injuries The seat backrest and seat belts provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and belts are properly positioned on the body Warning Your seat must be adjusted so that you can correctly fasten your seat belt gt page 51 Never place hands under the seat or near any moving parts while a seat is being ad justed gt gt Controls in detail gt D Seats After adjusting rear seats make sure e the seats are properly locked e the seat backrests are in an upright po sition and are properly locked A second row seat is properly locked only when lock status indicator Q is in hinged position and red marking is barely visible gt page 135 If a seat and seat backrest are not properly locked the seat could move forward and the seat backrest could fold You could slide un der the seat belt during braking vehicle ma neuvers or in an accident If you slide under it the belt would apply force at t
210. cle Distronic calculates and sets the required following distance to the preceding vehicle The set distance will be shown in the multifunction display gt page 276 The distance setting switch for the time setting is located on the cruise control lever on the left hand side of the steering column Driving systems Warning A It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to select the appropriate setting given road conditions traffic driver s preferred driving style and applicable laws and driving recom mendations for safe following distance a MESZ oe 1 Distance setting switch 2 To decrease distance 3 To increase distance Controls in detail Driving systems Increasing distance Increasing the distance setting tells Distronic to maintain a greater following distance to the preceding vehicle gt Turn distance setting switch Q in direction of arrow Decreasing distance Decreasing the distance setting tells Distronic to maintain a shorter following distance to the preceding vehicle gt Turn distance setting switch Q in direction of arrow 2 Driving with Distronic This section describes a number of driving situations where special precaution is re quired on the part of the driver Be pre pared to brake in such situations Braking will deactivate the Distronic system Warning Distronic works to maintain the speed selected by the driver unless a moving
211. cle with the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO the batteries in the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO are discharged the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is malfunctioning or the vehicle battery is drained e Check the batteries in the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO gt page 120 and replace them if necessary page 483 e Use the mechanical key to unlock the drivers door gt page 478 e Lock the vehicle as described in the Practical hints section gt page 479 e Have the vehicle battery and the vehicle bat tery connections checked gt page 506 If the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is malfunc tioning contact Roadside Assistance or an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Checking the batteries gt Press button or a Battery check lamp gt page 116 comes on briefly to indicate that the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO batteries are in order If battery check lamp gt page 116 does not come on briefly during check the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO batteries are discharged Replace the batteries gt page 483 You can obtain the required batteries at any authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center f the batteries are checked within signal range of the vehicle pressing the button or will lock or unlock the vehicle accordingly Unlocking and opening the tailgate Vehicles with power tailgate You can unlock and open the tailgate sep arately A minimum height clearance of 7 2 ft 2 20 m is required
212. cle without shifting into park position P is dangerous Also park position P alone is not intended to or capa ble of preventing your vehicle from moving possibly hitting people or objects Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to park position P gt page 66 When parked on an incline turn the front wheels towards the road curb Do not park this vehicle in areas where com bustible materials such as grass hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire A When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unat tended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could shift the automatic transmission out of park position P which could result in an accident and or serious personal injury Warning Driving tips Accelerator position Your driving style influences the transmission s shifting behavior Less throttle Earlier upshifting More throttle Later upshifting Kickdown Use kickdown when you want maximum acceleration gt Press the accelerator past the point of resistance Depending on the engine speed the transmission shifts into a lower gear gt Ease on the accelerator when you have reached the desired speed The transmission shifts up again Controls in det
213. could get caught between the pedals You could then no longer brake or accelerate This could lead to accidents and injury Automatic transmission Gear selector lever The gear selector lever is located on the right of the steering column l 2 Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission P Park position R Reverse gear N Neutral D Drive position Controls in detail Automatic transmission The current transmission position P R N or D appears in the multifunction display gt page 201 A It is dangerous to shift the automatic trans mission out of park position P or neutral position N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal Warning Shifting from P to N Moving the gear selector lever up or down shifts the automatic transmission out of park position P gt With the vehicle at a standstill depress the brake pedal and keep it pressed Move gear selector lever up or down to resistance point to select neutral position N i The gear selector lever returns to its original position Shifting from N to R or from N to D gt or With the vehicle at a standstill depress the brake pedal and keep it
214. ction e Freeze protection e Boiling protection by increasing the boiling point The cooling system was filled at the factory with a coolant providing freeze protection to approximately 35 F 37 C and corro sion protection If the antifreeze mixture is effective to 22 F 30 C the boiling point of the cool ant in the pressurized cooling system is reached at approximately 266 F 130 C The coolant solution must be used year round to provide the necessary corrosion protection and increase boil over protec tion Refer to Maintenance Booklet for replacement interval Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Coolant system design and coolant used determine the replacement interval The replacement interval published in the Maintenance booklet is only applicable if MB 325 0 anticorrosion antifreeze solu tion or other Mercedes Benz approved products of equal specification see Factory Approved Service Products pam phlet are used to renew the coolant con centration or bring it back up to the proper level To provide important corrosion protection the solution must be at least 45 anticor rosion antifreeze equivalent to freeze protection to approx 22 F 30 C If you use a solution that is more than 55 anti corrosion antifreeze freeze protection to approx 49 F 45 C the engine temper ature will increase due to the lower heat transfer capability of the solution There fore do not u
215. d Therefore do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equip ment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury gt D Controls in detail gt D Locking and unlocking A Warning Only drive with the tailgate closed as among other dangers such as blocked visibility exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior If the tailgate comes into contact with an object while closing e g luggage that has been piled too high the closing procedure is stopped and the tailgate reopens Closing the tailgate from the outside manually 1 Handle gt Lower tailgate by pulling firmly on handle 1 gt Close tailgate with hands placed flat on it Once the tailgate touches the latch the tailgate will pull itself shut automat ically A To prevent possible personal injury always keep hands and fingers away from the cargo compartment opening when closing the tailgate Be especially careful when small children are around Warning When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury A Warning Only drive with the tailgate closed as among other dang
216. d observing a front to rear rotation pattern that will maintain the intended rotation spinning direction of the tire gt page 375 In some cases such as when your vehicle is equipped with mixed size tires different tire dimension front vs rear tire rotation is not possible If applicable to your vehicle s tire configu ration tires can be rotated according to the tire manufacturers recommended in tervals in the tire manufacturers warranty pamphlet located in your vehicle literature portfolio If none is available tires should be rotated every 3000 to 6000 miles 5000 to 10000 km or sooner if neces sary according to the degree of tire wear The same rotation spinning direction must be maintained gt page 375 Rotate tires before the characteristic tire wear pattern becomes visible shoulder wear on front tires and tread center wear on rear tires Thoroughly clean the mounting face of wheels and brake disks i e the inner side of the wheels tires during each rotation Check for and ensure proper tire inflation pressure A Have the tightening torque checked after changing a wheel Wheels could become loose if not tightened with a torque of 110 Ib ft 150 Nm Warning Only use genuine Mercedes Benz wheel bolts specified for your vehicle s rims For information on wheel change see Flat tire gt page 497 Vv Winter driving Before the onset of winter have your vehicle winter
217. d in the window opening Warning When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unat tended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehi cle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Occupant safety The override switch is located on the driver s door control panel j b hs i j Pood 25 4200 3 1 1 Override switch For more information on power windows see Power windows gt page 251 Safety and Security Occupant safety Disabling gt Press override switch Q until it engages The switch engages in the recessed position The rear door windows can no longer be operated using the switches located in the rear doors i Operating the rear door windows using the switches located on the door control panel of the driver s door is still possible Enabling gt Press override switch 4 once more The switch disengages from its re cessed position back to its original po sition The rear door windows can again be operated using the switches located in the rear doors Vv Panic alarm An audible alarm and flashing exterior lamps will operate briefly SmartKey button P80 00 2117 31 Safety and Security amp USA only This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operat
218. d until the engine has cooled If necessary call the fire department Warning A N You could be injured when the hood is open even when the engine is turned off Parts of the engine can become very hot To prevent burns only touch owner serviceable components described in the Operator s Manual and comply with all relevant safety precautions Warning A N To help prevent personal injury stay clear of moving parts when the hood is open and the engine is running The radiator fan may continue to run for approximately 30 seconds or may even re start after the engine has been turned off Stay clear of fan blades Warning A N Vehicles with gasoline engine The engine is equipped with a transistor ized ignition system Because of the high voltage it is dangerous to touch any compo nents ignition coils spark plug sockets diagnostic socket of the ignition system e with the engine running e while starting the engine e if ignition is on and the engine is turned manually A Warning Vehicles with diesel engine The engine is equipped with a high voltage electronic control unit for the injection system Because of the high voltage it is dangerous to touch any components of the injection system injectors electrical wires e with the engine running e while starting the engine e when the ignition is switched on The hood lock release lever is located in the driver s footwell gt
219. d when you e switch on the ignition or start the engine and e release the parking brake and e set the automatic transmission to position D R or N Driving systems The Parktronic system deactivates at vehicle speeds exceeding approximately 11 mph 18 km h At lower vehicle speeds the Parktronic system turns on again The Parktronic system also deactivates when you set the automatic transmission to position P or depress the parking brake pedal The Parktronic system monitors the surroundings of your vehicle with six sen sors in the front bumper and four sensors P54 65 2893 31 1 Sensors in the front bumper Controls in detail Driving systems Range of the sensors Front sensors To function properly the sensors must be i Center approx 40 in 100 cm free of dirt ice snow and slush Clean the PP sensors regularly being careful not to Corners approx 24 in 60 cm scratch or damaging the sensors see Cleaning the Parktronic system sensors a as Rear sensors 100 50 Ojcm 0 60 120 cm gt page 414 40 20 Ofin 0 24 jin Center approx 48 in 120 cm T During parking maneuvers pay special 3 attention to objects located above or below the Ps4 65 2894 31 Corners approx 32 in 80 cm height of the sensors e g planters or trailer hitches Minimum distance The Parktronic system will not detect such objects at close range and damage to your Center approx 8 in 20 cm vehicle or the o
220. damaged e The operating clearance of the wheels and the tires may no longer be correct Operation Warning VAN Worn old tires can cause accidents If the tire tread is badly worn or if the tires have sustained damage replace them When replacing rims only use genuine Mercedes Benz wheel bolts specified for the particular rim type Failure to do so can result in the bolts loosening and possibly an accident Retreaded tires are not tested or recom mended by Mercedes Benz since previous damage cannot always be recognized on retreads The operating safety of the vehicle cannot be assured when such tires are used Tires and wheels Important guidelines e Only use sets of tires and rims of the same type and make Tires must be of the correct size for the rim e Break in new tires for approximately 60 miles 100 km at moderate speeds e Regularly check the tires and rims for damage Dented or bent rims can cause tire inflation pressure loss and damage to the tire beads e If vehicle is heavily loaded check tire inflation pressure and correct as required e Do not allow your tires to wear down too far Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply reduced at tread depths under in 3 mm e When replacing individual tires you should mount new tires on the front wheels first on vehicles with same sized wheels all around Operation Tires and wheels Tire care and maintenance A
221. de in a moving vehicle with the seat back in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous You could slide under the seat belt in a collision If you slide under it the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck That could cause serious or fatal injuries The seat backrest and seat belts provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and belts are properly positioned on the body Your seat must be adjusted so that you can correctly fasten your seat belt gt page 51 Never place hands under the seat or near any moving parts while a seat is being adjusted Warning A N When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Even with the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO removed from the vehicle the power seats can be operated when the respective door is open Therefore do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equip ment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Warning VAN According to accident statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seat ing position Thus we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats whenever possible Regardless of seating
222. des cleaning 415 Windshield Cleaning with wiper fluid 62 Cleaning 415 Power tilt sliding sunroof 258 Panorama roof with power 261 tilt sliding panel Doors Locking and unlocking 112 Opening and closing 122 Locking unlocking in an 478 emergency Front lamps 484 Headlamp cleaning system 212 Cockpit 2e O O oO 0L Item Cruise control lever Instrument cluster Multifunction steering wheel Horn Steering wheel gearshift buttons Gear selector lever for automatic transmission Front Parktronic warning indicators Overhead control panel Glove box release Glove box lock Page 267 26 30 207 54 293 33 311 312 OO8 O At a glance Item Glove box CD changer AUX socket Center console Starter switch Steering wheel adjustment manual Steering wheel adjustment electrical Heated steering wheel Hood lock release Parking brake release Parking brake pedal Page onal 311 311 31 39 46 47 326 364 57 66 Item Door control panel Headlamp washer switch Exterior lamp switch Combination switch e Turn signals e High beam e Windshield wipers e Rear window wiper Cockpit Page 36 22 146 60 39 60 62 ee _ ag oe i AM r Le WE ed Le Be Y 2Y AL A ca r z ds E Instrument cluster P54 30 9427 31 N Ar Item O el Left turn signal indicator lamp 2 To dim instrument cluster il
223. direction of arrow as far as it will go Seat and seat backrest are unlocked Controls in detail Loading Folding third row seats gt Completely lower the head restraints of the third row seats 0 The third row head restraints are adjusted in the same manner as the head restraints of the second row seats gt page 139 1 Seat belt holder 2 Release handle 3 Seat backrest Place seat belt in seat belt holder Q p gt Pull release handle 2 on seat backrest in direction of arrow Seat backrest 8 is released gt Slowly move seat backrest 3 forward Seat cushion 7 is released and folds 3 Seat backrest third row seat 4 Recess on second row seat backrest Guide pin on third row seat cushion 6 Seat backrest second row seat 7 Seat cushion third row seat Strap i Strap 8 serves to pull up the seat backrest when bringing the third row seats back to their original position gt page 304 gt Fold seat cushion to a horizontal position Guide pin must engage in recess of seat backrest 6 The second row seats must be in their rearmost position gt page 138 gt Fold seat backrest 3 to a horizontal position Returning seats to their original position gt Carry out the steps described on gt page 301 to gt page 304 in reverse order gt Make sure all seats are properly locked in position Controls in detail
224. door B pillar on the proper size and recommended tire inflation pressures for the original equipment tires on your vehicle Following is a discussion on how to work with the information contained on the placard with regards to loading your vehicle Tire and Loading Information A Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit as indicated on the plac ard on the driver s door B pillar Overloading the tires can overheat them possibly caus ing a blowout Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems or brake failure Warning Tire and Loading Information placard a Data shown on placard example are for illustration purposes only Load limit data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the following illustration Refer to placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle Operation tire COLD TIRE PRESSURE SEE OWNERS FRONT P19S 70R14 wean Ps 15 7OR 1 200KPA 29PSI ADDITIONAL SPARE T125 70D15 A20KPA A0PSI INFORMATION P40 00 2062 31 1 Load limit information on the Tire and Loading Information placard The placard showing the load limit informa tion is located on the driver s door B pillar gt Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs on this placard The combined weight of all occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue load i
225. door window slightly i You can also open or close the tilt sliding sunroof using the SmartKey or the KEYLESS GO function see Summer opening feature gt page 254 and Convenience clos ing feature gt page 256 Depending on the current position the tilt sliding sunroofs may also open or close when the air recirculation button on the control panel of the climate control gt page 220 or automatic climate control gt page 234 is pressed and held Controls in detail The tilt sliding sunroof is opened and closed electrically The switch for the tilt sliding sunroof is located on the overhead control panel gt Switch on the ignition gt page 39 mn Opening and closing ON P54 25 5186 31 gt To open close raise or lower the Sunroof switch tilt sliding sunroof move the sunroof Q Push back to slide sunroof open switch to the resistance point in the 2 Push forward to slide sunroof closed required direction of arrows to 3 Push up to raise sunroof at rear gt page 259 Pull n to r sunroof at rear Pull down to lower sunroof at rea gt Release the sunroof switch when the With the sunroof closed or tilted open a tilt sliding sunroof has reached the screen can be slid into the roof opening to desired position guard against sun rays When sliding the sunroof open the screen will also retract Power tilt sliding sunroof Fully opening Express open and closing Expr
226. drive Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs Driving instructions Pedals A Make sure that absolutely no objects are ob structing the pedal s range of movement Keep the driver s footwell clear of all obsta cles If there are any floormats or carpets in the footwell make sure the pedals still have sufficient clearance Warning During sudden driving or braking maneu vers the objects could get caught between the pedals You could then no longer brake or accelerate This could lead to accidents and injury Operation Driving instructions Power assistance Brakes T Operational or performance test must only Warning A N With the engine not running there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems In this case it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the ve hicle Warning A N After driving in heavy rain for some time without applying the brakes or through wa ter deep enough to wet brake components the first braking action may be somewhat reduced and increased pedal pressure may be necessary to obtain expected braking effect Maintain a safe distance from vehicles in front Resting your foot on the brake pedal will cause excessive and premature wear of the brake pads It can also result in the brakes overheating thereby significantly
227. ds for the system to complete the necessary check cycles and to make sure neither message appears in the multifunction display If above conditions are met you can occupy the front passenger seat again Depending on the front passenger classification sensed by the OCS gt page 88 the indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out If above conditions are not met the system is not working properly Have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center main n after performing th individual he fron nger Warning ES al zou even after performing t e ADON i Ovaa EE e fro t passenge seat corrective steps do not have any children until the system has been repaired If the indicator lamp re 12 years old and under and other small Practical hints What to do if Display message Possible Possible solution cause consequence Front passenger airbag Front passenger front Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and check the front disabled air bag is deactivated passenger seat for the following See Operator s Manual while driving even though an adult or someone largerthana gt small individual is oc p cupying the front pas s gt gt Apply the parking brake gt page 66 Switch off the ignition gt page 39 Have the front passenger vacate the seat and exit the vehicle senger seat Forces Adjust the seat in a height position gt page 44 acting on the se
228. dule gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Time Date submenu gt Press button J or Re repeatedly until the message Date Set day appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the day setting Date Set day 06 6 2005 gt Press button ES or E to set ie day Setting the date year This function is not available if your vehicle is equipped with the COMAND system and navigation module gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Time Date submenu gt Press button JM or eg repeatedly until the message Date Set year appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the year setting Date Set year msp 2005 gt Press button or E to set the year Lighting submenu Access the Lighting submenu via the Settings menu Use the Lighting submenu to change the lamp and lighting settings on your vehicle The following functions are available Function Page Setting daytime running lamp 183 mode USA only Setting locator lighting 184 Setting night security 185 illumination Setting interior lighting delayed 186 shut off Setting daytime running lamp mode USA only This function is not available in countries where the daytime running lamp mode is manda tory and therefore in a constant mode gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Lighting submenu gt Press button JM or Re repeatedly until
229. dure carefully to make sure no one is in danger of being in jured To prevent possible personal injury always keep hands and fingers away from the cargo compartment opening when clos ing the tailgate Be especially careful when small children are around To stop the clos ing procedure do one of the following e Press tailgate closing switch e Press KEYLESS GO locking closing switch 2 e Press the button on the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO gt page 116 e Press or pull the remote tailgate switch on the driver s door gt page 125 Even with the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO removed from the vehicle the tailgate closing switch can be operated Therefore do not leave children unattended in the ve hicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury A Warning Only drive with the tailgate closed as among other dangers such as blocked visibility exhaust fumes may enter the vehi cle interior Closing the tailgate gt Make sure you have the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO with you gt Press tailgate closing switch Q briefly The tailgate closes and an acoustic warning sounds If the tailgate comes into contact with an object while closing e g luggage that has been piled too high the closing procedure is stopped and the tailgate reopens If the vehicle was previously centrally locked the tailgate will lock a
230. e Control system section see Setting locator light ing gt page 184 and Setting night secu rity illumination gt page 185 Controls in detail Fog lamps Warning In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions only switch from position R to with the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location Switching from W to will briefly switch off the headlamps Doing so while driving in low ambient lighting conditions may result in an accident i Fog lamps will operate with the parking lamps and or the low beam headlamps on Fog lamps should only be used in conjunction with low beam headlamps Consult your State or Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding permissible lamp operation 0 Fog lamps cannot be switched on with the exterior lamp switch in position J To switch on the fog lamps turn the exterior lamp switch to position first Lighting Front fog lamps gt Switch on the low beam headlamps gt page 59 h j E _ j N j 1 ho Th W Ez D d h 3 ij nn r ji iw j D p54 4 r gt Pull out the exterior lamp switch to first stop The front fog lamps switch on The green indicator lamp in the exterior lamp switch comes on gt page 146 gt Push in the exterior lamp switch The front fog lamps switch off The green indicator lamp in the exterior lamp switch goes out Controls in detail Lighting Rear fog lamp driver s side only Co
231. e Practical hints section gt page 431 Warning A N Never place anything between seat cushion and child seat e g pillow since it reduces the effectiveness of the Occupant Classification System The bottom of the child seat must make full contact with the passenger seat cushion An incorrectly mounted child seat could cause injuries to the child in case of an accident instead of increasing protection for the child Follow the manufacturer s instructions for installation of child seats Occupant safety Child seat anchors LATCH type This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren type anchors at each of the second and third row seats for the installation of a LATCH child seat with matching mounting fittings Warning A N Children too big for a toddler restraint must ride in seats using regular seat belts Posi tion shoulder belt across chest and shoul der not face or neck A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper belt positioning for children over 41 Ibs until they reach a height where a lap shoulder belt fits properly without a booster Install child seat according to manufactu rer s instructions The child seat must be firmly attached to the right and left side anchors bE Safety and Security Occupant safety aa An incorrectly mounted child seat may come loose during an accident which could result in serious injury or death to the child
232. e 121 256 Kickdown 203 Kilopascal 402 Labels Lamps exterior 526 Certification label 526 Emission control information Engine number 527 Paint code 526 Vacuum line routing diagram 527 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 527 527 485 Front 485 Light sensor Messages in the multi function display 463 Messages in display 465 Messages in the multifunction display 463 468 Rear 485 Lamps Indicator and warning ABS 27 420 Brakes 27 421 Center console 31 431 CHECK ENGINE 29 423 424 Engine diagnostics 29 423 424 ESP 27 425 Front fog lamps 146 Front passenger front air bag off 78 88 92 93 431 Fuel reserve 29 430 High beam headlamps 29 Instrument cluster 26 420 Parktronic 293 294 Preglow indicator Diesel engine 29 Rear fog lamp 146 Seat belt telltale 29 79 426 Seat heating 142 SRS 29 72 82 430 Turn signals 27 Lamps indicator and warning Distance warning lamp 275 Instrument cluster 428 Seat ventilation 143 Language Setting 179 LATCH type child seat anchors see Children in the vehicle Leather upholstery Cleaning and careof 418 License plate lamps 485 Messages in the multifunction display 465 Replacing bulbs 485 493 Light alloy wheels Cleaning 416 Light sensor Messages in the multifunction display 463 Lighter see Cigarette lighter Lighting Parking lamps 146 Lighting Exterior and interior 146 Limp home mode 211 423 424 Loading see Vehicle loading Lo
233. e 2 on seat backrest in direction of arrow Seat backrest is released gt gt Controls in detail Loading 5 P91 122803 1 3 Seat backrest 4 Seat cushion Strap gt Move seat backrest 3 slightly for ward Seat cushion 4 is released and folds forward automatically gt Fold seat backrest 3 to a horizontal position L Strap serves to pull up the seat backrest when bringing the third row seats back to their original position gt page 304 Expanding cargo compartment fully Warning yx Folded second row seats are intended to serve as Cargo compartment expansion in conjunction with folded third row seats only Do not fold the second row seats and allow third row seat occupants to use folded second row seats as a footrest while driving Third row seat occupants must like all vehi cle occupants keep both feet on the floor in front of their seat Otherwise occupants could slide under the seat belt in a collision If occupants slide under it the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck That could cause serious or even fatal injuries Do not fold the second row seats and allow third row seat occupants to use folded second row seats as a table while driving Objects placed on folded second row seats may come loose during braking vehicle ma neuvers or an accident and be thrown around in the vehicle interior Objects thrown around in the vehicle interior may cause an
234. e compressor has cooled down Reduce vehicle speed Set the next higher level gt page 287 Practical hints Where will I find First aid kit Check expiration dates and contents for completeness at least once a year and replace missing expired items The first aid kit is stored under the cargo compartment floor see Vehicle tool kit gt page 472 Vehicle tool kit The vehicle tool kit is stored under the car go compartment floor The vehicle tool kit includes e Towing eye bolt e Wheel wrench e Alignment bolt e Vehicle jack e Fuse chart e Spare fuses e Fuse extractor e Collapsible wheel chock e Wheel bolts for spare wheel if applicable see Mounting the spare wheel gt page 500 1 Cargo compartment floor lowered 2 Handle cover gt Open the tailgate gt page 123 gt Push in handle cover 2 and pull handle in direction of arrow gt Lift cargo compartment floor Q T J ST 3 Securing hook gt Release securing hook 8 located be low the floor handle from holder 3 Securing hook 4 Cargo compartment floor raised Upper cargo compartment lip gt Engage securing hook 3 on upper cargo compartment lip T With the cargo compartment cover blind installed behind the third row seats page 306 disengage cargo compartment cover blind and flip it forward Otherwise the strap of the securing hook could
235. e gt Wait at least 10 seconds before automatic program mode C or S l restarting The manual program mode M is not Restart the engine stored Shift to drive position D for second gear or reverse gear R gt Have the transmission checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible Controls in detail Good visibility For information on the windshield wipers see Windshield wipers gt page 60 Headlamp cleaning system The button is located on the left side of the dashboard 1 Headlamp washer button gt Switch on the ignition gt page 39 gt Press button Q The headlamps are cleaned with a high pressure water jet i The headlamps will automatically be cleaned when you have e switched on the headlamps and e operated the windshield wipers with wind shield washer fluid fifteen times When you switch off the ignition the counter resets For information on filling up the washer reservoir see Windshield rear window washer system and headlamp cleaning system gt page 372 Rear view mirrors IMM MMMM MII O For more information on setting the rear view mirrors see Mirrors gt page 48 Interior rear view mirror antiglare position P68 40 2119 31 1 Lever gt Tilt the mirror to the antiglare position by moving lever C towards the wind shield The interior rear view mirror is dimmed Auto dimming re
236. e operation gt Close the hood after checking or re placing fuses gt page 366 Fuses Fuse box in cargo compartment The fuse box is located under the cargo compartment cover on the right hand side of the spare wheel well gt Open the tailgate gt page 123 gt Lift the cargo compartment cover gt page 472 gt Secure cargo compartment cover with strap gt page 473 q r E FRR Ss ai F kS s 5 E m k Pa f tey X 3 n gt i i gt a a 5 ae ts ai a AN i r lt E 7 os i Lo gt ch s A i S f Ha Dr x AT i L F H Pa 2 i Be Tie in a s x x s r E 5 d f h i gt Fold cover Q to the left as indicated by the arrow Cover Practical hints Fuses Fuse box in passenger compartment Opening Emergency engine shut down The fuse box is located behind a cover in Be Pulle over DCEO Or NaN If the engine cannot be turned off as de the dashboard on the passenger side Closing scribed in the Getting started section gt Open the front passenger door gt Clip upper end of cover Q into open gt page 67 do the following Ee Ing gt Take the fuse chart and the fuse extractor from the vehicle tool kit gt page 472 gt Push on lower end of cover Q until it engages gt Open the fuse box in the engine com partment gt page 521 gt Use the fuse extractor to remove or fuse 120 SG ELK Ceo
237. e the child in rear seat employing the child restraint if necessary Remove any other items from on and around the front passenger seat and make sure the storage bag on the back of the front passenger seat is empty Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the seat are present e g ob jects such as books briefcases etc lodged behind or around the seat head re straints pushing against roof etc The system may recognize such forces as supplemental weight and sense that an occupant on the front passenger seat is of a heavier weight than actually present Keep the seat unoccupied close the front passenger door and turn on the igni tion gt page 39 Continued on next page Practical hints What to do if Display message Possible Possible solution cause consequence Front passenger airbag Monitor the indicator lamp on the center console gt page 92 and enabled the multifunction display in the instrument cluster gt page 26 for the following see Operator s Manual With the seat unoccupied and the ignition turned on e the indicator lamp on the center console should illuminate and remain illuminated indicating that the OCS gt page 88 has deactivated the air bag e the message Front passenger airbag enabled See Operator s Manual or the message Front passenger airbag disabled See Operator s Manual should not appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied Wait at last 60 secon
238. e designation load and speed rating gt page 392 Load identification gt page 395 9 Tire name i For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration For more information see Rims and tires gt page 532 Operation Tires and wheels Tire size designation load and speed rating C Tire width 2 Aspect ratio in 3 Radial tire code 4 Rim diameter Tire load rating Tire speed rating ep For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration General Depending on the design standards used the tire size molded into the sidewall may have no letter or a letter preceding the tire size designation No letter preceding the size designation as illustrated above Passenger car tire based on European design standards Letter P preceding the size designation Passenger car tire based on U S design standards Letter LT preceding the size designation Light Truck tire based on U S design standards Letter T preceding the size designation Temporary spare tires which are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tire width The tire width G gt page 392 indicates the nominal tire width in mm Aspect ratio The aspect ratio 2 gt page 392 is the dimensional
239. e more gas The engine then operates at lower roms and the wheels are less likely to spin Select S for standard driving R 63 AMG sporty driving The vehicle starts out in first gear Upshifts occur later Controls in detail Steering wheel gearshift control With drive position D selected and driving in program mode C or S you can limit or extend the gear range If your vehicle is equipped with manual shift program M you can use the steering wheel gearshift control to manually shift the gears R 63 AMG For information on using the steering wheel gear Shift control in program mode M see Manual shift program R 63 AMG only page 209 Ba Allow engine to warm up under low load use Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only when the vehicle is stopped Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period when driving off on slippery road surfaces This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Automatic transmission EAS 1 Left shift button limiting gear range or downshift in program mode M 2 Right shift button extending gear range or upshift in program mode M P27 60 2811 3 i You cannot shift with the steering wheel gearshift control buttons when the transmission in position P N or R The following instructions
240. e multifunction steering wheel or the END button on the COMAND system headunit Useful features T If the indicator lamps do not start flashing after pressing one of the buttons or remain illuminated in red at any time the Tele Aid system has detected a malfunction or the service is not currently active and may not initiate a call Visit your authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center and have the system checked or contact the Response Center at 1 800 756 9018 in the USA or 1 888 923 8367 in Canada as soon as possible Controls in detail Useful features Call priority If other service calls such as a Roadside Assistance call or Information call are active an Emergency call is still possible In this case the Emergency call will take priority and override all other active calls id The indicator lamp in the respective button flashes until the call is concluded Emergency calls can only be terminated by a Response Center or Customer Assistance Center repre sentative whereas Roadside Assistance and Information calls can also be terminated using the button on the multifunction steering wheel or the END button on the COMAND system headunit BE if the indicator lamp continues to flash or the system does not reset contact the Response Center at 1 800 756 9018 in the USA or 1 888 923 8367 in Canada or Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance at 1 800 FOR MERCedes 1 800 367 6372 in the USA or Customer Service at 1 80
241. e replaced Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Starting the engine Warning A N Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide CO and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and possible death Do not run the engine in confined areas such as a garage which are not properly ventilated If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving have the cause determined and corrected immediately If you must drive under these conditions drive only with at least one win dow fully open Automatic transmission Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission P Park position R Reverse gear N Neutral D Drive position For information on how to operate the gear selector lever see Automatic transmis sion gt page 197 Starting with the SmartKey For information on turning off the engine with the SmartKey see Turning off the en gine gt page 67 Gasoline engine gt Make sure the automatic transmission is set to P The transmission position indicator in the multifunction display should be on P Do not depress the accelerator Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 3 gt page 40 and hold until the engine starts Gp You can also use the touch start function Turn the SmartKey to position 3 and release it again immediately The engine then starts auto matically Getting s
242. e runs surge free If the engine still does not start do not make any further attempts to start the en gine Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light truck Center or call Roadside Assistance gt page 333 When the KR malfunction indicator lamp USA only or the gx malfunction indicator lamp Canada only has been illuminated for the above condition it will remain illuminated until the engine was cycled on and off four times ina row Practical hints Practical hints Battery The battery is located under the front passenger seat Warning A OAO Mercedes Benz recommends to have the Observe all safety instructions and precau Rinse any acid spills immediate battery replaced at authorized Mercedes Benz tions when handling automotive batteries ly with clear water Contact a Light Truck Center ene physician if necessary Wear eye protection The battery should always be sufficiently A Risk of explosion charged in order to achieve its rated ser AD E vice life If you use your vehicle mostly for Fire open flames and smoking short distance trips you will need to have are prohibited when handling Follow the instructions in this the battery charge checked more batteries Avoid creating sparks Operator s Manual frequently When replacing the battery always use A Battery acid is caustic Do not Batteries contain materials that can harm batteries approved by Mercedes Benz allow it to come into c
243. e used as a descriptive code for identifying significant characteristics of the tire Date of manufacture The date of manufacture G gt page 396 identifies the week and year of manufac ture The first two figures identify the week starting with 0 1 to represent the first full week of the calendar year The second two figures represent the year For example 3202 represents the 32nd week of 2002 Maximum tire load 14 Maximum tire load rating ob For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specitic to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration The maximum tire load is the maximum weight the tires are designed to support Operation Tires and wheels A Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit as indicated on the plac ard located on the driver s door B pillar Overloading the tires can overheat them possibly causing a blowout Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems or brake failure Warning For more information on tire load rating gt page 393 For information on calculating total and cargo load capacities gt page 378 Operation Tires and wheels Maximum tire inflation pressure Always follow the recommended tire inflation pressure gt page 380 for proper tire inflation Never exceed the max tire inflation pressure Follow recommended tire inflation pressures
244. e vehicle through the rear left door gt Press down the locking knob of the driver s door T To prevent inadvertent lockout make sure to have the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO with you before proceeding with the next step The next step will lock the vehicle gt Exit the vehicle gt Close the rear left door The vehicle is locked This procedure does not arm the anti theft alarm system nor does it lock the fuel filler flap Fuel filler flap gt Open the tailgate gt page 123 The fuel filler flap release is located behind a cover in the right side trim panel of the cargo compartment 1 Lock 2 Cover Spb Practical hints Unlocking locking in an emergency gt gt Insert a suitable object such as a coin Pull red fuel filler flap release 3 in into the slot of lock Q direction of arrow gt Turn lock Q counterclockwise by 90 The fuel filler flap is unlocked in direction of arrow gt Open the fuel filler flap gt page 360 gt Remove cover 2 i The fuel filler flap release may differ depending on production date If your vehicle is not equipped with the fuel filler flap release as illustrated pulling a red fabric cord instead unlocks the fuel filler flap Practical hints Opening closing in an emergency Vv Opening closing in an emergency Power tilt sliding sunroof Vehicles with KEYLESS GO gt Take crank 2 out of the Ope
245. eadlamps Low beam H7 55 W Bi Xenon headlamps Low beam D2S 35 W Headlamps High beam high beam flasher H7 55 W Bi Xenon headlamps High beam high beam flasher spot lamp H7 55 W Side marker lamp WY 5 W Corner illuminating front fog lamp H11 55 W Vehicles with Bi Xenon headlamps Do not replace the Bi Xenon bulbs yourself Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center PB2 10 3764 31 Practical hints Replacing bulbs Rear lamps Lamp Type High mounted brake lamp LED Tail brake and side marker lamp P21W Turn signal lamp PY 21W QD Backup lamp P21W 2 Rear fog lamp driver s side only P21W 3 License plate lamps CSW Practical hints Replacing bulbs A Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot Allow the lamp to cool down before chang ing a bulb Warning Keep bulbs out of reach of children Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas A bulb can explode if you e touch or move it when hot e drop the bulb e scratch the bulb Wear eye and hand protection Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its components We recommend that you have such work done by a qualified technician Notes on bulb replacement Only use 12 volt bulbs of the same type and with the specified watt rating Switch the lights off before changing a bulb to prevent short circuits Always use a Clean lint f
246. eadly carbon monoxide CO gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in uncon sciousness and death Load distribution PO0 01 3037 31 The gross vehicle weight which is the weight of the vehicle including fuel tools spare wheel installed accessories pas sengers and luggage cargo must never exceed the load limit and the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR for your vehicle as specified on the placard located on the driver s door B pillar gt page 526 In addi tion the load must be distributed in sucha way so that the weight on each axle never exceeds the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for the front and rear axle The GVWR and GAWR for your vehicle are indi cated on the certification label which can be found on the driver s door B pillar gt page 526 For more information see Tire and Load ing Information gt page 377 The handling characteristics of a fully loaded vehicle depend greatly on the load distribution It is therefore recommended to load the vehicle according to the illustra tions shown with the heaviest items being placed towards the front of the vehicle Please pay attention to and comply with the following instructions when loading the vehicle and transporting cargo e Always place items being carried against front or rear seat backrests and fasten them as securely as possi ble e The heaviest portion of the cargo should always be kept as low as possi ble against f
247. eat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and the belt is properly positioned on the body Warning A N Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available Make sure everyone riding in the vehicle is cor rectly restrained with a separate seat belt Never use a seat belt for more than one per son at a time Warning A N Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked Only use seat belts which have been ap proved by Mercedes Benz Do not make any modifications to the seat belts This can lead to unintended activation of the ETDs or to failure Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection Have all work carried out only by qualified technicians Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Warning A N USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY Seat belts can only work when used properly Never wear seat belts in any other way than as described in this sec tion as that could result in serious inju ries in case of an accident Each occupant should wear their seat belt at all times because seat belts help reduce the likelihood of and potential severity of injuries in accidents includ ing rollovers The integrated restraint system includes SRS driver air bag pas senger front air b
248. eath you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying Mercedes Benz USA LLC If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or Mercedes Benz USA LLC To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9 153 go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov Introduction Vehicle data recording Y Vehicle data recording Information regarding electronic recording devices Including notice pursuant to California Code 9951 Please note that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems data and if equipped with the Tele Aid system may transmit some data in certain accidents This information helps for example to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to continuously improve vehicle safety DaimlerChrysler may access the information and share it with others for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee in response to an official request by law enforcem
249. eature which could result in an accident and or serious personal injury Move the selection marker with button or SH to the Comfort submenu Press button BeN or Red repeatedly until the message Easy entry feature appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Easy entry Feature Press button or E to switch the easy entry exit feature On or Off Setting fold in function for exterior rear view mirrors Using this function you can set the exterior rear view mirrors to be automati cally folded in when you lock your vehicle 0 With this function set to On and the exterior rear view mirrors folded in using the button on the door control panel gt page 214 the exterior rear view mirrors will not fold out when you switch on the ignition You will then have to fold out the exterior rear view mirrors using the button on the door control panel gt page 214 Make sure both exterior rear view mirrors are folded out completely before driving off gt Move the selection marker with button or MSH to the Comfort submenu gt Press button JA or ed repeatedly until the message Fold in mirrors when locking appears in the multi function display The selection marker is on the current setting Fold in mirrors when locking N OFF eT gt Press button or E to switch the function On or Off Controls in detail Distance warning function In veh
250. econds A call to a Mercedes Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher will be initiated The button will flash while the call is in progress The message Connecting call will appear in the multifunction display k n N A f P82 96 2545 31 Controls in detail Useful features When the connection is established the message Call connected appears in the multifunction display The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number model color and location subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals a While the call is connected you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAV button on the COMAND system headunit A voice connection between the Roadside Assistance dispatcher and the occupants of the vehicle will be established gt Describe the nature of the need for assistance Controls in detail Useful features The Mercedes Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified Mercedes Benz technician or arrange to tow your vehicle to the nearest Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center For services such as labor and or towing charges may apply Refer to the Roadside Assistance Manual for more information The following is only available in the USA e Sign and Drive services Services such as jump start a few gallons of fuel or the replacement of a flat tire with the vehicle spare tire are obtainable The indicator lamp on the Roadside A
251. ed Practical hints P54 10 2617 31 3 Battery cover mounting nuts gt Using a 6 mm T handle hex key not supplied with vehicle with a minimum shaft length of 12 in 30 cm unfasten and remove battery cover mounting nuts 3 located at the floor carpet per foration Move the front passenger seat to the most forward position gt page 45 b gt Practical hints Battery gt gt gt Switch off the ignition gt page 40 Step 3 Disconnecting Step 4 Disconnecting a If the vehicle battery is discharged and you had the vehicle jump started turn off the engine gt Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch Vehicles with KEYLESS GO gt Make sure the vehicle s on board electronics have status 0 After turning off the engine with the oa i KEYLESS GO start stop button 4 Seat rail rear 6 Floor carpet with the ara door sian the Seat rail cover rear gt Pull back and fold floor carpet in a i POSION 4 h Pull seat rail cover away from seat direction of the arrow pee ee ee ree me rail on both sides as indicated by starter switch is set to position 0 To release the floor carpet perforations see arrows bo l l l same as SmartKey removed from dotted line in above illustration you will have to starter switch gt page 41 gt Pull off seat rail cover 6 to the rearas apply somewhat greater force when pulling the indicated by arrow floor carpet back
252. ed position gt page 139 The third row seat head restraints are installed in the same manner Controls in detail Seats Armrests The second row seat armrests can be folded up when loading for example and adjusted Folding up gt Move the armrest into a vertical posi tion until it engages Adjusting gt With the armrest folded up disengage the armrest by pushing it towards the rear slightly gt Fold the armrest down to the lowest and then to the desired position until it engages gt To readjust the armrest to a higher position move armrest up to the desired position until it engages a To readjust the armrest to a lower position you must first fold up the armrest again and re peat the steps above Controls in detail Seats Seat heating The red indicator lamps in the switch come on to show which heating level you have selected The switches for front seat heating are lo cated in the center console i Level 3 Three indicator lamps on highest level The seat heating automatically switches to level 2 after approxi mately 5 minutes 1 Seat heating switch second row seats 2 Indicator lamps 2 Two indicator lamps on The seat heating automatically switches to level 1 after approxi mately 10 minutes Seat heating switch front seats 2 Indicator lamps 1 One indicator lamp on The switches for the second row seats are lowest level loc
253. ed off as possible The ABS may still be operational Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident In addition the yellow ESP warning gt Continue driving with added caution lamp CAM MER CM gt Have the system checked at an authorized The ESP or the ESP display is Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon malfunctioning as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident In addition the yellow ESP warning gt Continue driving with added caution lamp comes CM gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light The ESP is deactivated because of Truck Center as soon as possible a malfunction or interrupted power i l p p Failure to follow these instructions increases supply the risk of an accident Practical hints What to do if Display message ESP unavailable See Operator s Manual Possible cause consequence The ESP was deactivated because of insufficient power supply The charging voltage has fallen below 10 volts The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ESP available If the yellow ESP warning lamp flashes while driving and this message appears the electron ic traction system has switched off to prevent overheating of the drive wheel brakes The self diagnosis has not been completed yet Possible solution When the voltage is above this value again the ESP is operational again and t
254. ed rating Part of tire designation indicates the speed range for which a tire is approved Traction Force exerted by the vehicle on the road via the tires The amount of grip provided Tread The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road Operation Tires and wheels Treadwear indicators Narrow bands sometimes called wear bars that show across the tread of a tire when only in 1 6 mm of tread remains TWR Tongue Weight Rating Maximum permissible weight on trailer tongue Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire s traction temperature and treadwear Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire Vehicle maximum load on the tire Load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing it by two Operation Tires and wheels Rotating tires A Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires are of the same dimension Warning If your vehicle is equipped with mixed size tires different tire dimensions front vs rear tire rotation is not possible Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles with tires of the same dimension all around If your vehicle is equipped with tires of the same dimension all around tires can be rotate
255. eed Warning Decelerate the vehicle set speed to a value that the prevailing road conditions permit Otherwise sudden and unexpected deceler ation of the vehicle could cause an accident and or serious injury to you and others The set speed value is decreased in 5 mph Canada 10 km h increments each time you press the cruise control lever down past the resistance point gt Briefly press the cruise control lever down past the resistance point in direction of arrow 2 gt Release the cruise control lever The vehicle set speed decreases in increments of 5 mph Canada 10 km h i The new speed is set and the vehicle will decelerate Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has reached the set speed Controls in detail Setting to last stored speed Resume function A The set speed stored in memory should only be set again if prevailing road conditions permit Possible acceleration or decelera tion differences arising from returning to the preset speed could cause an accident and or serious injury to you and others Warning gt Briefly pull the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 4 gt page 267 The cruise control resumes to the last set speed or if no speed is stored it will set and store the current speed gt Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The last set speed appears in the multi function display for approximately 5 seconds D
256. eeeees 137 Outside temperature indicator 158 Anti theft SySteMS ccccccceeeeseeees 107 Seat heating ec eeseeseeeceeeeees 142 MMO DIZE ceccessnecennchesewsbasvasaeaceocs 107 Seat ventilation eseese 143 Anti theft alarm system 107 CORTONSY SEI i icnteniceutvactensuatenteceeanes 159 Multifunction display 006 159 Multifunction steering wheel 160 Menu senpase toumaceninnss 162 Standard display menu 166 AMG MENU miror 168 AUDIO MENU sinaninai a 171 Navit MeNi sensnnrenni 173 AIRMATIC Compass menu 174 Distronic MENU cccsssseceeees 174 Vehicle status message memory MENU ssessessesserserserseris 174 Settings MenU ssssesssserssserssseees 176 Distance warning function 191 Trip computer MeNU cceeee 191 TELTE arenes 193 Automatic tranSMiSSION ccceeeeee 197 Gear selector lever 000006 197 Shifting procedure 00c000 200 Transmission positions 55 201 DriviNe LIDS ra A 203 Gear ranges sseesssesssserssseresseees 205 Automatic shift program 206 Steering wheel gearshift control 207 3 zone automatic climate control 232 Manual shift program ROS AMG ONIY hoien nten 209 Emergency operation Limp Home Mode 00ccceees 211 Good visibility Siete cone x cnen nee 212 Headlamp cleaning system 212 Rear view
257. efore lowering the gt Lower vehicle by turning crank coun to position O and fuel economy and are more likely to fail l aoe l terclockwise until vehicle is resting ful gt Vehicles with KEYLESS GO eh els CMTE ly on its own weight Press the KEYLESS GO start stop button twice without depressing gt Detach the electric air pump gt Remove the jack ine PEGE eae Store the electrical plug and the air gt If the tire inflation pressure is above hose behind the flap and place the the recommended tire inflation pres electric air pump back in the vehicle sure given in this Operator s Manual tool kit storage well release excess tire inflation pressure using the vent screw P40 10 3698 31 1 G Wheel bolts Practical hints Flat tire P40 10 4108 31 6 Wheel wrench gt Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly fol lowing the diagonal sequence illustrat ed 1 to 5 until all bolts are tight Observe a tightening torque of 110 lb ft 150 Nm Warning UK Have the tightening torque checked after changing a wheel The wheels could come loose if they are not tightened to a torque of 110 lb ft 150 Nm gt Store jack and all other vehicle tool kit items back into the storage well The removed road wheel cannot be stored in the spare wheel well under the cargo compart ment floor but should be transported in the cargo compartment wrapped in a protective wrap Vehicles with TPMS or Adv
258. efore setting the vehicle in mo tion All steering wheel adjustments must be completed before setting the vehicle in mo tion Driving off with the steering wheel still adjusting could cause the driver to lose con trol of the vehicle Warning Easy entry exit feature for third row seats This feature allows for easier access to and exit from the vehicle s third row seats AN Warning To help avoid personal injury the sec ond row seat backrests must be properly locked either in the upright position or when using the expanded cargo compart ment in the fully folded position while the vehicle is in motion Seats Easy entry feature for third row seats The releases for the easy entry feature are located on the entry side and the back of each second row seat yez 1 Easy entry lever gt Pull and hold easy entry lever 1 in di rection of arrow at resistance point The seat backrest folds forward gt D Controls in detail Seats gt gt gt Push the seat forward as far as it will go You should now have sufficient space to access the vehicle s third row seat Easy entry exit position gt Enter the vehicle For information on how to fold down the second row seats completely see Folding second row seats gt page 303 Easy exit feature for third row seats The easy exit strap is located on the rear of the second row seat base h P91 12 2821 31 1 Easy ex
259. efully Insert the bulb socket into the housing gt Turn the bulb socket clockwise until it engages License plate lamps 1 License plate lamp cover 2 Screw gt Loosen screws 2 gt gt gt gt Remove license plate lamp cover Q Replace the license plate lamp bulb Reinstall license plate lamp cover 1 Retighten screws 2 Practical hints Replacing bulbs Practical hints Replacing wiper blades Warning A N For safety reasons switch off wipers and remove the SmartKey from starter switch vehicles with KEYLESS GO Make sure the vehicle s on board electronics have status 0 before replacing a wiper blade Otherwise the motor could suddenly turn on and cause injury A Wiper blades are components that are sub ject to wear and tear Change the wiper blades twice a year preferably in the spring and fall Otherwise the windows will not be properly wiped As a result you may not be able to observe surrounding traffic condi tions and could cause an accident Warning Front wiper blades T Never open the hood when the wiper arms are folded forward Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back If released the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield Do not allow the wiper arms to contact the wind Shield glass without a wiper blade inserted Make sure the wiper blades are properly in stalled Improperly installed wipe
260. ehicle if you turn the steering wheel in one direction and then again in the other direction shortly thereafter amp The corner illuminating front fog lamps will come on automatically depending on the steer ing angle even if you did not switch on either turn signal If the corner illuminating front fog lamps came on automatically they will also go out automatically depending on the steering angle Controls in detail Lighting Switching off corner illuminating front fog lamps The combination switch for the turn signal resets automatically after major steering wheel movements This will switch off the corner illuminating front fog lamps if they were activated by switching on the left or right turn signal If the turn signal should stay on after making the turn the turn signal and corner illuminating front fog lamps can be switched off by returning the combination switch to its original position i There may be a brief delay before the corner illuminating front fog lamps switch off Driving rearward Switching on corner illuminating front fog lamps gt Shift the automatic transmission to reverse gear R gt page 199 The corner illuminating front fog lamp opposite to your steering direction comes on Switching off corner illuminating front fog lamps gt Shift the automatic transmission to a gear other than reverse gear R gt page 197 The respective front fog lamp goes out Hazard warning f
261. eld is dry Dust that accumulates on a windshield might scratch the glass and or damage the wiper blades when wiping occurs on a dry windshield If it is necessary to operate the windshield wipers in dry weather conditions always operate the windshield wipers with windshield washer fluid page 62 T If anything blocks the windshield wipers leaves snow etc switch them off immediate ly e For safety reasons stop the vehicle in a safe location and e remove the SmartKey from the starter switch or e turn off the engine by pressing the KEYLESS GO start stop button and open the driver s door with the driver s door open starter switch is in position 0 same as with SmartKey removed from starter switch before attempting to remove any blockage e Remove blockage e Turn the windshield wipers on again If the windshield wipers fail to function at all in combination switch position RE or EE e set the combination switch to the next higher wiper speed e have the windshield wipers checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Switching on windshield wipers gt Turn the combination switch to the desired position depending on the in tensity of the rain Windshield wipers off Slow intermittent wiping Rain sensor operation with low sensitivity Fast intermittent wiping Rain sensor operation with high sensitivity Slow continuous wiping Fast continuous wiping Intermitte
262. ell that the active head restraints have been activated when they have been moved forward and cannot be adjusted 0 For your convenience we recommend that you have this work carried out by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center You will find the reset tool for manually operating the active head restraints in the Mercedes Benz vehicle literature pouch Warning A N When pushing back the head restraint cushion take care that your fingers do not become caught between the head restraint cushion and the cover Failing to do so may lead to injury Warning VAN For safety reasons have the active head restraints checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center after a rear end collision T Be careful not to damage upholstery 1 Reset tool 2 Active head restraint gt Take the reset tool 1 out of the Mercedes Benz vehicle literature pouch P91 16 2423 3 gt Guide reset tool Q into the rect angular opening of active head restraint 2 gt Press reset tool Q downward in direction of arrow until you hear the head restraint release mechanism audibly disengage Pull out reset tool Q Firmly press the active head restraint cushion backward towards the head re straint cover in direction of arrow until it engages gt Repeat this procedure on the active head restraint for the second front seat gt After resetting the active head restraints store reset tool Q in the Mer
263. elt are fastened If the driver s or the front passenger s seat belt remains unfastened after 60 seconds the the warning chime stops sounding and the seat belt telltale stops flashing but continues to be illuminated The seat belt telltale will only go out if both the driver s and the front passen ger s seat belt with the front passenger seat occupied are fastened or the vehicle is standing still and a front door is opened For more information see Practical hints gt page 426 Emergency tensioning device ETD seat belt force limiter The seat belts for the front and rear seats are equipped with emergency tensioning devices and belt force limiters The ETD is designed to activate in the following cases e in frontal or rear end impacts exceeding the system deployment threshold e in certain vehicle rollovers e ifthe restraint systems are operational and functioning correctly see E9 indicator lamp gt page 430 i The ETDs for the front seats will only acti vate if the respective front seat belt is fastened latch plate properly inserted into buckle The ETDs for the rear seats will activate with or without the respective seat belt fastened In an impact emergency tensioning devices remove slack from the belts in such a way that the seat belts fit more snugly against the body Belt force limiters when activated are employed to help reduce the peak force exerted by the seat belts on o
264. en side ger side Directs air to the windshield and side air vents Directs air through the center side and rear passen ger compartment air vents Directs air to the footwells and side air vents gt Press the desired air distribution button gt page 234 The indicator lamp on the desired button comes on Adjusting the air distribution for the center and side air vents Opening the center air vents gt Turn thumbwheels and gt page 232 upward The corresponding center air vents on the left and right are open Closing the center air vents gt Turn thumbwheels and gt page 232 downward The corresponding center air vents on the left and right are closed Opening the side air vents gt Turn thumbwheels 2 and gt page 232 upward The corresponding side air vents on the left and right are open Closing the side air vents gt Turn thumbwheels 2 and gt page 232 downward The corresponding side air vents on the left and right are closed Adjusting air volume fi Five blower speeds are available gt Press button to decrease or button to increase air volume gt page 234 to the desired level The indicator lamp on button Big goes out The AUTO display disappears in the display 4 gt page 234 and the automatic mode is switched off The selected blower speed appears in the display 4 gt page 234 Controls in detail
265. ent or other government agency for use in dispute resolution involving DaimlerChrysler its affiliates or sales service organization and or as otherwise required or permitted by law Please check the Tele Aid subscription service agreement for details regarding the information that may be recorded or transmitted via that system At a glance Exterior view Cockpit Instrument cluster Multifunction steering wheel Center console Overhead control panel Storage compartments Door control panel a glance a Exterior view POO 00 3927 31 Item Tailgate Opening Closing Power tailgate Cargo compartment Vehicle tool kit Spare wheel Rear window defroster Rear lamps Fuel filler flap Refueling Fuel Exterior rear view mirrors Adjusting Auto dimming rear view mirrors Power folding Page 123 125 123 125 472 475 217 485 360 360 361 542 49 213 214 At a glance Item Towing eye bolt Vehicle tool kit Installing Tires and wheels Checking tire inflation pressure Run Flat Indicator Canada vehicles Tire Pressure Monitoring System U S vehicles Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring System Canada vehicles Flat tire Spare wheel Hood Engine oll Coolant Page 472 9 17 373 932 382 383 385 388 497 475 364 366 370 Exterior view Item Page Windshield wipers 60 Wiper blades replacing 494 Wiper bla
266. er Vehicles with or without tilt sliding sun roof The closing of the windows can be im mediately halted by pressing or pulling the respective window switch The closing of the tilt sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by moving the switch for the tilt sliding sunroof in any direction The closing of the windows and the tilt sliding sunroof can be reversed by again pressing and holding the button Controls in detail Vehicles with panorama roof The closing of the windows and tilt sliding panel can be immediately halted by releasing the button a A window the tilt sliding sunroof or the tilt sliding panel will only return to its previous position if it has not been moved to another position using the respective window switch or tilt sliding sunroof or tilt sliding panel switch after it was closed with button eq Vehicles with tilt sliding sunroof Convenience closing gt Press button for approximately 2 seconds The windows and or tilt sliding sun roof will close You can release button once the closing proce dure has begun The windows and tilt sliding sunroof continue closing until they are fully closed The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air recirculation mode is activated Climate control Convenience opening gt Press button for approximately 2 seconds The windows and or tilt sliding sun roof will return to their previous posi tions You can release button o
267. er are required for satellite radio opera tion Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center for details and availability for your vehicle For more information refer to separate COMAND system operating instructions Operating the CD player Selecting CD track gt Turn on the COMAND system and select CD Refer to separate COMAND system operating instructions gt Press button or repeatedly until the settings for the CD currently being played appear in the multifunc tion display Track I 1 Current CD for CD changer 2 Current track gt Press button BVA or FAM repeatedly until the desired track is selected i Vehicles with CD changer To select a CD from the magazine press a number on the COMAND system key pad located in the center console Selecting MP3 CD track gt Turn onthe COMAND system and select MP3 Refer to separate CO MAND system operating instructions gt Press button or repeatedly until the settings for the MP3 CD cur rently being played appear in the multi function display Smalltouwn C MP3 mode 2 Current track gt Press button BV or EAN repeatedly until the desired track is selected Navi menu The Nav menu contains the functions needed to operate your navigation system gt Press button or repeatedly until the message Navi appears in the multifunction display The message shown in the multifunction display depends on
268. er as soon as possible Adjusting instrument cluster illumination Use button Q or to adjust the illumina tion brightness for the instrument cluster d The instrument cluster illumination is dimmed or brightened automatically to suit ambient light conditions The instrument cluster illumination will also be adjusted automatically when you switch on the vehicle s exterior lamps To brighten illumination gt Press and hold button until the desired level of illumination is reached To dim illumination gt Press and hold button Q until the desired level of illumination is reached Resetting the trip odometer Make sure you are viewing the trip odome ter display gt page 159 gt If itis not displayed press button or on the multifunction steering wheel gt page 160 repeatedly until the trip odometer appears in the multi function display gt Press and hold reset button 2 gt page 156 until the trip odometer is reset Controls in detail Instrument cluster Tachometer The red marking on the tachometer gt page 26 denotes excessive engine speed T Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds as it may result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty To help protect the engine the fuel supply is interrupted if the engine is operated within the red marking Controls in detail Instrument cluster Outside temperature ind
269. er strap or lower anchors and top tether strap fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer s instruc tions Children can be killed or seriously injured by an inflating air bag Note the following im portant information when circumstances re quire you to place a child in the front passenger seat e Your vehicle is equipped with air bag technology designed to turn off the front passenger front air bag in your vehicle when the system senses the weight of a typical 12 month old child or less along with the weight of a standard appropri ate child restraint on the front passen ger seat e Achild ina rear facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be serious ly injured or even killed if the front pas senger front air bag inflates in a collision which could occur under some circum stances even with the air bag technolo gy installed in your vehicle The only means to completely eliminate this risk is to never place a child in a rear facing child restraint in the front seat We therefore strongly recommend that you always place a child in a rear facing child restraint in the back seat If you must install a rear facing child restraint on the front passenger seat because circumstances require you to do so make sure that the indicator lamp is illumi nated indicating that the front passen ger front air bag is deactivated Should the indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while the restraint is installed
270. er the seat belt in a collision If you slide under it the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck That could cause serious or even fatal injuries The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and the belt is properly positioned on the body Warning A N Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available Make sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time Warning A N Read and observe the additional warning no tices printed in the Safety and Security section gt page 76 and gt page 79 1 Seat belt outlet 2 Latch plate 3 Buckle 4 Release button gt With a smooth motion pull the belt out of seat belt outlet Q gt Place the shoulder portion of the seat belt across the top of your shoulder and the lap portion across your hips gt Push latch plate 2 into buckle gt page 52 until it clicks gt If necessary tighten the lap portion of the seat belt to a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion up Seat belt height adjustment P91 40 2532 31 1 Release button Getting started gt Press release button 1 and move the seat belt height adjuster upward or downward Proper use of seat belts Do not twist the seat belt when fasten ing Adjust seat belt so that the
271. erior lamp 153 Tele Aid emergency call 832 system button 9 Vehicles without 330 telephone installed Hands free microphone for TeleAid emergency call P s 00 4447 31 system At a glance Storage compartments P68 00 4442 31 OO O Ge Q Item Parcel net in front passenger footwell Glove box CD changer Door pocket Parcel net on front passenger seat backrest Door pocket Cup holder Third row storage compartment Parcel net in cargo compartment First aid kit vehicle tool kit spare wheel Third row storage compartment Cup holder Page 2115 311 315 316 311 315 472 311 316 OS O At a glance Item Door pocket Parcel net on driver s seat backrest Door pocket Storage compartment in center console Storage compartment in center console Ashtray Cupholders Front armrest storage compartments Cup holders Rear armrest storage compartment Cup holders Rear storage compartments Rear seat ashtray Page 315 311 311 319 316 311 316 311 316 311 319 Storage compartments At a glance Door control panel Oo We Item Inside door handle Central locking unlocking switch Exterior rear view mirror adjustment Selection buttons for exterior rear view mirror adjustment Power folding exterior rear view mirrors Switches for opening closing front
272. ers such as blocked visibility exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior a To prevent an inadvertent lockout do not place the SmartKey in the cargo compartment Vehicles with KEYLESS GO To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout the tailgate will open automatically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is recognized inside the vehicle Ifthe vehicle was previously centrally locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS GO the tailgate will lock automatically after closing it The turn signals flash three times to confirm locking Controls in detail Closing the tailgate from the outside vehicles without KEYLESS GO In vehicles with power tailgate you can close the tailgate from the outside using the tailgate closing switch or the button on the SmartKey 1 Tailgate closing switch gt Press tailgate closing switch Q briefly The tailgate closes and an acoustic warning sounds a You can also close the tailgate manually gt page 126 Locking and unlocking If the tailgate comes into contact with an object while closing e g luggage that has been piled too high the closing procedure is stopped and the tailgate reopens A Monitor the closing procedure carefully to make sure no one is in danger of being in jured To prevent possible personal injury always keep hands and fingers away from the cargo compartment opening when clos ing the tailgate Be especially careful when small children are around T
273. es the mes sage Compass appears in the multifunction display Controls in detail Floormats A Whenever you are using floormats make sure there is enough clearance and that the floormats are securely fastened Warning Floormats should always be securely fas tened using eyelets 2 and retainer pins Q Before driving off check that the floormats are securely in place and adjust them if nec essary A loose floormat could slip and hinder proper function of the pedals Do not place several floormats on top of each other as this may impair pedal move ment ae To install or remove the floormats more easily move the driver s seat or front passenger seat as far to the rear as possible gt page 45 Useful features 1 Retainer pin 2 Eyelet Removing gt Pull floormat off of retainer pins Q gt Remove the floormat Installing gt Lay down the floormat inthe respective footwell gt Press floormat eyelets 2 onto retainer pins Controls in detail Useful features Infrared reflecting windshield T Hamer 1 Infrared transparent areas Your vehicle is equipped with infrared reflecting glass which reduces the amount of radiated heat entering the vehicle interior through the windows The infrared reflecting glass also prevents the transmission of signals through the glass by in vehicle electronic devices e g electronic toll collection device
274. es approved by Mercedes Benz are developed to provide best possible performance in conjunction with the driving safety systems on your vehicle such as ABS or ESP Tires specially developed for your vehicle and tested and approved by Mercedes Benz can be identified by finding the following on the tire s sidewall e MO Mercedes Benz Original equipment tires AMG vehicles Does not apply to all approved tires on AMG vehicles For information on tested and approved tires for AMG vehicles contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Using tires other than those approved by Mercedes Benz may result in damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty T Using tires other than those approved by Mercedes Benz can have detrimental effects such as e poor handling characteristics e increased noise e increased fuel consumption Moreover tires and rims not approved by Mercedes Benz may under load exhibit dimen sional variations and different tire deformation characteristics that could cause them to come into contact with the vehicle body or axle parts Damage to the tires or the vehicle may be the result i Further information on tires and rims is available at any authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center A placard with the recommended tire inflation pressures is located on the driver s door B pillar gt page 376 Some vehicles may have supplemental tire inflation pressure infor mation for driving
275. ess close gt To fully open or close the tilt sliding sunroof move the sunroof switch past the resistance point in the required direction C or gt page 259 and release The tilt sliding sunroof opens or closes completely Stopping the power tilt sliding sunroof during Express open gt Move the sunroof switch in any direction The movement of the tilt sliding sunroof stops ap Ifthe movement of the tilt sliding sunroof is blocked during the closing procedure the tilt sliding sunroof will stop and reopen slightly Controls in detail Power tilt sliding sunroof A If the tilt sliding sunroof encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circum stance where you are closing the tilt sliding sunroof by moving the tilt sliding sunroof switch past the resistance point or by pressing and holding button on the SmartKey by pressing and holding the lock button vehicles with KEYLESS GO on the door handle the automatic reversal function will not operate Warning The opening closing procedure of the tilt sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or if the switch was moved past the resistance point and released by moving the switch in any direction Synchronizing The tilt sliding sunroof must be synchronized after the battery has been disconnected or discharged after the tilt sliding sunroof has been closed manually gt page 48 1 after a malfunction
276. essage Top up coolant See Oper Manual Warning A N Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts You could be seriously burned Practical hints What to do if Possible cause consequence Possible solution The coolant level is too low gt Add coolant gt page 370 gt If you have to add coolant frequently have the cooling system checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center BE Do not ignore the low engine coolant level warning Extended driving with the message and symbol displayed may cause serious engine damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Do not drive without sufficient amount of coolant in the cooling system The engine will overheat causing major engine damage Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Possible cause consequence Possible solution B 4 Check eng oi level The engine oil level is too low at next refueling USA only The engine oil level is too low gt Add 1 qt engine oil at next refueling Canada only Add 1 liter engine at next refueling Engine oil level Cannot be measured When the message Add 1 qt engine oil when next refueling Canada 1 liter appears while the engine is running and at operating temperature the engine oil level has dropped to approximately the mini mum level When th
277. essage will appear in the multifunction display Run Flat Indicator restarted After a certain learning phase the Run Flat Indicator checks the set pressure values for all four tires If you wish to cancel activation gt Press button EEJ or gt Wait until the message Restart Run Flat Indicator disappears Checking tire pressure electronically with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS USA only The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS is equipped with a combination low tire pressure TPMS malfunction telltale in the instrument cluster gt page 26 Depending on how the telltale illuminates it indicates a low tire pressure condition or a malfunction in the TPMS system itself e fthe telltale illuminates continuously one or more of your tires is significantly under in flated There is no malfunction in the TPMS e 6 f the telltale flashes for 60 seconds and then stays illuminated the TPMS system itself is not operating properly Operation Tires and wheels The TPMS only functions on wheels that are equipped with the proper electronic sensors It monitors the tire inflation pres sure as selected by the driver in all four tires A warning is issued to alert you to a decrease in pressure in one or more of the tires A The TPMS does not indicate a warning for wrongly selected inflation pressures Always adjust tire inflation pressure according to the placard on the driver s door
278. et injured Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes skin or clothing In case it does immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary A battery will also produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and very explosive Keep flames or sparks away from battery avoid improper connection of jumper cables smoking etc Attempting to jump start a frozen battery can result in it exploding causing personal injury Read all instructions before proceeding If the battery is discharged the engine can be started with jumper cables and the bat tery of another vehicle Observe the follow ing e Jump starting should only be performed using the jump start contacts in the en gine compartment gt page 515 e Jump starting should only be performed when the engine and catalytic converter are cold e Do not start the engine if the battery is frozen Let the battery thaw out first e Only jump start from batteries with the same voltage rating 12V Jump start ing with a more powerful battery could damage the vehicle s electrical system which will not be covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty e Use only jumper cables with sufficient cross section and insulated terminal clamps Vehicles with gasoline engine only e Always make sure the jumper cables are not on or near pulleys fans or other parts that move when the engine is
279. ey have occurred For malfunctions and warning messages see Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display gt page 433 After you have scrolled through all recorded status messages the first recorded message appears again Controls in detail Control system Should the vehicle s system record any conditions while driving the number of messages will reappear in the multifunc tion display e when the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position O or removed from the starter switch Or e when you turn off the engine by pressing the KEYLESS GO start stop button gt page 67 in the starter switch once and open the driver s door this puts the starter switch in position 0 same as with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch The vehicle status message memory will be cleared when you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 2 or when you press the KEYLESS GO start stop button once or twice without depressing the brake pedal You will then only see high priority messages in the multifunction display gt page 433 Controls in detail Control system Settings menu The following settings and submenus are Resetting all settings available in the Settings menu In the Settings menu there are two You can reset the functions of all unctione Function Page submenus to the factory settings e The function Reset to factory Resetting all settings 176 gt Press
280. f applicable should never exceed the weight referenced in that statement Tires and wheels Seating capacity The seating capacity gives you important information on the number of occupants that can be in the vehicle Observe front and rear seating capacity The placard showing the seating capacity is located on the driver s door B pillar gt page 376 Data shown on placard example are for illustration purposes only Load limit data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the following illustration Refer to placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle ING INFORMATION TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 TIRE SIZE COLD TIRE PRESSURE OEA sones C vua ror A ooo Omme oo P40 00 2063 31 1 Seating capacity Operation Tires and wheels Steps for determining correct load limit The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49 Code of U S Federal Regulations Part 575 pursuant to the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966 Step 1 gt Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on your vehicle s placard Step 2 gt Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle Step 3 gt Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX Ibs Step 4
281. f arrow P91 1 and push down on head restraint Q P Q restraint ment locked may cause an unexpected gt While seated reach behind you with steering wheel movement which could both hands and find lower edge of the cause the driver to lose control of the head restraint vehicle Make sure the steering wheel is securely locked by trying to move it up and gt Adjust the head restraint to the desired down and in and out before driving off position by pushing or pulling on the lower edge of the head restraint cushion For more information see Seats gt page 132 Make sure that e you can reach the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent at the elbows e you can move your legs freely e all displays including malfunction and indicator lamps on the instrument cluster are clearly visible The steering wheel adjustment release handle is located on the lower left of the steering column yp 1 Release handle S P46 15 2241 31 Getting started To unlock the steering wheel pull release handle 4 out to its stop limit Move steering wheel to the desired position Push release handle Q back to its original position to relock the steering wheel The steering wheel is locked into posi tion again Make sure the steering wheel is securely locked by trying to move it up and down as well as in and out before driving off Adjusting Steering wheel adjustment electrical Warn
282. f the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in mountainous terrain Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Gasoline additives gasoline engine E F A major concern among engine manufac turers is carbon build up caused by gaso line Mercedes Benz recommends only the use of quality gasoline containing additives that prevent the build up of carbon depos its After an extended period of using fuels without such additives carbon deposits can build up especially on the intake valves and in the combustion area leading to engine performance problems such as e Warm up hesitation e Unstable idle e Knocking pinging e Misfire e Power loss In areas where carbon deposits may be encountered due to lack of availability of gasolines which contain these additives Mercedes Benz recommends the use of additives approved by us for use on Mercedes Benz vehicles Refer to Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet for a listing of approved product s Follow directions on product label Do not blend other specific fuel additives with fuel This only results in unnecessary costs and may be harmful to the engine operation Damage or malfunction resulting from poor fuel quality or from blending addition al fuel additives other than those tested and approved by us for use on Mercedes Benz vehicles listed in the Fac tory Approved Service Products pamphlet are not covered by the Mercedes Benz Lim
283. f there are any equipment details that are not shown or described in this Operator s Manual your authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center will be glad to inform you of correct care and operating proce dures The Operator s Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept with the vehicle Service and warranty information The Service and Warranty Information Booklet contains detailed information about the warranties covering your Mercedes Benz including e New Light Truck Limited Warranty e Emission System Warranty e Emission Performance Warranty e California Maine Massachusetts Ver mont Emission Control System Warran ty California Maine Massachusetts and Vermont only e State Warranty Enforcement Laws Lemon Laws Important notice for California retail buyers and lessees of Mercedes Benz automobiles Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease price if Mercedes Benz USA LLC and or its au thorized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or more substantial defects or mal functions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty after a reasonable number of repair attempts During the pe riod of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18000 miles approx 29000 km on the odometer of the vehicle whichever occurs first a reasonable number of repair at
284. ff As soon as the battery has sufficient voltage the rear window defroster switches back on auto matically Controls in detail Climate control OOR 8 S Glee ele Left side air vent adjustable Thumbwheel for air volume control for left side and door air vent Left center air vent adjustable Right center air vent adjustable Thumbwheel for air volume control for left center air vent Thumbwheel for air volume control for right center air vent Thumbwheel for air volume control for right side and door air vent Right side air vent adjustable Front passenger door air vent fixed Climate control panel Driver s door air vent fixed e For draft free ventilation move the sliders for center air vents and side air vents to the middle position Controls in detail Climate control Controls in detail Climate control Temperature control left Air distribution and air volume automatic manual Front defroster KJ Canada only Increasing air volume Air distribution directs air through the windshield and side air vents Rear climate control on off Air supply for rear passenger compartment on off USA only Canada only Temperature control right So We e AC cooling on off Residual heat ventilation Air distribution directs air through center and side air vents Air distribution directs air through the footwells and side air vents Air volume d
285. ff the engine and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch or when using KEYLESS GO before turning off the engine with the start stop button and opening the driver s door Controls in detail Automatic transmission T If you want the gear position to remain in neutral position N for example when the vehicle is pulled through a car wash e donotremove the SmartKey from the starter switch or when using KEYLESS GO e donot turn off the engine using the KEYLESS GO start stop button and open the driver s door Otherwise the transmission will shift to park position P and lock the wheels preventing the vehicle from being pulled through a car wash Effect Reverse gear Shift into reverse gear R only when the vehicle is stopped Neutral No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive axle When the brakes are released the vehicle can be moved freely pushed or towed To avoid damage to the trans mission never shift into neutral position N while driving If the ESP is deactivated or malfunctioning Shift into neutral position N only if the vehicle is in danger of skidding e g on icy roads Drive The transmission shifts automatically All forward gears are available T Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason in neutral position N can result in trans mission damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Warning A N Getting out of your vehi
286. fluid level displayed can result in an ac cident Have your brake system checked im mediately Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire You could be seriously burned Possible cause consequence Possible solution There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir i If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks gt Risk of accident Carefully stop the vehi cle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe to do so Apply the parking brake gt page 66 Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Do not add brake flu id This will not solve the problem Display symbol SE REST Display message Coolant level Stop car switch engine off Practical hints What to do if Possible cause consequence Possible solution The coolant is too hot gt Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe to do so Among other possible causes the cooling fan could be malfunctioning the poly V belt could be broken vy Turn off the engine vy Apply the parking brake gt page 66 Check the poly V belt If it is broken gt Do not continue to drive Otherwise the engine will overheat due to an inoperative wa
287. fted vehicle Always firmly set parking brake and block wheels before raising vehicle with jack Warning Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is raised Be certain that the jack is always vertical plumb line when in use especially on hills Always try to use the jack on level surface Make sure the jack arm is fully seated in the jack take up bracket Always lower the vehi cle onto sufficient capacity jackstands be fore working under the vehicle gt Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by blocking wheels with wheel chocks or other sizable objects One wheel chock is included with the vehicle tool kit gt page 473 When changing wheel on a level surface gt Place the wheel chock in front of and another sizable object behind the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the wheel being changed Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack on a level surface However should cir cumstances require you to do so on a hill place the wheel chock and another sizable object as follows gt Place the wheel chock and another sizable object on the downhill side blocking both wheels of the axle not being worked on P40 10 3696 31 1 Wheel wrench gt On wheel to be changed loosen but do not yet remove the wheel bolts approximately one full turn with wheel wrench The jack take up brackets are located directly behind the front wheel housings and in front of the rear wheel housings
288. fueling cccceessseccccesseeeeeeees Check regularly and before ENSING Oll nosssanansvarennseennereaseanwosonss Transmission fluid level Coolant level ccccecececeeeees Windshield rear window washer system and headlamp cleaning system s cccsseees Tires and wheels Important guidelines 00 Tire care and maintenance Direction of rotation 08 Loading the vehicle c 008 Recommended tire inflation Drosu Cx n2sececcessesmroananccanceouaonsaans Checking tire inflation pressure Tire WA DCA nas cqeduoreacedeceoeenssaess Load identification ccc08 DOT Tire Identification Number TIN ccceesecceeeseeees 396 Maximum tire load cccseeceeeeee 397 Maximum tire inflation pressure 398 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards U S vehicles 398 Tire ply material ccceeseeees 400 Tire and loading terminology 401 Rotating tires cceccccseesceeeeeeeees 404 Winter driving csccccsesccceseeecneeees 405 Winter tires ccccesesccsesseeceeeees 405 SNOW ChAiNS sswstycdismuncnwsersccsubcendnnde 406 Maintenance cccccssssccceseeecneeees 407 Maintenance service indicator MESSAge cross saasewaneadasewesncadeatudacests 407 Calling up the maintenance service indicator display 409 Resetting the maintenance ser
289. g ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driv er s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is com bined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately 1 minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the mal function exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of in compatible replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly i If a condition causing the TPMS to malfunc tion develops it may take up to 10 minutes for the system to signal a malfunction using the TPMS telltale flashing and illumination sequence The te
290. gainst your body could cause injuries Pregnant women should also use a lap shoulder belt The lap belt portion should be positioned as low as possible on the hips to avoid any possible pres sure on the abdomen Never place your feet on the instrument panel dashboard or on the seat Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat When using a seat belt to secure infant or toddler restraints or children in booster seats always follow the child seat manufacturer s instructions Safety and Security Occupant safety Enhanced seat belt reminder system When the engine Is started the seat belt telltale will always illuminate for 6 seconds to remind you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts If the drivers seat belt is not fastened when the engine Is started an additional warning chime will also sound for a maxi mum of 6 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is fastened If after these 6 seconds the driver s or the front passenger s seat belt with the front passenger seat occupied are not fastened with all doors closed e the seat belt telltale remains illu minated for as long as either the driv er s or front passenger s Seat belt is not fastened e and if the vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph 25 km h the seat belt telltale starts flashing and a warning chime sounds with increasing intensity for a maximum of 60 seconds or until the driver s and the front passenger s seat b
291. garage door opener Operator s Manual Controls in detail Useful features gt gt Step 9 gt Press the training button on the garage door opener motor head unit The training light is activated You have 30 seconds to initiate the following step Step 10 gt Return to the vehicle and firmly press hold for 2 seconds and release the programmed signal transmitter button or Step 11 gt Press hold for 2 seconds and release same signal transmitter button a second time to complete the training process i Some garage door openers or other rolling code equipped devices may require you to press hold for 2 seconds and release the same signal transmitter button a third time to com plete the training process Step 12 gt Confirm the garage door operation by pressing the programmed signal trans mitter button or Step 13 gt To program the remaining two signal transmitter buttons repeat the steps above starting with step 3 Gate operator Canadian programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for the integrated signal transmitter to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner If you live in Canada or if you are having difficulties p
292. ge 121 Limiting opening height of tailgate Vehicles with power tailgate The tailgate opening height can be limited when transporting goods on a roof rack e g presence of an MB sport luggage con tainer When activated the tailgate opens to approximately 6 4 ft 1 95 m gt Activate the limiting opening height of tailgate using the control system gt page 189 Controls in detail Closing the tailgate Closing the tailgate from the inside electrically In vehicles with power tailgate you can close the tailgate from the inside using the remote tailgate switch gt Press remote tailgate switch Q gt page 124 until tailgate begins to close The tailgate closes The indicator lamp in the remote tailgate switch goes out While the tailgate is closing an acoustic signal sounds To interrupt the closing procedure gt Press or pull remote tailgate switch gt page 124 Locking and unlocking Warning VAN Maintain sight of the area around the rear of the vehicle while operating the tailgate with the door mounted switch Monitor the closing procedure carefully to make sure no one is in danger of being injured To interrupt the closing procedure press or pull the door mounted remote tailgate switch Even with the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO removed from the vehicle the remote tailgate switch can be operate
293. gt page 277 Turns and bends P54 70 2205 31 In turns or bends Distronic may not detect a moving vehicle in front or it may detect one too soon This may cause your vehicle to brake late or unexpectedly Controls in detail Driving systems Offset driving P54 70 2206 31 A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset from your direct line of travel may not be detected by Distronic There will be insuffi cient distance to the vehicle ahead Controls in detail Driving systems Lane changing P54 70 2207 31 Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes There will be insufficient distance to the lane changing vehicle Narrow vehicles ll meth P54 70 2208 3 1 Because of their narrow profile the vehi cles traveling near the outer edges of the lane have not yet been detected by Distronic There will be insufficient distance to the vehicles ahead Distance warning function When Distronic is deactivated this function will continue to warn you when recognizing a stationary obstacle or a slower vehicle moving in your vehicle s path and the danger of a collision exists e The distance warning lamp in the instrument cluster comes on e An intermittent warning will sound if necessary If these warnings are issued you must brake manually to maintain a safe distance and avoid a collision with the preceding vehicle When pressing the brake pedal the warn
294. gt page 67 gt Open the driver s door this puts the starter switch in position O same as with the SmartKey re moved from the starter switch The driver s door then can be closed again gt Remove the KEYLESS GO start stop button from the starter switch i You can use the power outlets in the cargo compartment or in the second seat row to operate the electric air pump even when the ignition is switched off e g in order to inflate the collapsible tire gt page 501 An emergency shut off feature ensures that the vehicle s electrical voltage does not fall below a minimum level If the voltage drops to this mini mum level the power outlets are automatically switched off This ensures that enough power remains to start the engine Practical hints Flat tire Mounting the spare wheel Preparing the vehicle gt Prepare the vehicle as described gt page 497 Take the wheel wrench and the vehicle jack from the vehicle tool kit gt page 473 Take the spare wheel from the wheel well under the cargo compartment floor gt page 476 Lifting the vehicle A The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack take up brackets built into both sides of the vehicle To help avoid personal injury use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported by the jack Keep hands and feet away from the area under the li
295. h positions A When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Warning Getting started Unlocking SmartKey Starter switch 0 For removing SmartKey 1 Power supply for some electrical consumers such as seat adjustment 2 Ignition power supply for all electrical consumers and driving position All lamps except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated in the instru ment cluster come on If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to come on when the ignition is switched on have it checked and replaced if necessary If a lamp in the instrument cluster remains on after starting the engine or comes on while driving refer to Lamps in instrument cluster gt page 420 3 Starting position When you switch on the ignition the indicator and warning lamps except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indica tor lamps unless activated in the instrument cluster come on The indicator and warning lamps except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps if activated will go out when the engine is running This indicates that the respective systems are
296. h your entire phone book gt Press button or repeatedly until the message Te appears in the multifunction display gt Press button F The first number in the redial memory appears in the multifunction display gt Press button J or Re repeatedly until the desired name appears in the multifunction display gt Press button F The control system dials the selected phone number Vv Automatic transmission For information on driving with an automatic transmission see Automatic transmission gt page 54 Your vehicle s transmission adapts its gear shifting process to your individual driving style by continually adjusting the shift points up or down These shift point adjust ments are performed based on current operating and driving conditions If the operating conditions change the automatic transmission reacts by adjusting its shift program During the brief warm up transmission upshifting is delayed This allows the catalytic converter gasoline engine or the oxidation catalyst diesel engine to heat up more quickly to operating temperature Controls in detail Warning A N Make sure that absolutely no objects are obstructing the pedals range of movement Keep the driver s footwell clear of all obsta cles If there are any floormats or carpets in the footwell make sure that the pedals still have sufficient clearance During sudden driving or braking maneuvers the objects
297. he SmartKey alone will not automatically shift the transmission to P Only when the SmartKey is removed from the starter switch will the trans mission automatically shift to P Parking and locking Turning off with KEYLESS GO gt Press the KEYLESS GO start stop button gt page 41 to turn off the engine With the driver s door closed the starter switch is now in position 1 With the driver s door opened the starter switch is set to position 0 same as SmartKey removed from starter switch gt page 39 i You can turn off the engine while driving by pressing and holding the KEYLESS GO start stop button for approximately 3 seconds i If you turn off the engine using the KEYLESS GO start stop button and open the driver s door with the transmission in a position other than P the transmission will automatically shift to P Keep in mind that turning off the engine with the KEYLESS GO start stop button alone will not automatically shift the transmission to P Only when the driver s door is opened will the trans mission automatically shift to P Getting started Parking and locking Releasing seat belts gt Press the seat belt release button gt page 52 Allow the retractor to completely re wind the seat belt by guiding the latch plate i Make sure the seat belt retracts fully so that the seat belt and or latch plate cannot get caught or pinched in the door or in the seat mechanism This can da
298. he phone book at any time gt Press button or repeatedly until the message lel appears in the multifunction display gt Press button ENN or Re The control system reads the phone book which is stored in the telephone This may take several minutes The message Please wait appears in the multifunction display When the message Please wait disappears the phone book has been loaded Controls in detail gt Press button EAN or R repeatedly until the desired name appears in the multifunction display The stored names are displayed in ascending or descending alphabetical order C Name from the phone book f you press and hold A or KA for longer than 1 second the system scrolls rapidly through the list of names until you release the button again Cancel the quick search mode by pressing button Control system gt Press button gl The system dials the selected phone number e f the connection is successful and this feature is supported by your network provider the name of the party you are calling if stored in your phone book and the duration of the call will appear in the multi function display 00 02 54 Newman e If no connection is made the control system stores the dialed number in the redial memory Controls in detail Control system Redialing The control system stores the most recently dialed phone numbers This eliminates the need to search throug
299. he tailgate recessed handle again Stolen Vehicle Recovery services In the event your vehicle was stolen gt Report the incident to the police The police will issue a numbered incident report p gt Pass this number on to the Mercedes Benz Response Center along with your password issued to you when you subscribed to the service The Response Center will then attempt to covertly contact the vehicle s Tele Aid system Once the vehicle is located the Response Center will contact the local law enforcement and you The vehicle s location will only be provided to law enforcement When the anti theft alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds a call is initiated automatically to the Response Center For more information see Anti theft systems gt page 107 Controls in detail Garage door opener sss The integrated remote control is capable of operating up to three separately controlled devices It provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand held remote controls used to operate devices such as garage door openers gate openers or other devices compatible with HomeLink or some other systems Before the integrated remote control can be used it must be programmed to the garage door opener gate operator or other device you wish to operate See the follow ing instructions for programming informa tion Useful features P68 05 2124 31 Interior rear view mirror with integrated remote con
300. he Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty If the yellow ESP warning lamp comes on while driving the 4 ETS is being switched off temporarily to prevent overheating of the drive wheel brakes In addition the message ABS ESP unavailable See Operator s Manual appears in the multifunction display For more information see the Practical hints section gt page 420 and gt page 433 Y Anti theft systems Immobilizer The immobilizer prevents unauthorized persons from starting your vehicle Activating With the SmartKey gt Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch With KEYLESS GO gt Press the KEYLESS GO start stop button gt page 41 once The engine is turned off gt Open the driver s door Safety and Security Deactivating With the SmartKey gt Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 2 gt page 39 With KEYLESS GO gt Switch on the ignition gt page 39 Starting the engine will also deactivate the immobilizer In case the engine cannot be started yet the vehicle s battery is charged the system is not operational Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center or call 1 800 FOR MERCedes in the USA or 1 800 387 0100 in Canada Anti theft systems Anti theft alarm system Once the alarm system has been armed a visual and audible alarm is triggered when someone opens e a door e the tailgate e the hood The alarm will stay on e
301. he abdomen or neck That could cause serious or even fatal injuries Fore and aft adjustment second row seats only The handles for adjusting the seats are located on the front of each seat base gt Pull up handle in direction of arrow and hold it there Move seat to the desired position Release handle The seat must audibly engage A 9 12 2869 a44 Seat backrest tilt second row seats The handles for adjusting the seats are located on the rear of each seat base or T s Vi WANN WA ANY y 1 yA K 14 Adjustment handle gt While seated pull handle Q in direc tion of arrow to resistance point and hold it there gt To move seat backrest back lean light gt ly against backrest To move seat backrest forward lean forward with handle 4 pulled and held at resistance point The seat backrest will move forward against your back Release handle Q when the seat back rest has reached the desired position To make sure the seat backrest has engaged lean firmly against the back rest Controls in detail Seats Seat backrest tilt third row seats gt To move seat backrest forward lean The handles for adjusting the seats are forward with handle Q pulled located on the outer side of each seat The seat backrest will move forward backrest against your back gt Release handle G when the seat back rest h
302. he front passen ger seat Otherwise the Occupant Classification System OCS gt page 88 may not be able to properly approximate the occupant weight category Q Parcel net ly Parcel nets are intended for storing 1 Storage compartment light weight items only Parcel nets on front seat backrests Poy oa o _ Heavy objects objects with sharp edges or ee fragile objects may not be transported in the 3 zone automatic climate control the storage 6 J y P compartment is replaced by an adjustable air pabel NES Wit alt ecien eing Na vent gt page 249 braking or sudden maneuvers they could be thrown around inside the vehicle and cause injury to vehicle occupants i If your vehicle is equipped with a Parcel nets cannot protect transported goods in the event of an accident 1 Parcel net Controls in detail Useful features Parcel net in cargo compartment Cup holders Keep in mind that objects placed in a cup holder may come loose during braking AN vehicle maneuvers or an accident and be thrown around in the vehicle interior Objects thrown around in the vehicle in terior may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Warning In order to help prevent spilling liquids on vehicle occupants and or vehicle equip ment only use containers that fit into the cup holder Use lids on open containers and do not fill containers to a height where the Cup holders
303. he head lamp housing vy gt Pull the low beam bulb out of bulb socket gt Insert the new low beam bulb into bulb socket gt Insert bulb socket into the head lamp housing gt Turn bulb socket G clockwise until it engages gt Place cover 1 on the opening in the headlamp housing gt Turn cover Q clockwise until it engages Practical hints Replacing bulbs High beam headlamp bulbs gt Turn cover 1 counterclockwise v v Yy Remove cover 1 Turn bulb socket 4 counterclockwise Pull bulb socket out of the head lamp housing Pull the high beam bulb out of bulb socket 4 Insert the new high beam bulb into bulb socket 4 Insert bulb socket 4 into the head lamp housing Turn bulb socket clockwise until it engages Place cover 1 on the opening in the headlamp housing Turn cover Q clockwise until it engages Front turn signal lamp bulbs gt gt Bi Xenon headlamps Pull bulb socket 2 out of the head lamp housing Pull the turn signal bulb out of bulb socket 2 Insert the new turn signal bulb into bulb socket 2 Insert bulb socket 2 into the head lamp housing PBZ 10 3708 31 1 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp 2 Low beam high beam headlamp cover Do not remove 1e P82 10 3769 31 1 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp Low beam and high beam flasher spot bulbs Warning ZN Do not remove the
304. he indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while the restraint is installed please check installation Peri odically check the indi cator lamp while driving to make sure the lamp is illuminated If the indicator lamp goes out or remains out do not transport a child on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired A child in a rear facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front passenger front air bag inflates Safety and Security Occupant safety e If you have to place a child in a forward facing child restraint on the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible use the proper child restraint recommended for the age size and weight of the child and secure child restraint with the vehicle s seat belt according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions For children larger than the typical 12 month old child the front passenger front air bag may or may not be activated gt page 88 Warning A N Infants and small children should never share a seat belt with another occupant During an accident they could be crushed between the occupant and seat belt A child s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and or the child is not properly secured in the child restraint gt gt 87 b gt Safety and Security Occupant safety
305. he message in the multifunction display should disappear If the message in the multifunction display does disappear gt Have the generator alternator and the battery checked As soon as the brakes have cooled off the electronic traction system switches on again The message in the multifunction display disap pears and the ESP warning lamp goes out The display will clear after driving a short distance at a vehicle speed of above 12 mph 20 km h Display message P SIMs Hee Sh Cer Onp Ol aN to start engine Only shift to Park when vehicle 1s stationary Practical hints Possible cause consequence You have started the engine or switched on the ignition with KEYLESS GO and opened the driver s door with the automatic transmission not set to position P You have attempted to start the engine with the KEYLESS GO start stop button while the auto matic transmission was set to position R or D What to do if Possible solution gt Set the automatic transmission to position P or gt Close the drivers door Set the automatic transmission to position P or N Make sure the brake pedal is depressed when attempting to start the engine with the KEYLESS GO start stop button You have tried to shift the transmis gt Stop the vehicle sion into position P using the gear selector lever although the vehicle is still in motion Practical hints What to do if Display message
306. he side bolsters so that they provide good lateral support with switch 2 Controls in detail Seats Front seat active head restraints Rear seats Rear seat adjustment A For your protection drive only with properly positioned head restraints Warning Adjust the head restraint so that it is close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation You cannot remove the active head restraints on the driver s and front passen ger s seat For removal of the active head restraints we recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center For information on head restraint adjust ment see Seats gt page 43 For information on active head restraints see Active head restraints gt page 83 A According to accident statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seat ing position Thus we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats Re gardless of seating position children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant or toddler restraint or booster seat recom mended for the size and weight of the child For additional information see Children in the vehicle gt page 84 Warning A
307. heel installed accessories passengers and cargo and if applicable trailer tongue load The GVW must never exceed the GVWR indicated on the certification label located on the driver s door B pillar GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating This is the maximum permissible vehicle weight of the fully loaded vehicle weight of the vehicle including all options passen gers fuel and cargo and if applicable trailer tongue load It is indicated on certi fication label located on the driver s door B pillar Kilopascal kPa The metric unit for air pressure There are 6 9 kPa to 1 psi another metric unit for air pressure Is bars There are 100 kilopascals kPa to 1 bar Maximum load rating The maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire Maximum loaded vehicle weight The sum of curb weight accessory weight total load limit and production options weight Maximum tire inflation pressure This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire under normal driving conditions Normal occupant weight The number of occupants the vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 68 kilograms 150 Ibs Occupant distribution The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their designated seating positions Production options weight The combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over 5 Ibs 2 3 kilograms in excess of those stand
308. heir wear limit T Brake pad thickness must be visually in spected by a qualified technician at the intervals specified in the Maintenance Booklet gt Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe to do so Apply the parking brake gt page 66 Do not continue to drive Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Have the brake pads replaced as soon as possible Display symbol USA only Canada only USA only Canada only Display message Release parking brake EBV ABS ESP inoperative see Operator s Manual Practical hints Possible cause consequence You are driving with the parking brake set The EBP the ABS and the ESP have switched off due to a mal function The BAS is also switched off The brake system is still func tional but without the EBP the ABS and the ESP available What to do if Possible solution gt Release the parking brake gt page 57 gt Continue driving with added caution Wheels may lock during hard braking reducing steering capability gt Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message USA only Check OW Canada only eae Fi wal level Warning AN Driving with the message Check brake
309. highly demanding process we recommend you have the side marker lamp bulbs replaced by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Replacing bulbs Replacing bulbs for rear lamps Before you start to replace a bulb for a rear lamp do the following first gt Turn the combination switch to position W gt page 146 Tail lamp unit To access the tail lamp units you have to remove the cover in the corresponding side trim panel of the cargo compartment gt Open the tailgate gt page 123 Practical hints Replacing bulbs Opening the side trim panels yg f PB2 10 4077 31 1 Lock 2 Cover in right side trim panel gt Insert a suitable object such as a coin into the slot of lock Q Turn lock Q clockwise left side trim panel or counterclockwise right side trim panel by 90 in direction of arrow Remove cover 2 Replacing bulbs P82 10 3772 31 1 Tail side marker standing and parking lamp bulb socket 2 Turn signal lamp bulb socket 3 Fog lamp bulb socket drivers side only 4 Backup lamp bulb socket Depending on which bulb needs to be replaced turn the respective bulb socket C counterclockwise Pull the bulb socket out of the housing Similarly turn the bulb counterclock wise carefully and pull the bulb out of bulb socket Insert the new bulb into the bulb socket Turn the bulb in the bulb socket clock wise car
310. hort delay i Switch off the rear climate control for improved cooling or heating output in the front passenger compartment You can also switch off the rear climate control from the front passenger compartment gt page 231 Operating from the front Deactivating gt Press button on the front climate control panel gt page 220 The indicator lamp on the button comes on Reactivating gt Press button on the front climate control panel gt page 220 The indicator lamp on the button goes out The rear climate control is adjusted automatically Controls in detail Adjusting air distribution Use the air distribution controls 2 or to adjust the air distribution for the rear passenger compartment The symbols on the controls represent the following functions Symbol Function Directs air to the center air vents Directs air to the footwells and the side air vents Adjusting manually gt Press the desired air distribution control or The indicator lamp on button Mg goes out Climate control Adjusting automatically gt Press button EGR The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air distribution is adjusted automatically Adjusting air volume The air volume for the rear zone corre sponds to the air volume settings for the front passenger side You can switch off the air supply for the rear zone You can switch off the supplied amount of air volume gt Press
311. ht of the tailgate gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Vehicle Submenu gt Press button JM or Re repeatedly until the message Opening limiter Tailgate appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Opening limiter Tailgate gt Press button or E to switch the limiting opening height of the tailgate On or Off Controls in detail Control system Comfort submenu Access the Comfort submenu via the Settings menu Use the Comfort submenu to change the settings for a number of con venience features The following functions are available Function Page Activating easy entry exit 190 feature Setting fold in function for 190 exterior rear view mirrors Controls in detail Control system Activating easy entry exit feature Use this function to activate and deactivate the easy entry exit feature gt page 132 Warning A N You must make sure no one can become trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel when the easy entry exit feature is activated To stop steering wheel movement do one of the following e Move steering wheel adjustment stalk gt page 47 e Press one of the memory position buttons or memory button M gt page 145 Do not leave children unattended in the ve hicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could open the driver s door and unintentionally activate the easy entry exit f
312. ic loss of tire inflation pressure e g tire blowout caused by a foreign object In this case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully apply ing the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering maneuvers Reactivating the Run Flat Indicator gt The tire inflation pressure monitor must be reactivated in the following situations Switch on the ignition gt page 39 Make sure the standard display menu appears in the multifunction display if you have changed the tire inflation gt page neo pressure gt Press button BV or BA repeatedly until the following message appears in the multifunction display if you have replaced the wheels or tires if you have installed new wheels or tires Run Flat Indicator gt Using the tire placard on the drivers active door B pillar or if available the inside Menu R Button of the fuel filler flap make sure the tire I inflation pressure of all four tires is TT E correct gt Press the reset button on the instru ment cluster gt page 156 Warning AN The following message will appear in The Run Flat Indicator can only warn you in a reliable manner if you have set the correct the multifunction display Restart Run Flat Indicator tire inflation pressures for each tire If an incorrect tire inflation pressure was set the system will monitor the pressure according to the incorrect value If you wish to confirm activation gt Press button ES The following m
313. ically Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring system Advanced TPMS Canada only 388 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS USA only 385 Child safety Infant and child restraint systems 85 Children in the vehicle 84 Airbags 75 86 Blocking rear door window operation 97 Indicator lamp Front passenger front airbag 92 Infant and child restraint systems 93 95 LATCH type child seat anchors 93 Occupant Classification System OCS 88 Cigarette lighter 321 Climate control 218 Control system 159 Coolant 370 539 543 Air conditioning Cooling 228 Multifunction display 159 Anticorrosion antifreeze mixing ratio Air conditioning refrigerant 540 Multifunction steering wheel 160 and quantity 543 Air distribution 223 Resetting to factory default 176 Capacities 539 Air recirculation mode 226 Control system menus 162 Checking coolant level 370 Air vents Front 218 224 AIRMATIC Compass 174 Messages in the multifunction Air vents Rear 230 AMG Menu 168 display 455 457 Airvolume 224 AUDIO 171 Temperature 359 Control panel Front 220 Distance warning function 191 Corner illuminating front fog lamps 151 Control panel Rear 230 Distronic 174 Fog lamps Front 149 Deactivating system 222 Navi 173 Messages in the multifunction Defogging 225 Settings 176 display 464 Defrosting 224 Standard display 166 Replacing bulbs 484 485 Rear passenger compartment 229 TEL 193 Cruise control 266 Residual heat utilization REST 229 Trip computer 191 Activating 267
314. ications to electronic components Other improper work or modifications on the vehicle could also have a negative impact on the operating safety of the vehicle Some safety systems only function while the engine is running You should therefore nev er turn off the engine while driving Warning A N Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody or tires wheels for example when running over an obstacle road debris or a pothole may cause serious damage and impair the operating safety of your vehicle If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride distur bance or you suspect that damage to your vehicle has occurred you should turn on your hazard warning flashers carefully slow down and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the road Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires wheels for possible damage If the ve hicle appears unsafe have it towed to the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center or other qualified maintenance or repair facility for further inspection or re pairs Proper use of the vehicle Proper use of the vehicle requires that you a a re familiar with the following information nd rules the safety precautions in this manual the Technical data section in this manual traffic rules and regulations motor vehicle laws and safety stan dards A Various warning labels are attached to your vehicle These warning labels are intended to make you and
315. icator A The outside temperature indicator is not de signed to serve as an ice warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose Warning Indicated temperatures just above the freez ing point do not guarantee that the road sur face is free of ice The road may still be icy especially in wooded areas or on bridges The outside temperature is indicated in the multifunction display gt page 159 The temperature sensor is located in the front bumper area Due to its location the sensor can be affected by road or engine heat during idling or slow driving This means that the accuracy of the displayed temperature can only be verified by com parison to a thermometer placed next to the sensor not by comparison to external displays e g bank signs etc When moving the vehicle into colder ambient temperatures e g when leaving your garage you will notice a delay before the lower temperature Is displayed A delay also occurs when ambient temper atures rise This prevents inaccurate temperature indications caused by heat radiated from the engine during idling or slow driving Y Control system The control system is activated as soon as the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position 1 gt page 40 or as soon as the KEYLESS GO start stop button is in position 1 gt page 41 The control system enables you to e call up information about your vehicle e change vehicle settings F
316. ices draw your attention to haz e HomeLink is a registered trademark ards that may endanger your health or life of Prince a Johnson Controls or the health or life of others procedure Company gt Page This symbol tells you where to The following symbols are found in this T Highlights hazards that may result in dam look for further information on a Operator s Manual age to your vehicle topig Optional equipment is identified Helpful hints or further information you may a unis OA ee Hells with an asterisk Since standard find useful pele dn ewe a equipment varies between models on the next page the descriptions and illustrations in gt D This continuation symbol marks this manual may differ slightly from a warning which is continued on the actual equipment of your vehi the next page oip gt This symbol is used to indicate cross references to term defini tions Display Words appearing in the multi function display are printed in the type shown here Introduction Operating safety A Work improperly carried out on electronic components and associated software could cause them to cease functioning Because the vehicle s electronic components are in terconnected any modifications made may produce an undesired effect on other sys tems Electronic malfunctions could seriously impair the operating safety of your vehicle Warning See an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center for repairs or modif
317. icle con dition gt page 382 If such information is pro vided it can be found on the inside of the fuel filler flap gt Switch on the ignition gt page 39 gt Press button or on the multifunction steering wheel repeat edly until the standard display menu appears in the multifunction display gt page 166 gt Press the MA or Keg button repeat edly until you see the following mes sage Tire pressure monitor active Menu R button gt Tires and wheels Press the reset button gt page 156 The following message will appear in the multifunction display Restart tire pressure monitor Press the button The following message will appear in the multifunction display Tire pressure monitor restarted After driving a few minutes the current tire inflation pressure values are accepted as reference pressures and then monitored If you wish to cancel activation gt Press the E button Operation Tires and wheels Checking tire pressure electronically with the Advanced Tire Pressure Moni toring System Advanced TPMS Canada only The TPMS only functions on wheels that are equipped with the proper electronic sensors It monitors the tire inflation pres sure as selected by the driver in all four tires A warning is issued to alert you to a decrease in pressure in one or more of the tires Tire pressure inquiries are made using the multifunction display The present infl
318. icles equipped with Distronic you can determine whether the distance warn ing function is to be enabled or disabled With this function set to On the system will alert you when recognizing a stationary ob stacle or a slower vehicle moving in your vehicle s path and the danger of a collision exists even when the Distronic is switched off gt Press button or repeatedly until the message Distance warning appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Distance warning OFF gt Press button or E to switch the distance warning function On or UTT Control system Trip computer menu Use the trip computer menu to call up statistical data on your vehicle The following information is available Function Page Fuel consumption statistics 192 from start Fuel consumption statistics 192 since last reset Distance to empty 193 Gp When you enter the trip computer menu you will always see the fuel consumption statistics from start first Controls in detail Control system Fuel consumption statistics from start gt Press button or repeatedly until the message From start appears in the multifunction display From start TOM 1 30 h a 30 mpi N OIT mo oO Distance driven since start 2 Time elapsed since start 3 Average speed since start 4 Average fuel consumption since start All statistics stored since the last engine start
319. ide temperature Checking tire inflation pressure Regularly check your tire inflation pressure at least once a month Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold The tires can be considered cold if the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km If you check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are warm the vehicle has been driven for several miles or sitting less than 3 hours the reading will be approximately 4 psi 0 3 bar higher than the cold reading This is normal Do not let air out to match the specified cold tire inflation pressure Otherwise the tire will be underinflated A Warning Follow recommended tire inflation pressures Do not underinflate tires Underinflated tires wear excessively and or unevenly adversely affect handling and fuel economy and are more likely to fail from being over heated Do not overinflate tires Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort wear unevenly increase stopping distance and result in sudden deflation blowout because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris potholes etc Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit as indicated on the plac ard on the driver s door B pillar Overloading the tires can overheat them possibly caus ing a blowout Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems
320. ifting to park position P On uphill grades with a gradient angle of more than 5 the hill start assist system maintains the pressure in the brake sys Working on the vehicle Warning A tem for approximately 1 second after you cca have released the brake pedal Therefore When working on the vehicle set the you can start off smoothly without the parking brake and shift to park position P vehicle moving immediately after releasing Otherwise the vehicle could roll away the brake pedal Gear ranges With the automatic transmission in drive position D you can select a gear range for the automatic transmission to operate within You can limit the gear range by pressing the left gearshift button on the steering wheel gearshift control and reverse the gear range limit by pressing the right gear shift button on the steering wheel gearshift control gt page 207 The selected gear range appears in the multifunction display 72 F 1 Current gear range Controls in detail Effect The transmission shifts through sixth gear only The transmission shifts through fifth gear only The transmission shifts through fourth gear only The transmission shifts through third gear only With this selection you can use the braking effect of the engine Automatic transmission Effect The transmission shifts through second gear only Allows the use of engine s braking power when driving e o
321. il Climate control a gt Severe conditions e g strong air pollution may require replacement of the filter before its scheduled interval A clogged filter will reduce the air volume to the interior If the vehicle interior is hot ventilate the interior before driving off see Summer opening fea ture gt page 254 The climate control will then adjust the interior temperature to the set value much faster Keep the air intake grille in front of the wind shield free of snow and debris Controls in detail Climate control Deactivating the climate control Reactivating Activating od Beil gt Press button A gt page 220 gt Press button Egy gt page 220 while the engine is running You can also press button 3 Warning A N gt page 220 on the climate control panel The indicator lamp on the button When the climate control system is switched off the outside air supply and cir culation are also switched off Only choose this setting for a short time Otherwise the windows could fog up impairing visibility and endangering you and others Deactivating gt Press button gt page 220 The indicator lamp on the button comes on If you press button gt page 220 to reacti vate the climate control system the defrosting mode is activated Operating the climate control system in automatic mode i When operating the climate control system in automatic mode you will only rarel
322. in addition to shifting to position P gt page 199 When parked on an incline also turn front wheel towards the road curb Switching off headlamps gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to WE For more information see Lighting gt page 146 Turning off the engine f the engine cannot be turned off as described see Emergency engine shut down gt page 522 gt Shift the automatic transmission to position P gt page 199 A Do not turn off the engine before the vehicle has come to a complete stop With the engine not running there is no power assis tance for the brake and steering systems In this case it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle Warning gt Apply the parking brake gt page 66 Always set the parking brake in addition to Shifting to position P page 199 When parked on an incline also turn front wheel towards the road curb Getting started Turning off with the SmartKey gt Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position O gt page 40 gt Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch The immobilizer is activated Ifyou turn off the engine using the SmartKey and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch with the transmission in a position other than P the transmission will automatically shift to P Keep in mind that turning off the engine with t
323. in the COMAND system dis play to indicate that a Tele Aid call is in progress After the Tele Aid call has ended the optional cellular phone inserted in the cradle switches on again A PIN entry might be necessary Controls in detail System self check Initially after switching on the ignition malfunctions are detected and indicated the indicator lamps in the SOS button the Roadside Assistance button and the Information button stay on longer than 10 seconds or do not come on The message lele Aid inoperative appears in the multifunction display A If the indicator lamps on the SOS button on the Roadside Assistance button and or on the Information button remain illuminated continuously in red and or the message Tele Aid inoperative is displayed in the multifunction display after the system self check a malfunction in the system has been detected Warning If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above the system may not operate as expected Have the system checked at the nearest Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible Useful features Emergency calls An emergency call is initiated auto matically following an accident in which the emergency tensioning devices ETDs or air bags deploy An emergency call can also be initiated manually by opening the cover next to the interior rear view mirror labeled SOS then briefly pressing the button located under the cover See gt page 332 for ins
324. indows and the tilt sliding sunroof the driver s outside door handle to stop or tilt sliding panel simultaneously the closing procedure e Immediately pull on the same outside door handle and hold firmly The Warning AN windows and the tilt sliding sunroof or tilt sliding panel will open for as When closing the windows and the long as the door handle is held but the tilt sliding sunroof or tilt sliding panel door is not opened make sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure Vehicles without tilt sliding panel li potande conga csi PIEC ae gt Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or Oae SmartKey with KEYLESS GO at the e Release button to stop the closing driver s outside door handle procedure To open press and hold gt page 255 button gi To continue the closing l procedure after making sure that there The SmartKey or SmartKey with is no danger of anyone being harmed by KEYLESS GO must be in close the closing procedure press and hold proximity to the driver s door handle button ie Press and hold button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO until the windows and the tilt sliding sunroof are completely closed Release button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO to interrupt the closing procedure Vehicles with KEYLESS GO gt Press and hold the lock button on an outside door handle gt page 69 until the windows and the tilt sliding s
325. ing A N Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving Adjusting the steering wheel while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO removed from the vehicle the steering wheel adjustment feature can be operated when the driver s door is open Therefore do not leave children unattended in the ve hicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Getting started Adjusting a The memory function gt page 144 lets you Store the settings for the steering wheel together with the settings for seat positions and the exterior rear view mirrors Make sure that e you can reach the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent at the elbows e you can move your legs freely e all displays including malfunction and indicator lamps on the instrument cluster are clearly visible The steering wheel adjustment stalk is located on the lower left of the steering column Mirrors Adjust the interior and exterior rear view mirrors before driving so that you have a good view of the road and traffic conditions Warning A N In case of an accident
326. ing sound ceases The warning sound will also cease when the distance to the preceding vehicle is sufficient again with out applying the brakes In this case the distance warning lamp will also go out Warning If the distance warning lamp in the in strument cluster comes on while driving and or an intermittent warning sounds immediate attention on the part of the driver is required As required by the traffic situation apply the brakes and navigate around a possible obstacle However do not drive by relying on the distance warning function as this will result in an emergency braking application This will not always enable you to avoid a collision especially when traveling on varying road surface conditions and with varying driver reaction Complex driving situations are not always fully recognized by the distance warning function This could result in wrong or miss ing distance warnings gt Switch on the distance warning func tion in the control system gt page 191 Controls in detail 1 Symbol for activated distance warning function When the distance warning function is switched on you will see the symbol in the Standard display When the distance warning function is deactivated the symbol will not appear Driving systems AIRMATIC The AIRMATIC consists of two compo nents e Adaptive Damping System ADS gt page 286 Automatically optimizes your vehicle s suspension tuning
327. ing stretches in hours minutes Lap number gt Press button JES and seconds You can start the RACETIMER when the The timer stops engine is running or the starter switch is in position 2 gt page 39 i When you stop the vehicle and turn the SmartKey to position 1 gt page 39 or in vehi i While the RACETIMER is being displayed cles with KEYLESS GO turn off the engine and you cannot adjust the audio volume using do not open the driver s door the RACETIMER buttons or Sy stops timing Timing is resumed when you switch the ignition back on gt page 39 or restart the engine gt page 54 and then press the button Controls in detail Control system Saving lap time and starting a new lap i You can save up to nine laps gt Press button EE while the timer is running The intermediate time will be shown for 5 seconds gt Press button EE within 5 seconds The intermediate time shown will be saved as a lap time The RACETIMER begins timing the new lap The new lap begins to be timed as soon as the intermediate time is called up MOLOG 0013 sA Ny Ome 00 13 54 i 2y 1 Gear indicator 2 RACETIMER 3 Best lap time 4 Lap number Resetting current lap gt Press button while the timer is running The timer stops gt Press button Sj The lap time is reset to O Deleting all laps a It is not possible to delete a single saved lap gt Press button while the ti
328. ion is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment i Canada only This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Panic alarm Activating gt Press and hold button Q for at least 1 second Deactivating gt Press button Q again or gt Insert SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO in the starter switch or gt Press the KEYLESS GO start stop button gt page 41 The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be in the vehicle Safety and Security Driving safety systems In this section you will find information on the following driving safety systems e ABS Antilock Brake System e BAS Brake Assist System e ESP Electronic Stability Program e EBP Electronic Brake Proportioning e 4 ETS Electronic Traction System A The following factors increase the risk of accidents
329. ires 235 65 R17 104H M S 255 55 R18 105H M S 255 50 R19 107H XL Extra Load M S R 320 CDI Sport Package R 63 AMG R 350 Sport Package R 500 Sport Package AMG rims light alloy 8 5 Jx 19 H2 8 5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset 2 52 in 64 mm 2 36 in 60 mm All season tires 255 50 R19 107H XL Extra Load M S Summer tires 265 45 ZR20 104Y Winter tires 255 50 R19 107H XL Extra Load M S 255 45 R20 105V XL Extra Load M S l Radial ply tires 2 Not available as factory equipment Technical data Rims and tires Spare wheel collapsible tire R 320 CDI R 63 AMG R 350 R 500 Rim steel 6 5 B x 18 H2 Rim light alloy 5 5 Bx 19 H2 Wheel offset 1 58 in 40 mm 0 51 in 13 mm Collapsible tire l 195 75 18 106P 185 65 19 104P Recommended tire inflation pressure 44 psi 3 0 bar 51 psi 3 5 bar Must not be used with snow chains BE Please compare the recommended tire Please note that the tire inflation pressure of inflation pressure for your vehicle with the tire the collapsible tire differs from the tire inflation inflation pressure on the yellow label located on pressure of the road tires the spare wheel rim If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim differs from the values given in this Operator s Manual inflate the collapsible tire to the recommended tire inflation pressure given on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim Y Electrical system Model Gener
330. is occurs the warning will first come on intermittently and then stay on if the oil level drops further nn The measuring system Is gt malfunctioning Visually check for oil leaks If no obvious oil leaks are noted drive to the nearest service station where the engine oil should be topped to the required level with an approved oil specified in the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet Check the engine oil level gt page 366 Add engine oil gt page 369 and check the engine oil level gt page 366 Have the measuring system checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Possible cause consequence Possible solution B 4 Engine oil level There is no oil in the engine gt Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as Stop car turn engine off There is a danger of engine soon as it is safe to do so in a safe damage location Turn off the engine Add engine oil gt page 369 and check the engine oil level gt page 366 Engine oil level You have added too much gt Have oil siphoned or drained off Reduce oil level engine oil There is a risk of damaging the engine and or the catalytic converter gasoline en gine or the oxidation catalyst diesel engine Observe all legal requirements with respect to its disposal Engine oil level The engine oil has dropped toa gt Check the engine oil level gt page 366 Visit
331. isplay Decreasing air volume Rear window defroster USA only ray Canada only Air recirculation Interior temperature sensor Climate control on off The climate control is operational whenev er the engine is running You can operate the climate control system in either the automatic or manual mode The system cools or heats the interior depending on the selected interior temperature and the current outside temperature A When operating the climate control the air that enters the passenger compartment through the air vents can be very hot or very cold depending on the set temperature This may cause burns or frostbite to unpro tected skin in the immediate area of the air vents Warning Always keep sufficient distance between un protected parts of the body and the air vents If necessary use the air distribution controls page 220 to direct the air to air vents in the vehicle interior that are not in the immediate area of unprotected skin Nearly all dust particles pollutants and odors are filtered out before outside air en ters the passenger compartment through the air distribution system The air conditioning will not engage no cooling if the A C mode is deactivated gt page 228 A Follow the recommended settings for heat ing and cooling given on the following pag es Otherwise the windows could fog up impairing visibility and endangering you and others Warning Controls in deta
332. isplay should be on P gt Depress the brake pedal during the starting procedure TF ret A a N aT ae fi ee E i a r KEYLESS GO start stop button 1 USA only 2 Canada only gt Make sure the KEYLESS GO start stop button is inserted in the starter switch gt page 41 Do not depress the accelerator Press the KEYLESS GO start stop button once The engine starts if the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is in the vehicle If you wish to start the engine using the SmartKey instead of the KEYLESS GO feature remove the KEYLESS GO start stop button from the starter switch gt page 41 For information on turning off the engine with KEYLESS GO see Turning off with KEYLESS GO gt page 67 Diesel engine gt vy Make sure the automatic transmission is set to P The transmission position indicator in the multifunction display should be on P Depress the brake pedal during the starting procedure Do not depress the accelerator Press the KEYLESS GO start stop button once The engine preglows and starts if the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is in the vehicle L If the engine is at operating temperature the time the engine needs to preglow is reduced Starting difficulties If the engine does not start as described carry out the following steps gt If you are starting the engine with the SmartKey turn SmartKey in starter switch to position 0 and repeat starting procedure
333. ission position 201 ES Supplemental 72 indicator eel System 430 EF Fuel filler flap indica 360 E SRO Aer Eae tor The fuel filler flap e Gear range indicator 205 l a is located on the rear e Selected program mode 206 Ewan cle il in 423 right hand side indicator icator lamp USA only Distance warning function 284 a indicator ae Engine malfunction in 423 dicator lamp Rear window wiper 62 indicator Canada only Vehicles with diesel engine only At a glance Multifunction steering wheel Item Page Multifunction display 159 Operating the control 160 system 2 Selecting the submenu or setting the volume Press button up to increase E down to decrease 3 Telephone Press button to take a call to dial to redial to end a call to reject an incoming call Item 4 Moving within a menu Press button Wag for next display B for previous display Menu systems Press button for next menu for previous menu Voice Control Voice Control Page 1 Vehicles without Voice Control Button without function Vv Center console Upper part Item COMAND system see separate operating instructions Climate control 3 zone automatic climate control Rear window defroster Seat heating front passenger side Seat ventilation front passenger side Vehicle level control switch Program mode selector switch for auto
334. it strap gt To exit the vehicle when seated on a third row seat pull up and hold easy exit strap Q The second row seat backrest folds forward gt Push second row seat forward a far as it will go Easy entry exit position gt Exit the vehicle For information on how to fold down the second row seats completely see Folding second row seats gt page 303 Controls in detail Seats Returning second row seats to their original position Warning A N When occupants have entered or exited the vehicle using the easy entry exit feature before driving off make sure e the seats are properly locked e the seat backrests are in an upright po Seat unlocked Seat locked son ame eke epet OE oe Q Lock status indicator Q Lock status indicator A second row seat is properly locked only 2 Red marking 2 Red marking hen lock status indicat is in hinged 3 ea a or ie tS When the seat is unlocked When the seat is locked position and red marking 2 is barely visi ble e lock status indicator Q is extended e lock status indicator Q is in hinged po If a seat and seat backrest are not properly e red marking is clearly visible Sen locked the seat could move forward and the gt When the seat is unlocked push seat e red marking 2 is barely visible seat backrest could fold You could slide un der the seat belt during braking vehicle ma neuvers or in an accident If you slide under it the belt wou
335. ite radio operation 172 Audio search function 188 Auto dimming Rear view mirrors 213 Automatic antiglare for rear view mirrors 213 Automatic central locking Control system 189 Automatic climate control 3 zone Air conditioning Cooling 243 Air conditioning refrigerant 540 Air distribution 238 Air recirculation mode 240 Air vents Front 232 238 Air vents Rear 245 249 Air volume 239 Control panel Front 234 Control panel Rear 245 Deactivating system 236 Defogging 240 Defrosting 239 Maximum cooling MAX COOL 240 Rear passenger compartment 245 Residual heat utilization REST 244 Automatic headlamp mode 147 Automatic lighting control Interior lighting 154 Automatic locking when driving 130 Automatic shift program 206 232 Automatic transmission 197 Accelerator position 203 Automatic shift program 206 Emergency operation limp home mode 211 Gear ranges 205 Gear selector lever 54 197 Gear shifting malfunctions 211 Hill start assist system 204 Kickdown 203 Kickdown manual shift program R63 AMG only 211 Manual shift program R 63 AMG only 209 Program mode selector switch 206 Shifting procedure 200 Starting the engine 54 Steering wheel gearshift control 207 Transmission fluid level 370 Transmission positions 201 Automatic transmission fluid see ATF AUxX socket 311 B Backrest seat 44 Seat Lumbar support 136 Seat Multicontour 136 Backup lamps Messages in the multifunction display 463 468 Re
336. ited Warranty Fuel requirements Gasoline engine Only use premium unleaded fuel e The octane number posted at the pump must be 91 min It is an average of both the Research R octane num ber and the Motor M octane number R M 2 This is also known as the ANTI KNOCK INDEX Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol IPA IBA and TBA can be used provided the ratio of any one of these oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 10 MTBE must not exceed 15 The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3 plus additional cosolvents Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is not allowed Gasohol which contains 10 ethanol and 90 unleaded gasoline can be used These blends must also meet all other fuel requirements such as resistance to spark knock boiling range vapor pressure etc Diesel engine Only use commercially available vehicular diesel fuels No 2 or No 1 ASTM D975 No 2 D or No 1 D To prevent malfunctions diesel fuel with improved cold flow characteristics is of fered in the winter months Check with your fuel retailer i Do not fill the tank with gasoline Do not blend diesel fuel with gasoline or kerosine The fuel system and engine will otherwise be damaged which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Coolants E F The engine coolant is a mixture of water and anticorrosion antifreeze which provides e Corrosion prote
337. ituation Do not wait for the operation of the warning signal to intercede with your own braking This will result in potentially dangerous emergency braking which will not always result in an impact being avoid ed Tailgating increases the risk of an accident Driving systems Warning VAN Distronic brakes your vehicle with a maxi mum deceleration of 6 5 ft s 2 m s2 This corresponds to about 20 of the maximum deceleration of your vehicle Distronic brakes the vehicle in an effort to restore the preset distance or to maintain the set speed Keep driver s foot area clear at all times in cluding the area under the brake pedal Ob jects stored in this area may impair pedal movement which could interfere with the braking ability of the Distronic system Do not place your foot under the brake pedal your foot could become caught Controls in detail Driving systems Distronic menu in the control system Use the DISTRONIC menu to display the current settings for your Distronic system The information shown in the multifunction display depends on whether the Distronic system is activated or deactivated i For activating or deactivating the Distronic system see Activating Distronic gt page 277 or see Deactivating Distronic gt page 280 For activating or deactivating the Distance warn ing function see Distance warning function gt page 197 gt Press button or repeatedly un
338. ized at an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center This service includes e Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze concentration e Addition of cleaning concentrate to the water of the windshield and headlamp cleaning system Add MB Concentrate MB SummerFit to a premixed wind shield washer solvent antifreeze which is formulated for temperatures below freezing point gt page 546 e Battery test Battery capacity drops with decreasing ambient temperature A well charged battery helps to make sure that the engine can be started even at low ambient temperatures e Tire change Mercedes Benz recom mends M S rated radial ply tires with a minimum tread depth of approximately 1 in 4 mm on all four wheels for the winter season Winter tires Always use winter tires at temperatures below 45 F 7 C and whenever wintry road conditions prevail Not all M S rated radial ply tires provide special winter performance Make sure the tires you use show M S and the mountain snowflake marking on the tire sidewall These tires meet specific snow traction perfor mance requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association RMA and the Rubber Association of Canada RAC and have been designed specifically for use in snow conditions Use of winter tires is the only way to achieve the maximum effec tiveness of the ABS ESP 4 ETS and EBP in winter operation For safe handling make sure all winter tires mounted are of
339. ke any modification that could change the effectiveness of the belts Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them In a crash they may not be able to provide ade quate protection No modifications of any kind may be made to any components or wiring of the SRS This includes changing or removing any component or part of the SRS the installation of additional trim material badges etc over the steering wheel hub front passenger front air bag cover outboard sides of the front seat backrests door trim panels or door frame trims and installation of addition al electrical electronic equipment on or near SRS components and wiring Keep area between air bags and occupants free from objects e g packages purs es umbrellas etc Do not hang items such as coat hangers from the coat hooks or handles over the door These items may turn into projec tiles and cause head and other injuries when window curtain air bag is de ployed Air bag system components will be hot after an air bag has inflated Do not touch Never place your feet on the instrument panel dashboard or on the seat Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat In addition improper repair work on the SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center
340. l when the engine Is running cools the vehicle down to the selected interior temperature The cooling function also dehumidifies the air in the vehicle interior thereby preventing the windows from fogging up i Condensation may drip out from underneath the vehicle This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction Controls in detail A If you turn off the cooling function the interior air is not dried The windows can fog up more quickly Window fogging may impair visibility and endanger you and others Warning Deactivating It is possible to deactivate the air condi tioning cooling function of the automatic climate control system The air in the vehicle will then no longer be cooled or dehumidified gt Press button gt page 234 The indicator lamp on the button goes out The cooling function switches off after a short delay 3 zone automatic climate control Activating Moist air can fog up the windows You can dehumidify the air with the air condition ing gt Press button again The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air conditioning uses the refrigerant R 134a This refrigerant is free of CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer BE if the air conditioning cannot be turned on again this indicates that the air conditioning is losing refrigerant The compressor has turned off Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center
341. l has reached the desired position Lowering gt Pull and hold the roof panel switch in direction of arrow 4 gt page 263 until the tilt sliding panel has lowered and closed completely Fully opening Express open the panorama roof with tilt sliding panel gt Pull the roof panel switch past the resistance point in direction of arrow 1 gt page 263 and release The tilt sliding panel opens com pletely Stopping the panorama roof with tilt sliding panel during Express open gt Move the roof panel switch in any direction The tilt sliding panel will stop in its current position Controls in detail Panorama roof with power tilt sliding panel Synchronizing the panorama roof with power tilt sliding panel The tilt sliding panel and its roller sunblinds must be synchronized e after the battery has been disconnected or discharged e after a malfunction e if the tilt sliding panel does not open smoothly T Do not attempt to open or close the tilt sliding panel before the tilt sliding panel is properly synchronized The tilt sliding panel could otherwise lock up in the open position If the tilt sliding panel cannot be closed or synchronized see an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center or call Roadside Assistance gt page 333 gt Switch off the ignition gt page 40 and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch Vehicles with KEYLESS GO gt Switch off the ignition
342. l l l e with the engine not at operating tem T oe i be made after the vehicle break in period i come loose while the vehicle is in motion perature yet the vehicle must have and injure you and or others Do not use any special lubricant additives been stationary for at least 30 minutes as these may damage the drive assemblies with the engine turned off Using special additives not approved by gt Let the hood drop from a height of Mercedes Benz may cause damage not covered To check the engine oil level via the approximately 1 ft 30 cm by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty multifunction display do the following The hood will lock audibly More information on this subject is availableat Switch on the ignition gt page 39 any Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center gt Check to make sure the hood is fully The standard display gt page 166 closed should appear in the multifunction display If you can raise the hood at a point above the headlamps then it is not properly closed Open it again and let it drop with somewhat greater force gt Press button BV or RAS on the mul tifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the following message appears in the multifunction display Engine oil level Measuring now Measurement correct onl iF vehicle level f One of the following messages will subsequently appear in the multifunc tion display e Engine oil level OK e Add 1 0 gt to reach max oil level
343. lasher The hazard warning flasher can be switched on at all times even with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch or with the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO removed from the vehicle The hazard warning flasher switches on automatically when an air bag deploys The hazard warning flasher switch is located on the upper part of the center console Switching on hazard warning flasher gt Press hazard warning flasher switch 1 All turn signals are flashing With the hazard warning flasher activated and the combination switch set for either left or right turn only the respective left or right turn signals will operate when the ignition is switched on Switching off hazard warning flasher gt Press hazard warning flasher switch Q again f the hazard warning flasher has been activated automatically press hazard warning flasher switch Q once to switch it off Controls in detail Interior lighting I ii Ban F I cn Oa ee E i Ba a j A 2 d a Sng D Hu i a R FA P68 00 4448 31 1 Front left reading lamp on off 2 Rear interior lighting on off 3 Automatic interior lighting 4 Front interior lighting on off Front right reading lamp on off 6 Front right interior lamp 7 Reading lamps Front left interior lamp Lighting The controls are located in the overhead control panel i An interior lamp switched on manuall
344. lation Display Decreasing air volume Air recirculation Air distribution driver s side Air distribution driver s side Interior temperature sensor Adopting driver s side settings for all zones Warning A N When operating the automatic climate control the air that enters the passenger compartment through the air vents can be very hot or very cold depending on the set temperature This may cause burns or frost bite to unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air vents Always keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the air vents If necessary use the air distribution controls gt page 234 to direct the air to air vents in the vehicle interior that are not in the immediate area of unprotected skin The automatic climate control is a 3 zone intelligent automatic climate control system Your vehicle interior is divided into 3 zones E T E g iiil i i ie IE i ee al A a G 1 i i F a Y N f iiis iim im jee P83 00 2170 31 Controls in detail 3 zone automatic climate control With the help of a sun sensor the automatic climate control determines the relation of the sun to the vehicle and auto matically adjusts the inside temperature for each individual zone The automatic climate control is oper ational whenever the engine is running It cools the vehicle s interior according to the angle
345. ld apply force at the abdomen or neck That could cause serious or even fa tal injuries backrest back until the seat audibly en gages Controls in detail Seats Lumbar support The curvature of the drivers seat can be adjusted to help enhance lower back sup port and seating comfort The lever for lumbar support adjustment is located on the right hand side of the driver s seat backrest gt Move adjustment lever in direction of arrows until you have reached a comfortable seating position Multicontour seat The multicontour seat has an extendable seat cushion and inflatable air chambers built into the backrest to provide additional lumbar and side support The seat cushion depth seat backrest cushion height and curvature can be con tinuously varied with switches on the in side of each front seat base after the ignition is switched on gt page 39 Tag a p o W Pas z 7 a 1 Seat cushion depth 2 Backrest side bolsters 3 Backrest center 4 Backrest bottom gt Switch on the ignition gt page 39 Seat cushion depth gt Adjust the seat cushion depth to the length of your upper leg with switch Q Backrest contour gt Adjust the contour of the seat backrest to the desired position with switch E3 o E gt Move the seat backrest support to the bottom with button 4 or to the center with button G Backrest side bolsters gt Adjust t
346. le gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible gt Inthe control system set lamp operation to manual mode gt page 147 gt Switch on headlamps using the exterior lamp switch gt page 146 gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt page 484 gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt page 484 Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Possible cause consequence Possible solution Cornering lamp The left corner illuminating front gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible Left fog lamp is malfunctioning gt page 484 Cornering lamp The right corner illuminating gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible Right front fog lamp is malfunctioning gt page 484 Front foglamp The left front fog lamp is gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible Left malfunctioning gt page 484 Front foglamp The right front fog lamp is gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible Right malfunctioning gt page 484 High beam The left high beam lamp is Halogen headlamp Left malfunctioning gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt page 484 Bi Xenon headlamp gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible High beam The right high beam lamp is Halogen headlamp Right malfunctioning gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt
347. le in direction of arrow 4 and hold it there gt While holding center console Q up grip handle G gt Lift center console Q at rear handle to release the center con sole from anchorage points 6 gt Take center console Q out of the vehi cle Rear center console base cannot be removed Controls in detail Useful features Installing Warning VAN The rear center console must be properly in stalled on the center console base Driving with the rear center console not properly in stalled on the rear center console base may cause the rear center console to come loose and be thrown around in the vehicle interior 7 p g leb causing injury to vehicle occupants during Latch position 1 Rear center console base B Latch position 0 6 Rear center console e rakin E Rear center console base gt Position center console 6 above e vehicle maneuvers 4 Anchorage point position 1 base e an accident Anchorage point position 0 gt Insert the tabs at rear of center l console 6 into anchorage points You can install the rear center console in or on base two different positions In the most for l ward position position 1 you can expand gt Guide front of center console 6 down the cargo compartment fully gt page 302 towards base Q without removing the rear center console Center console must rest on i The storage compartment and the cuphold Baek
348. lever The vehicle set speed decreases in increments of 5 mph Canada 10 km h L The new speed is set and the vehicle will decelerate Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has reached the set speed Controls in detail Driving systems Setting to last stored speed Resume function A The set speed stored in memory should only be set again if prevailing road conditions permit Possible acceleration or decelera tion differences arising from returning to the preset speed could cause an accident and or serious injury to you and others Warning gt Briefly pull the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 4 gt page 276 The Distronic resumes to the last set speed gt Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The last set speed or if no speed is stored the current set speed appears in the multifunction display for approximately 5 seconds Deactivating Distronic There are several ways to deactivate the Distronic system gt Step on the brake pedal or gt Briefly tip the cruise control lever in direction of arrow gt page 276 Distronic will be deactivated The last set speed will be stored in memory i The following message appears in the multi function display for approximately 5 seconds DISTRONIC Off The last stored set speed is deleted when the engine is turned off i The Distronic switches off automatically when e you
349. liquid electrolyte may escape the mirror housing if the mirror glass k P46 00 2117 31 1 Adjusting steering wheel in or out 2 Adjusting steering wheel up or down breaks gt Switch on the ignition gt page 39 Electrolyte has an irritating effect Do not or allow the liquid to come into contact with eyes skin clothing or respiratory system In case it does immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary gt Open the drivers door Adjusting steering wheel in or out gt Move stalk forward or back in direction of arrow T Electrolyte drops coming into contact with ae the vehicle paint finish can only be completely Adjusting steering wheel up or down removed while in their liquid state and by apply gt Move stalk up or down in direction of 78 Plenty of water arrow 2 Interior rear view mirror gt Manually adjust the interior rear view mirror For more information see Rear view mir rors gt page 212 Exterior rear view mirrors A Warning Exercise care when using the passenger side exterior rear view mirror The mirror surface is convex outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view Ob jects in mirror are closer than they appear Check your interior rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes Getting started The buttons are located on the drivers door control panel 1 Driver s side
350. lltale extinguishes after a few minutes driving if the malfunction has been corrected i Operating radio transmission equipment e g wireless headsets two way radios in or near the vehicle could cause the TPMS to mal function Reactivating the TPMS A It is the drivers responsibility to calibrate the TPMS on the recommended cold infla tion pressure Underinflated tires affect the ability to steer or brake the vehicle You might loose control over the vehicle Warning The TPMS must be reactivated when you have adjusted the tire inflation pressure to a new level e g because of different load or driving conditions The TPMS is then recalibrated to the current tire inflation pressures gt Using the tire placard on the drivers door B pillar gt page 376 or if avail able the supplemental tire pressure information on the inside of the fuel fill er flap gt page 360 make sure the tire inflation pressure of all four tires is cor rect Operation Reactivate the TPMS after adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the inflation pressure rec ommended for the vehicle operating condition Tire pressure should only be adjusted on cold tires Observe the recommended tire inflation pressure on the placard on the driver s door B pillar gt page 376 Some vehicles may have supplemental tire pressure information for driv ing at high speeds gt page 381 or for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded veh
351. lly locked with the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO it will not unlock using the central unlocking switch Q If the vehicle was previously locked with the cen tral locking switch 2 e While in the selective remote control mode only the front door opened from the inside is unlocked e While in the global remote control mode the vehicle is unlocked completely when a front door is opened from the inside i With the passenger side door opened you cannot lock the vehicle with the central locking switch Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Controls in detail Seats For information on seat adjustment see the Getting started section gt page 44 For more information on folding the seats see Loading gt page 297 Easy entry exit feature Easy entry exit feature for driver s seat This feature allows for easier entry into and exit from the vehicle When entering and exiting the vehicle the steering wheel is in its uppermost position The easy entry exit feature can be activated or deactivated in the Comfort submenu of the control system gt page 190 Warning AN You must make sure no one can become trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel when the easy entry exit feature is activated To stop steering wheel movement do one of the following e Move steering wheel adjustment stalk gt page 47 e Pres
352. lnotbe not e the vehicles speed exceeds e Raised level for driving on rough roads me a el Ap When the engine is started the previously e Highway level for driving on paved selected setting is selected again e the vehicles speed Is between roads in fair or better condition OFAN E I 72 ei avie For information on ADS settings AUTO 70 mph 112 km h for longer than 20 The third available level is the highspeed SPORT or COMF see Adaptive Damping seconds level that is set automatically system ADS gt page 286 i Obey local speed limits Use prudent driving speeds appropriate to prevailing conditions ADS AUTO ADS SPORT ADS COMF Raised level 1 69 in 43 mm 1 69 in 43 mm 1 69 in 43 mm Highway level 0 0 28 in 7 mm 0 20 in 5 mm Highspeed level 0 0 28 in 7 mm 0 Raised level Only choose the raised level when the road conditions permit Otherwise e Fuel consumption may increase e Handling characteristics of the vehicle may be unfavorable i You can select the raised level at vehicle speeds of up to 25 mph 40 km h At a higher vehicle speed the message Level selection not permitted appears in the multifunction display gt Start the engine gt page 54 The switch is located on the upper part of the center console 1 Vehicle level control switch 2 Indicator lamp If indicator lamp 2 is off gt Press switch Q Indicator lamp
353. low beam high beam cover for the Bi Xenon headlamp Because of high voltage in Bi Xenon lamps it is dan gerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its components We recommend that you have such work done by a qualified technician Front turn signal lamp bulbs gt Pull bulb socket Q out of the head lamp housing Pull the turn signal bulb out of bulb socket Q Insert the new turn signal bulb into bulb socket 1 Insert bulb socket Q into the head lamp housing Practical hints Parking and standing lamp bulbs Pa 10 3987 31 1 Bulb socket for parking and standing vY Vv vy Yy vy lamp Turn bulb socket Q counterclockwise Pull bulb socket Q out of the housing Pull the bulb out of bulb socket Q Insert the new parking and standing lamp bulb into bulb socket Insert bulb socket into the housing Turn bulb socket Q clockwise until it engages Replacing bulbs Corner illuminating front fog lamp PB2 10 3775 31 Example illustration except R 63 AMG 1 Corner illuminating front fog lamp 2 Cover 3 Retaining screw Practical hints Replacing bulbs gt Remove screws that retain front fog lamp Q gt Remove corner illuminating front fog lamp PEZ 10 4454 31 Example illustration R 63 AMG 1 Corner illuminating front fog lamp 2 Cover 3 Retaining screws P82 10 3985 31 Corner illuminating fro
354. lower runs on low speed to protect the vehicle battery Activating Rear automatic climate control gt Switch off the ignition gt page 39 second row gt Press button gt page 234 The indicator lamp on the button comes on The control panel is located at the rear of the front center console ert Jll 7 Deactivating oe gt Press button ERJ The indicator lamp on the button goes out The residual heat is automatically turned off e when the ignition is switched on e after about 30 minutes e if the coolant temperature is too low e if the battery voltage drops E J P83 40 3 5 04 31 Rear automatic climate control panel Controls in detail 3 zone automatic climate control Increasing air volume Air distribution and air volume automatic manual Air distribution directs air through the side air vents Right rear center air vent adjustable Air distribution directs air through the footwells and side air vents Rear automatic climate control on off Decreasing air volume Left rear center air vent adjustable Cleo Mo He E me e Indicator lamps for air volume settings Temperature control Controls in detail 3 zone automatic climate control Activating rear automatic climate control The automatic climate control must be switched on gt page 236 gt Press button EUR The indicator lamp on the button comes on The temperature air vol
355. ls DOT Tire Identification Number TIN U S tire regulations require each new tire manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a TIN into or onto a sidewall of each tire produced The TIN is a unique identifier which facili tates efforts by tire manufactures to notify purchasers in recall situations or other safety matters concerning tires and gives purchasers the means to easily identify such tires The TIN is comprised of Manufacturer s identification mark Tire size Tire type code and Date of manufacture DOT 2 Manufacturer s identification mark 3 Tire size 4 Tire type code at the option of the tire manufacturer Date of manufacture GD For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration DOT Department of Transportation A tire branding symbol C gt page 396 which denotes the tire meets require ments of the U S Department of Transportation Manufacturer s identification mark The manufacturer s identification mark 2 gt page 396 denotes the tire manufacturer New tires have a mark with two symbols Retreaded tires have a mark with four sym bols For more information on retreaded tires see gt page 373 Tire size The code Q gt page 396 indicates the tire size Tire type code The code gt page 396 may at the option of the manufacturer b
356. lumination 3 Reset button 4 To brighten instrument clus ter illumination EJ Right turn signal indicator lamp Clock Page 157 156 157 Item Page 7 Speedometer with Antilock Brake 420 System ABS indicator lamp WE Variable speed limiter indicator lamp Distance warning lamp Lamp without function It illuminates when the ignition is on It should go out when the engine is running Vehicles without Distronic Warning lamp without function It illuminates when the ignition is on It should go out when the engine is running Item BRAKE JE At a glance Instrument cluster Brake warning lamp USA only Brake warning lamp Canada only Electronic Stability Program ESP warning lamp Combination low tire pressure TPMS malfunction telltale USA only Low tire pressure telltale Canada only Page 421 421 425 428 428 t a glance a Instrument cluster P54 30 9428 31 At a glance Instrument cluster Item Page Item Page Item Page Multifunction display with E High beam headlamp 150 1 Multifunction display with e Trip odometer 157 indicator e Outside temperature 159 5 Men adenete 159 Keo Preglow indicator display or digital speed 180 Tach af lamp ometer depending on achometer with rk Ba te tele Fuel gauge with aa see in the WEE Seat belt telltale control system 426 Fuel tank reserve warning 430 l i E lamp e Transm
357. lution Key The SmartKey with gt Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do Me We USEC Led KEYLESS GO is not detected SO Du inks Cnet ne IS ALN gt Apply the parking brake gt page 66 because a K th Search for the SmartKey with a KEYLESS GO KEYLESS GO is not in the vehicle Otherwise the vehicle cannot be centrally locked nor can the engine be started e there is strong again after the engine is stopped radio frequency interference The SmartKey with gt Change the position of the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is momentarily KEYLESS GO in the vehicle Sect lee gt Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the starter switch if necessary Key The SmartKey with gt Search for the SmartKey with not detected KEYLESS GO is not detected KEYLESS GO while the ignition is switched on gt page 39 and a door is opened or closed and the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is gt Change the position of the SmartKey with not in the vehicle KEYLESS GO in the vehicle Otherwise the vehicle cannot be locked nor can the engine be started Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Key detected in vehicle Remove key You need a new key Change key batteries Don t forget your key Possible cause consequence Possible solution A SmartKey with KEYLESS GO Take the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO left in the vehicle was detected out of the vehicle while trying to lock the vehicle f
358. ly reset have an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center correct it Only reset if the proper maintenance service has been performed Resetting the system without performing the proper service as called for by the maintenance service indicator will result in engine damage and or other vehicle damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Operation Vehicle care Cleaning and care of the vehicle Regular and proper care will help to main tain the value of your vehicle The best way to protect your vehicle from harmful envi ronmental influences is to wash it and use protective treatments regularly A Many cleaning products can be hazardous Some are poisonous others are flammable Always follow the instructions on the partic ular container Always open your vehicle s doors or windows when cleaning the inside Warning Never use fluids or solvents that are not de signed for cleaning your vehicle Always lock away cleaning products and keep them out of reach of children While in operation even while parked your vehicle is subjected to varying external in fluences which if gone unchecked can at tack the paintwork as well as the vehicle underbody and cause lasting damage Such damage is caused not only by extreme and varying climatic conditions but also by e Air pollution e Road salt e lar e Gravel and stone chipping To avoid paint damage you should imme diately remo
359. m the in KEYLESS GO opening a door from the inside side Open door only when conditions are will trigger the anti theft alarm system Peep eCr yc OnE ROO te Opemaeet safe to do so To cancel the alarm do one of the following If the door was locked locking knob With the SmartKey OSD e nsert the SmartKey in the starter switch Rear doors e Press the Fy or Oo button on the SmartKey j i gt Pull up locking knob on the respec With KEYLESS GO tive rear door to unlock door e Grasp an outside door handle gt Pull on inside door handle 2 on the re e Press the KEYLESS GO start stop button Aa a ab door s 0Pen deck gt page 41 The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be 1 Locking knob inside the vehicle 2 Inside door handle Opening the tailgate Opening the tailgate from the outside A minimum height clearance of 7 2 ft 2 20 m is required to open the tailgate The handle is located above the rear license plate recess P72 20 2553 31 Vehicles without KEYLESS GO The vehicle must be unlocked gt page 39 Vehicles with KEYLESS GO When opening the tailgate the vehicle is globally unlocked Controls in detail gt Pull on the handle The tailgate opens slightly gt Pull tailgate upwards to open T The tailgate swings open upwards automat ically Always make sure there is sufficient over head clearance Vehicles with power tailgate To stop the opening procedure press
360. mage the seat belt and impair the effectiveness of the seat belt and or cause damage to the door and or door trim pan el Such damage is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Damaged seat belts must be replaced Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Locking Warning A N To prevent possible personal injury always keep hands and fingers away from the door openings when closing the doors Be especially careful when small children are around Before closing doors make sure there is no possibility of someone getting caught in a door during closing Warning A N When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO with you and lock your vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury i If you hear a warning signal you have forgotten to switch off the exterior lamps before opening the driver s door In addition the message Switch off lights appears in the multifunction display Switch off the exterior lamps gt Exit the vehicle and close all doors and the tailgate Locking with the SmartKey gt Press button on the SmartKey gt page 38 With the tailgate and all doors closed the turn signal lamps flash three times The locking knobs on the doors move down The an
361. matic transmission Page 218 232 217 142 143 289 206 o 0 At a glance Center console Item Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp Hazard warning flasher Alarm system indicator lamp Parking assist Parktronic system deactivation switch Electronic Stability Program ESP switch Seat ventilation driver s side Seat heating driver s side Adaptive damping system ADS switch Page 92 431 152 108 294 104 143 142 286 At a glance Center console Lower part Oo Qe Item Storage compartment Armrest storage tray release Armrest storage compart ment release Storage compartment Ashtray with cigarette lighter Cup holders Card ticket holder Bottle opener Page 312 313 313 312 319 316 317 317 At a glance Overhead control panel Y Overhead control panel Item Page Item Page C4 Left reading lamp on off 153 Interior rear view mirror 212 2 Automatic interior lighting 153 QD Reading lamps 153 3 Rear interior lighting on off 153 2 Garage door opener 397 4 Front interior lighting on off 153 3 Vehicles with telephone 330 G Right reading lamp on off 153 installed Nee Hands free microphone for Front right interior lamp 153 TeleAid emergency call Tilt sliding sunroof switch 258 system and telephone Tlt sliding panel switch 261 Front left int
362. mbination switch gt Push the combination switch in gt Switch on the low beam headlamps direction of arrow Q to switch on the high beam gt page 59 The high beam headlamp indicator lamp Ee in the instrument cluster comes on gt page 26 gt Pull out the exterior lamp switch to second stop The rear fog lamp switches on j gt Pullthe combination switch in direction of arrow 2 to its original position to switch off the high beam The yellow indicator lamp in the exterior lamp switch comes on gt page 146 A P54 25 5105 31 The high beam headlamp indicator f so equipped the front fog lamps will also High beam lamp Ee in the instrument cluster ane 2 High beam flasher poe oui gt Push inthe exterior lamp switch to first f stop High beam High beam flasher gt Pull the combination switch briefly in The rear fog lamp switches off gt Canada only Turn the exterior lamp ae direction of arrow 2 The yellow indicator lamp in the switch to position gt page 146 exterior lamp switch goes out or The front fog lamps remain lit gt USA only Turn the exterior lamp switch to position or Mg gt page 146 Corner illuminating front fog lamps The corner illuminating front fog lamps improve illumination of the area in the direction into which you are turning The corner illuminating front fog lamps will operate with the engine running and with e the exterior lamp switch i
363. ment You can separately fold each seat of the rear passenger compartment to expand the cargo compartment A When expanding the cargo compartment always fully fold the corresponding seats and if so equipped always use the partition Warning net gt page 308 when transporting cargo Unless you are transporting cargo the seat backrests must remain properly locked in the upright position In an accident during hard braking or sudden maneuvers loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle and can cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle Always use the cargo tie down rings gt page 299 Controls in detail Warning Never drive vehicle with the tailgate open Deadly carbon monoxide CO gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in uncon sciousness and death T When the second row seats are folded forward the front seats may not be moved to the rearmost position Otherwise you could damage the front and second row seats Expanding cargo compartment in part Folding third row seats gt Completely lower the head restraints of the third row seats a The third row head restraints are adjusted in the same manner as the head restraints of the second row seats gt page 139 Loading oe EE P91 1 oh 1 Seat belt holder 2 Release handle 3 Seat backrest gt gt Place seat belt in seat belt holder Q Pull release handl
364. ment cover blind must be extended for installation behind the second row seats gt page 306 Blind installed behind third row seats 14 Handle 2 Mount Rolling out blind gt Pull blind on handle Q across the cargo compartment gt Guide blind into mounts 2 and release Rolling up blind gt Disengage blind and guide retraction by its handle Removing blind De P68 50 2312 31 Blind installed behind second row seats 1 Release button Blind gt Roll the blind up Push release button 1 gt Pull blind to the left against the spring pressure until the spring in the blind audibly engages gt Remove the blind Installing blind gt For installation behind second row seats install the blind extensions gt page 307 BE For installation behind third row seats the blind extensions must not be installed Otherwise the blind could be damaged gt Remove the covers from the mounts in side trim gt Press on cover at its lower edge as indicated by arrow The mount cover s upper edge flips up Controls in detail gt Remove mount cover by pulling its upper edge out of side trim in direction of arrow To avoid loss of the mount covers keep them in a safe place while not in use e g the glove box gt Place left side of blind gt page 306 in left mount gt Position right side of blind gt page 306 over right mount gt P
365. ment of large heavier objects into the pas senger compartment in an accident Such items must be properly secured using the cargo tie down rings in the cargo compart ment floor gt page 299 Passenger use of seats behind installed partition net is restricted because of the footwell being taken up by the net Use of the partition net is a particularly important safety factor when the vehicle is loaded higher than the top of the seat backrests with smaller objects For your safety always use the partition net when transporting cargo The partition net can be installed in two lo cations j Sige iif P68 50 317 31 1 Holder behind B pillar 2 Holder behind C pillar With the cargo compartment expanded in part gt page 301 use holders behind C pillars 2 and the cargo tie down rings in the third row footwell gt page 300 With the cargo compartment fully expanded gt page 302 use holders behind B pillars and the cargo tie down rings in the second row footwell gt page 300 Open the zipper on the partition net package Roll out the partition net Unfold the partition net The partition net bars must audibly en gage Controls in detail ue LHH MEEL TTE TTET H a8 EL aoi LHAT Partition net installed behind the B pillar 1 Holder 2 Partition net bar gt Hang partition net bar 2 on holder as Indicated by the arrow Push partition net bar 2 forward i
366. mer is running The timer stops gt Press the reset button twice gt page 26 gt Press button ES The timer starts The saved laps are de leted When you turn off the engine the RACETIMER will be reset to O after 30 seconds All laps are deleted Overall analysis Gp These functions are only available if you have saved at least one lap and have stopped the RACETIMER gt Press button or repeatedly until you see the AMG menu gt Press button JM repeatedly until you see the overall analysis Q AT 00 54 2 1 Overall analysis of RACETIMER 2 Overall driving time 3 Maximum speed 4 Overall distance driven 5 Average speed Lap analysis These functions are only available if you have saved at least two laps and have stopped the RACETIMER gt Press button or repeatedly until you see the AMG menu gt Press button JM repeatedly until you see the lap analysis 1 Lap number 2 Lap time 3 Maximum speed 4 Lap length Average speed during lap gt Press button EAN or RA to see other lap analyses Each lap is shown in its own submenu The fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol Q Controls in detail AUDIO menu The functions in the Audio menu operate the audio equipment which you currently have turned on If no audio equipment is currently turned on the message Audio off appears in the multifunction display The following func
367. mittent wipe Problems while driving The coolant temperature is above gt Turn rear window wiper switch C to 2AB ele position 4 gt page 62 The engine runs erratically and misfires The coolant is too hot and is no longer Indicator for the rear window wiper e An ignition cable may be damaged EOONME Me Chee is cleared from the lower multifunction gasoline engine only gt Stop the vehicle in a safe location as display indicating that the rear window soon as possible and turn off the wiper is deactivated engine Allow engine and coolant to cool e The engine electronics may not be operating properly Wiping with windshield washer fluid e Unburned gasoline may have entered the catalytic converter and damaged it gasoline engine only gt Check the coolant level and add gt Turn and hold rear window wiper coolant if necessary gt page 370 switch 1 in position 2 or G gt page 62 until the rear window is gt Give very little gas cam Have the problem repaired by an The rear window wiper operates with authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck washer fluid Center as soon as possible For information on filling up the washer reservoir see Windshield rear window washer system and headlamp cleaning system gt page 372 Getting started Driving In case of accident If the vehicle is leaking fuel gt Do not start the engine under any circumstances gt Notify local fire and or p
368. multifunc tion steering wheel Multifunction display Operating the control system Selecting the submenu or setting the volume Press button up to increase E down to decrease Telephone Press button to take a call to dial to redial to end a call to reject an incoming call Moving within a menu Press button Wag for next display B for previous display Menu systems Press button for next menu for previous menu Voice Control Voice Control Vehicles without Voice Control Button without function Depending on the selected menu pressing the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel will alter what is shown in the multi function display The information available in the multifunc tion display is arranged in menus each containing a number of functions or sub menus The individual functions are then found within the relevant menu radio or CD operations under AUDIO for example These functions serve to call up relevant information or to customize the settings for your vehicle It is helpful to think of the menus and the functions within each menu as being ar ranged in a circular pattern e If you press button or repeatedly you will pass through each menu one after the other e Ifyou press button BV or Bay repeatedly you will pass through each function display one after the other in the current menu Controls in detail Control system In
369. n position gt page 146 or e the exterior lamp switch in position W gt page 146 or e the daytime running lamp mode activated gt page 148 With the automatic headlamp mode activated the corner illuminating front fog lamps will only come on in low ambient lighting condi tions The corner illuminating front fog lamps function is not available at a vehicle speed above 25 mph 40 km h Controls in detail f you are driving faster than 25 mph 40 km h or have the front fog lamps switched on the corner illuminating function Is not available Driving forward Switching on corner illuminating front fog lamps gt Switch on the left or right turn signal gt page 60 depending on whether you are turning left or right The respective front fog lamp comes on and illuminates the area in the direction into which you are turning Or gt Turn steering wheel in desired direc tion The front fog lamp on the side of your steering direction comes on Lighting i If you have switched on the turn signal for one side but turn the steering wheel in the opposite direction the corner illuminating front fog lamp comes on for the side indicated by the turn signal The corner illuminating front fog lamp remains lit for a maximum of three minutes Afterwards it goes out even if the turn signal is still switched on d The corner illuminating front fog lamps tem porarily come on both sides of the v
370. n then press fold button Q gt page 214 again to fold mirrors out Do not force mirrors by hand as this may damage the adjustment mechanism The mirror housing is then properly positioned and you can adjust the mirror in the usual man ner a The memory function gt page 144 lets you store the settings for the exterior rear view mirrors together with the setting for the steering wheel column and the seat positions At low ambient temperatures the exterior rear view mirrors will be heated automatically For more information see Rear view mir rors gt page 212 Getting started Driving Y Driving Warning A N Make sure that absolutely no objects are obstructing the pedal s range of movement Keep the driver s footwell clear of all obsta cles If there are any floormats or carpets in the footwell make sure the pedals still have sufficient clearance During sudden driving or braking maneu vers the objects could get caught between the pedals You could then no longer brake or accelerate This could lead to accidents and injury Fastening the seat belts Warning A N Always fasten your seat belt before driving off Always make sure your passengers are properly restrained even those sitting in the rear and pregnant women Failure to wear and properly fasten and po sition your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident You and your pas
371. n P only when vehicle is stopped The park position is not intended to serve as a brake when the vehi cle is parked Rather the driver should always set the parking brake in addition to shifting into park position P to secure the vehicle If the vehicle s electrical system is malfunctioning the automatic transmission could remain locked in park position P gt Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible by an autho rized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Automatic transmission T SmartKey Ifyou turn off the engine using the SmartKey and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch the transmission will shift to park position P automatically Keep in mind that turning off the engine with the SmartKey alone will not automat ically shift the transmission to park position P Only when the SmartKey is removed from the starter switch will the transmission automat ically shift to park position P KEYLESS GO If you turn off the engine using the KEYLESS GO start stop button and open the driver s door the transmission will shift to park position P auto matically Keep in mind that turning off the engine using the KEYLESS GO start stop button alone will not automatically shift the trans mission to park position P Only when the driver s door is opened will the transmission automatically shift to park position P Even though this is possible make it a practice to always shift into park position P before turning o
372. n acoustic warning sounds there is a malfunction in the Parktronic system The Parktronic system will auto matically switch off after 20 seconds and the indicator lamp in the Parktronic switch comes on gt Have the Parktronic system checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible If only the red distance segments illumi nate and no acoustic warning sounds the Parktronic system sensors are dirty e g slush snow or ice or there is an interfer ence from other radio or ultrasonic signals e g working jackhammers car wash or the air brakes of trucks The Parktronic system will automatically switch off after 20 seconds and the indicator lamp in the Parktronic switch comes on gt Switch off the ignition gt page 39 gt Clean the Parktronic system sensors gt page 414 gt Switch on the ignition gt page 39 or gt Check the Parktronic system operation at another location to rule out interfer ence from outside radio or ultrasonic signals Rear view camera Warning A N The rear view camera is only an aid and may display obstacles from a distorted perspec tive or inaccurately or may not display ob stacles at all The rear view camera does not relieve you of the responsibility to be cau tious take care and pay careful attention The rear view camera may not show objects which are e very close to the rear bumper e under the rear bumper e above the tailgate handle
373. n number model color and location subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals i While the call is connected you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAV button on the COMAND system headunit A voice connection between the Customer Assistance Center representative and the occupants of the vehicle will be estab lished Information regarding the operation of your vehicle the nearest Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center or Mercedes Benz USA products and services is available to you For more details concerning the Tele Aid system please visit www mbusa com and use your ID and password sent to you sep arately to learn more USA only Controls in detail a The indicator lamp in the Information button remains illuminated in red for approximately 10 seconds during the system self check after switching on the ignition together with the SOS button and the Roadside Assistance button j See system self check gt page 331 if the indicator lamp does not come on in red or stays on longer than approximately 10 seconds If the indicator lamp in the Information button is flashing continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an Information call e g the relevant cellular phone network is not available The message Call failed appears in the multifunction display Information calls can be terminated using the button on th
374. n steep downgrades e in mountainous regions e under extreme operating conditions The transmission operates in first gear only For maximum use of engine s braking effect on very steep or lengthy downgrades Controls in detail Automatic transmission Automatic shift program The selected program mode appears in the multifunction display The program mode selector switch is located on the upper part of the center console 1 Current program mode Program mode selector switch T Never change the program mode when the RO FAMG ONY automatic transmission is out of park position P M Manual For manual gear shifting This could result in a change of driving character SN gt page 209 istics for which you may not be prepared Comfort For standard driving The last selected program mode C or is Program mode selector switch S Sport E ey switched on when the engine is restarted C Comfort For comfort driving pa E SAE aa S Sport For standard driving Press program mode selector switch repeatedly until the letter of the desired program mode appears in the multifunction display Select C for comfort driving R 63 AMG standard driving The vehicle starts out in second gear both forward and reverse for gentler starts This does not apply if full throttle is applied or gear range 1 is selected Traction and driving stability are improved on icy roads Upshifts occur earlier even when you giv
375. n two ways i When you use the cruise control lever to decelerate the brake system will automatically brake the vehicle if the engine s braking power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently Adjustment in 1 mph Canada 1 km h increments i The set speed value is decreased in 1 mph Canada 1 km h increments each time you press the cruise control lever down to the resistance point gt Briefly press the cruise control lever down to the resistance point in direction of arrow 2 gt page 276 gt Release the cruise control lever The vehicle set speed decreases in in crements of 1 mph Canada 1 km h Controls in detail Adjustment in 5 mph Canada 10 km h increments A You can decrease the vehicle set speed in 5 mph Canada 10 km h increments When using this feature keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has reached the set speed Warning Decelerate the vehicle set speed to a value that the prevailing road conditions permit Otherwise sudden and unexpected deceler ation of the vehicle could cause an accident and or serious injury to you and others i The set speed value is decreased in 5 mph Canada 10 km h increments each time you press the cruise control lever down past the resistance point Driving systems gt Briefly press the cruise control lever down past the resistance point in direction of arrow 2 gt page 276 gt Release the cruise control
376. nable to gt As soon as the causes of the malfunction have been currently unavailable monitor the tire pressure due to removed the TPMS or Advanced TPMS automati cally becomes active again after a few minutes e anearby radio interference source driving e excessive wheel sensor temperatures Symbol messages Display symbol Display message Practical hints What to do if Possible cause consequence Possible solution The battery is no longer charg ing Possible causes e alternator malfunctioning e broken poly V belt Do not forget that the brake system requires electrical energy and may be operating with restricted capability Considerably greater brake pedal force is required and the stopping distance is increased gt Stop ina safe location or as soon as it is safe to do so and check the poly V belt If itis broken gt Do not continue to drive Otherwise the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center If itis intact gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center immediately Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced braking responsiveness Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Possible cause consequence Possible solution Battery Alternator The battery is defective Stop vehicle O Brake wear The brake pads have reached t
377. nce the opening procedure has begun The windows and tilt sliding sunroof continue opening until they have reached their previous positions The indicator lamp on the button goes out The air recirculation mode is deactivated Vehicles with panorama roof Convenience closing gt Press and hold button until the windows and the tilt sliding panel are closed or have reached the desired position The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air recirculation mode is activated gt gt Controls in detail Climate control gt gt Convenience opening gt Press and hold button until the windows and the tilt sliding panel are opened or have reached the desired position The indicator lamp on the button goes out The air recirculation mode is deactivated Air conditioning The air conditioning is operational while the engine is running and cools the interior air to the temperature set by the operator In addition the air conditioning dehumidi fies the interior air at outside temperatures above 41 F 5 C and helps prevent window fogging i Condensation may drip out from underneath the vehicle This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction A If you turn off the cooling function the inte rior air is not dried The windows can fog up more quickly Window fogging may impair visibility and endanger you and others Warning Deactivating It is possible to deactivate the air condi ti
378. nd wheels gt page 373 Hydroplaning Depending on the depth of the water layer on the road hydroplaning may occur even at low speeds and with new tires Reduce vehicle speed avoid track grooves in the road and apply brakes cautiously in the rain Tire traction The safe speed on a wet snow covered or icy road is always lower than on a dry road You should pay particular attention to the condition of the road whenever the outside temperatures are close to the freezing point VAN If ice has formed on the road tire traction will be substantially reduced Under such weather conditions drive steer and brake with extreme caution Warning Operation Mercedes Benz recommends winter tires gt page 405 with a minimum tread depth of approximately in 4 mm on all four wheels for the winter season to ensure normal balanced handling characteristics On packed snow they can reduce your stopping distance compared to summer tires Stopping distance however is still consid erably greater than when the road is not covered with snow or ice Exercise appro priate caution T Avoid spinning of a drive wheel This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Driving instructions Tire speed rating Regardless of the tire speed rating local speed limits should be obeyed Use prudent driving speeds appropriate to prevailing conditions A
379. ng gt Fold seat backrest up and push back wards until it audibly engages A second row seat is properly locked only when lock status indicator Q is in hinged position and red marking 2 is barely visible gt page 135 A After installing top tether straps make sure Warning e the seats are properly locked e the seat backrests are in an upright po sition and are properly locked A second row seat is properly locked only when lock status indicator Q is in hinged position and red marking 2 is barely visible gt page 135 If a seat and seat backrest are not properly locked the seat could move forward and the seat backrest could fold The child seat would no longer be properly supported or positioned to provide its intended benefit That could cause serious or even fatal injuries gt Lower the head restraint if necessary gt page 139 Make sure the top tether strap can pass freely between the head restraint and top of seat backrest gt Install the child restraint system and tighten the top tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions Safety and Security Blocking of rear door window operation With the override switch you can disable the rear side window switches in the rear door panels A Activate the override switch when children are riding in the back seats of the vehicle The children could otherwise injure them selves e g by becoming trappe
380. ning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabili ties of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Warning T Operational or performance test must only be conducted on a two axle dynamometer If such tests are necessary contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center You could otherwise seriously damage the brake system or the transfer case which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Driving safety systems T Because the ESP operates automatically the engine and ignition must be shut off SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS GO start stop button in position 0 or 1 when testing the brakes on a brake test dynamometer and such testing should be no longer than 10 seconds Active braking action through ESP may other wise seriously damage the brake system which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty ap The ESP will only function properly if you use wheels of the recommended tire size gt page 532 For more information see the Practical hints section gt page 425 and gt page 441 Safety and Security Driving safety systems Switching off the ESP AN Warning The ESP should not be switched off during normal driving other than in the circum stances described below Disabling of the sys
381. ning solvents or cockpit care sprays to clean the cockpit or the steering wheel Cleaners containing sol vents will make the surface porous and vehi cle occupants could suffer serious injuries from plastic parts coming loose in the event of air bag deployment Warning Hard plastic trim items gt Use Mercedes Benz approved Interior Care a soft lint free cloth and apply with light pressure T Never apply strong force and only use a soft non scratching cloth when cleaning the surface Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry cloth or sponge Otherwise you may scratch or damage the surface Steering wheel gt Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thor oughly or clean with Mercedes Benz approved Leather Care Carpets gt Use Mercedes Benz approved Carpet and Fabric Care for cleaning the carpets Operation Headliner gt Usea soft bristle brush or a dry shampoo cleaner in case of excessive dirt Seat belts gt Only use clear lukewarm water and soap i The seat belts must not be treated with chemical cleaning agents Do not dry the seat belts at temperatures above 176 F 80 C or in direct sunlight A Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection Warning Vehicle care Upholstery Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing clothing that have the tendency to give off coloring e g when wet etc ma
382. not bead up This should normally be done every 3 to 5 months de pending on the climate and washing deter gent used Mercedes Benz approved Paint Cleaner should be applied if the paint surface shows signs of dirt embedding i e loss of gloss Do not apply any of these products or wax if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hood is still hot gt Use the appropriate MB Touch Up Stick for quick and provisional repairs of minor paint damage i e chips from stones vehicle doors etc Operation Vehicle care Engine cleaning Prior to cleaning the engine compartment make sure to protect electrical compo nents and connectors from the intrusion of water and cleaning agents Corrosion protection such as MB Anticor rosion Wax should be applied to the en gine compartment after every engine cleaning Before applying all control link age bushings and joints should be lubricat ed The poly V belt and all pulleys should be protected from any wax Vehicle washing In the winter thoroughly remove all traces of road salt as soon as possible When washing the vehicle underbody do not forget to clean the inner sides of the wheels Vehicles with KEYLESS GO Ifa door handle is hit by a strong jet of water and a SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is in close proximity i e within approximately 3 ft approximately 1 m the vehicle could be inadvertently locked or unlocked Hand wash Do not use
383. not to exceed 30 mph 50 km h Keep in mind that it is important for the SmartKey to be in the respective starter switch positions as described above As soon as the SmartKey is removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is removed from the vehicle the automatic transmission will shift to park position P see Starter switch posi tions gt page 39 Practical hints Towing the vehicle T Towing of the vehicle should only be done Installing towing eye bolt using the towing eye Never attach tow cable tow rope or tow rod to vehicle chassis frame or Depending on whether you are towing a suspension parts vehicle or you are being towed the towing eye bolt can be screwed into threaded When towing the vehicle with all wheels on 6 holes which are located behind covers on the ground note the following the right hand side of each bumper With the automatic central locking activated and the ignition in position 2 gt page 39 the vehicle doors lock if the left front wheel is turning at a speed of approx 9 mph 15 km h or above al PB8 20 2612 31 To prevent the vehicle doors from locking Example illustration R 500 deactivate the automatic central locking gt page 130 1 Towing eye cover un A Warning A N i l l P88 20 2611 31 In order to avoid possible serious burns or switch for left or right turn signal in usual manner injury use extreme caution when removing
384. nt cluster come on If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to come on when the ignition is switched on have it checked and replaced if necessary If a lamp in the instrument cluster remains on after starting the engine or comes on while driving refer to Lamps in instrument cluster gt page 420 Ge If you now press the KEYLESS GO start stop button once more the power supply is again switched off When you switch on the ignition the indicator and warning lamps except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indica tor lamps unless activated in the instrument cluster come on The indicator and warning lamps except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps if activated will go out when the engine is running This indicates that the respective systems are operational For information on starting the engine using the KEYLESS GO start stop button see Starting with KEYLESS GO gt page 55 For more information on KEYLESS GO see SmartKey with KEYLESS GO gt page 116 Getting started Adjusting Vv Adjusting Warning A N All seat head restraint steering wheel and rear view mirror adjustments as well as fastening of seat belts must be done before the vehicle is put into motion Seats Warning A N Do not adjust the driver s seat while driving Adjusting the seat while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Never ri
385. nt door window 3 Right rear door window 4 Hinged quarter windows Override switch gt page 97 6 Left rear door window gt Switch on the ignition gt page 39 Power windows Warning A N When closing the windows make sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure Activate the override switch gt page 97 when children are riding in the back seats of the vehicle The children could otherwise in jure themselves e g by becoming trapped in the window opening The closing of a door window can be imme diately halted by releasing the switch or if switch was pulled past the resistance point and released by either pressing or pulling the respective switch If a door window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you pulled the switch past the resistance point and released it to close the door win dow the automatic reversal function will stop the door window and open it slightly b gt b gt Controls in detail Power windows If a door window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you are closing a door window by pulling and holding the switch or by pressing and hold ing button on the SmartKey by press ing and holding the lock button vehicles with KEYLESS GO on the door handle the automatic reversal function will not operate When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey
386. nt fog lamp bulb socket gt Remove retaining screw s 3 gt All models except R 63 AMG Insert a suitable object e g screwdriver at point indicated by the arrow and pry out cover 2 R 63 AMG only An additional adapter cable is used to connect the bulb socket with the vehicle s electrical circuit Reuse the adapter cable after replacing the bulb Cover 2 is released Example illustration R 63 AMG gt Swing cover 2 outwards and take it off gt R63 AMG Take off cover 2 4 Retaining screws vv viv vy Turn bulb socket 6 counterclockwise Pull bulb socket out of the housing Pull the bulb out of bulb socket Insert the new corner illuminating front fog lamp bulb into bulb socket Insert bulb socket into the housing Turn bulb socket clockwise until it engages Insert corner illuminating front fog lamp Q back into bumper Fasten retaining screws 4 Reinsert cover 2 and press it in until it engages Fasten retaining screw s Practical hints Additional turn signal lamps bulbs The additional turn signal lamps in the exterior rear view mirrors have LEDs If a malfunction occurs or LEDs fail to function the entire turn signal unit must be replaced Have the turn signal unit re placed by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Front side marker lamp bulbs Since replacing the side marker lamp bulbs is a technically
387. nt or similar situation Children in the vehicle If an infant or child is traveling with you in the vehicle e Secure the child using an infant or child restraint appropriate to the age and size of the child e Make sure the infant or child is proper ly secured at all times while the vehicle is in motion Warning A N Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle even if they are secured in a child restraint system The children could e injure themselves on parts of the vehicle e be seriously or fatally injured through excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight The child restraint system s metal parts for example could become very hot and the child could be burned on these parts If children open a door they could e injure other persons e get out of the car and injure themselves or be injured by following traffic Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the passenger or cargo compartment unless they are firmly secured in place For more in formation please refer to the Loading gt page 297 and Useful features gt page 311 sections in the Controls in detail chapter Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo increases a child s risk of injury in the event of e strong braking maneuvers e sudden changes of direction e anaccident Safety and Security Infant and child restraint systems We recommend all infa
388. nt wiping Only switch on intermittent wiping under wet weather conditions or in the presence of precipitation When you select intermittent wiping the rain sensor is activated The rain sensor automatically sets a suitable wiping interval depending on the wetness of the sensor surface BS Do not leave windshield wipers in intermit tent setting when the vehicle is taken to an auto matic car wash or during windshield cleaning Wipers will operate in the presence of water sprayed on the windshield and windshield wipers may be damaged as a result T If you have set intermittent wiping dirt on the surface of the rain sensor or optical effects may cause the windshield wipers to wipe in an undesired fashion This could then damage the windshield wiper blades or scratch the windows You should therefore switch off the windshield wipers when weather conditions are dry gt Turn the combination switch to position B or Eg Getting started Driving After the initial wipe pauses between wipes are automatically controlled by the rain sensor Ge Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the vehicle is at a standstill and a front door is opened This protects persons getting into or out of the vehicle from being sprayed Intermittent wiping will be continued when e all doors are closed and e the automatic transmission is set to position DorR or e the wiper setting is changed using the combination switch Single wipe
389. ntegrated into the SmartKey On these vehicles the validity of the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is checked when you grasp an outside door handle If the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is valid your vehicle unlocks e the doors e the tailgate e the fuel filler flap P80 35 2285 31 SmartKey with KEYLESS GO Lock button Unlock button for tailgate 3 Locking tab for mechanical key 4 Unlock button Battery check lamp 6 Panic button gt page 99 A When leaving the vehicle always take the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unat tended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Warning T To prevent possible malfunction avoid exposing the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO to high levels of electromagnetic radiation USA only This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Canada only This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may no
390. nto holder in direction of arrow Loading footwell 1 Belt hook 2 Cargo tie down ring 3 Tightening belt gt Hook belt hook 1 into cargo tie down ring 2 in direction of arrow gt Pull tightening belt by the loose end in direction of arrow until the partition net is pulled tight gt After driving a short distance make sure the partition net is still tight and if necessary pull it tight again Controls in detail Loading Removing and storing the partition net gt Take partition net bar 2 out of holder Q see Installing the partition net gt page 309 gt Press the red button on the upper and lower partition net bar Fold the partition net Roll up the partition net Close the zipper on partition net package footwell C Buckle 2 Belt hook 3 Cargo tie down ring gt Loosen the tightening belt by pulling buckle Q upward in direction of arrow gt Remove belt hook 2 from cargo tie down ring Vv Useful features Storage compartments A Warning To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver exercise care when storing objects in the vehicle Put luggage or cargo in the cargo compartment if possible Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat backs Always use partition net when transporting cargo Partition net cannot secure hard or heavy objects Parcel nets cannot secure hard or heavy object
391. ntrate MB SummerFit to water Premix the windshield washer fluid in a suitable container A Washer solvent antifreeze is highly flamma ble Do not spill washer solvent antifreeze on hot engine parts because it may ignite and burn You could be seriously burned Warning gt Use the tab to pull cap G upwards Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Washer Concentrate MB SummerFit and water or commercially available premixed windshield washer sol vent antifreeze depending on ambient temperatures BE Always use washer solvent antifreeze where temperatures may fall below freezing point Failure to do so could result in damage to the washer system reservolr BE Only use washer fluid which is suitable for plastic lenses Improper washer fluid can damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps For more information see Windshield and headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio gt page 546 YV Tires and wheels See an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center for information on tested and recommended rims and tires for summer and winter operation They can also offer advice concerning tire service and purchase Warning A N Replace rims or tires with the same designa tion manufacturer and type as shown on the original part See an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center for further information If incorrectly sized rims and tires are mounted e The wheel brakes or suspension components can be
392. ntrol other functions of the mobile phone via the control system gt page 193 or COMAND system see separate operat ing instructions i When you take the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO out of the starter switch the mobile phone remains switched on for approx 10 minutes If you place or receive a call during this time the mobile phone switches off 10 min utes after the call has been completed Removing mobile phone from mobile phone cradle P82 70 5735 31 Example illustration 1 Release catch for mobile phone 2 Mobile phone cradle ae When using a flip style mobile phone open flip top before removing from the cradle while a call is connected Otherwise the call will be disconnected gt Press release catch in direction of arrow 1 and take mobile phone out of mobile phone cradle 2 Controls in detail Changing mobile phone cradle If you require a different cradle for your mobile phone remove the present cradle before installing a new one Removing an existing mobile phone cradle P82 70 5736 31 Example illustration 1 To release the mobile phone cradle 2 To remove the mobile phone cradle 3 Mobile phone cradle Useful features gt Press release button in direction of arrow 1 and take mobile phone cradle 3 out in direction of arrow 2 Installing a different mobile phone cradle PB2 70 5737 31 Example illustration 1 Contact plate 2 Recesses 3 Mobile
393. ntrol system will corre spondingly adjust the interior air temperature Decreasing gt Turn temperature control Q and or 7 gt page 220 slightly counterclock wise The climate control system will corre spondingly adjust the interior air temperature Climate control Adjusting air distribution Press air distribution button 9 or gt page 220 to adjust the air distribution The following symbols are found on the buttons Symbol Function Directs air through the center and side air vents Directs air to the windshield and side air vents Directs air to the footwells and side air vents gt Press the desired air distribution button or G0 gt page 220 The indicator lamp on button Big goes out Controls in detail Climate control Adjusting air volume Five blower speeds are available gt Press button to decrease or button to increase air volume gt page 220 to the desired level The indicator lamp on button MAg gt page 220 goes out The automatic operation of air volume switches off The selected blower speed is shown in the air volume display 1 gt page 220 Adjusting air volume for the center and side air vents Opening the center air vents gt Turn thumbwheels and gt page 218 upward The corresponding center air vents on the left and right are open Closing the center air vents gt Turn thumbwheels and gt page
394. nts and children be properly restrained at all times while the vehicle is in motion All lap shoulder belts except the driver s seat belt have special seat belt retractors for secure fastening of child restraints To fasten a child restraint follow child restraint instructions for mounting Then pull the shoulder belt out completely and let it retract During seat belt retraction a ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate that the special seat belt retractor is acti vated The belt is now locked Push down on child restraint to take up any slack To deactivate release seat belt buckle and let seat belt retract completely To deacti vate the special seat belt retractor for the front passenger seat the front passenger seat must be in the most backward posi tion The seat belt can again be used in the usual manner Occupant safety Warning VAN Never release the seat belt buckle while the vehicle is in motion since the special seat belt retractor will be deactivated g Forinformation on child seats with mounting fittings for tether anchorages see Installation of infant and child restraint system gt page 95 For information on LATCH type child seat mounts see Child seat anchors LATCH type gt page 93 The use of infant or child restraints is re quired by law in all 50 states the District of Columbia the U S territories and all Canadian provinces Safety and Security Occupant safet
395. nu Controls in detail Control system gt Press button Yg or EAN repeatedly Calling up digital speedometer or You can select whether the digital speed until the coolant temperature appears outside temperature ometer or the outside temperature is to be in the multifunction display gt Press button IRE or PA repeatedly displayed until the digital soeedometer or the outside temperature appears in the multifunction display You can change the setting in the submenu Instr cluster via the function Status line display see Selecting display digital speea ometer or outside temperature for status indicator gt page 180 T Excessive coolant temperature triggers a warning message in the multifunction display page 455 The engine should not be operated with a coolant temperature above 248 F 120 C Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty During severe operating conditions e g stop and go city traffic the coolant temperature may rise close to 248 F 120 C Outside temperature Controls in detail Control system AMG menu Use buttons BV or RAN to select the fol Vehicle supply voltage lowing functions in the AMG menu E Pecho ai repeatedly This function is only available in AMG vehicles Function Page until you see the AMG menu I ly until The main screen of the AMG menu shows Vehicle supply voltage Mee d Press b
396. nz service network at your disposal If you plan to drive into areas which are not listed in the index of your Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center directory you should request pertinent information from an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Operation Driving instructions Control and operation of radio Telephones and two way radios Catalytic converter gasoline engine transmitters A Your vehicle is equipped with monolith ic type catalytic converters an important element in conjunction with the oxygen sensors to achieve substantial control of the pollutants in the exhaust emissions Keep your vehicle in proper operating con dition by following our recommended maintenance instructions as outlined in your Maintenance Booklet Warning COMAND system radio and telephone Never operate radio transmitters equipped A with a built in or attached antenna i e with out being connected to an external antenna from inside the vehicle while the engine is running Doing so could lead to a malfunc tion of the vehicle s electronic system possibly resulting in an accident and or Warning Do not forget that your primary respon sibility is to drive the vehicle Only operate the COMAND system radio or telephone if road weather and traffic conditions permit a personal injury BE 70 prevent damage to the catalytic convert Bear in mind that at a speed of just ers use only premium unleaded gasoline in this 30 mph
397. o stop the clos ing procedure do one of the following Warning e Press tailgate closing switch Q e Press the button on the SmartKey e Press or pull the remote tailgate switch on the driver s door b gt Controls in detail Locking and unlocking gt D Even with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch the tailgate closing switch can be operated Therefore do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsuper vised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Warning A N Only drive with the tailgate closed as among other dangers such as blocked visibility exhaust fumes may enter the vehi cle interior Do not place the SmartKey in the open car go compartment You may lock yourself out If the vehicle was previously centrally locked the tailgate will lock automatically after closing it The turn signals will flash three times to confirm locking Closing the tailgate and locking the vehicle from the outside vehicles with KEYLESS GO In vehicles with power tailgate and KEYLESS GO you can close the tailgate and lock the vehicle simultaneously from the outside using the KEYLESS GO lock ing closing switch or the button on the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO j Cari 7 NS A SAE 1 Tailgate closing switch 2 KEYLESS GO locking closing switch Warning A N Monitor the closing proce
398. obstacle proceeding directly ahead of it in the same travel direction is detected e g following another vehicle ahead of you at your set distance This means that e Your vehicle can pass another vehicle after you have changed lanes e While in a sharp turn or if the preceding vehicle is ina sharp turn Distronic could lose sight of the preceding vehicle Your vehicle could then accelerate to the previously selected speed Distronic regulates only the distance be tween your vehicle and those directly ahead of it but does not register stationary objects in the road e g e a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam e a disabled vehicle e an oncoming vehicle The driver must always be alert observe all traffic and intercede as required by means of steering or braking the vehicle Warning A N Distronic should not be used in snowy or icy road conditions The most likely cause for a malfunctioning system is a dirty sensor located behind the hood grille especially at times of snow and ice or heavy rain In such a case Distronic will switch off and the message DISTRONIC currently unavailable See Operator s Manual appears in the multi function display For cleaning and care of the Distronic sen sor see Cleaning the Distronic system sensor cover gt page 414 if the message DISTRONIC available again appears during driving the dirt e g slush has dissolved Distronic works again if you reactivate it
399. off the engine gt page 67 Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch Vehicles with KEYLESS GO The electrical fuses are located in different fuse boxes fuses may cause an overload leading to a fire and or cause damage to electrical components and or systems Have the e cause determined and remedied by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center gt Open the drivers door this puts the starter switch to position O same as with the SmartKey re moved from starter switch The driver s door can then be closed again on the passenger side of the engine compartment gt page 521 e inthe cargo compartment gt page 521 e inthe passenger compartment i A blown fuse must be replaced by an appro gt page 522 priate spare fuse recognizable by its color or the fuse rating given on the fuse of the amperage recommended in the fuse chart Any Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center will be glad to advise you on this subject Fuse box in engine compartment E E The main fuse box is located on the pas senger side of the engine compartment gt Open the hood gt page 364 Ey ea Pi ta Clamp 2 Main fuse box cover Practical hints gt Release clamp Q gt Lift fuse box cover 2 up gt Install fuse box cover in reverse order i The fuse box cover must be installed properly to prevent moisture and or dirt from entering the fuse box and possibly impairing fus
400. ogrammed a signal transmitter button and wish to retain its programming proceed to step 3 If you are programming the integrated remote control for the first time press and hold the two outer signal transmitter buttons 2 and and release them only when indicator lamp Q begins to flash after approxi mately 20 seconds do not hold the button for longer than 30 seconds This procedure erases any previous settings for all three channels and ini tializes the memory If you later wish to program a second and or third hand held transmitter to the remaining two signal transmitter buttons do not repeat this step and begin directly with step 3 Step 3 gt Hold the end of the hand held remote control of the device you wish to train approximately 2 to 5 in 5 to12 cm away from the signal trans mitter button or to be pro grammed while keeping indicator lamp in view Step 4 gt Using both hands simultaneously press hand held remote control button 6 and the desired signal trans mitter button or Do not release the buttons until step 5 is com pleted Indicator lamp Q will flash first slowly and then rapidly Indicator lamp flashes immediately the first time the signal transmitter button is programmed If this button has already been programmed the indicator lamp will only start flashing after 20 seconds Controls in detail Step 5 p gt After indicator lamp Q
401. ol will not cool the air when the air conditioning is switched off gt page 243 Increasing the temperature gt Turn temperature control gt page 245 slightly clockwise The rear automatic climate control will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature for the rear passenger compartment Decreasing the temperature gt Turn temperature control gt page 245 slightly counterclock wise The rear automatic climate control will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature for the rear passenger compartment Adjusting air volume Adjusting manually Five blower speeds are available gt Press button to decrease or button to increase air volume to the desired level The indicator lamp on button A goes out The selected blower speed is shown by the indicator lamps for air volume settings Q gt page 245 Adjusting automatically gt Press button Rg The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air volume is adjusted automatically B pillar air vents Air vents are located in both B pillars ge L Ca Z ae ESE a r o Y A A AE a y NN Q Air vent adjustable 2 Thumbwheel for air volume control Adjusting air volume gt Turn thumbwheel 2 to the left to increase the air volume or gt Turn thumbwheel 2 to the right to decrease the air volume Controls in detail 3 zone automatic climate control Adjusting air distribution Air vents
402. olice authori ties If the extent of the damage cannot be determined gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center If no damage can be determined on the e major assemblies e fuel system e engine mount gt Start the engine in the usual manner Y Parking and locking You have now completed your first drive You have properly stopped and parked your vehicle End your drive as follows Warning A N With the engine not running there is no power assistance for the brake and the steering system In this case it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle Warning AN Do not park this vehicle in areas where com bustible materials such as grass hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of vehicle movement before turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle always e Keep right foot on brake pedal e Firmly depress parking brake pedal e Shift the automatic transmission to position P e Slowly release brake pedal e When parked on an incline turn front wheel towards the road curb Getting started Parking and locking Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch or press the start stop button vehicles with KEYL
403. ompartment vehicle is raised Be certain that the jack is gt Push crank handle up The vehicle jack should be fully col always vertical plumb line when in use lapsed especially on hills Always try to use the jack Ben a e The handle must be folded in storage position Make sure the Jack arm is fully seated in the jack take up bracket Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before working under the vehicle Practical hints Where will I find Setting up the collapsible wheel chock Tilt both plates upward Q Spare wheel The collapsible wheel chock serves to ad gt Fold the lower plate outward 2 ditionally secure the vehicle e g while Guide the tabs of the lower plate all the ings changing the wheel p Warning A way into the openings of base plate 3 The dimensions of the spare wheel are different from those of the road wheels As a result the vehicle handling characteristics change when driving with a spare wheel mounted Adapt your driving style accord ingly The spare wheel is for temporary use only When driving with a spare wheel mounted ensure proper tire inflation pressure and do not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph 80 km h For information on where to place wheel chocks when changing a wheel see Lift ing the vehicle gt page 498 Drive to the nearest Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible to have the spare wheel repl
404. ompass Calibration appears in the multifunction display again Calibrating the compass has failed due to outside influences Repeat compass calibration in a different location Audio search function Use of the Audio search function to select a radio station gt page 171 will enable you to start a frequency scan Freq or select a radio station stored in memory Memory gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Vehicle submenu gt Press button EAN or Re repeatedly until the message Audio Search function appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Audio Search Function Memory Ty alh66 gt Press button ES or E to select Freq or Memory Setting automatic locking Use this function to activate or deactivate the automatic central locking With the automatic central locking system activated the vehicle is centrally locked at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph 15 km h gt Move the selection marker with button or MMM to the Vehicle Submenu gt Press button JA or Red repeatedly until the message Automatic door lock appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Automatic door lock AN 0 o gt Press button or E to switch the automatic central locking On or Off Limiting opening height of tailgate Use this function to activate or deactivate the limiting opening heig
405. on of bubbles in the system thus reducing the system s efficiency Therefore the brake fluid must be replaced regularly Refer to your vehicle s Maintenance Booklet for replacement interval Only brake fluid approved by Mercedes Benz is recommended Your authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center will provide you with additional information Premium unleaded gasoline gasoline engine Warning A N Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous It burns violently and can cause serious injury Never allow sparks flame or smoking mate rials near gasoline Turn off the engine before refueling Whenever you are around gasoline avoid in haling fumes and skin or clothing contact extinguish all smoking materials Direct skin contact with gasoline and the in halation of gasoline vapors are damaging to your health Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc T To maintain the engine s durability and per formance premium unleaded gasoline must be used If premium unleaded is not available and low octane fuel is used follow these precau tions Have the fuel tank only partially filled with unleaded regular and fill up with premium unleaded as soon as possible Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceler ation Do not exceed an engine speed of 3000 rom if the vehicle is loaded with a light load such as two persons and no luggage Do not exceed of maximum accelerator pedal position i
406. oning cooling function of the climate control system The air in the vehicle will then no longer be cooled or dehumidified gt Press button gt page 220 The indicator lamp on the button goes out Activating Moist air can fog up the windows You can dehumidify the air with the air condition ing gt Press button gt page 220 again The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air conditioning uses the refrigerant R134a This refrigerant is free of CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer BB if the air conditioning cannot be turned on again this indicates that the air conditioning is losing refrigerant The compressor has turned off Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Residual heat and ventilation With the engine switched off it is possible to continue to heat or ventilate the interior for up to 30 minutes This feature makes use of the residual heat produced by the engine i How long the system will provide heating depends on e the coolant temperature e the battery voltage Regardless of the temperature and air volume set on the climate control panel an interior tem perature is aimed at by 72 F 22 C and the blower runs on low speed to protect the vehicle battery Activating gt Switch off the ignition gt page 39 gt Press button gt page 220 The indicator lamp on the button comes on Deactivating g
407. ont side marker lamp gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz is malfunctioning Light Truck Center as soon as possible The front left parking lamp is gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible malfunctioning A substitute gt page 484 bulb is being used The front right parking lamp is gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible malfunctioning A substitute gt page 484 bulb is being used The left rear fog lamp is malfunc gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible tioning gt page 484 The left backup lamp is gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible malfunctioning gt page 484 The right backup lamp is gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible malfunctioning gt page 484 Display symbol 10 oe I Display message e ey Wi laes Switven OTT 1 Ginits or remove key Tail lamp Lei Tail lamp Right Practical hints What to do if Possible cause consequence Possible solution You have removed the SmartKey Turn the exterior lamp switch to WJ from the starter switch and gt page 146 opened the driver s door or removed the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the vehicle and left the headlamps on You have opened the drivers Turn the exterior lamp switch to WJ door while the exterior lamp gt page 146 switch is in position Big and or the SmartKey is still in the starter switch gt Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch The parking lamps are still on The left
408. ontact the environment if disposed of improperly If you do not intend to operate your vehicle with skin eyes or clothing meeyelne SRDalieHe pele prerenred l l l l method of disposal Many states require for an extended period of time consult an Wear suitable protective cloth i sellers of batteries to accept old batteries authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck ing especially gloves apron and f i Center about steps you need to observe faceguard S T The battery is a valve regulated lead acid VRLA battery also referred to as fleece battery Such batteries do not require topping up of the electrolyte level VRLA batteries therefore do not have cell caps and the battery cover is non removable Do not attempt to open the battery as otherwise the battery will be dam aged Even though VRLA batteries do not require topping up of the electrolyte level and cannot be opened to check the electrolyte level the battery condition must be checked periodically by performing a battery conductance test Refer to Maintenance Booklet for battery condition testing intervals As with any other battery the battery may discharge if the vehicle is not operated for an extended period of time You can connect a battery maintenance charge unit tested and approved for use on your vehicle model or dis connected the battery to prevent battery dis charge Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center for more information Prac
409. or brake failure Checking tire inflation pressure manually Follow the steps below to achieve correct tire inflation pressure gt Remove the cap from the valve on one tire gt Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve gt Read tire inflation pressure on tire gauge and check against the recom mended tire inflation pressure on the placard on the driver s door B pillar gt page 376 or if available the inside of the fuel filler flap If necessary add air to achieve the recommended tire in flation pressure amp If you have overfilled the tire release tire in flation pressure by pushing the metal stem of the valve with e g a tip of a pen Then recheck the tire inflation pressure with the tire gauge gt Install the valve cap gt Repeat this procedure for each tire Run Flat Indicator Canada only While the vehicle is being driven the Run Flat Indicator monitors the set tire inflation pressures by evaluating each wheel s rota tional speed This allows the system to de tect a significant loss of pressure in a tire If a wheel s rotational speed changes due to falling tire inflation pressure you will see a corresponding warning message in the multifunction display The Run Flat Indicator may function in a re stricted manner or with a delay e if snow chains are mounted to the vehicle e in presence of ice and snow e if you are driving on a loose surface e g sand or gravel e if
410. or an accessory battery charge unit approved by Mercedes Benz must be connected using the jump start contacts in the engine compartment see separate instructions for the accessory battery charge unit before any of the following steps can be performed If the battery cannot be jumped or charged please contact an autho rized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center gt Set the automatic transmission to position P gt page 199 gt Firmly depress the parking brake gt page 66 Turn off the engine gt page 67 gt Leave the ignition switched on gt page 39 If the vehicle battery is discharged and you had the vehicle jump started e Leave the engine running e Complete step 1 starting with switching off all electrical consumers e Continue with step 2 e When the font passenger seat is in the most forward position turn off the engine Switch off all electrical consumers Read and observe safety instructions and precautions gt page 506 gt Open the front passenger door i Open doors only when conditions are safe to do so gt Move the front passenger seat to the most rearward position gt page 45 P54 10 2616 31 _ es ag 1 Seat rail cover front right 2 Seat rail cover front left gt Pull off right seat rail cover in direc tion of arrow gt Pull left seat rail cover 2 in direction of arrow as far as it will go Left seat rail cover 2 cannot be re mov
411. or could be damaged ay With the sunshade raised and the respective door window open the sunshade could disen gage and snap back when driving at high vehicle speeds e g on highways and damage the retractor You should therefore always either close the door window or lower the sunshade when driving at high speed Controls in detail Rear window defroster The rear window defroster uses a large amount of power To keep battery drain to a minimum switch off the defroster as soon as the rear window is clear The de froster is automatically deactivated after approximately 6 to 17 minutes of operation depending on the outside tem perature A Any accumulation of snow and ice should be removed from the rear window before driv ing Visibility could otherwise be impaired endangering you and others Warning gt Switch on the ignition gt page 39 Good visibility Activating gt Press button on the climate con trol panel gt page 220 or the automat ic climate control panel gt page 234 The indicator lamp on the button comes on Deactivating gt Press button BRM once more The indicator lamp on the button goes out BE if the rear window defroster switches off too soon and the indicator lamp starts flashing too many electrical consumers are operating simul taneously and there is insufficient voltage in the battery The system responds automatically by switching the rear window defroster o
412. or example you can use the control system to find out when your vehicle is next due for maintenance service to set the language for messages in the instru ment cluster display and much more i The displays for the audio systems radio CD player will appear in English regardless of the language selected Warning A N A driver s attention to the road and traffic conditions must always be his her primary focus when driving For your safety and the safety of others selecting features through the multifunction steering wheel should only be done by the driver when traffic and road conditions permit it to be done safely Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet approximately 14 m every second The control system relays information to the multifunction display Controls in detail Control system Multifunction display ae 3 Oates N Il i ji D 4A EPO q1 1 Trip odometer 2 Main odometer 3 Transmission position indicator 4 Current transmission program mode Status indicator outside temperature or digital soeedometer For more information on menus displayed in the multifunction display see Menus gt page 162 Controls in detail Control system Multifunction steering wheel The displays in the multifunction display and the settings in the control system are controlled by the buttons on the
413. or press button on the multifunction steering wheel To lower turn the rotary volume control on the COMAND system headunit counterclockwise or press button EE on the multifunction steering wheel gt To activate press the SOS button the Roadside Assistance button or the Information button RSM depend ing on the type of response required The SOS button is located in the overhead control panel gt page 332 The Roadside Assistance button gt page 333 and the Information button gt page 334 are located below the center armrest cover BE The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular network for communication and the GPS Global Positioning System satellites for vehicle location If either of these signals are unavail able the Tele Aid system may not function and if this occurs assistance must be summoned by other means When a Tele Aid call has been initiated the COMAND system audio is muted and the selected mode radio CD etc pauses The optional cellular phone if installed inserted in cradle switches off If you must use this phone we recommend that you use it only with the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location Remove the phone from the cradle and place the call The navigation system if engaged will continue to run The display in the instrument cluster is available for use and spoken com mands are only available by pressing the RPT button on the COMAND system A pop up window will appear
414. orama roof with power tilt sliding panel is made out of glass In the event of an accident the glass may shatter This may result in an opening in the roof In a vehicle rollover occupants not wearing their seat belts or not wearing them properly may be thrown out of the opening Such an opening also presents a potential for injury for occupants wearing their seat belts properly as entire body parts or portions of them may protrude from the passenger compartment When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and or serious personal injury T To avoid damaging the seals do not trans port any objects with sharp edges which can stick out of the tilt sliding panel Do not open the tilt sliding panel if there is snow or ice on the roof as this could result in malfunctions i When the tilt sliding panel is open resonance noises may result in addition to the usual wind noises They are caused by minimal pressure changes in the passenger compart ment To reduce or eliminate theses noises change the position of the tilt sliding panel or open a door window slightly i You can also open or close the tilt sliding panel using the SmartKey or the KEYLESS GO function see Summer
415. osed while vehicle is in motion Reflected glare can endanger you and others P68 60 2116 31 1 Sun visor 2 Additional sun visor 3 Mirror lamp 4 Vanity mirror cover Vanity mirror 6 Holder for gas cards 7 Mounting Glare through the windshield gt Swing sun visor Q down gt Make sure sun visor Q is properly en gaged in mounting 7 gt When you do not experience glare any more swing sun visor Q up Controls in detail Good visibility Vanity mirror gt Swing sun visor Q down gt Flip up cover 4 to access vanity mirror Vanity mirror lamp comes on gt After using vanity mirror flip down cover 4 gt Swing sun visor Q up 1 1 Sun visor 2 Additional sun visor Glare through a side window Se P68 60 2099 31 Swing sun visor down Disengage sun visor Q from mounting 7 gt page 215 gt Pivot sun visor Q to the side T To avoid damage to vanity mirror cover page 215 make sure it is closed before pivoting sun visor Q to the side gt Swing down additional sun visor 2 when you experience additional glare through the windshield Rear door window sunshade gt To raise sunshade pull on tab 2 and engage it in holder Q gt To lower sunshade disengage tab 2 from holder and guide retraction T Always guide the sunshade Do not let it snap back abruptly as the retract
416. our back against the seat backrest Adjust the driver seat as far as possible rearward still permitting proper opera tion of vehicle controls The distance from the center of the driver s breast bone to the center of the air bag cover on the steering wheel must be at least 10 inches 25 cm or more You should be able to accomplish this by a combina tion of adjustments to the seat and steering wheel If you have any problems please see an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Do not lean your head or chest close to the steering wheel or dashboard Keep hands on the outside of steering wheel rim Placing hands and arms inside the rim can increase the risk and potential severity of hand arm injury when driver s front air bag inflates Adjust the front passenger seat as far as possible rearward from the dashboard when the seat is occupied e Always sit nearly upright properly use the seat belts and use an appropriately sized infant or toddler restraint or boost er seat recommended for the size and weight of the child Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injuries to you or other occupants If you sell your vehicle it is important that you make the buyer aware of this safety information Be sure to give the buyer this Operator s Manual Safety and Security Warning AN Accident research shows that the safest place for children in an automobile is in the rear seat It should
417. p to a maximum of 85 W designed for use with the standard ciga rette lighter plug type Keep in mind however that connecting accessories to the lighter socket for example extensive connecting and discon necting or using plugs that do not fit properly can damage the lighter socket With the socket damaged the lighter may no longer be able to be placed in the heating pushed in position or the lighter may pop out too early with the lighter not hot enough To help avoid damaging the cigarette lighter socket we recommend connecting 12V DC elec trical accessories designed for use with the stan dard cigarette lighter plug type to the 12V power outlets gt page 322 in your vehicle whenever possible T The cigarette lighter is not designed for use with the electric air pump page 501 Use a power outlet page 322 for electric air pump operation i If the engine is off and the cigarette lighter is being used extensively the vehicle battery may become discharged Controls in detail Useful features Power outlets i If you use all power outlets in the vehicle make sure that the maximum current drawn does not exceed 55 A amp The power outlets can be used to accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories e g air pump auxiliary lamps up to a maximum of 240 W If the engine is off and the power outlets are being used extensively the vehicle battery may become discharged i You can use
418. parative rat ing based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For ex ample a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 1 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Operation Tires and wheels Traction The traction grades from highest to low est are AA A B and C Those grades rep resent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance A The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Warning Operation Tires and wheels Temperature The temperature grades are A the high est B and C representing the tire s resis tance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high tem perature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and ex cessive tempe
419. pecially under slip pery road conditions The brakes are ap plied to the spinning wheel and power Is transferred to the wheel s with traction The ESP warning lamp in the instru ment cluster starts to flash at any vehicle speed as soon as a tire loses traction and the wheel begins to spin Warning A When you see the ESP warning lamp flashing in the instrument cluster then pro ceed as follows e While driving off apply as little throttle as possible e While driving ease up on the accelera tor e Adapt your speed and driving style to the prevailing road conditions Failure to observe these guidelines could cause the vehicle to skid The 4 ETS cannot prevent accidents resul ting from excessive speed T Operational or performance test must only be conducted on a two axle dynamometer If such tests are necessary contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center You could otherwise seriously damage the brake system or the transfer case which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty T Because the ESP operates automatically the engine and ignition must be shut off SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS GO start stop button in position 0 or 1 when testing the brakes on a brake test dynamometer and such testing should be no longer than 10 seconds Active braking action through ESP may other wise seriously damage the brake system which is not covered by t
420. per million ppm When using diesel fuel with a sulfur content of above 300 ppm the engine oil interval should be shortened For more information on diesel fuels refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet or contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center i Diesel engine The engine is more susceptible to wear and damage if you use e marine diesel fuel e heating oil e additives The use of such non approved fuels and or special additives is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Operation At the gas station Low outside temperatures diesel engine To prevent malfunctions diesel fuel with improved cold flow characteristics is of fered in the winter months Check with your fuel retailer BE Do not fill the tank with gasoline Do not blend diesel fuel with gasoline or kerosine The fuel system and engine will otherwise be dam aged which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Check regularly and before a long trip gt Open the hood gt page 364 1 Coolant level 2 Brake fluid 3 Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system Engine oil level For more information on engine oil see Engine oil gt page 366 Coolant For normal replenishing use water pota ble water quality For more information see Coolant level gt page 370 and Fuels coolants lubricants etc gt page 538 Brake fluid
421. phone cradle gt Insert mobile phone cradle into recesses 2 of contact plate 1 gt Push mobile phone cradle forward until it engages Controls in detail Useful features Tele Aid i The initial activation of the Tele Aid system may only be performed by completing the sub scriber agreement and placing an acquaintance call using the button Failure to complete either of these steps will result in a system that is not activated If you have any questions regarding activation please call the Response Center at 1 800 756 9018 in the USA or 1 888 923 8367 in Canada Shortly after the completion of your Tele Aid acquaintance call you will receive a user ID and password By visiting www mbusa com and selecting Tele Aid USA only you will have access to account information remote door unlock and more The Tele Aid system Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response e automatic and manual emergency e roadside assistance e information The Tele Aid system is operational provid ing that the vehicle s battery is charged properly connected not damaged and cel lular and GPS coverage are available The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can be adjusted by using the volume control on the COMAND system headunit or on the multifunction steering wheel To raise turn the rotary volume control on the COMAND system headunit clockwise
422. placing bulbs 484 Bar 401 BAS 102 Lamps in instrument cluster 420 Messages in the multifunction display 435 Batteries SmartKey Check lamp 112 116 Checking battery condition Battery Vehicle 506 Charging 513 Disconnecting and connecting 508 Jump starting 514 Removing and installing 508 Bead 401 115 120 Beverage holder see Cup holder Bleeding the fuel system diesel engine 505 Bolts Spare wheel 500 Bottle opener 317 Brake Assist System see BAS Brake fluid 541 Checking 362 Messages in the multifunction display 454 Brake lamp Cleaning lenses 413 Messages in the multifunction display 463 468 Replacing bulbs 484 Brake pads 348 Messages in the multifunction display 452 Brakes 348 High performance brake system AMG vehicles only 350 Warning lamp 421 Break in the vehicle 346 Bulbs replacing see Replacing bulbs C California retail buyers and lessees Important notice for 11 Call priority Tele Aid 336 Can holder see Cup holder Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants 538 Card holder 32 317 Cargo compartment Tie down rings 299 Cargo compartment cover blind 306 Cargo tie down rings 299 Carpets Cleaning 417 Catalytic converter gasoline engine 357 CD changer 172 311 CD player 172 Center console 31 Central locking 189 Automatic 130 Locking unlocking from the inside 130 Central locking switch 130 Certification label 526 527 CHECK ENGINE malfunction indicator lamp 423 424 Checking tire pressure electron
423. play will clear after driving a short distance at a vehicle speed of above 12 mph 20 km h gt Have cruise control checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center gt Accelerate to a speed exceeding 20 mph 30 km h and set the speed gt page 266 gt Switch on the ESP gt page 105 gt Set the automatic transmission to position D gt page 197 gt Release the parking brake gt page 57 Display message DISTRONIC e inoperative Override Practical hints Possible cause consequence You have attempted to set a speed while driving below 20 mph 30 km h The ESP is switched off The automatic transmission is set to position P R or N The vehicle is secured with the parking brake The Distronic or the Distronic display are malfunctioning You have accelerated The Distronic has switched off What to do if Possible solution gt y Accelerate to a speed exceeding 20 mph 30 km h and set the speed gt page 266 Switch on the ESP gt page 105 Set the automatic transmission to posi tion D gt page 197 Release the parking brake gt page 57 Have the system checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Stop accelerating Practical hints What to do if Display message DISTRONIC available again currently unavailable see Operator s Manual Possible cause consequence Possible solution
424. position children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant or toddler restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child For additional informa tion see Children in the vehicle gt page 84 A child s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the child restraint Getting started Adjusting Seat adjustment The seat adjustment switch is located on the entry side of each front seat base 1 Head restraint height vehicles with memory function 2 Seat cushion tilt 3 Seat height 4 Seat backrest tilt Seat fore and aft adjustment Ba When moving the seat make sure there are no items in the footwell or behind the seat Otherwise you could damage the seat pg When the second row seats are folded forward e g for cargo compartment expansion page 301 the front seats may not be moved to the rearmost position Otherwise you could damage the front and second row seats A When adjusting the seat backrest tilt and head restraint height make sure the sun visor is folded up gt page 215 Ifthe head restraint is in the uppermost position it could hit and damage the sun visor i The memory function gt page 144 lets you store the settings for the seat position to gether with the settings for
425. position and material Tongue Weight Rating see TWR TPMS USA only 385 used 403 Tools 472 Recommended tire inflation Retreads 373 Top tether pressure 380 Rims and tires 532 Children in the vehicle 84 Tires 373 532 Rotating 404 Towing eye bolts 518 Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring Run Flat Indicator Canada only 383 Towing the vehicle 517 system Advanced TPMS Canada Service life 374 Tow starting 514 517 only 388 sizes 532 TPMS USA only 385 Air pressure 401 Snow chains 406 Traction 403 Care and maintenance 374 Spare wheel Collapsible tire 534 4 ETS Driving safety systems 100 Cleaning 375 Speed rating 353 393 403 106 Collapsible tire Spare wheel 534 Storing 375 Transmission see Automatic transmission Combination low tire pressure TPMS Temperature 381 400 Traveling abroad 356 malfunction telltale USA only 27 Terminology 401 Tread 403 Direction of rotation Spinning 375 TIN 396 403 Tread depth 375 Driving instructions 352 Tire Identification Number see TIN Treadwear indicators 403 Hydroplaning 352 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Trip computer 191 Important guidelines 373 TPMS USA only 385 Trip odometer 157 Turn signal lamps Cleaning lenses 413 Messages in the multifunction display 468 Replacing bulbs 484 Turn signals 60 Additional in mirrors 485 Bulbs 485 Cleaning lenses 413 Indicator lamps 26 Turning off the engine 67 TWR 403 U Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards 403 Units Settings Speedometer 179
426. pplemental weight wa Poi ae ae eee onto the seat are present illuminated with the weight of a typical gt Make sure no objects which apply forces to the seat 12 month old child in a are present e g objects such as books briefcases standard child restraint or etc lodged behind or around the seat head restraints less on the front passen pushing against roof etc The system may recognize ger seat such forces as supplemental weight gt If the front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp remains out have the system checked as soon as pos sible by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Do not transport a child on the front passen ger seat until the system has been repaired gt Also note any messages in the multifunction display and follow corrective steps gt page 445 A weight of a typical 12 month old child in a the front passenger seat until the system standard child restraint or less on the front passenger seat do not transport a child on not illuminate or remains out with the has been repaired Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display Warning and malfunction messages appear in the multifunction display located in the instrument cluster Certain warning and malfunction messag es are accompanied by an audible signal Address these messages accordingly and follow the additional instructions given in this Operator s Manual Selecting the vehicle status message memory menu in the con
427. pplying plenty of water Warning A N Exercise care when using the passen ger side exterior rear view mirror The mirror surface is convex outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view Objects in mirror are closer than they appear Check your interior rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes Controls in detail Good visibility Power folding exterior rear view mirrors T Before you drive the vehicle through an au tomatic car wash fold the exterior rear view mir rors in Otherwise they may get damaged Folding the exterior rear view mirrors in and out automatically When the corresponding function in the control system is activated gt page 190 e The exterior rear view mirrors automat ically fold in as soon as the vehicle is locked from the outside e The exterior rear view mirrors automat ically fold out as soon as the vehicle is unlocked and the driver s or front pas senger door are subsequently opened Synchronizing exterior rear view mirrors The power folding rear view mirrors may have to be synchronized after the vehicle battery has been disconnected or dis charged If the exterior rear view mirrors do not fold properly upon locking or un locking the vehicle although the corre sponding function in the control system is activated gt page 190 do the following gt Fold each exterior rear view mirror in completely gt page 215 gt Fold ea
428. pproximately 9 mph 15 km h or more You could therefore lock yourself out when the vehicle e is pushed or towed e isonatest stand For information on towing the vehicle see Towing the vehicle gt page 517 You can deactivate the automatic locking mode using the control system gt page 189 Locking and unlocking from the inside You can lock or unlock the doors and the tailgate from inside using the central lock ing or unlocking switch This can be useful for example if you want to lock the vehicle before starting to drive The fuel filler flap cannot be locked or un locked with the central locking or unlock ing switch A When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unat tended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehi cle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Warning The switches are located in the front door control panels 1 Central unlocking switch 2 Central locking switch Locking gt Press central locking switch 2 lf all doors and the tailgate are closed the vehicle locks Unlocking gt Press central unlocking switch Q The vehicle unlocks You can open a locked door from the inside Open door only when conditions are safe to do SO If the vehicle was previously centra
429. pths under 7 in 3 mm Treadwear indicators TWI are required by law These indicators are located in six places on the tread circumference and become visible at a tread depth of approx imately in 1 6 mm at which point the tire is considered worn and should be re placed Recommended minimum tire tread depth e Summer tires in 3 mm e Winter tires in 4 mm A Although the applicable federal motor safety laws consider a tire to be worn when the treadwear indicators TWI become visible at approximately 46 in 1 6 mm we recom mend that you do not allow your tires to Warning Operation wear down to that level As tread depth ap proaches in 3 mm the adhesion prop erties on a wet road are sharply reduced Depending upon the weather and or road surface conditions the tire traction varies widely C TWI Tread Wear Indicator The treadwear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread Tires and wheels Storing tires T Keep unmounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and fuels Cleaning tires Ea Never use a round nozzle to power wash tires The intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire Always replace a damaged tire Direction of rotation Unidirectional tires offer added advan tages such as better hydroplaning perfor mance To benefit however you must m
430. r gt page 234 The indicator lamp on the button Mg goes out and AUTO disappears in the display 4 gt page 234 Depending on which button you press the air distribution button or the air vol ume button or automatic control of either the air distribution or air volume is switched off 3 zone automatic climate control Setting the temperature Use temperature controls Q and gt page 234 to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment You should raise or lower the temperature setting in small incre ments preferably starting at 72 F 22 C The automatic climate control will adjust to the set temperature as fast as possible Increasing gt Turn temperature control 1 and or slightly clockwise The automatic climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature Decreasing gt Turn temperature control 1 and or 9 slightly counterclock wise The automatic climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature 237 Controls in detail 3 zone automatic climate control Adjusting air distribution Use the air distribution buttons 7 or 8 for the driver s side or 7 Q or 2 gt page 234 for the passenger side to separately adjust the air distribution on each side of the passenger compartment The following symbols are found on the buttons Symbol Function Drivers Pass
431. r blades may cause windshield damage For your convenience we recommend that you have this work carried out by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Removing gt Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch Vehicles with KEYLESS GO gt Make sure the vehicle s on board electronics have status 0 gt page 41 T Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts They could tear gt Fold the wiper arms forward until they engage 1 Wiper blade 2 Tab 3 Wiper arm gt Press tabs 2 together gt Tilt wiper blade Q away from wiper arm 3 gt Take off wiper blade in direction of arrow Installing 1 Wiper blade 2 Attachment 3 Guide tab 4 Opening gt With guide tab sliding into opening 4 place wiper blade 1 onto wiper arm in direction of arrow Practical hints Fold wiper blade 1 towards wiper arm Tabs 2 gt page 494 must engage into both recesses of attachment 2 Check whether the wiper blade is securely fastened Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on the windshield Make sure to hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back Replacing wiper blades Rear wiper blade Warning A N For safety reasons switch off wipers and remove SmartKey from starter switch vehicles with KEYLESS GO Make sure the vehicle s on board electronics have status 0 before replacing a wiper blade Otherwise the motor could suddenly turn on
432. r its equipment which may in turn result in personal injury If you have questions about carrying out any type of service turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center We reserve the right to make changes in design and equipment Therefore information illustrations and descriptions in this Operator s Manual might differ from your vehicle Reprinting and copying even of excerpts is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing Press time March 27 2006 GSP TIP Printed in Germany
433. r lamp and turn signal indica and malfunction messages that may No messages will be displayed if either the tor lamps unless activated as well as the mult appear in the multifunction display instrument cluster or the multifunction function display to come on Make sure the l display is inoperative lamps and multifunction display are in working For yo A the messages are order before starting your journey divided into two sections As a result you will not be able to see infor mation about your driving conditions such e Text messages gt page 435 as speed or outside temperature warn e Symbol messages gt page 451 ing indicator lamps malfunction warning messages or the failure of any systems Driving characteristics may be impaired If you must continue to drive do so with added caution Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible Practical hints What to do if Text messages Display message Possible cause consequence Possible solution ABS inoperative The ABS has detected a malfunction gt Continue driving with added caution See Operator s Manual and has switched off Wheels may lock during hard braking Tina ESS andl ane Ake sre alse reducing steering capability deactivated gt Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ABS avail able Failure to follow these instr
434. r next maintenance service is due Starting approximately 1 month before maintenance service is due one of the fol lowing messages will appear in the multi function display while you are driving or when you switch on the ignition example service A Service A in XXXX miles km Service A in XX days Service A in X day Service A due now The maintenance services will be indicated by showing a service type A through type H in the multifunction display Types A through H are classified based on estimat ed time needed to perform the mainte nance service ranging from Service A approx 1 hour to Service H approx 8 hours Operation Maintenance Service A in 2730 miles Refer to Maintenance Booklet for a listing of maintenance services and intervals they need to be performed at Vehicles equipped with Maintenance System only U S vehicles The Maintenance System in your vehicle tracks distance driven and the time elapsed since your last maintenance service and calculates other maintenance service work required Operation Maintenance Vehicles equipped with FSS PLUS Flexible Service System PLUS only Canada vehicles e FSS PLUS evaluates engine temperature oil level vehicle speed engine speed dis tance driven and the time elapsed since your last service and calculates other mainte nance service work required e The interval between maintenance services depends on your dri
435. r tank until the filler nozzle unit cuts out do not top up or overfill A Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pres sure in the system which could cause a gas discharge This could cause the gas to spray back out when removing the fuel pump nozzle which could cause personal injury Warning Operation gt Replace the fuel cap by turning it clock wise until it audibly engages gt Close the fuel filler flap You should hear the latch close shut a Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap open can cause the yellow fuel tank reserve warning lamp to flash and the Kee malfunction indicator lamp USA only or the ma malfunc tion indicator lamp Canada only comes on For more information see Practical hints gt page 424 i Gasoline engine Only use premium unleaded gasoline with a min imum Posted Octane Rating of 91 average of 96 RON 86 MON Information on gasoline quality can normally be found on the fuel pump For more information on gasoline see see Pre mium unleaded gasoline gasoline engine gt page 541 see Fuel requirements gt page 542 and the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet At the gas station Diesel engine Only use commercially available vehicular diesel fuels No 2 or No 1 ASTM D975 No 2 D or No 1 D Information on diesel quality can normally be found on the fuel pump The sulfur content in diesel fuel should not exceed 50 parts
436. raint systems Do not tamper with electronic components or their software Safety and Security Warning AN In the event that the EGE indicator lamp comes on during driving or does not come on at all the SRS self check has detected a malfunction For your safety we strongly recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center immedi ately to have the system checked otherwise the SRS may not deploy when needed in an accident which could result in serious or fatal injury or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury In addition improper work on the SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS inopera tive or causing unintended air bag deploy ment Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Occupant safety If it is necessary to modify an air bag system to accommodate a person with disabilities contact a local authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center or call our Customer Assistance Center at 1 800 FOR MERCedes 1 800 367 6372 for details Safety and Security Occupant safety Air bags Warning AN Air bags are designed to reduce the poten tial of injury and fatality in certain frontal impacts front air bags side impacts side impact air bags and head protection window curtain air bags or rollovers head protec tion window curtain air bags However no s
437. rake pedal pressure yields the advantages provided by the ABS namely braking power and ability to steer the vehicle The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving Safety and Security Emergency brake maneuver gt Keep continuous full pressure on the brake pedal Warning VAN When the ABS is malfunctioning the BAS the ESP and the 4 ETS are also switched off The basic driving and braking functions are still available When the ABS is malfunctioning the wheels may lock during hard braking reducing steering capability and extending the brak ing distance Driving safety systems Warning VAN The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency be yond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent acci dents including those resulting from exces sive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can pre vent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others For more information see the Practical Hints section gt page 420 Safety and Security Driving safety sy
438. ration gt Carry out step 11 to reconnect the battery gt page 512 gt Carry out steps 7 through 1 in reverse order to complete reinstall the battery gt page 511 to gt page 508 Step 11 Reconnecting gt If the battery has been removed carry out step 9 gt page 512 before starting the connecting procedure Open the driver s door Make sure the SmartKey is removed from the starter switch Vehicles with KEYLESS GO gt Make sure the vehicle s on board electronics have status 0 With the driver s door opened the vehicle s on board electronics have status 0 same as SmartKey removed from the starter switch gt page 41 gt Connect the positive lead to the posi tive terminal and fasten it s cover gt page 512 gt Connect the negative lead to the nega tive terminal gt page 512 BE Never invert the terminal connections The following procedures must be carried out following any interruption of battery power e g due to disconnection e Set the clock gt page 181 Vehicles with COMAND system with naviga tion module Time and date are set auto matically e Synchronize the door windows gt page 254 e Synchronize the power tilt sliding sunroof gt page 260 e Synchronize the power tilt sliding panel gt page 264 e Synchronize the power folding exterior rear view mirrors gt page 214 Practical hints Charging the battery
439. rator s Manual pouch gt Turn off the engine by pressing the KEYLESS GO start stop button gt Insert crank 2 into hole gt page 67 You can open or close the tilt sliding sunroof manually should an electrical malfunction occur Turn crank 2 clockwise to gt Open the drivers door this puts e slide sunroof closed the starter switch to position O The tilt sliding sunroof drive is located behind a cover on the overhead control same as with the SmartKey e raise sunroof at the rear panel removed from starter switch gt Turn crank counterclockwise to The driver s door can then be closed again e slide sunroof open gt Press on cover at the position e lower sunroof at the rear indicated by the arrow Turn crank slowly and smoothly gt Take off cover Q The tilt sliding sunroof must be synchronized if E Bi it has been operated manually page 260 ob The panorama roof with power tilt sliding panel cannot be operated as described Contact Roadside Assistance or an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center 1 Cover gt Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch Practical hints Resetting activated head restraints If the active head restraints have been triggered in a rear end collision the active head restraints must be reset Otherwise the active head restraints cannot offer any additional protection in the event of anoth er rear end collision You can t
440. rature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Warning A N The temperature grade for this tire is estab lished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underin flation or excessive loading either sepa rately or in combination can cause excessive heat build up and possible tire failure Tire ply material 1 Plies in sidewall 2 Plies under tread i For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration This marking tells you about the type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread Tire and loading terminology Accessory weight The combined weight in excess of those standard items which may be replaced of automatic transmission power steering power brakes power windows power seats radio and heater to the extent that these items are available as factory installed equipment whether installed or not Air pressure The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire Air pressure Is expressed in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascal kPa or bars Aspect ratio
441. re cannot always be removed or repaired with the car care products recommended here In such cases it is best to seek aid at an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center The following topics deal with the cleaning and care of your vehicle and give important how to information as well as references to Mercedes Benz approved car care products Operation Power washer T Follow the instructions provided by the power washer manufacturer on maintaining a distance between the vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer Never use a round nozzle to power wash tires The intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire Always replace a damaged tire Always keep the jet of water moving across the surface Do not aim directly at electrical parts electrical connectors seals or other rubber parts Vehicles with KEYLESS GO Ifa door handle is hit by a strong jet of water and a SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is in close proximity i e within approximately 3 ft approximately 1 m the vehicle could be inadvertently locked or unlocked Tar stains Quickly remove tar stains before they dry and become more difficult to remove A tar remover is recommended Vehicle care Paintwork painted body components BE Affixing stickers adhesive tape or similar materials to painted body components may dam age the paintwork Mercedes Benz approved Paint Care should be applied when water drops on the paint surface do
442. re as being above 186 mph 300 km h Consult the tire manufacturer for the actual maximum permissible speed of the tire All season and winter tires Index Q M S T M S Speed rating up to 100 mph 160 km h up to 118 mph 190 km h H M S upto 130 mph 210 km h V M S upto 149 mph 240 km h 1 or M S for winter tires i Not all M S rated radial ply tires provide special winter performance Make sure the tires you use show M S and the mountain snowflake marking on the tire sidewall These tires meet specific snow traction performance re quirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Associ ation RMA and the Rubber Association of Canada RAC and have been designed specifi cally for use in snow conditions Load identification a For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specitic to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration Operation Tires and wheels In addition to tire load rating special load information may be molded into the tire sidewall following the letter designating the tire speed rating G gt page 393 No specification given absence of any text like in above example indicates a standard load SL tire XL Extra Load designates an extra load or reinforced tire Light Load designates a light load tire C D E designates load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Operation Tires and whee
443. ree cloth when handling bulbs Your hands should be dry and free of oil and grease If the newly installed bulb does not come on contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following lamps replaced by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center e the additional turn signal lamps in the exterior rear view mirrors e the high mounted brake lamp e the Bi Xenon low beam lamps e the Bi Xenon high beam flasher spot light e the front side marker lamps i Do not replace the bulbs yourself You could otherwise damage the LEDs or parts of the vehi cle Only have the LEDs replaced by a qualified specialist workshop having the necessary Skills and tools for carrying out the work required Practical hints Replacing bulbs for front lamps Before you start to replace a bulb for a front lamp do the following first gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to position W gt page 146 gt Open the hood gt page 364 Halogen headlamps O P82 10 3767 31 2 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp PB2 10 3765 31 1 Low beam high beam headlamp cover P amp 2 10 3766 31 2 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp 3 Bulb socket for low beam headlamp 4 Bulb socket for high beam headlamp Replacing bulbs Low beam headlamp bulbs gt Turn cover 1 counterclockwise vy Remove cover 1 vy Turn bulb socket 3 counterclockwise Pull bulb socket 3 out of t
444. ree device and only use the telephone when road weather and traffic conditions permit Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a mobile telephone while driving a vehicle Only operate the COMAND system if road weather and traffic conditions permit Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet approximately 14 m every second Observe all legal requirements Useful features a gt Various mobile phone cradles can be installed in the front center armrest see separate installation instructions for the mobile phone cradle These mobile phone cradles can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center The functions and services available to you while using the mobile phone depend on your service provider and the type of mobile phone you are using See also separate operating manual for instructions on how to use the mobile phone When the mobile phone is inserted in the cradle you can operate the telephone using the following devices e mobile phone keypad e COMAND system see separate operat ing instructions e buttons and on the multi function steering wheel gt page 160 e Voice Control see separate operating instructions Controls in detail Useful features Please note that these functions are only available with Mercedes Benz approved mobile phones Please contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light T
445. relationship between tire section height and section width and is expressed in percentage The aspect ratio is arrived at by dividing section height by section width Tire code The tire code gt page 392 indicates the tire construction type The R stands for radial tire type Letter D means diag onal or bias ply construction letter B means belted bias ply construction At the tire manufacturer s option any tire with a speed capability above 149 mph 240 km h can include a ZR in the size designation for example 245 40 ZR 18 For additional information see Tire speed rating gt page 393 Rim diameter The rim diameter gt page 392 is the diameter of the bead seat not the diameter of the rim edge Rim diameter is indicated in inches in Tire load rating The tire load rating G gt page 392 is a numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can support For example a load rating of 91 corre sponds to a maximum load of 1356 Ibs 615 kg the tire is designed to support See also Maximum tire load gt page 397 where the maximum load as sociated with the load index Is indicated in kilograms and lbs Warning AN The tire load rating must always be at least half of the GAWR gt page 401 of your vehi cle Otherwise tire failure may be the result which may cause an accident and or seri ous personal injury to you or others Always replace
446. ress release button Q gt page 306 and guide blind gt page 306 into mount Extending blind The cargo compartment cover blind has two extensions which are connected to the cargo compartment cover blind by cords The cargo compartment cover blind must be extended for installation behind the second row seats Loading P68 00 3969 31 Blind 2 Extension 3 Guidings 4 Guide pins gt Position extension 2 over blind Guide pins must point directly at guidings 3 Turn extension 2 and blind Q in op posite directions as indicated by the ar rows Guide pins must engage in guidings 3 gt D Controls in detail Loading gt gt When not in use you can attach the cover blind extensions to the cover blind Extension guide rail 6 Mounting gt With the cargo compartment cover installed behind third row seats insert extension guide rail into mounting 6 gt Push extension into mounting 6 as far as it will go Partition net Warning A N Make sure the partition net is properly engaged at top and bottom position and the tightening belts are securely fastened Never use a damaged partition net To help avoid personal injury from smaller objects being thrown around in the occu pant compartment during a collision or sudden maneuver always use partition net when transporting cargo The partition net cannot prevent the move
447. rest that we can contact you should the need arise If you sell your Mercedes please leave all literature with the vehicle to make it avail able to the next operator If you bought this vehicle used be sure to send in the Notice of Purchase of Used Truck found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet or call the Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Cen ter in the USA at 1 800 FOR MERCedes or Customer Service in Canada at 1 800 387 0100 introduction Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada SaaS ge If you plan to operate your vehicle in for eign countries please be aware that e service facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available e unleaded gasoline for vehicles with cat alytic converters may not be available the use of leaded fuels will damage the catalysts e gasoline may have a considerably low er octane rating and improper fuel can cause engine damage Operator s Manual Introduction Where to find it This Operator s Manual is designed to pro vide comprehensive support information for you the vehicle operator Each section has its own reference color C At a glance Here you will find an overview of all the controls that can be operated from the driver s seat E Getting started Here you will find all the information you need for your first drive You should read this section first if this is your first Mercedes Benz vehicle or if you
448. ricants etc Before the start of the winter season or once a year in hot southern regions you should have the anticorrosion antifreeze concentration checked The coolant is also regularly checked each time you bring your vehicle to an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center for service Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system Both the windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system are supplied from the windshield washer fluid reservoir The windshield and headlamp washer fluid reservoir has a capacity of approx 8 0 US qt 7 6 I gt Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Washer Concentrate and water or con centrate and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent antifreeze depending on am bient temperatures A Washer solvent antifreeze is highly flamma ble Do not spill washer solvent antifreeze on hot engine parts because it may ignite and burn You could be seriously burned Warning Windshield and headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio For temperatures above freezing point use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate MB SummerFit and water e part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water 1 34 fl oz 40 ml MB SummerFit to 1 gal 4 0 I water For temperatures below freezing point use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate MB SummerFit and commercially avail able premixed windshield washer solven
449. rims and tires with the same designation manufacturer and type as shown on the original part Warning A N Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit as indicated on the plac ard located on the driver s door B pillar Overloading the tires can overheat them possibly causing a blowout Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems or brake failure Operation Tires and wheels i Tire load rating gt page 392 and tire speed rating 6 gt page 392 are also referred to as service description For additional information on tire load rating see Load identification gt page 395 Tire speed rating The tire speed rating gt page 392 indicates the approved maximum speed for the tire Warning A N Even when permitted by law never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and or personal injury and possible death for you and for others Operation Tires and wheels a Tire load rating gt page 392 and tire speed rating 6 gt page 392 are also referred to as service description Summer tires Index Q lt ae ce ze Speed rating up to 100 mph 160 km h up to 106 mph 170 km h up to 112 mph 18
450. rive at the maximum engine speed for each gear without overrewing the engine 1 Gear indicator 2 Upshift indicator gt Shift to the next higher gear The fuel supply will otherwise be inter rupted to prevent the engine from over revving fe Downshifting A On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control Your vehicle s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control Warning gt Briefly press left shift button C gt page 207 The transmission shifts to the next lower gear a gt When you brake or stop the transmission shifts down to a gear from which you can easily accelerate or drive off Controls in detail Automatic transmission Kickdown Emergency operation Limp Home Using the kickdown when driving in the Moge manual program mode M is not possible If vehicle acceleration becomes less re sponsive or sluggish or the transmission Deactivating manual shift program no longer shifts the transmission is most gt Press the program mode selector likely operating in limp home emergency switch gt page 209 repeatedly until operation mode In this mode only second C or S appears in the multifunction gear and reverse gear can be selected GPa Stop the vehicle in a safe location a gt Shift to park position P P Aer cua gt Turn off the engine me AOR OLO Wi
451. river s door B pillar gt page 376 Some vehicles may have supplemental tire pressure information for driv ing at high speeds gt page 381 or for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle con dition gt page 382 If such information is pro vided it can be found on the inside of the fuel filler flap gt Press button or on the mul tifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the standard display menu appears in the multifunction display gt page 166 gt Press the EAN or Keg button repeat edly until you see the current inflation pressures for each tire appear in the display or the following message ap pears in the display Tire pressure displayed after driving for a few minutes Press the reset button gt page 156 The following message will appear in the multifunction display Restart tire pressure monitor Press the button The following message will appear in the multifunction display Tire pressure monitor restarted After driving a few minutes the system verifies that the current tire inflation pressures are within the system s specified range Afterwards the current tire inflation pressures are accepted as reference pressures and then moni tored If you wish to cancel activation gt Press the EE button Potential problems associated with underinflated and overinflated tires Underinflated tires Underinflated tires can e cause excessive and uneven tire wear e
452. riving systems Distronic When activated the Distronic adaptive cruise control system increases the driving convenience afforded by the cruise control while traveling on expressways and other major roadways e lf the Distronic distance sensor detects a slower moving vehicle directly ahead your vehicle speed will be reduced so that you follow that vehicle at your preset following distance e lf there is no vehicle directly ahead of you Distronic will function in the same way as standard cruise control gt page 266 Controls in detail Driving systems Warning A N Distronic is a convenience system Its speed adjustment reduction capability is intended to make cruise control more effective and usable when traffic speeds vary It is not however intended to nor does it replace the need for extreme care The responsibility for the vehicle s speed distance to the preceding vehicle and most importantly brake operation to ensure a safe stopping distance always rests with the driver Distronic cannot take road and traffic condi tions into account Complex driving situations are not always fully recognized by Distronic This could result in wrong or missing distance warnings Warning AN Distronic adaptive cruise control is no substitute for active driving involvement It does not react to pedestrians or on station ary objects nor does it recognize or predict the lane curvature or the
453. rn the exterior lamp switch in position to permit activation of the high beam headlamps When the engine is running and you shift from a driving position to position N or P the low beam headlamps will switch off with a three minute delay When the engine is running and you e turn the exterior lamp switch to position gj the parking lamps and the side marker lamps switch on additionally e turn the exterior lamp switch to position J the manual headlamp mode has priority over the daytime running lamp mode The corresponding exterior lamps switch on gt page 59 USA only By default the daytime running lamp mode is deactivated Activate the daytime running lamp mode using the control system see Setting daytime running lamp mode USA only gt page 183 i With the daytime running lamp mode activat ed and the exterior lamp switch in position WH you cannot switch on the high beam headlamps The high beam flasher is available at all times For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp switch in position or EZ to permit activation of the high beam headlamps When the engine Is running and you turn the exterior lamp switch to position or E the manual headlamp mode has priority over the daytime running lamp mode The corresponding exterior lamps switch on gt page 146 Locator lighting and night security illumination The locator lighting and the night security illumination are described in th
454. rogramming a gate operator regardless of where you live by using the programming procedures replace step 4 with the following Step 4 gt Press and hold the signal transmitter button or Do not release this button until it has been successful ly trained While still holding down the signal transmitter button or cycle your hand held remote control button as follows Press and hold button 6 for 2 seconds then release it for 2 seconds and again press and hold it for 2 seconds Repeat this sequence on the hand held remote control until the frequency signal has been learned Upon successful train ing indicator lamp Q will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds Proceed with programming step 5 and step 6 to complete Upon completion of programming the integrated remote control make sure you retain the hand held remote control that came with the garage door opener gate operator or other device You may need it for use in other vehicles for future programming of an integrated remote control or simply for continued use as a hand held remote control to operate the respec tive device in other situations Reprogramming a single signal transmitter button To program a device using a signal trans mitter button previously trained follow these steps gt Switch on the ignition gt page 39 gt Press and hold the desired signal transmitter button or
455. rol automatically regulates the ride height to e reduce fuel consumption e improve driving safety Changes to the vehicle level should be made while the vehicle is moving The vehicle will then reach the set level as fast as possible The vehicle begins adjusting to the set vehicle level as soon as the doors or tailgate are e unlocked or e opened or closed with the vehicle unlocked For major changes in vehicle level the engine must be running A Make sure that no one is near the wheel housing or under the vehicle when you lower the vehicle while it is standing still Limbs could become wedged into or under the vehicle Warning For safety reasons the vehicle can only be lowered with all doors and the tailgate closed Lowering is interrupted if a door or the tailgate is opened and will continue after the door is closed again A Adapt your speed and driving to possible changed driving behavior of the vehicle after changing the vehicle level The ESP cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle Warning Controls in detail T Keep in mind that in rough or uneven roads adjusting the vehicle to a lower level may cause the vehicle underbody to come in contact with the road and result in damage to the vehicle un derbody Always make sure the vehicle has suffi cient ground clearance before adj
456. rom the outside You have forgotten to remove gt Remove the SmartKey from the starter the SmartKey switch There is no additional code avail gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz able for SmartKey or SmartKey Light Truck Center as soon as possible with KEYLESS GO The batteries inthe SmartKey gt Replace the batteries gt page 483 with KEYLESS GO are dis charged This message appears for a gt Insert SmartKey in the starter switch maximum of 60 seconds if the driver s door is opened with the engine shut off and no SmartKey gt Take the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO in the starter switch with you when leaving the vehicle This message is only a reminder Display symbol 10 oe I Display message 3rd brake lamp Active headlamps inoperative AUTO Light inoperative Brake lamp left Brake lamp right Practical hints Possible cause consequence The high mounted brake lamp is malfunctioning This message will only appear if all light emitting diodes have stopped working The active Bi Xenon headlamp system is malfunctioning The light sensor is malfunction ing The headlamps do not switch on automatically The left brake lamp is malfunc tioning A substitute bulb is being used The right brake lamp is malfunc tioning A substitute bulb is being used What to do if Possible solution gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possib
457. rome plated contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Vehicle care Headlamps brake lamps tail lamps side markers turn signal lenses gt Use a mild car wash detergent such as Mercedes Benz approved Car Shampoo with plenty of water BE Only use window cleaning solutions that are suitable for plastic lamp lenses Window clean ing solutions which are not suitable may damage the plastic lamp lenses of the headlamps There fore do not use abrasives solvents or cleaners that contain solvents Never apply strong force and only use a soft non scratching cloth when cleaning the lenses Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth or sponge Otherwise you may scratch or damage the lens surface Operation Vehicle care Cleaning the Distronic system sensor Pp Restart the engine after cleaning sen T Do not apply strong pressure to the sensor sor cover 1 covers Applying strong pressure may damage the sensor covers Cleaning the Parktronic system Follow the instructions provided by the power sensors washer manufacturer on maintaining a distance between the vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer a To prevent scratches never apply strong force and only use a soft non scratching cloth when cleaning the sensors Do not attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth or sponge 1 Distronic system sensor cover gt Switch off the ignition gt page 39 P54 65 2893 31 gt U
458. ront or rear seat backrests i The cargo compartment is the preferred place to carry objects The expanded cargo com partment page 301 should only be used for items which do not fit in the cargo compartment alone Cargo tie down rings Your vehicle is equipped with eight cargo tie down rings Carefully secure cargo by applying even load on all rings with rope of sufficient strength to hold down the cargo While the partition net gt page 308 will help protect you from smaller objects it cannot prevent the movement of large heavier objects into the passenger compartment in an accident during hard braking or sudden maneuvers Such items must be properly secured using the cargo tie down rings in the cargo compartment floor Controls in detail Loading Cargo compartment Four cargo tie down rings are located in the cargo compartment 1 Cargo tie down ring Controls in detail Loading Second seat row Two cargo tie down rings are located in the footwell behind the driver s and passenger seat 1 Cargo tie down ring Third seat row Two cargo tie down rings are located in the footwell behind the second row seats o tie down ring Hooks Two hooks are located on the rear com partment trim panels one on each side C Hook Use the hooks to secure light weight items only The maximum permissible weight per hook is 9 Ibs 4 kg Expanding cargo compart
459. roxim ity to the driver s outside door handle Vehicles without tilt sliding panel gt Press and hold button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO until the windows and the tilt sliding sunroof have reached the desired position Release button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO to interrupt the opening procedure Vehicles with tilt sliding panel If roller sunblinds are closed gt Press and hold button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO The windows and roller sunblinds begin to open after approximately 1 second Release button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO to interrupt the opening procedure With the windows and roller sunblinds fully opened press and hold button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO once more The tilt sliding panel opens Release button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO to interrupt the opening procedure Controls in detail Power windows If roller sunblinds are open gt Press and hold button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO The windows and the tilt sliding panel begin to open after approximately 1 second Release button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO to in terrupt the opening procedure Controls in detail Power windows Convenience closing feature Vehicles with KEYLESS GO When locking the vehicle you can close e Release the lock button gt page 69 on the w
460. rtKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO e Parking lamps e Tail lamps e License plate lamps e Side marker lamps e Front fog lamps The locator lighting switches off when the driver s door is opened If you do not open a door after unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey the lamps will switch off automatically after approxi mately 40 seconds Move the selection marker with button or SH to the Lighting submenu Press button BeN or Ref repeatedly until the message Function Surround lighting appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Funetion Surround lighting Press button or E to switch the locator lighting function On or Off Turn the exterior lamp switch to position W when exiting the vehicle The locator lighting feature is activated Controls in detail Control system Setting night security illumination gt Move the selection marker with You can temporarily deactivate the head Headlamps delayed shut off feature button or E tothe Lighting lamps delayed shut off feature Use this function to set whether you would omeny gt Before exiting the vehicle turn the like the exterior lamps to remain on for gt Press button eN or RA repeatedly SmartKey in the starter switch to 15 seconds during darkness after exiting until the message Headlamp delayed position O the vehicle and closing all doors pada appears in the multifunction gt Then turn it to posi
461. ruc tions Always sit nearly upright properly use the seat belts and use an appropriately sized in fant or toddler restraint or booster seat rec ommended for the size and weight of the child Children can be killed or seriously injured by an inflating air bag Note the following important information when circumstances require you to place a child in the front passenger seat e Your vehicle is equipped with air bag technology designed to turn off the front passenger front air bag in your vehicle when the OCS senses the weight of a typical 12 month old child or less along with the weight of a standard appropri ate child restraint on the front passen ger seat A child in a rear facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be serious ly injured or even killed if the front pas senger front air bag inflates in a collision which could occur under some circum stances even with the air bag technolo gy installed in your vehicle The only means to completely eliminate this risk is to never place a child in a rear facing child restraint in the front seat We therefore strongly recommend that you always place a child in a rear facing child restraint in the back seat If you must install a rear facing child restraint on the front passenger seat because circumstances require you to do so make sure that the indicator lamp is illumi nated indicating that the front passen ger front air bag is deactivated Should t
462. ruck Center for information on features avail able for your mobile phone of choice The cradle is located in the front center armrest gt Open telephone compartment gt page 313 Inserting mobile phone in mobile phone cradle Once the mobile phone has been inserted in the mobile phone cradle you have to use the hands free device to respond during phone calls T Do not try to remove the mobile phone along with the cradle You could otherwise damage the mobile phone cradle gt If applicable remove the cover for the external antenna connection from the back of the mobile phone and store it in a safe place Be sure to comply with the mobile phone s operating instructions as well Og P82 70 5734 31 Example illustration 1 Inserting the mobile phone 2 Connector contact 3 Mobile phone cradle gt Slide the lower end of the mobile phone into connector contact 2 on cradle G gt Push the top of the mobile phone in direction of arrow Q until the lug on the mobile phone release button engages The mobile phone is connected to the network via the external antenna The mobile phone is linked to the hands free device and the multifunc tion steering wheel The battery is charged depending on its charge status and the position of the SmartKey in the starter switch The charge procedure will be indicated in the mobile phone s display You can place or receive phone calls You can co
463. s gt page 51 ap For information on infants and children trav eling with you in the vehicle and restraint sys tems for infants and children see Children in the vehicle gt page 84 Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning J Always fasten your seat belt before driving off Always make sure all of your passengers are properly restrained even those sitting in the rear and pregnant women Failure to wear and properly fasten and po sition your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident You and your passengers should always wear seat belts If you are ever in an accident your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled Without your seat belt buckled you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it You can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are properly wearing your seat belt Air bags can only protect as they are designed if the occupants are prop erly wearing their seat belts Warning VAN Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous You could slide under the seat belt in a collision If you slide under it the belt would apply force at the ab domen or neck That could cause serious or even fatal injuries The seat backrest and s
464. s Keep compartment lids closed This will help to prevent stored objects from being thrown about and injuring vehicle occupants during e braking e vehicle maneuvers e an accident Glove box CD changer gb Depending on vehicle equipment a CD changer and an AUX socket are located in the glove box 1 Glove box lid release 2 Glove box lid Opening the glove box gt Pull lid release in direction of arrow Glove box lid 2 opens downward Controls in detail Useful features Closing the glove box gt Push glove box lid 2 up to close Releasing CD changer P82 64 2906 1 Release button 2 CD changer 3 AUX socket gt Open the glove box gt Press release button Q CD changer 2 is released and swings down automatically For information on CD changer operation see separate COMAND system operating instructions Controls in detail Useful features Closing CD changer C CD changer gt Gently push CD changer Q up in direction of arrow until it engages For information on CD changer operation see separate COMAND system operating instructions Locking and unlocking the glove box separately You can lock the glove box separately e g when the vehicle is in the shop for service gt Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO gt page 478 Storage compartment in front center console wr ag
465. s To allow the use of these devices in the vehicle infrared transparent areas are placed in the windshield Operation The first 1000 miles 1500 km Driving instructions At the gas station Engine compartment Tires and wheels Winter driving Maintenance Vehicle care Operation The first 1000 miles 1500 km In the Operation section you will find The more cautiously you treat your vehicle After 1000 miles 1500 km you may detailed information on operating main during the break in period the more satis gradually increase vehicle and engine taining and caring for your vehicle fied you will be with its performance later speeds to the permissible maximum on BE Additional instructions for AMG vehicles e During the first 1000 miles 1500 km do 1000 miles 1500 km at varying but not exceed a speed of 85 mph 140 km h moderate vehicle and engine speeds e Drive your vehicle during the first e During this period avoid engine speeds e During this period avoid heavy loads above 4500 rpm in each gear full throttle driving and excessive l All of the above instructions as may apply engine speeds no more than 2 of to your vehicle type also apply when maximum rpm in each gear driving the first 1000 miles 1500 km af e Shift gears in a timely manner ter the engine the transfer case the front differential or the rear differential has been e Avoid accelerating by kick down replaced
466. s sages in the multifunction display Especially for high performance driving it is important to maintain and have the brake system checked regularly Parking brake When driving on wet roads or dirt covered surfaces road salt and or dirt can get into the parking brake To prevent corrosion and a reduction in the braking power of the parking brake observe the following gt From time to time lightly engage the parking brake before driving off gt Drive a distance of approximately 110 yds 100 m at a maximum speed of 12 mph 20 km h Warning A N While performing this procedure please as sure that the vehicle is stopped before ap plying the parking brake Otherwise the rear wheels could lock up You could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident In ad dition the vehicle s brake lights do not light up when the parking brake is engaged Make sure not to endanger any other road users when you engage the parking brake Driving off Apply the brakes to test them briefly after driving off Perform this procedure only when the road is clear of other traffic Warm up the engine smoothly Do not place full load on the engine until the oper ating temperature has been reached T When driving off on a slippery surface do not allow a drive wheel to spin for an extended period with the ESP switched off Doing so may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited
467. s 405 Winter driving instructions 354 Winter tires 405 Wiping and washing simultaneously 63 Wood trims cleaning 418 Window curtain airbags 78 Windows see Power windows Windshield Cleaning 415 Defogging 225 240 Infrared reflecting 344 Washer fluid 546 Windshield washer fluid 372 Messages in the multifunction display 469 Mixing ratio 546 Refilling 372 Reservoir level 372 Windshield washer system 372 546 Windshield wipers 60 Cleaning wiper blades 415 Fast continuous wiping 61 Fast intermittent wiping 61 Rear window wiper washer 62 Replacing wiper blades 494 Slow continuous wiping 61 Slow intermittent wiping 61 Service and Literature Your authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center has trained technicians and genuine Mercedes Benz Parts to service your vehicle properly For expert advice and quality service contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle please contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle For further information you can find us on the Mercedes Benz web site www mbusa com or www mercedes benz ca Warning A To help avoid personal injury be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs Improper or incomplete service or the use of incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle o
468. s approximately 2 1 US gt 2 0 1 R 63 AMG The filling quantity between the upper and lower marks on the oil dipstick is approximately 1 6 US gt 1 5 1 gt If necessary add engine oil For more information on engine oil see Technical data section gt page 538 and gt page 540 For information on messages in the multi function display concerning engine oil see the Practical hints section gt page 459 Operation Adding engine oil T Only use approved engine oils and oil filters required for vehicles with Maintenance System U S vehicles or FSS PLUS Canada vehicles For a listing of approved engine oils and oil filters refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet in your vehicle literature port folio or contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Using engine oils and oil filters of specification other than those expressly required for the Maintenance System U S vehicles or FSS PLUS Canada vehicles or changing of oil and oil filter at change intervals longer than those called for by the Maintenance System U S vehicles or FSS PLUS Canada vehicles will result in engine or emission control system damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Engine compartment R 350 R 320 CDI similar 1 Filler cap R 500 R 63 AMG similar 1 Filler cap Operation Engine compartment gt Unscrew filler cap G from filler neck gt
469. s are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident Warning With a third row seat occupied make sure to move the respective head restraint up from the lowest non use position and have the occupant adjust the head restraint properly For your protection drive only with properly positioned head restraints Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it is as close to the head as possible and the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation When removing or installing the head re straint of a second row seat adjust the seat to the rear as far as possible page 138 and fold the seat backrest gt page 133 forward Removing head restraints Seat position for removal of head restraints from second row seats 1 Head restraint 2 Release button gt To remove head restraint pull head restraint 4 to its uppermost position gt Press release button 2 and pull out head restraint Q The third row seat head restraints are re moved in the same manner Installing head restraints gt Insert head restraint Q into openings on the seat backrest On the second row seats the guide bar with the detent must be on the left gt Push head restraint down until it audibly engages gt Push release button 2 and adjust head restraint 1 to the desir
470. s ashtray cover Q down in direction of arrow as far as it will go Removing ashtray insert gt Open ashtray cover 1 gt Press ashtray cover Q down in direction of arrow as far as it will go Eere 1 Ashtray cover 2 Ashtray insert gt Push on ashtray insert 2 and pull it out upwards Reinstalling ashtray insert gt Insert ashtray insert 2 into opening gt Push down ashtray insert 2 until it engages gt Close ashtray cover Q Cigarette lighter Warning A N Never touch the heating element or sides of the cigarette lighter they are extremely hot Hold the knob only Make sure that any children traveling with you do injure themselves or start a fire with the hot cigarette lighter When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury gt Switch on the ignition gt page 39 Controls in detail 1 Cover plate 2 Cigarette lighter gt Open cover plate G gt page 319 gt Push in cigarette lighter 2 The cigarette lighter will pop out auto matically when hot gt Take out cigarette lighter 2 Useful features i The lighter socket can accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories u
471. s flash three times The locking knobs on the doors move down The anti theft alarm system is armed Locking and unlocking Selective setting If you frequently travel alone you may wish to reprogram the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO so when you grasp the driv er s door handle only the driver s door and the fuel filler flap unlocks gt Press and hold buttons and simultaneously for about 5 seconds until battery check lamp G gt page 116 flashes twice The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO will then function as follows Unlocking driver s door and fuel filler flap gt Grasp the drivers outside door handle All turn signal lamps flash once The locking knob in the driver s door moves up The anti theft alarm system is dis armed Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Global unlocking gt Grasp any outside door handle other than the driver s outside door handle All turn signal lamps flash once The locking knobs in the doors move up The anti theft alarm system is dis armed Global locking gt Press the lock button on an outside door handle gt page 69 All turn signal lamps flash three times The locking knobs in the doors move down The anti theft alarm system is armed Restoring to factory setting gt Press and hold buttons and simultaneously for about 5 seconds until battery check lamp gt page 116 flashes twice BS If you can no longer lock or unlock the vehi
472. s in detail Power windows Opening gt Press and release switch 1 To stop the hinged quarter window gt Press and release switch G once more Closing gt Press and release switch 2 To stop the hinged quarter window gt Press and release switch 2 once more When the obstruction sensor detects the hinged quarter window is blocked during the closing process it will stop and open slightly Synchronizing the door windows The door windows must be synchronized e after the battery was disconnected e if the door windows cannot be fully opened Express open or closed Express close Each door window must be synchronized separately gt Close all doors gt Switch on the ignition gt page 39 gt Pull and hold door window switch C 2 or gt page 251 Once a door window is closed completely hold the respective switch for approximately 3 seconds The door window is synchronized Summer opening feature If the weather is warm you can ventilate the vehicle before driving off by simulta neously e opening the door windows e opening the hinged quarter windows e opening the tilt sliding sunroof or tilt sliding panel e switching on the seat ventilation for the driver s seat gt Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO at the driver s outside door handle The SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be in close p
473. s in the multifunction display Lighting gt Press button Sg The selection marker moves to the next Submenu Settings Instr cluster Times Date The submenus are arranged by hierarchy Scroll down with button EE scroll up with button ES Control system With the selection marker on the desired submenu use the MJ button to access the individual functions within that sub menu Once within that submenu you can use the EAN button to move to the next function or the RY button to move to the previous function within that submenu The settings themselves are made with button or Controls in detail Control system The table below shows what settings can be changed within the various menus Detailed instructions on making individual settings can be found on the following pages INSTRUMENT CLUSTER TIME DATE LIGHTING VEHICLE COMFORT gt page 179 gt page 181 gt page 183 gt page 186 gt page 189 Selecting speedometer display Setting the time Setting daytime running Calling up the compass Activating mode hour lamp mode USA only easy entry exit feature Selecting language Setting the time Setting locator lighting Compass adjustment Setting fold in function minutes for exterior rear view mirrors Selecting display digital Setting the date Setting night security Compass calibration speedometer or outside month illumination temperature for status indicator Setting the da
474. s one of the memory position buttons or memory button M gt page 145 Do not leave children unattended in the ve hicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could open the driver s door and unintentionally activate the easy entry exit feature which could result in an accident and or serious personal injury With the easy entry exit feature activated the steering wheel will return to the last set position when you close the driver s door with the ignition switched on or e insert the SmartKey into the starter switch or press the KEYLESS GO start stop button gt page 41 once with the driver s door closed i The last set steering wheel position is stored when e the ignition is switched off gt page 39 e the position is stored into memory gt page 145 With the easy entry exit feature activated the steering wheel tilts upwards when you e remove the SmartKey from the starter switch or e open the driver s door with the SmartKey in starter switch position O or 1 gt page 39 or the KEYLESS GO start stop button in position 1 gt page 41 i If the current position for the steering wheel is in the uppermost tilt position the steering wheel will no longer be able to move upward when the easy entry exit feature is activated The adjustment procedure is briefly interrupted when the engine is started Controls in detail A Let the system complete the adjustment procedure b
475. s stuck in snow make sure that snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe and from around the vehicle with the engine running Otherwise deadly carbon monoxide CO gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation open a window slightly on the side of the vehicle not facing the wind A The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose Indicated temperatures just above the freez ing point do not guarantee that the road sur face is free of ice Warning For more information see Winter driving gt page 405 Driving instructions Standing water To prevent water from entering the pas senger compartment or the engine com partment if you must drive through standing water keep in mind that e the maximum depth of the water may not exceed 10 in 25 cm e you must drive slowly Vehicles with AIRMATIC except R 63 AMG If you have selected the raised level gt page 289 before driving through standing water the maximum water depth is 12 in 30 cm R 63 AMG with AIRMATIC If you have selected the highway level gt page 289 with the ADS in SPORT mode gt page 286 before driving through standing water the maximum water depth is 7 5 in 19 cm If you have selected the raised level gt page 289 before driving through standing water the
476. s the desired air distribution con control is switched on gt page 236 to adjust the air distribution for the rear trol gt Press button ERY gt page 234 paseene GOMPATUTGNI The indicator lamp on button Mg The indicator lamp on the button The symbols on the controls represent the goes out following functions comes on Adjusting automatically In display 04 gt page 234 youwillsee Symbol Function gt Press button R the iil symbol followed by MODE Directs air to the center air The indicator ha bat gt Set the desired temperature for the vents i 7 a a ON os an P comes on The air distribution is ad rear passenger compartment using Directs air to the footwells and justed automatically temperature control gt page 234 the side air vents After approximately 3 seconds after the last adjustment the display switch es back to its standard display and the indicator lamp on button ER goes out You can also press the EEN button once more to switch back to the standard display Controls in detail 3 zone automatic climate control Setting the temperature Use temperature control gt page 245 to separately adjust the air temperature of the rear passenger compartment You should raise or lower the temperature setting in small increments preferably starting at 72 F 22 C The automatic climate control will adjust to the set temperature as fast as possible i The rear automatic climate contr
477. s traction force of adhesive friction between the tires and the road surface and handling The ESP recognizes when a wheel is spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid By applying brakes to the appropriate wheel and by limiting engine output the ESP helps stabilize the vehicle The ESP is especially useful while driving off and on wet or slippery road surfaces The ESP also stabilizes the vehicle during braking maneuvers The ESP warning lamp in the instru ment cluster gt page 26 flashes when the ESP is engaged The ESP warning lamp in the instru ment cluster comes on when you switch on the ignition It goes out when the engine is running A Never switch off the ESP when you see the ESP warning lamp flashing in the in strument cluster In this case proceed as follows Warning e While driving off apply as little throttle as possible e While driving ease up on the accelera tor e Adapt your speed and driving style to the prevailing road conditions Failure to observe these guidelines could cause the vehicle to skid The ESP cannot prevent accidents result ing from excessive speed Safety and Security A The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded The ESP cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns fol lowing another vehicle too closely or hydro pla
478. sconaeteediaestea te aasecnnensaess 943 ae A E 530 Windshield washer and Rims and tiVeS essesesccceeceesssseenes 532 headlamp cleaning system 546 Same size THPES cccccccsssseseesssneees 533 Spare wheel collapsible tire 534 M Electrical system cc sssccssseeeeeees 999 MAAK icine sccesscncssoressoeesundaceounganenantonatss 547 Main DIMENSIONS ccceeeeeeeeeeees 936 WES MO inr EE tai nig cdeaseaeeaeanies 537 Y Product information Please observe the following in your own best interest We recommend using Genuine Mercedes Benz Parts as well as conversion parts and accessories explicitly approved by us for your vehicle model We have tested these parts to determine their reliability safety and special Suitability for Mercedes Benz vehicles We are unable to make an assessment for other products and therefore cannot be held responsible for them even if in indi vidual cases an official approval or authori zation by governmental or other agencies should exist Use of such parts and acces sories could adversely affect the safety performance or reliability of your vehicle Please do not use them Introduction Product information Genuine Mercedes Benz Parts as well as conversion parts and accessories approved by us are available at your authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center where you will receive comprehen sive information also on permissible tech nical modifi
479. se 245 Rear automatic climate control second and third row 6 249 Power WINCOWS sccccsesscsereceenesces 251 Opening and CIOSING 000008 251 Synchronizing the door windows 254 Summer opening feature 254 Convenience closing feature 256 Power tilt sliding sunroof Opening and CIOSING 000008 SYNCHYONIZING ccccesseeeeeeeeeeeees Panorama roof with power tilt sliding panel ccsssssssceeseees Roller sunblinds for the panorama roof with power tilt sliding panel Opening and closing the panorama roof with power tilt sliding panel Synchronizing the panorama roof with power tilt sliding SEU E E ET Driving SYSTEMS eeeeeesseeessssesssseee CrulS ContfOlserierisisrisisisiivisssiesss LI SEN ONC crina Distance warning function AIRMATIC icc coccossessncncetneenannaewnters Parktronic Parking assist Rear VIEW camera cceeeeeceeeeeee EGOIN e E 297 ROO TACK Toses 297 Loading instructions 66 298 Cargo tie down IingS csseecee 299 PIO OMS Ere EE 300 Expanding cargo compartment 301 Cargo compartment cover blind 306 Partition net scstacsnetesabacnedwedicccentent 308 Useful features cecccccsssseeceee eens 311 Storage compartments 311 Parcel Nets ssccccssssercceeenseees 315 CUD Nolder S scocswancsetentvinuranet
480. se a Soft non scratching cloth when clean ing the rear part of the tilt sliding panel Otherwise you may scratch or damage the protective layer Light alloy wheels If possible clean wheels once a week gt Use Mercedes Benz approved Wheel Care a soft bristle brush and a strong spray of water for cleaning the light al loy wheels i Only use acid free cleaning materials Acid may cause corrosion or damage the clear coat i The vehicle should not be parked for an extended period of time immediately after it has been cleaned especially not after the wheel rims have been cleaned with wheel rim cleaner Wheel rim cleaners can lead to increased corrosion of the brake disks and brake pads Non approved wheel cleaners may also damage the wheel paint if the car is not driven after cleaning Therefore the vehicle s brake system should always be warmed up before it is parked after cleaning To do so please drive your vehicle for several minutes to allow the brakes to dry When applying Mercedes Benz approved Tire Care and Mercedes Benz approved Wheel Care products take care not to spray them on the brake disks Plastic and rubber parts gt Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing solution gt Wipe with a cloth moistened in a luke warm solution The surface may temporarily change color If this is the case wait for it to dry AN Do not use cleaners contai
481. se a mild carwash detergent suchas Parktronic system sensors in front Mercedes Benz approved Car bumper Shampoo with plenty of water and a non scratching cloth to clean sensor gt Usea mild car wash detergent such as Mercedes Benz approved Car cover 1 Shampoo with plenty of water and a T To prevent scratches or damage never soft non scratching cloth to clean apply strong force and only use a soft sensors 1 on the bumpers non scratching cloth when cleaning the sensor cover 1 Do not attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth or sponge Cleaning the Rear View Camera lens P54 00 2552 31 1 Camera lens gt Only use clean water and a soft non scratching cloth to clean camera lens Be careful not to apply wax to camera lens Q when waxing the vehicle If neces sary remove the wax using the Mercedes Benz approved Car Shampoo with plenty of water Operation i Do not clean the camera and the area around the camera e with a high pressure cleaner e with a dry cloth and high pressure e with aggressive cleaning agents You could otherwise damage the camera Cleaning the windows and the wiper blades A For safety reasons switch off wipers and re move SmartKey from starter switch vehicles with KEYLESS GO Make sure the vehicle s on board electronics have status 0 before cleaning the windshield and or the wiper blades Otherwise the wiper motor could suddenly turn on and
482. se more than this amount of anticorrosion antifreeze Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc If the coolant level is low water and MB 325 0 anticorrosion antifreeze should be used to bring it up to the proper level have cooling system checked for signs of leakage Please make sure the mixture is in accordance with label instructions The water in the cooling system must meet minimum requirements which are usually satisfied by normal drinking water If you are not sure about the water quality con sult an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Anticorrosion antifreeze Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum parts The use of aluminum components in motor vehicle engines ne cessitates that anticorrosion antifreeze coolant used in such engines be specifically formulated to protect the Anticorrosion antifreeze quantity Model R 320 CDI R 350 R 500 R 63 AMG aluminum parts Failure to use such anti corrosion antifreeze coolant will result in a significantly shortened service life Therefore the following product is strongly recommended for use in your vehicle Mercedes Benz 325 0 anticorrosion anti freeze agent Approx freeze protection 35 F 37 C 5 0 US qt 4 75 I 5 0 US qt 4 75 1 5 6 US gt 5 25 I 6 1 US qt 5 751 49 F 45 C 5 5 US qt 5 2 5 5 US qt 5 2 6 1 US gt 5 8 6 8 US qt 6 41 Technical data Fuels coolants lub
483. seeeeceneeees 10 Service and warranty information ccccceeeesecceeeeeeeeeeens 10 Important notice for California retail buyers and lessees of Mercedes Benz automobiles 11 Maintenance cececcecececececeecees 12 Roadside Assistance 0ee00 12 Change of address or ownership 13 Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada ccccsseeeees 13 Where to find Ese stecincstaitvacnsiaswetaveseestes 14 SYMHO lE sespe rra 15 Operating safety ccccccccsssecceeeeeeeees 16 Proper use of the vehicle 16 Problems with your vehicle 0 17 Reporting safety defects ccce 18 Reporting safety defects 18 Vehicle data recording cccseccceeees 19 Information regarding electronic recording AEVICES seecceeeeeeeees 19 At a glance 2 00 cece ceeeccceeeesceeeeeees 21 Exterior VIQW cccsssscecsseeceeecescneesscees 22 GOCKOI serrr 24 Instrument CIUStEP ccsseeceeeeseeees 26 Multifunction steering wheel 30 Center console csccccssssccsesseeeeees 31 Upper part cccccsssscccesecceeeeees 31 LOWE DATT 2ccssecuvsanevdancaniarsavaeneredteed 32 Overhead control panel cccce sees 33 Storage compartments cceceees 34 Door control panel ccccccseesceeeeeees 36 Getting started ce cccccceeeeeeees 37 WIAI
484. sengers should always wear seat belts If you are ever in an accident your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled Without your seat belt buckled you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it You can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are wearing your seat belt The air bags can only provide the protection they were designed to afford if the occupants are using their seat belts gt page 79 Warning VAN According to accident statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seat ing position Thus we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats Regardless of seating position children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant or toddler restraint or booster seat recom mended for the size and weight of the child For additional information see Children in the vehicle gt page 84 A child s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the child restraint Getting started Driving Warning uN Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous You could slide und
485. side Assistance Program provides factory trained technical help in the event of a breakdown Calls to the toll free Roadside Assistance number 1 800 FOR MERCedes in the USA 1 800 387 0100 in Canada will be answered by Mercedes Benz Cus tomer Assistance Representatives 24 hours a day 365 days a year Roadside Assistance will be provided in ac cordance with standard program guide lines which include providing service to the vehicle up to a reasonable distance from a paved roadway We will make every effort to assist in a breakdown situation howev er the accessibility of your vehicle will be determined by our authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center techni cian or the tow service provider on a case by case basis and may be a factor in our ability to respond Additional charges may be applicable for a breakdown location determined not to bea reasonably accessible roadside location as determined by our authorized technician and tow service provider For additional information refer to the Mercedes Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure in your vehicle literature portfolio Change of address or ownership If you change your address be sure to send in the Change of Address Notice found in the Service and Warranty Informa tion Booklet or simply call the Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Center in the USA at 1 800 FOR MERCedes or Customer Ser vice in Canada at 1 800 387 0100 Itis in your own inte
486. sition N gt With the vehicle at a standstill depress the brake pedal and keep it pressed gt Step firmly on parking brake pedal gt page 66 gt Press button on gear selector lever in direction of arrow gt page 197 to select park position P gt Release the brake pedal T Shift the automatic transmission directly from drive position D to reverse gear R from reverse gear R to drive position D or directly to park position P only when the vehicle is stopped Otherwise the automatic transmission could be damaged When trying to free a vehicle stuck in mud or snow see Rocking the vehicle gt page 204 Controls in detail Automatic transmission Shifting from D or R to N If you want to select neutral position N with the transmission being in drive position D or reverse gear R gt With the vehicle at a standstill depress the brake pedal and keep it pressed gt Step firmly on parking brake pedal gt page 66 When the vehicle needs to be moved with the engine switched off and the transmission set to neutral position N gt page 201 e g in an automatic car wash do not depress the parking brake pedal gt Move gear selector lever up to resis tance point when in drive position D or down to resistance point when in reverse gear R to select neutral position N gt Release the brake pedal Shifting procedure The automatic transmission selects indi vidual gears a
487. ss of control Warning A N It is dangerous to shift the gear selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal ga Shift the automatic transmission to position P or R only when the vehicle is stopped in order to avoid damaging the transmission T Do not run cold engine at high engine speeds Running a cold engine at high engine speeds may shorten the service life of the engine R 63 AMG At engine temperatures below 68 F 20 C the engine s maximum speed is restricted in order to protect it from damage Avoid driving your vehicle at full speed when the engine is cold to prevent premature engine wear and or diminished comfort T Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake reduces engine performance and causes premature brake and drivetrain wear For more information see Driving instruc tions gt page 347 Switching on headlamps For more information on headlamps see Lighting gt page 146 Low beam headlamps The exterior lamp switch is located on the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel F me lt a E Exterior lamp switch Off 2 Low be
488. ssistance button remains illuminated in red for approximately 10 seconds during the system self check after switching on the ignition together with the SOS button and the Information button See system self check gt page 331 if the inal cator lamp does not come on in red or stays on longer than approximately 10 seconds If the indicator lamp on the Roadside Assistance button is flashing continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established then the Tele Aid system could not initiate a Roadside Assistance call e g the rele vant cellular phone network was not available The message Call failed appears in the mul tifunction display Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated using the button on the multifunction steering wheel or the END button on the COMAND system headunit Information button The Information button is located below the center armrest cover gt 1 Information button j li i 3 f Bes F HEREAE a lt Tie Open the storage tray gt page 313 Press and hold button Q for longer than 2 seconds A call to the Customer Assistance Center will be initiated The button will flash while the call is in progress The message Connecting call will appear in the multifunction display When the connection is established the message Call connected appears in the multifunction display The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identificatio
489. sssecceeeeees 505 PAOI e E aves 506 Disconnecting removing reinstalling and reconnecting the DELLS scosccdnassnvenarvecsaaseranererenns 508 Charging the battery e 513 Jump starting xc catcsvtewtspsnornevnssasenscoeness 514 Towing the vehicle cccesseceeeeees 517 Installing towing eye bolt 518 Stranded vehicle n se 519 FU SOG en ET 520 Fuse box in engine compartment seseseseseseeereeenee 521 Fuse box in cargo compartment Fuse box in passenger COMpArtMeN secceeseceeeeees 922 Emergency engine shut down 522 A Fuels coolants lubricants etc 538 Technical data cccccceceeeeeees 523 Capacities x sesdenacenapdvecsbeseseuveurntien 938 Parts SCIVICG scacextiseararsntseceyrecnecdnecetures 524 ENGINE O1S nesnesete 540 Warranty coverage 525 Engine oil additives eee 940 Loss of Service and Warranty Air conditioning refrigerant 540 Information Booklet e 925 Brake TUNG sa ciersanasaeescdncaatectesuauesics 541 Identification labels cccseeeeeees 526 Premium unleaded gasoline Layout of poly V belt drive 928 gasoline ENiNe cceeereeees 541 R320 CDI peparen inen 528 Gasoline additives FO a OENE EA 528 gasoline ENiNe cceeseeeeeees 542 R OO er 528 Fuel requirements s ssssseseeeeeee 542 ROS AMU ervaneaeveceavatapetieeavnantentvenes 529 COOIANTS gi
490. stems BAS The Brake Assist System BAS operates in emergency situations If you apply the brakes very quickly the BAS automatically provides full brake boost thereby poten tially reducing braking distance gt Apply continuous full braking pressure until the emergency braking situation is over The ABS will prevent the wheels from locking When you release the brake pedal the brakes function again as normal The BAS is then deactivated Warning A N If the BAS is malfunctioning the brake sys tem is still functioning but without the addi tional brake boost available that BAS would normally provide in an emergency braking maneuver Therefore the braking distance may increase Warning VAN The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The BAS cannot prevent accidents includ ing those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or danger ous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ESP The Electronic Stability Program ESP is operational as soon as the engine Is run ning and monitors the vehicle
491. sunaieene 316 A MOYSES 319 Cigarette lighter sensen 321 Power outlets ccccssseeceneeees 322 Rear center Console 0006 323 Heated steering wheel 326 Telephone cccccssccceesesceseeees 327 TECA arosa an 330 Garage door opener 6608 337 GCOMMDASS risi E 342 FOOrMATS sesa 343 Infrared reflecting windshield 344 I Operation aooeeoeeeeseeeeseeesss esseen 345 The first 1000 miles 1500 km 346 Driving instructions cccceeeeeeeee ees 347 Drive sensibly save fuel 347 Drinking and riving cceeeee 347 Pedal esise i 347 Power assistance cccceeeeeee eens 348 Brak OG reperar 348 Driving Off eeeccccessssseceeeeeeeeeeees 351 P clit CIE E AE 351 IEE EE E EAE 352 HyCroplaning cccccsssseceeeeeeees 352 Tire traction cssccccsesscecesecees 353 Tire Speed rating cceeccceeeeeeeees 353 Winter driving instructions 354 Standing Water ccccccseeseceeeees 355 Passenger compartment 356 Driving abroad uu eeeceeecceeeeeeeees 356 Control and operation of radio transmitters ssssneseiiennesesasesssacunrveded 357 Catalytic converter gasoline ENINE cccceeeeeeeeees 357 Oxidation catalyst diesel ENgine ccccceseeeeeees Emission control cccseeeeeees Coolant temperature 066 At the gas station Re
492. t function displayed in each menu will show you which part of the system you are in i The headings used in the menus table are designed to facilitate navigation within the Sys tem and are not necessarily identical to those Controls in detail Control system Standard display menu The following functions are available Checking coolant temperature In the standard display the main odometer Function Page i l and the trip odometer appear in the multi Checking tire inflation pressure 382 Kanning A NENON ASRA Checking coolant temperature 166 e Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire You could be seriously Calling up digital speedometer or 167 outside temperature AN Calling up maintenance service 409 burned indicator e Steam from an overheated engine can SD Ts 2 Checking engine oil level 366 cause serious burns which can occur Trip odometer R 500 only just by opening the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam Main odometer coming from it gt If you see another display press Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from button or repeatedly until other traffic Turn off the engine get out of the standard display appears the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle gt Press button BV or EAN to select until the engine has cooled down the functions in the standard display me
493. t Press button gt page 220 again The indicator lamp on the button goes out The residual heat is automatically turned off e when the ignition is switched on e after about 30 minutes e if the coolant temperature is too low e if the battery voltage drops Controls in detail Climate control Rear climate control The control panel for the rear climate control is only available if your vehicle is equipped with seat heating for the second row seats The control panel is located on the rear of the front center console Controls in detail Climate control Rear climate control panel JAO GLET Er O Rear climate control on automatic mode Air distribution directs air through the center air vents Rear air conditioning off Air distribution directs air through the footwells and side air vents Right rear center air vent adjustable Left rear center air vent adjustable Activating rear climate control The climate control must be switched on gt page 231 gt Press button Rg The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air volume and air distri bution are adjusted automatically i The temperature is adjusted according to the settings for the front passenger side made on the front climate control panel page 223 Deactivating rear climate control gt Press button fig The indicator lamp on the button goes out The cooling function switches off after a s
494. t Switch on the ignition gt page 39 The standard display of the control sys tem appears gt page 166 gt Press button or on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the standard display appears in the multifunction display gt page 166 Operation gt Press button B or FAM on the multifunction steering wheel until the maintenance service indicator display with the service symbol and the service deadline appears in the multi function display Q If the battery is disconnected the days of disconnection will not be included in the count shown by the maintenance service indicator To arrive at the true maintenance service deadline you will need to subtract these days from the days shown in the maintenance service indicator message or maintenance service indicator display Maintenance Resetting the maintenance service indicator In the event that the maintenance service on your vehicle is not carried out by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center you can have the maintenance service indicator reset The automotive maintenance facility carrying out the maintenance service will find the informa tion for resetting the maintenance service indicator in the maintenance relevant literature for your vehicle Such literature is available either from either an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center or directly from Mercedes Benz i If the maintenance service indicator was in advertent
495. t antifreeze e 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts solvent 1 34 fl oz 40 ml MB SummerFit to 1 gal 4 0 I solvent A ABS 100 Indicator lamp 420 Messages in the multifunction display 435 Accelerator position automatic transmission 203 Accessory weight 401 Accident 64 Active head restraint 83 137 482 Airbags 74 Children 75 86 Front Driver 77 Front Passenger 77 Messages in the multifunction display 445 448 Occupant Classification System OCS 88 Safety guidelines 76 Side impact 78 Window curtain 78 Air conditioning Cooling 228 243 Air conditioning refrigerant 540 Air conditioning system see Climate control or Automatic climate control 3 zone Air distribution 223 238 Air pressure see Tire inflation pressure Air pressure Tires 401 Air pump Electric 502 Air recirculation mode 226 240 Air vents Front 218 224 232 238 Air vents Rear 230 245 249 Air volume 224 239 AIRMATIC 285 Messages in the multifunction display 470 Alarm system see Anti theft systems Alignment bolt vehicle tool kit 472 500 Anticorrosion antifreeze 543 546 Antiglare Interior rear view mirror 212 Antiglare Auto dimming rear view mirrors 213 Anti theft systems 107 Anti theft alarm system 107 Immobilizer 107 Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning Arm rests Second row 141 Armrest storage compartments Front 313 Rear 314 Ashtrays 319 Aspect ratio 401 ATF 370 AUDIO menu 171 CD operation 172 Radio operation 171 Satell
496. t page 484 gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible Display symbol Display message Tele Aid inoperative Tele Aid battery FUNCION unavailable Top up washer fluid Practical hints Possible cause consequence One or more main functions of the Tele Aid system are malfunctioning The emergency power battery for the Tele Aid system is malfunctioning If the vehicle battery is also malfunctioning or drained Tele Aid will not be operational This display appears if button or on the multifunction steering wheel is pressed and the vehicle is not equipped with a telephone The fluid level has dropped to about of total reservoir capacity What to do if Possible solution gt Have the Tele Aid system checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center gt Have the Tele Aid system checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center gt Add washer fluid gt page 372 Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Possible cause consequence Fess STOP The AIRMATIC is inoperative car too low Malfunction The AIRMATIC is malfunctioning Malfunction The AIRMATIC is functional only to a limited extent Possible solution gt Avoid large steering angles Otherwise a fender or tire could be damaged Do not
497. t the seat belt tell tale always comes on and remains lit for 6 seconds after starting the engine Fasten your seat belt The warning chime stops sounding Fasten your seat belts The seat belt telltale goes out Remove the items from the front pas senger seat and put them in a safe place The seat belt telltale goes out Practical hints What to do if Problem Possible cause consequence Suggested solution During driving the red seat belt The vehicle s speed once exceeded gt Fasten your seat belts es ei st a is we 25 L r AER a The seat belt telltale goes out and the ally hear an intermittent warning front passenger have forgotten to fasten your warning chime stops sounding chime with increasing intensity seat belts There are items placed on the front passen gt Remove the items from the front ger seat and therefore the system senses the passenger seat and put them in a safe front passenger seat as being occupied place The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stops sounding amp After 60 seconds with an unfastened seat belt on one of the front seats the warning chime stops sounding and the seat belt telltale illumi nates continuously The seat belt telltale will only go out if both the driver and front passenger s seat belt are fastened or the vehicle is standing still and a front door is opened Practical hints What to do if Problem Possible cause consequence
498. t be activated when needed in an accident which could result in serious or fatal injury or it might deploy unexpect edly and unnecessarily which could result in an accident and or injury to you or to others Lamp in center console Problem eg or The front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp illuminates and re mains illuminated with the weight of a typical adult or someone larger than a small individual on the front passenger seat Warning A N If the indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated with the weight of a typical adult or someone larger than a small individual on the front passen ger seat do not have any passenger use the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired Possible cause consequence The system is malfunctioning Practical hints What to do if Suggested solution gt Have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Also read and observe any messages in the multifunction display and follow corrective steps gt page 445 Practical hints What to do if Problem euR The front passenger Warning If the indicator lamp does Possible Suggested solution cause consequence The system is malfunction Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and front air bag off indicator ing child seat and check installation of the child seat ome on He lls gt Make sure no objects applying su
499. t cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment You can also open and close the power win dows the tilt sliding sunroof or the tilt sliding panel gt page 261 using the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO see Summer opening feature gt page 254 and Convenience closing fea ture gt page 256 Controls in detail Important notes on using KEYLESS GO You can also use the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO like a normal SmartKey gt page 112 You can combine KEYLESS GO func tions with normal SmartKey functions e g unlocking with KEYLESS GO and locking with the button Always carry the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO with you Never store the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO together with e electronic items such as a cellular phone or another SmartKey with KEYLESS GO e metallic objects such as coins or metal foil Doing so could impair the function of the KEYLESS GO system Locking and unlocking To lock or unlock the vehicle the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be located outside the vehicle within approximately 3 ft 1 m of the respec tive door or the tailgate In order to start the engine with the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO e The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be located in the vehicle e The KEYL
500. t of diagnostic trouble codes It is located in the front left area of the footwell next to the parking brake pedal Practical hints What to do if Problem ENNE USA only Canada only The yellow engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving Possible cause conse quence A loss of pressure has been detected in the fuel system The fuel cap may not be closed properly or the fuel system may be leaky Your fuel tank is empty Suggested solution gt Check the fuel cap gt page 360 If it is not closed properly gt Close the fuel cap If it is closed properly gt Have the fuel system checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center gt After refueling start turn off and restart the engine three or four times in succession The limp home mode is canceled You do not need to have your vehicle checked Practical hints What to do if Problem Possible cause consequence Suggested solution The yellow ESP warning lamp The ESP has been switched of with the ESP gt Switch the ESP back on comes on while the engine is switch or has switched off due to a gt page 105 dau TENN ON If the ESP cannot be switched back on Risk of accident gt Continue driving with added caution Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail a Observe additional messages in the ing road weather and traffic conditions multifunction display that may appear
501. tact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center T Using engine oils and oil filters of specification other than those expressly re quired for the Maintenance System U S vehicles or FSS PLUS Canada vehicles or changing of oil and oil filter at change intervals longer than those called for by the Maintenance System U S vehicles or FSS PLUS Canada vehicles will result in engine or emission control system damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Please follow Maintenance System U S vehicles or FSS PLUS Canada vehicles recommendations for scheduled oil changes Failure to do so could result in engine or emission control system damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Engine oil additives Do not blend oil additives with engine oil They may damage the engine Damage or malfunctions resulting from blending oil additives are not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Air conditioning refrigerant R 134a HFC refrigerant and special PAG lubricating oil are used in the air condition ing system Never use R 12 CFC or mineral based lu bricating oil Otherwise damage to the system will occur Brake fluid Warning A N During vehicle operation the boiling point of the brake fluid is continuously reduced through the absorption of moisture from the atmosphere Under extremely strenuous operating conditions this moisture content can lead to the formati
502. tarted Diesel engine gt Make sure the automatic transmission is set to P The transmission position indicator in the multifunction display should be on P Do not depress the accelerator Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 2 gt page 40 Preglow indicator lamp qo in the in strument cluster comes on gt As soon as preglow indicator lamp Kel goes out turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 3 gt page 40 and release it The engine starts automatically i If the engine is at operating temperature preglow indicator lamp gg may not stay on and you can Start the engine without preglowing Starting with KEYLESS GO A As long as the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is in your vehicle the vehicle can be started Therefore never leave children unattended in the vehicle as they could otherwise accidentally start the engine Warning When leaving the vehicle always take the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle You can start your vehicle without the SmartKey in the starter switch using the KEYLESS GO start stop button in the starter switch The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be located in the vehicle Getting started Driving Gasoline engine gt Make sure the automatic transmission is set to P The transmission position indicator in the multifunction d
503. te Setting interior lighting Audio search function day delayed shut off Setting the date Setting automatic year locking Limiting opening height of tailgate Instrument cluster submenu Access the Instr cluster submenu via the Settings menu Use the Instr cluster submenu to change the instru ment cluster display settings The following functions are available Function Page Selecting speedometer display 179 mode Selecting language 179 Selecting display digital 180 speedometer or outside temperature for status indicator Selecting speedometer display mode gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Instr cluster submenu gt Press button a or Red repeatedly until the message Display unit Digital speedometer appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting y Sao gt Press button or E to set speedometer unit to km or miles Display unit Digital speedometer Controls in detail Control system Selecting language gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Instr cluster submenu Press button BeN or Ref repeatedly until the message Language appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Lanquage Deutsch rancals Py O gt Press button or E to select the language to be used for the multifunction display messages Controls in detail
504. technicians Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center 1 Front side impact air bag 2 Window curtain air bag 3 Rear side impact air bag The side impact air bags and window curtain air bags are deployed e onthe impacted side of the vehicle e in impacts exceeding a preset deploy ment threshold e independently of the front air bags In addition the window curtain air bags 2 are deployed in certain vehicle rollovers The front passenger side impact air bag will not deploy if the OCS senses that the front passenger seat is empty and the front passenger seat belt is not fastened latch plate is not inserted into the buckle With an empty front passenger seat and the seat belt fastened latch plate properly in serted into buckle the front passenger side impact air bag will deploy indepen dently of the empty seat The side impact air bags and window cur tain air bags are not deployed in impacts which do not exceed the system s deploy ment threshold Safety and Security Occupant safety Seat belts Always wear your seat belt All vehicle occupants always need to have their seat belts fastened and wear them properly In addition applicable motor vehicle safety laws require you to wear seat belts Even where this is not the case we strongly recommend that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened and wear them properly For more information see Fastening the seat belt
505. tem will reduce vehicle stability in stan dard driving maneuvers Do not switch off the ESP when a spare wheel is mounted To improve the vehicle s traction switch off the ESP in driving situations where it would be advantageous to have the drive wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for better grip such as e when driving with snow chains e in deep snow e in sand or gravel BE Switch on the ESP immediately if the aforementioned circumstances do not apply anymore When you switch off the ESP e the ESP does not stabilize the vehicle e the engine output is not limited which allows the drive wheels to spin and thus cut into surfaces for better grip e the 4 ETS will still apply the brake to a spinning wheel e the ESP continues to operate when you are braking e you cannot activate the cruise control or the Distronic system e the cruise control or the Distronic system switch off if currently activated When the ESP is switched off and one or more drive wheels are spinning the ESP warn ing lamp in the instrument cluster flashes However the ESP will then not stabilize the vehicle The ESP switch is located on the upper part of the center console 3 Se P54 25 4183 31 gt With the engine running press ESP switch Q The ESP warning lamp in the in strument cluster comes on The ESP is deactivated 1 ESP switch Warning A N When the ESP warning l
506. ter pump which may result in damage to the engine Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center If it is intact gt Wait for the message to disappear before restarting the engine Doing otherwise could result in seri ous engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Continued on next page Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Warning A N Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire You could be seriously burned Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the engine hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Turn off the engine get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down Possible cause consequence Possible solution gt Observe the coolant temperature in the multifunction display gt page 166 If the temperature rises again gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center immediately During severe operation conditions and BE The engine should not be operated with the stop and go city traffic the coolant tem coolant temperature above 248 F 120 C perature may rise close to 248 F 120 C Doing so may cause serious damage which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Display symbol Display m
507. tes If you have turned off the air conditioning gt page 243 or the outside temperature is below 41 F 5 C the air recirculation mode will not switch on automatically Controls in detail Warning AN Never operate the windows and tilt sliding sunroof or tilt sliding panel if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing procedure In case the procedure causes potential danger Vehicles with or without tilt sliding sunroof The closing of the windows can be immediately halted by pressing or pulling the respective window switch The closing of the tilt sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by moving the switch for the tilt sliding sunroof in any direction The closing of the windows and the tilt sliding sunroof can be reversed by again pressing and holding the button Vehicles with panorama roof The closing of the windows and tilt sliding panel can be immediately halted by releasing the button 3 zone automatic climate control i To cool the interior as fast as possible the automatic climate control automatically switches to air recirculation The indicator lamp on button is not lit when the system switches to air recirculation automatically Deactivating gt Press button gt page 234 The indicator lamp on the button goes out The air recirculation mode is deactivated automatically e after 5 minutes if the outside temperature Is below approxim
508. the entry side of the front passenger seat e Front passenger seat head restraint height and backrest position A Do not activate the memory function while driving Activating the memory function while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Warning Controls in detail Memory function The memory button and stored position Storing positions into memory Recalling positions from memory buttons are located on the entry side of ae each front seat base gt Adjust the seats gt page 44 BE Do not operate the power seats using mem ory button M if the seat backrest is in an exces sively reclined position Doing so could cause damage to front or rear seats On the driver s side additionally adjust the steering wheel gt page 46 and exterior rear view mirrors gt page 48 to the desired positions d t i r 4 i Move seat backrest to an upright position first gt Press and hold stored position Press memory button M l button 1 2 or 3 until the seat steering Release memory button M and press wheel and exterior rear view mirrors stored position 1 2 or 3 within have fully moved to the stored posi 3 seconds tions All settings are stored to the selected a Releasing the stored position button stops position movement to the stored positions immediately M Memory button 1 2 3 Stored positions gt Switch on the ignition gt page 39 or gt Open the respec
509. the message Lamp circuit headlamp appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Controls in detail Control system Lamp circuit headlamp B Manual Constant A SY 46 gt Press button or E to select manual operation Manual or daytime running lamp mode Constant With daytime running lamp mode activated and the exterior lamp switch in position WEJ or EG the low beam headlamps are switched on when the engine is running Controls in detail Control system In low ambient light conditions the following lamps will switch on additionally e Parking lamps e Tail lamps e License plate lamps e Side marker lamps For more information on the daytime running lamp mode see Lighting gt page 146 For safety reasons changing the setting for the daytime running lamp mode is not possible while the vehicle is in motion The following message appears in the multifunction display Settings only possible at standstill For safety reasons resetting to factory settings page 176 while driving will not deactivate the daytime running lamp mode Setting locator lighting With the locator lighting feature activated the exterior lamp switch in position RA gt page 147 and the interior lighting in automatic mode gt page 153 the following lamps will switch on during dark ness when the vehicle is unlocked using button on the Sma
510. the reset button in the settings with which you can reset all Submenus in the Settings menu 177 ae cia gt P 130 tor the settings to the original factory approximately 9 seconds Instrument cluster submenu 179 settings The request to press the reset button Time date submenu 181 once more to confirm appears in the e A collection of submenus with which a ee 183 multifunction displ you can make individual settings for ens ea ai a your vehicle Vehicle submenu 186 gt Press button or repeatedly Comfort submenu 189 w adres until the Settings menu appears in the AN Factory settings UN To confirm multifunction display press reset button a t Ji Settings j gt Press the reset button once more To reset P Press reset button He The functions of all the submenus will For 3 seconds reset to factory settings The settings you have changed will not be reset unless you confirm the action by pressing the reset button a second time After approximately 5 seconds the Settings menu reappears in the multifunction display gt page 176 For safety reasons the function Light circuit headlamp in the Lighting submenu cannot be reset while driving The following message appears in the multifunc tion display Settings Cannot be completely reset to factory settings while driving Controls in detail Submenus in the Settings menu gt Press button A The collection of the submenus appear
511. the status of the navi gation system e With the COMAND system switched off the message Navi off appears in the multifunction display e With the COMAND system switched on but route guidance not activated the direction of travel and if applicable the name of the street currently traveled on appear in the multifunction display Controls in detail Control system e With the COMAND system switched on and route guidance activated the direction of travel and maneuver in structions appear in the multifunction display Please refer to the COMAND system manual for instructions on how to activate the route guidance system Controls in detail Control system AIRMATIC Compass menu Distronic menu The AIRMATIC Compass menu displays the Use the DISTRONIC menu gt page 276 to AIRMATIC messages and the direction display the current settings for your into which you are currently driving Distronic system The information shown in the multifunction display depends on gt Press button or repeatedly l until the AIRMATIC Compass menu whether the Distronic system is activated appears in the multifunction display or deactivated Please refer to the Driving systems section of this manual gt page 27 1 for instructions on how to activate Distronic gt Press button or repeatedly to select the Distronic menu in the multifunction display AIRMATIC Compass G o NE For information on AIRMATI
512. the steering wheel and the exterior rear view mirrors gt or gt or Switch on the ignition gt page 40 Open the respective door vehicles with memory function The seat can be adjusted with the re spective door opened Open a front door vehicles without memory function The seat can be adjusted within 3 minutes after either front door has been opened Seat fore and aft adjustment gt Press the switch forward or backward in direction of arrow Adjust the seat to a comfortable seating position that still allows you to reach the accelerator brake pedal safely The position should be as far to the rear as possible consistent with ability to properly operate controls Seat height gt Press the switch up or down in direction of arrow Seat cushion tilt gt Press the switch up or down in direction of arrow 2 until your upper legs are lightly supported Seat backrest tilt gt Press the switch forward or backward in direction of arrow 4 until your arms are slightly angled when holding the steering wheel Getting started Head restraint height Warning A N Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident With a third row seat occupied make sure to move the respective head restraint up from the lowest non use position and have the occupant adjust the head restraint properly For
513. thin 3 ft 1 m of the vehicle e Press the KEYLESS GO start stop button gt page 41 The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be inside the vehicle Removing the mechanical key P80 20 2725 31 1 Mechanical key locking tab 2 Mechanical key gt Move locking tab in direction of arrow Slide mechanical key 2 out of the housing Unlocking the driver s door P80 20 2697 31 1 Unlocking 2 Mechanical key gt Insert mechanical key 2 into the driver s door lock until it stops Turn mechanical key 2 counterclock wise to position Q and hold it there Pull the door handle until the locking knob moves up The driver s door is unlocked Pull the door handle once more to open the driver s door Locking the vehicle If you cannot lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS GO lock the vehicle carrying out the following steps gt Close the front passenger door the rear right door and the tailgate gt Open the driver s door and the rear left door gt Press the central locking switch on the driver s door gt page 130 The locking knobs of the front passen ger door and the rear doors move down If the vehicle battery is disconnected or drained gt Press down the locking knobs of the front passenger door and the rear doors manually Practical hints Unlocking locking in an emergency Exit the vehicle Close the driver s door Enter th
514. ti theft alarm system is armed For more information see Locking and unlocking gt page 112 P8 0 30 2205 31 1 Lock button on the outside door handle gt Press lock button Q on an outside door handle With the tailgate and all doors closed the turn signal lamps flash three times The locking knobs on the doors move down The anti theft alarm system is armed For more information see Locking and unlocking gt page 112 Getting started Parking and locking Safety and Security Occupant safety Panic alarm Driving safety systems Anti theft systems Safety and Security Occupant safety In this section you will learn the most important facts about the restraint systems of the vehicle The restraint systems are e Seat belts gt page 79 e Child restraints gt page 95 e Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren LATCH gt page 93 Additional protection provide e Supplemental Restraint System SRS with e Air bags gt page 74 e Air bag control unit with crash sensors e Emergency Tensioning Device ETD for seat belts gt page 82 e Active head restraints gt page 83 Air bag system components with e Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp gt page 92 e Front passenger seat with Occupant Classification System OCS gt page 88 Although independent systems their protective functions work in conjunction with each
515. tic transmission to N while driving cancels the cruise control However the automatic transmission should not be set to N while driving except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding e g on icy roads i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not deactivate the cruise control After brief acceler ation e g for passing the cruise control will re sume the last speed set Controls in detail Setting a higher speed You can increase the set speed in two ways Adjustment in 1 mph Canada 1 km h increments i The set speed value is increased in 1 mph Canada 1 km h increments each time you lift the cruise control lever to the resistance point gt Briefly lift the cruise control lever up to the resistance point in direction of arrow 1 gt page 267 gt Release the cruise control lever The vehicle set speed increases in in crements of 1 mph Canada 1 km h Driving systems Adjustment in 5 mph Canada 10 km h increments A Warning You can increase the vehicle speed in 5 mph Canada 10 km h increments When using this feature keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has reached the set speed Increase the vehicle set speed to a value that the prevailing road conditions permit Otherwise sudden and unexpected acceler ation of the vehicle could cause an accident and or serious injury to you and others a The set speed value is increased in 5 mph Canad
516. tical hints T The factory equipped VRLA battery is leak proofed Only use a battery as replacement that has the same security features and is of identical size voltage and capacity as the factory equipped battery The battery the battery ventilation and the later al plug must always be securely installed when the vehicle is in operation A Jump starting must only be done using the jump start contacts located in the engine compartment gt page 514 Warning Battery A Failure to follow these instructions can re sult in severe injury or death Warning Observe all safety instructions and precau tions when handling automotive batteries gt page 506 Never lean over batteries while connecting you might get injured Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes skin or clothing In case it does immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary A battery will also produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep flames or sparks away from battery avoid improper connection of jumper cables smoking etc Practical hints Battery BE Never loosen or detach battery terminal Disconnecting removing reinstalling clamps while the engine is running or the and reconnecting the battery SmartKey is in the starter switch Otherwise the alternator and other electronic components could be severely damaged Warning A N
517. til you see one of the following two displays in the multifunction display Distronic activated When you turn Distronic on you will see the set speed in the multifunction display for about 5 seconds When Distronic is activated the following display appears in the multifunction display oisTRonic 2 mph S we 0 p 300 200 100 ft 1 Distronic activated 2 Set vehicle speed Distronic deactivated When Distronic is deactivated you will see the standard Distronic display in the multi function display 300 200 400 Oft N vehicle if detected 2 Actual distance to the preceding vehicle 3 Preset distance threshold to the preceding vehicle 4 Your vehicle Cruise control lever The Distronic system is operated by means of the cruise control lever The cruise control lever is the uppermost lever on the left hand side of the steering column N Fos4 25 5109 31 1 Setting current or higher speed Adjustment in 1 mph increments to the resistance point or 5 mph increments past the resistance point Canada 1 km h or 10 km h 2 Setting current or lower speed Adjustment in 1 mph increments to the resistance point or 5 mph increments past the resistance point Canada 1 km h or 10 km h 3 Deactivating Distronic 4 Activating Distronic or resuming to last set speed Activating Distronic You can activate Distronic when the vehi cle speed is between
518. tilt sliding sunroof 258 Convenience closing feature 256 Opening closing 258 Opening closing in an emergency 481 Stopping 256 Summer opening feature 254 synchronizing 260 Power washer 411 Power windows Cleaning 415 Convenience closing feature 256 Door windows 251 Hinged quarter windows 253 Opening closing 251 Rear door windows Blocking Operation 97 Summer opening feature 254 Synchronizing Door windows 254 Practical hints 419 Premium unleaded gasoline 541 Problems While driving 63 With starting see Starting difficulties With the vehicle 17 Product information 9 Production options weight 402 Program mode see Automatic transmission Automatic shift program Program mode selector switch Automatic shift program 206 PSI 402 Push starting see Tow starting Q Quarter windows see Power windows R RACETIMER see Control system menus AMG menu Radio AUDIO menu Control system 171 Selecting station 171 Selecting stations satellite 172 Radio transmitters 357 Range distance to empty 193 Reading lamp 154 155 Rear automatic climate control 245 Rear center console 323 Rear climate control 229 Rear door window sunshade 216 Rear door windows Blocking operation 97 Rear fog lamp see Fog lamp Rear Rear lamps see Tail lamps Rear seat ashtray see Ashtrays 319 Rear seat head restraints see Head restraints 139 Rear towing eye 518 Rear view camera 295 Cleaning 415 Lens Cleaning 415 Rear view mirrors see Mirrors Rear
519. tion 2 and back to With the headlamps delayed shut off pray position 0 e and oi iat lamp The selection marker is on the current The headlamps delayed shut off switch in position I before the engine earns feature is deactivated It will reactivate is turned off the following lamps will Aa as soon as you reinsert the SmartKey in switch on when the engine is turned off Headlamp delayed shut off H the starter switch A eame aps f Vehicles with KEYLESS GO Xi Jr della gii Sl fj gt Press the KEYLESS GO start stop e License plate lamps Ses 22 08 button gt page 41 e Side marker lamps gt pred button ES or E to switch A p the headlamps delayed shut off feature E TOME oe Ap On or Off If after turning off the engine you do not open a door or do not close an opened door the lamps will automatically switch off after 60 seconds gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to position W9 before turning off the engine The headlamps delayed shut off feature is activated Controls in detail Control system Setting interior lighting delayed shut off Use this function to set whether you would like the interior lighting to remain on for 10 seconds during darkness after you have removed the SmartKey from the starter switch gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Lighting submenu gt Press button JM or Re repeatedly until the message Int light delayed shut off appears in the
520. tions are available Function Page Selecting radio station 171 Selecting satellite radio station 172 USA only Operating CD player 172 Control system Selecting radio station gt Turn on the COMAND system and select radio Refer to separate COMAND system operating instruc tions gt Press button or repeatedly until the currently tuned station appears in the multifunction display m aA 2 ee 1 V 1 Waveband setting 2 Station frequency gt D Controls in detail Control system gt gt gt Press button RYA or KA repeatedly until the desired station is found The station search depends on the selected setting in the Vehicle submenu of the control system gt page 188 Pressing button A or BAN will either start a frequency scan or select the next stored radio station Qe You can only store new stations using the corresponding feature on the radio Refer to separate COMAND system operating instructions You can also operate the radio in the usual manner Selecting satellite radio station USA only The satellite radio is treated as a radio application gt Select satellite radio with the corresponding soft key on the COMAND system gt The Pulse C SAT mode 2 Channel name or number gt Press button BV or EAN repeatedly until the desired channel is found i Additional optional satellite radio equipment and a subscription to satellite radio service provid
521. tions of your vehicle this section will be of particular interest to you To quickly familiarize yourself with the ba sic functions of the vehicle refer to the Getting started section of this manual The corresponding page numbers are given at the beginning of each segment For more information on locking and un locking see the Getting started section gt page 38 and gt page 68 SmartKey Your vehicle comes supplied with two SmartKeys each with remote control and a removable mechanical key The locking tabs for the mechanical key portion of the two SmartKeys are a differ ent color to help distinguish each SmartKey unit The SmartKey provides an extended oper ating range To prevent theft however it is advisable to only unlock the vehicle when you are in close proximity to it The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks e the doors e the tailgate e the fuel filler flap P80 35 2285 31 SmartKey with remote control Lock button Unlock button for tailgate 3 Locking tab for mechanical key 4 Unlock button Battery check lamp 6 Panic button gt page 99 A When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle It is possible for children to open a locked door from the inside which could result in an accident and
522. tive door Controls in detail Lighting For information on how to switch on the headlamps and use the turn signals see Switching on headlamps gt page 59 and Turn signals gt page 60 fyou drive in countries where vehicles drive on the other side of the road than the country in which the vehicle is registered you must have the headlamps modified for symmetrical low beams Relevant information can be obtained at any authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Vehicles with active Bi Xenon headlamps The active Bi Xenon headlamps monitor the vehicle s steering angle and speed then auto matically shift their beams to either side to better follow the curvature of the road ahead in creasing usable illumination over conventional headlamps Exterior lamp switch Off Daytime running lamp mode gt page 148 Automatic headlamp mode Daytime running lamp mode gt page 147 Parking lamps also tail lamps license plate lamps side marker lamps instrument panel lamps Low beam headlamps or high beam headlamps when the combination switch is pushed forward The tail lamps license plate lamps side marker lamps parking lamps and instrument panel lamps also come on lt a Standing lamps right turn left one stop Standing lamps left turn left two stops Indicator lamp for front fog lamps Indicator lamp for rear fog lamp i Ifyou hear a warning signal when e
523. to open the tailgate The handle is located above the rear license plate recess P72 20 2553 31 Controls in detail gt Pull on the handle or gt Press and hold button on the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO until the tailgate unlocks and opens Ba The tailgate swings open upwards automat ically Always make sure there is sufficient over head clearance To stop the opening procedure press button on the SmartKey The tailgate stops moving a lf the vehicle was previously centrally locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS GO the tailgate will lock automatically when closed gt page 125 The turn signals will flash three times to confirm locking Locking and unlocking Loss of the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO If you lose your SmartKey with KEYLESS GO or mechanical key you should do the following gt Have the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO deactivated by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center gt Report the loss of the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO or the mechanical key immediately to your car insurance company gt Have the mechanical lock replaced if necessary Your authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center will be glad to supply you with a replacement Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Opening the doors from the inside If the vehicle has previously been locked Front doors from the outside with the SmartKey or gt Pulloninsidedoorhandie onthe You can open a locked door fro
524. to will briefly switch off the headlamps Doing so while driving in low ambient lighting conditions may result in an accident Lighting The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid to the driver The driver is responsible for the operation of the vehicle s lights at all times gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to position Bag With the SmartKey in starter switch position 1 or the KEYLESS GO start stop button pressed once only the parking lamps and the side marker lamps will switch on and off automati cally When the engine is running the low beam headlamps the tail and parking lamps the license plate lamps and the side marker lamps will switch on and off automatically Controls in detail Lighting Daytime running lamp mode gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to position WJ or Ez When the engine Is running the low beam headlamps are switched on In low ambient light conditions the following lamps will switch on addition ally e Tail and parking lamps e License plate lamps e Side marker lamps With the daytime running lamp mode activat ed and the engine running you cannot switch off the low beam headlamps manually Canada only The daytime running lamp mode is manda tory and therefore in a constant mode With the exterior lamp switch in position WJ or EGS you cannot switch on the high beam headlamps The high beam flasher is available at all times For nighttime driving tu
525. traints Adjust head restraint so that it is as close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation Safety and Security Occupant safety You cannot remove the active head restraint on the driver s and front passen ger s seats For removal of the active head restraints we recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center For information on head restraint adjust ment see Seats gt page 43 For information on resetting the activated active head restraints see Resetting acti vated head restraints gt page 482 Rear head restraints Warning A N Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints installed when the rear seats are occupied Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident With a third row seat occupied make sure to move the respective head restraint up from the lowest non use position and have the occupant adjust the head restraint properly For your protection drive only with properly positioned head restraints Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it is as close to the head as possible and the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accide
526. trol Indicator lamp AAA Signal transmitter button Needed for programming not part of vehicle equipment Hand held remote control of garage door opener gate operator or other device 6 Hand held remote control button Controls in detail Useful features Warning A N Before programming the integrated remote control to a garage door opener or gate operator make sure people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent po tential harm or damage When programming a garage door opener the door moves up or down When programming a gate operator the gate opens or closes Do not use the integrated remote control with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U S federal safety standards this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1 1982 A garage door that cannot detect an object signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U S federal safety standards When programming a garage door opener park the vehicle outside the garage Do not run the engine while programming the integrated remote control Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide CO and inhaling it can cause unconscious ness and possible death Programming the integrated remote control Step 1 gt Switch on the ignition gt page 39 Step 2 gt If you have previously pr
527. trol system gt page 174 displays both cleared and uncleared messages High priority messages appear in the multifunction display in red color Certain messages of high priority cannot be cleared from the multifunction display using the reset button gt page 156 or button EAN ed fae or on the multifunction steering wheel Other messages of high priority and mes sages of less immediate priority can be cleared from the multifunction display using the reset button gt page 156 or button AN ed fae or on the multifunction steering wheel They are then stored in the vehicle status message memory gt page 174 Remember that clearing a message will only make the mes sage disappear Clearing a message will not correct the condition that caused the message to appear Practical hints What to do if A Warning All categories of messages contain important information which should be taken note of and where a malfunction is indicated addressed as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Failure to repair condition noted may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty or result in property dam age or personal injury Practical hints What to do if Switching on the ignition causes all On the pages that follow you will find a Warning A N instrument cluster lamps except high beam compilation of the most important warning headlamp indicato
528. tronic as usual again Practical hints What to do if Display message Depress brake to shiit Out Oi Park Door Open Vehicle not in Park Drive to workshop without shifting gears Possible cause consequence Possible solution You have tried to shift the automatic gt Depress the brake pedal transmission into position D R or N using the gear selector lever without depressing the brake pedal You have opened the drivers door gt Before you leave the vehicle make sure and the automatic transmission is that the automatic transmission is set to still in position D R or N position P and that the parking brake is engaged The automatic transmission cannot Ifthe automatic transmission is set to be shifted out of the set position be position D cause of a malfunction gt Without changing the automatic transmis sion from position D drive to an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center If the automatic transmission is set to position N R or P gt Do not drive gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center Practical hints What to do if Display message Possible cause consequence Possible solution ESP inoperative In addition the yellow ESP warning Continue driving with added caution see Operator s Manual lamp Contas ell gt Have the system checked at an authorized The ESP has detected a malfunc Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center as soon tion and switch
529. tructions on initiating an emergency call manually Once the emergency call is in progress the indicator lamp on the SOS button will begin to flash The message Connecting call appears in the multifunc tion display When the connection is estab lished the message Call connected appears in the multifunction display All information relevant to the emergency such as the location of the vehicle deter mined by the GPS satellite location sys tem vehicle model identification number and color are generated Controls in detail Useful features A voice connection between the Response Center and the occupants of the vehicle will be established automatically soon after the emergency call has been initiat ed The Response Center will attempt to determine more precisely the nature of the accident provided they can speak to an occupant of the vehicle The Tele Aid system is available if e it has been activated and is operation al Activation requires a subscription for monitoring services connection and cellular air time e vehicle battery power is available e the relevant cellular phone network and GPS signals are available and pass the information on to the Response Center i Location of the vehicle on a map is only possible if the vehicle is able to receive signals from the GPS satellite network and pass the information on to the Response Center Warning VAN If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is fl
530. ts Where will I find gt Turn vehicle tool kit storing well casing 8 gt page 476 by approxi mately 180 The electric air pump gt page 473 points in direction of travel gt Fasten retaining screw Q gt page 476 by turning it clockwise gt Insert the jack into the vehicle tool kit storage well casing gt page 473 n P38 10 2114 31 1 Guide pins 2 Spare wheel id Fold the jack base outwards against the spring power and first insert the jack base into gt Place spare wheel 2 into spare wheel the recess in the left of the storage well casing well gt Close and pull tight the hook and Make sure spare wheel 2 is placed loop fastener that secures the precisely on guide pins Q jack gt page 473 p gt With the electric air pump gt page 473 pointing towards the rear insert vehicle tool kit storage well casing 8 gt page 476 into spare wheel 2 Practical hints Unlocking locking in an emergency Unlocking the vehicle If you cannot unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS GO open the driver s door using the mechanical key Unlocking the driver s door with the mechanical key will trigger the anti theft alarm system To cancel the alarm e Press button or on the SmartKey e nsert the SmartKey in the starter switch Vehicles with KEYLESS GO e Grasp an outside door handle The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be wi
531. ttery compartment 2 out of the SmartKey housing PB0 35 2284 31 3 Batteries 4 Contact springs gt Pull out batteries gt Using a line free cloth insert new bat teries 3 under contact springs 4 with the positive terminal side facing up gt Return battery compartment 2 into housing until it locks into place gt Slide mechanical key Q back into SmartKey gt Check the operation of the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO Practical hints Replacing bulbs Bulbs Safe vehicle operation depends on proper exterior lighting and signaling It is there fore essential that all bulbs and lamp assemblies are in good working order at all times Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely important Have headlamps checked and readjusted at regular intervals and when a bulb has been replaced See an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center for headlamp adjustment Qe If the headlamps or front fog lamps are fogged up on the inside as a result of high humid ity driving the vehicle a distance with the lights on should clear up the fogging fa Substitute bulbs will be brought into use when the following lamps malfunction e Turn signal lamps e Brake lamps e Parking lamps e Taillamps Read and observe messages in the multifunction display page 463 Front lamps Lamp Type Q Parking standing lamp W 5 W 2 Turn signal lamp PY 21W 3 Additional turn signal lamp LED 4 H
532. tures from foreign objects e Check to see whether air is leaking from the valves or from around the rim Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure are also increased while driving depending on the driving speed and the tire load If you will be driving your vehicle at high speeds of 100 mph 160 km h or higher where it is legal and conditions allow consult the placard on the inside of the fuel filler flap on how to adjust the cold tire in flation pressure If you do not adjust the tire inflation pressure excessive heat can build up and result in sudden tire failure Operation Tires and wheels Be sure to readjust the tire inflation pressure for normal driving speeds You should wait until the tires are cold before adjusting the tire inflation pressure a Driving comfort may be reduced when the tire inflation pressure is adjusted to the value for speeds above 100 mph 160 km h as specified on the placard located on the inside of the fuel filler flap Some vehicles may have supplemental tire inflation pressure information for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehi cle condition If such information is provid ed it can be found on the placard located on the inside of the fuel filler flap Tire inflation pressure changes by approxi mately 1 5 psi 0 1 bar per 18 F 10 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire inflation pressure where the temperature is different from the outs
533. uch as grass hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire Warning Emission control E I I OOE Certain engine systems serve to keep the toxic components of the exhaust gases within permissible legal limits These systems of course will function properly only when maintained strictly ac cording to factory specifications Any ad justments on the engine should therefore be carried out only by qualified Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center autho rized technicians Engine adjustments should not be altered in any way Moreover the specified service jobs must be carried out regularly accord ing to Mercedes Benz servicing require ments For details refer to the Maintenance Booklet Warning A N Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide CO and inhaling it can cause un consciousness and possible death Do not run the engine in confined areas such as a garage which are not properly ventilated If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving have the cause determined and corrected immediately If you must drive under these conditions drive only with at least one win dow fully open at all times Coolant temperature During severe operating conditions and stop and go city traffic the coolant temperature may rise to approximately 248 F 120 C The
534. uctions increases the risk of an accident as possible unavailable The ABS was deactivated because of When the voltage is above this value again the See Operator s Manual insufficient power supply The charg ABS is operational again and the message in ing voltage has fallen below 10 volts the multifunction display should disappear The brake system is still functioning If the message in the multifunction display normally but without the ABS does not disappear available gt Have the generator alternator and the battery checked Practical hints What to do if Display message ABS unavailable See Operator s Manual Cruise inoperative control and SPEEDTRONIC Cruise mph control Possible cause consequence If the yellow ESP warning lamp flashes while driving and this message appears the electron ic traction system has switched off to prevent overheating of the drive wheel brakes The self diagnosis has not yet been completed yet The cruise control is malfunctioning You have attempted to set a speed while driving below 20 mph 30 km h The ESP is switched off The automatic transmission is set to position P R or N The vehicle is secured with the parking brake Possible solution As soon as the brakes have cooled off the electronic traction system switches on again The message in the multifunction display disap pears and the ESP warning lamp goes out The dis
535. ume and air distribution are ad justed automatically Deactivating rear automatic climate control gt Press button AJJ The indicator lamp on the button goes out The cooling function switches off after a short delay i Switch off the rear automatic climate control for improved cooling or heating output in the front passenger compartment You can also switch off the rear automatic climate control from the front passenger com partment gt page 246 Operating from the front Deactivating gt Press button ERY gt page 234 The indicator lamp on the button comes on In display 4 gt page 234 you will see the ZEEE symbol followed by MODE for approximately 3 seconds Press button gt page 234 In display 4 gt page 234 you will see the ZEEE symbol followed by OFF The rear automatic climate control is switched off Reactivating gt Press button EEN gt page 234 The indicator lamp on the button comes on In display 4X gt page 234 you will see the EES symbol followed by ON and MODE The MODE display is cleared and the indicator lamp on button Egy goes out after approximately 3 seconds The rear automatic climate control switches on Controls in detail 3 zone automatic climate control Setting the temperature Adjusting air distribution Adjusting manually gt Make sure the front automatic climate Use the air distribution controls orG gt Pres
536. uminate depending on the distance When the seventh distance segment illuminates you have reached the minimum distance e Front area An intermittent acoustic warning lasting a maximum of 2 seconds will sound as the first red distance segment illuminates and a constant acoustic warning lasting a maximum of 2 seconds will sound for the second red distance segment The signal is canceled when the automatic transmission is set to position P or the parking brake is set e Rear area An intermittent acoustic warning lasting a maximum of 2 seconds will sound as the first red distance segment illuminates and a constant acoustic warning lasting a maximum of 2 seconds will sound for the second red distance segment The signal is canceled when the automatic transmission is set to position D P or the parking brake is set Controls in detail Driving systems Switching the Parktronic system on off You can switch off the Parktronic system manually The Parktronic switch is located in the upper part of the center console Q Parktronic switch 2 Indicator lamp Switching off gt Press Parktronic switch Q Indicator lamp 2 comes on Switching on gt Press Parktronic switch Q once more Indicator lamp 2 goes out i The Parktronic system switches on automatically when you switch on the ignition gt page 39 Parktronic system malfunction If only the red distance segments illumi nate and a
537. unroof are completely closed Release the lock button on the outside door handle to interrupt the closing procedure Vehicles with tilt sliding panel If tilt sliding panel is closed gt Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO at the driver s outside door handle gt page 255 The SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be in close proximity to the driver s door handle gt Press and hold button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO until the windows and the roller sunblinds are completely closed gt Release button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO to interrupt the closing procedure Controls in detail Vehicles with KEYLESS GO gt Press and hold the lock button on an outside door handle gt page 69 until the windows and the roller sunblinds are completely closed gt Release the lock button on the outside door handle to interrupt the closing procedure If tilt sliding panel is open gt Aimtransmitter eye of the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO at the driver s outside door handle gt page 255 The SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be in close proximity to the driver s door handle gt Press and hold button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO until the windows and the tilt sliding panel are completely closed Power windows gt Release button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO to interrupt
538. uspect that possi should be replaced ble damage to your vehicle has occurred you should turn on the hazard warning flashers carefully slow down and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the road Warning AN Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody for possible damage If the vehicle or tires appear unsafe have the vehicle towed to the nearest Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center or tire dealer for repairs The treadwear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread Although the applicable federal motor vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be worn when the treadwear indicators TWI become visible at approximately 1 46 in 1 6 mm we recommend that you do not allow your tires to wear down to that level As tread depth approaches 7 in 3 mm the adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply reduced Depending upon the weather and or road surface conditions the tire traction varies widely Specified tire inflation pressures must be maintained This applies particularly if the tires are subjected to high loads e g high speeds heavy loads high ambient temper atures Warning A N Do not drive with a flat tire A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle You may lose control of the vehicle Continued driving with a flat tire or driving at high speed with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build up and possibly a fire For more information see Tires a
539. usting it to a lower level T Before jacking up the vehicle with equip ment that lifts one or more of the wheels com pletely off the ground remove the SmartKey from the starter switch BE Please also note the information in the section on towing gt page 517 The activation threshold is defined by the set suspension tuning gt page 286 Basic settings except R 63 AMG There are two settings from which to choose e Raised level for driving on rough roads e Highway level for driving on paved roads in fair or better condition a The third available level is the highspeed level that is set automatically Driving systems The vehicle s ride height changes by the approximate values given in table below according to the set level Level Ride height Raised 1 97 in 50 mm Highway 0 Highspeed 0 78 in 20 mm The vehicle lowers to highspeed level automatically when e the vehicles speed exceeds 70 mph 112 km h e the vehicles speed is between 60 mph 96 km h and 70 mph 112 km h for longer than 20 seconds i Obey local speed limits Use prudent driving speeds appropriate to prevailing conditions Controls in detail Driving systems Basic settings R 63 AMG only The vehicle will be lowered by The vehicle lowers to highspeed level auto There are two settings from which to 0 87 in 22 mm after the engine is turned off matically when choose From the raised level the vehicle wil
540. utes Cargo compartment lamp 1 Rear right reading lamp on off The cargo compartment lamp comes on 2 Rear left reading lamp on off when the tailgate is opened Rear left reading lamp If you leave the tailgate open for an Rear interior lamp extended period of time the cargo Rear right reading lamp compartment lamp will switch off automatically after approximately 10 minutes Controls in detail Instrument cluster For a full view illustration of the instrument cluster see Instrument cluster gt page 26 1 To dim instrument cluster illumination 2 Reset button 3 To brighten instrument cluster illumination The instrument cluster is activated when you e open a door switch on the ignition gt page 39 e press reset button 2 switch on the exterior lamps gt page 146 You can change the instrument cluster settings in the instrument cluster submenu of the control system gt page 179 Warning A N No messages will be displayed if either the instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative As a result you will not be able to see infor mation about your driving conditions such as speed or outside temperature warn ing indicator lamps malfunction warning messages or the failure of any systems Driving characteristics may be impaired If you must continue to drive do so with added caution Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Cent
541. utomatically and reactivate the anti theft alarm system within approximately 40 seconds of un locking if e neither door nor tailgate is opened e the SmartKey is not inserted in the starter switch e the central locking switch is not activated Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Global locking gt Press button BAN With the tailgate and all doors closed the turn signal lamps flash three times The locking knobs on the doors move down The anti theft alarm system is armed Selective setting If you frequently travel alone you may wish to reprogram the SmartKey so that pressing button only unlocks the driver s door and the fuel filler flap gt Press and hold buttons and simultaneously for about 5 seconds until battery check lamp G gt page 112 flashes twice The SmartKey will then function as fol lows Unlocking driver s door and fuel filler flap gt Press button once All turn signal lamps flash once The locking knob in the driver s door moves up The anti theft alarm system is disarmed Global unlocking gt Press button twice All turn signal lamps flash once The locking knobs in the doors move up The anti theft alarm system is disarmed Global locking gt Press button eg With the tailgate and all doors closed the turn signal lamps flash three times The locking knobs on the doors move down The anti theft alarm system is armed Restoring to factory setting
542. utomatically depending on e drive position D gt page 201 with gear ranges gt page 205 e the selected program mode C S gt page 206 or M C S R 63 AMG only gt page 209 e the position of the accelerator pedal gt page 203 e the vehicle speed i Allow engine to warm up under low load use Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only when the vehicle is stopped Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period when driving off on slippery road surfaces This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty With drive position D selected you can use the steering wheel gearshift control buttons gt page 207 to influence trans mission shifting by e limiting the gear range e changing gears manually Transmission positions The current transmission position appears in the multifunction display PIAF 1 Current transmission position BE if the current transmission position does not appear in the multifunction display due to a malfunction for example make sure that the automatic transmission is in the desired position by carefully driving off with the transmission in drive position D and program mode S gt page 206 selected Do not limit the gear range Controls in detail Effect Park position Shift into park positio
543. utomatically after closing it The turn signals will flash three times to confirm locking Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Closing and locking the tailgate gt Make sure you have the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO with you gt Press KEYLESS GO locking closing switch 2 briefly The tailgate closes automatically and an acoustic warning sounds Once the tailgate is closed the vehicle locks if doors are closed The turn signals flash three times to confirm locking The locking knobs in the doors move down The anti theft alarm system is armed If the tailgate comes into contact with an object while closing e g luggage that has been piled too high the closing procedure is stopped and the tailgate reopens ig To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout the tailgate will open automatically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is recognized inside the vehicle Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Automatic central locking The doors and the tailgate lock automati cally when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph 15 km h or more You can open a locked door from the in side Open door only when conditions are safe to do so id The doors unlock automatically after an accident if the force of the impact exceeds a pre set threshold The vehicle automatically locks when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of a
544. utton REE bane i you you the gear currently engaged as well as RACETIMER 169 Pply ge the engine oil temperature Overall analysis 170 gt Press button or repeatedly Lap analysis 171 until you see the AMG menu the manual shift program page 209 the EEEEEEE 1 menu will be shown in red In addition you will Cear indicator see UP next to gear indicator Q as a reminder to upshift If the engine reaches the overspeed range in 2 Vehicle supply voltage fe 213 1 Gear indicator 2 Engine oil temperature i The engine oil temperature symbol flashes if the engine oil temperature has not yet reached 80 C During this time avoid driving at full engine speed Controls in detail Control system RACETIMER gt Press button or repeatedly Starting the RACETIMER until you see the AMG menu gt Press button JEN Warning AN gt Press button EAN repeatedly until you the imersas see the RACETIMER The RACETIMER feature is only for use on roads and in conditions where high speed driving is permitted Racing on public roads Displaying intermediate time gt Press button EE while the timer is is prohibited under any circumstances and running the driver is and must always remain re 3 The intermediate time is shown for sponsible for following posted speed limits 4 ss 5 seconds 1 Gear indicator The RACETIMER allows you to time and RACETIMER Stopping the RACETIMER save driv
545. ve e Grease and oil e Fuel e Coolant e Brake fluid e Bird droppings e Insects e Tree resins etc Frequent washing reduces and or elimi nates the aggressiveness and potency of the above adverse influences More frequent washings are necessary to deal with unfavorable conditions e near the ocean e in industrial areas smoke exhaust emissions e during winter operation You should check your vehicle from time to time for stone chipping or other damage Any damage should be repaired as soon as possible to prevent corrosion In doing so do not neglect the underbody of the vehicle A prerequisite for a thor ough check is a washing of the underbody followed by a thorough inspection Dam aged areas need to be re undercoated Your vehicle has been treated at the facto ry with a wax base rustproofing in the body cavities which will last for the lifetime of the vehicle Post production treatment is neither necessary nor recommended by Mercedes Benz because of the possibility of incompatibility between materials used in the production process and others applied later We have selected car care products and compiled recommendations which are specially matched to our vehicles and which always reflect the latest technology You can obtain Mercedes Benz approved car care products at an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center scratches corrosive deposits corrosion or damage due to negligent or incorrect ca
546. vehicle interior is hot ventilate the interior before driving off see Summer opening fea Deactivating ture gt page 254 The automatic climate control will then adjust the interior temperature Press button gt page 234 until to the set value much faster the display 4 gt page 234 is cleared Keep the air intake grille in front of the wind The indicator lamp on the button shield free of snow and debris comes on Operating the automatic climate control system in automatic mode You can switch the automatic climate control system on and off separately for each zone as needed 0 When operating the automatic climate con trol system in automatic mode you will only rarely need to adjust the temperature air volume and air distribution In automatic mode cooling with dehumidify is switched on This function can be switched off if necessary Activating gt Press button Ri gt page 234 while the engine is running The indicator lamp on the button comes on AUTO appears in the display 4 gt page 234 Air volume and air distribution are controlled separately for each zone Controls in detail gt Use temperature controls and gt page 234 to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment The temperature of the interior is adjusted automatically Deactivating gt Press one button of the air distribution gt page 234 or press button o
547. vehicle is raised Otherwise the vehicle could fall off the jack Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric air pump gt page 472 before lowering the vehicle Warning A N Observe instructions on air pump label BB Do not lower the vehicle before inflating the collapsible tire Otherwise the rim may be dam aged gt Take the electric air pump out of the vehicle tool kit storage well gt page 472 gt gt Practical hints Flat tire gt Screw union nut G onto the gt Inflate the spare wheel tire to the collapsible tire valve recommended tire inflation pressure given in the Technical data section gt Insert electrical plu into a power plug j gt page 532 outlet gt page 322 This takes about 5 minutes for the T The cigarette lighter page 319 is not collapsible tire designed for use with the electric air pump Use a power outlet page 322 for electric air pump operation Warning A N ees A Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch Electric air pump to position 1 Air hose and union nut G can become hot during inflation Exercise proper caution 2 aap gt Vehicles with KEYLESS GO to avoid burning yourself when using the 2 On off switch Press the KEYLESS GO start stop En 3 Electrical plug button once without depressing the 4 Air hose with pressure gauge and vent brake pedal screw oo T Do not operate the electric air pump longer Union nut gt Press
548. vel gt Have excess oil siphoned or drained off Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center i Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off It could cause damage to the engine and or catalytic converter gasoline engine or the oxidation catalyst diesel engine not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty For more information on messages in the multifunction display concerning engine oil see the Practical hints section gt page 459 Checking engine oil level with the oil dipstick except R 500 When checking the oil level the vehicle must be parked on level ground with the engine at operating tempera ture the vehicle must have been stationary for at least 5 minutes with the engine turned off with the engine not at operating tem perature yet the vehicle also must have been stationary for at least 5 minutes with the engine turned off 1 Oil dipstick 2 Upper mark 3 Lower mark gt gt gt gt Open the hood gt page 364 Pull out oil dipstick Q Wipe oil dipstick clean Fully insert oil dipstick Q into the dipstick guide tube Pull out oil dipstick Q again after approximately 3 seconds to obtain accurate reading The oil level is correct when it is between lower mark 8 min and upper mark max of the oil dipstick All models except R 63 AMG The filling quantity between the upper and lower marks on the oil dipstick i
549. ven if the activat ing element a door for example is imme diately closed The alarm system will also be triggered when e the vehicle is opened with the mechan ical key see Unlocking the vehicle gt page 478 e adoor is opened from the inside see Opening the doors from the inside gt page 122 Safety and Security Anti theft systems f the alarm stays on for more than gt Make sure all doors and thetailgate are Disarming the alarm system 30 seconds a call to the Response Center is closed gt initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system gt page 330 provided that the Tele Aid service The turn signal lamps flash once to was subscribed to and properly activated and The turn signal lamps flash three times indicate that the vehicle is disarmed that necessary cellular service and GPS cover to indicate that the vehicle is locked Alarm system indicator lamp goes age are available Unlock the vehicle gt page 38 Lock the vehicle gt page 68 The alarm system is armed within ap gut Arming the alarm system proximately 10 seconds Alarm system The alarm system will rearm automatically indicator lamp flashes again after approximately 40 seconds ifneither a The alarm system is armed after you have locked the vehicle with the SmartKey or i If the turn signal lamps do not flash three SmartKey with KEYLESS GO times one of the following elements may not be properly closed
550. ver can now be used gt Shift automatic transmission to D or R gt page 199 p Wait for the gear selection process to complete before setting the vehicle in motion i Shifting from gear position P to position R N or D is only possible with the brake pedal depressed Without the brake pedal depressed the gear selector lever can be moved but the parking pawl remains engaged not allowing Shifting to occur gt Release the brake pedal gt Carefully depress the accelerator pedal T If you hear a warning signal and the message Release parking brake appears in the multifunction display when driving off you have forgotten to release the parking brake Release the parking brake gt page 57 Once the vehicle is in motion the automatic central locking system engages and the locking knobs drop down The automatic door lock feature can be deactivated gt page 189 You can open a locked door from the inside Open door only when conditions are safe to do so After a cold start the automatic transmis sion shifts at a higher engine revolution This allows the catalytic converter gasoline engine or the oxidation catalyst diesel engine to reach its operating tem perature earlier Warning A N On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi cle control Your vehicle s ABS will not pre vent this type of lo
551. vice indicator ccceseeceeeees 409 Vehicle Cafe sessssensssersssesssseessseress 410 Cleaning and care of the vehicle 410 Practical hints cccceceeeeeees 419 What to COAT wsccsssmresunntantonrtveswndsvenedent 420 Lamps in instrument cluster 420 Lamp in center console 431 Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display 666 433 Where will find 0 eeeeceeeeeeeees 472 PIRSE AIC Kii ces ncseeedavecsviariceradeidunets 472 Vehicle tool Kit ccccssescceeeees 472 Spare WNEEI cccssscceseceeseeeees 475 Unlocking locking in an emergency 478 Unlocking the vehicle 066 478 Locking the vehicle c se0ee 479 Fuel filler flap cccccccesececeeeees 479 Opening closing in an emergency 481 Power tilt sliding sunroof 481 Resetting activated head restraints 482 Replacing SmartKey batteries 483 Replacing DUlbS ceccceseeeceeeeeeeees 484 BUD Gi E E E E aedeuateaanansiaate 484 Replacing bulbs for front lamps 487 Replacing bulbs for rear lamps 491 Replacing wiper blades 668 494 Front wiper blades cceeee 494 Rear wiper blade ccceeeceeeees 495 FNC UII a AR 497 Preparing the vehicle 06 497 Mounting the spare wheel 498 Bleeding the fuel system diesel engine Only ccc
552. ving habits A gentle driving style moderate engine speeds and the avoidance of short distance trips will lengthen the interval between services Clearing the maintenance service indicator message The maintenance service indicator mes sage Is automatically cleared e after approximately 10 seconds when you switch on the ignition or when reaching the maintenance service threshold while driving e after approximately 30 seconds once the suggested maintenance service term has passed You can also clear it yourself 1 Reset button gt Press reset button Q on the instru ment cluster The maintenance service indicator message is cleared and the standard display appears in the multifunction display gt page 166 Maintenance service term exceeded If you have exceeded the suggested main tenance service term you will see the fol lowing message in the multifunction display Service A exceeded by XXXXX miles km Service A exceeded by XXX days Service A exceeded by X day In addition a signal sounds when the message appears Any authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center will reset the maintenance service indicator following a completed mainte nance service Calling up the maintenance service indicator display The menu overview can be found on gt page 162 You can call up the maintenance service indicator display at any time to check when the next maintenance service is due g
553. with KEYLESS GO from starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and or serious personal injury amp You can also open or close the windows us ing the SmartKey see Summer opening fea ture gt page 254 and Convenience closing feature gt page 256 Depending on the current position the power windows may also open or close when the air recirculation button Eggjon the control panel of the climate control gt page 220 or automatic climate control gt page 234 is pressed and held With the SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or removed from the starter switch the windows can be operated e until you open the driver s or front passenger door e for at least 5 minutes Opening the door windows gt Press switch 1 2 or gt page 251 to the resistance point The corresponding door window moves downwards until you release the switch Closing the door windows gt Pull switch O or gt page 251 to the resistance point The corresponding door window moves upwards until you release the switch A If you pull and hold the switch up when clos ing the door window and upward movement of the door window is blocked by some obstruction including but not limited to arms hands fingers etc the automati
554. workshop critical level and add oil as required gt page 369 gt If you must add engine oil frequently have the engine checked for possible leaks T The engine oil level warnings should notbe Serious engine damage that is not covered by the ignored Extended driving with the symbol dis Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty played could result in Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Possible cause consequence Possible solution You are driving with one or more Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as doors open soon as it is safe to do so gt Close the doors D Gas cap is open A loss of pressure has been gt Check the fuel cap gt page 360 detected in the fuel system The fuel cap may not be closed properly or the fuel system may Close the fuel cap If it is not closed properly be leaky If it is closed properly gt Have the fuel system checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center S You are driving with the hood or gt Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as the tailgate open soon as it is safe to do so in a safe location gt Close the hood gt page 364 or the tailgate gt page 125 You are trying to lock the vehicle gt Close all doors and or the tailgate with the KEYLESS GO function gt page 125 with a door or the tailgate open Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Possible cause consequence Possible so
555. xiting the vehicle you have forgotten to switch off the ex terior lamps In addition the message Switch off lights appears in the multifunction display Switch off the exterior lamps O With the daytime running lamp mode activat ed and the engine running the low beam head lamps cannot be switched off manually For information on how to activate the daytime running lamp mode see Daytime running lamp mode page 148 Manual headlamp mode The low beam headlamps and the parking lamps can be switched on and off with the exterior lamp switch gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to position ey Automatic headlamp mode The following lamps switch on and off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light e Low beam headlamps e Tail and parking lamps e License plate lamps e Side marker lamps Controls in detail Warning AN If the exterior lamp switch is set to RI e the headlamps may switch off unexpectedly when the system senses bright ambient light for example light from oncoming traffic e the headlamps will not be automatically switched on under foggy conditions To minimize risk to you and to others activate headlamps by turning exterior lamp switch to when driving or when traffic and or ambient lighting conditions require you to do so In low ambient lighting conditions only switch from position BG to with the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location Switching from Mg
556. y Infants and small children should be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system properly secured in accordance with the manufacturers in structions for the child restraint that complies with U S Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 and 210 2 A statement by the child restraint manu facturer of compliance with these stan dards can be found on the instruction label on the restraint and in the instruction man ual provided with the restraint When using any infant or child restraint system make sure to carefully read and follow all manufacturer s instructions for installation and use Please read and observe warning labels affixed to inside of vehicle and to infant or child restraints Warning VAN According to accident statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seat ing position Thus we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats whenever possible Regardless of seating position children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant or child restraint recom mended for the size and weight of the child The infant or child restraint must be properly secured with the vehicle s seat belt the seat belt and top tether strap or lower anchors and top tether strap fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer s inst
557. y 460 Opening 364 Hooks Loading 300 Horn 25 HVAC see Climate control or Automatic cli mate control 3 zone Hydroplaning 352 l Identification label see Labels Identification labels Certification label 527 Ignition 40 54 67 Immobilizer 107 Indicator lamps see Lamps Indicator and warning Infant and child restraint systems see Children in the vehicle Inflation pressure see Tires Inflation pressure Information button see Tele Aid Infrared reflecting windshield 344 Inside door handle 122 Instrument cluster 26 156 Illumination brightness 157 Lamps 420 Messages in the multifunction display 433 471 Multifunction display 159 Selecting language 179 Instrument lighting see Instrument cluster Illumination brightness Instrument panel see Instrument cluster Instruments and controls see Cockpit Interior lighting 153 Delayed switch off 186 Interior rear view mirror 48 Antiglare position 212 Auto dimming 213 Interior storage spaces see Storage com partments Intermittent wiping Windshield wipers 61 J Jack 472 474 Jacking up the vehicle 498 Jump starting 514 K Key Mechanical 478 Key SmartKey 112 Batteries 115 483 Battery check lamp 112 Checking battery condition 115 Closing the power windows Convenience closing feature 256 Closing the tilt sliding panel Convenience closing feature 256 Closing the tilt sliding sunroof Convenience closing feature 256 Closing Power tailgate 127 Factory settings
558. y cause the upholstery to become permanently dis colored By lining the seats with a proper intermediate cover contact discoloration will be prevented A Only use seat or head restraint covers which have been tested and approved by Mercedes Benz for your vehicle model Using other seat or head restraint covers may interfere with or prevent the activation of the active head restraints Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center for availability Warning Operation Vehicle care Leather upholstery Please note that leather upholstery is a natural product and is therefore subject to a natural aging process Leather up holstery may also react to certain ambient influences such as high humidity or high temperature by showing wrinkles for example gt Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes Benz approved Leather Care RE Wipe with light pressure to avoid damage to the upholstery Exercise particular care when cleaning perforated leather as its underside should not become wet Wood trims gt Dampen cloth using water and use damp cloth to clean wood trims in your vehicle i Do not use solvents like tar remover or wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as these may be abrasive Practical hints What to do if Where will I find Unlocking locking in an emergency Opening closing in an emergency Resetting activated head restraints
559. y coverage Your vehicle is covered under the terms of Replacement parts and accessories are the warranties printed in the Service and covered by the Mercedes Benz Parts and Warranty Information booklet Your Accessories warranties copies of which authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck are available at any Mercedes Benz Light Center will exchange or repair any defec Truck Center tive parts originally installed on the vehicle in accordance with the terms of the follow ing warranties New Vehicle Limited Warranty Emission System Warranty Emission Performance Warranty California Maine Massachusetts and Vermont Emission Control Systems Warranty Warranty coverage Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information booklet have an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center arrange for a replacement It will be mailed to you Technical data Identification labels mi BY oe U S INTL INC Soe 25 ss olson 20 SE ir sase 2525 aoe zz wwr 2783016240 THES VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE 4AJGCB 5E06A0 W 3 MERCEDES BENZ U S INTL INC RM STE COLD KPAPSI 220 32 260138 GAWR PNEY 3150 027 06 TYPE MPV VTUM C776 E TNA MANUFACTURED UNDER CONTRACT kz EE a FOR DAIMLERCHRYSLER AG e A 4 GCB465E06A00089 si uni a mm 63 20 6282 31 POO 00 3274 31 P99
560. y does not go out automatically Leaving an interior lamp switch in the ON position for extended periods of time with the engine turned off could result in a discharged battery Deactivating automatic control The interior lighting is factory set to automatic mode gt Press switch 3 The interior lighting and the locator lighting gt page 184 remain switched off even when you e unlock the vehicle e remove the SmartKey from the starter switch e open a door e open the tailgate Controls in detail Lighting Activating automatic control gt Press switch The interior lighting and the locator lighting gt page 184 come on when you e unlock the vehicle e remove the SmartKey from the starter switch e open a door e open the tailgate The interior lighting switches off after 10 seconds see Setting interior lighting delayed shut off gt page 186 i If a door remains open the interior lighting switches off automatically after approximately 5 minutes Manual control Switching front rear interior lighting on and off gt Press front rear interior lighting switch or 2 gt page 153 to switch on the desired interior light gt Press front rear interior lighting switch or 2 again to switch off the respective interior light Switching front reading lamps on and off The front reading lamps are located in the lower edge of the interior rear view mirror gt
561. y need to adjust the temperature air volume and air distri bution In automatic mode cooling with dehumidify is switched on This function can be switched off if necessary page 228 comes on The air volume and air distri bution are adjusted automatically gt Use temperature controls and gt page 220 to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment The interior air temperature is adjusted automatically i The settings for the passenger side are also used for the rear passenger compartment Deactivating gt Or Press button or gt page 220 The indicator lamp on button MAg goes out The automatic operation of air volume switches off The selected blower speed is shown in the air volume display G gt page 220 Press air distribution button or O gt page 220 The indicator lamp on button Big goes out The automatic operation of air distribution switches off Controls in detail Setting the temperature Use temperature controls Q and gt page 220 to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment You should raise or lower the temperature setting in small incre ments preferably starting at 72 F 22 C The climate control will adjust to the set temperature as fast as possible Increasing gt Turn temperature control Q and or 7 gt page 220 slightly clockwise The climate co
562. y to deploy the driver front air bag that the seat was occupied by a small individ ual such as a young teenager or a small adult or a child weighing more than the weight of a typical 12 month old child in a standard child restraint instances where the system may suppress deployment of the front passenger front air bag even though the impact met the criteria and was of suffi cient severity to deploy the driver front air bag Safety and Security Occupant safety The indicator lamp is lo f A poeni P80 30 2206 31 indicator lamp The indicator lamp Q will be illuminated except with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch or with the starter switch in position O gt page 39 Warning AN If the 9 indicator lamp and the indicator lamp are lit at the same time there is a malfunction in the Occupant Classification System The front passenger front air bag will be deactivated in this case Have the system checked as soon as possible by qualified technicians Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Light Truck Center In order to ensure proper operation of the air bag system and OCS Do not place more than 4 4 Ibs 2 kg into the parcel net on the back of the front passenger seat Otherwise the OCS may not be able to properly approx imate the occupant weight category Do not place objects under and or around the front passenger seat Do not hang anything from or attach any items to the seats
563. y unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Canada only This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference re ceived including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Compass Calling up the compass gt Press button or repeatedly until the AIRMATIC Compass menu appears in the multifunction display The compass displays the direction into which the vehicle is currently trav eling N NE E SE S SW Wor NW AIRMATIC Compass NE G o Example for compass display on vehicles equipped with AIRMATIC d If your vehicle is not equipped with AIRMATIC the multifunction display will show the compass only i The presence of buildings bridges power lines and large antenna masts can influence the displayed values Metallic or magnetic objects in or on the vehicle can influence the accuracy of the compass To make sure the display is correct the compass must be set to the proper geographic zone gt page 186 It may also be necessary to calibrate the compass gt page 187 f the compass is not calibrated or its func tion is impaired by outside influenc
564. you are driving in a very sporty manner involving rapid acceleration or high speeds in curves Operation Tires and wheels Warning VAN When the multifunction display shows the message Tire pressure Check tires One or more of your tires is significantly un derinflated You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper tire inflation pressure as indicat ed on the vehicle s tire information placard Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Each tire including the spare should be checked monthly when cold and set to the recommended tire inflation pressure as specified on the Tire And Loading Informa tion placard gt page 377 or on the tire in flation pressure label gt page 382 Operation Tires and wheels A The Run Flat Indicator does not provide a warning for wrongly selected tire inflation pressures Always adjust tire inflation pres sure according to the placard on the drivers door B pillar or fuel filler flap Warning The Run Flat Indicator does not replace reg ular checks of the tire inflation pressures since a gradual pressure loss in all four tires cannot be detected by the Run Flat Indicator The Run Flat Indicator is not able to issue a warning due to a sudden dramat
565. ystem and navigation module gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Time Date submenu gt Press button JM or ed repeatedly until the message Clock Set hour appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the hour setting Clack Set hour 03 pm gt Press button or E to set th hour Control system Setting the time minutes This function is not available if your vehicle is equipped with the COMAND system and navigation module gt Move the selection marker with button or SSH to the Time Date submenu gt Press button JAM or Re repeatedly until the message Clock Set minute s appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the minute setting Clack Set minute s 10 pm gt Press button or E to set th minutes Controls in detail Control system Setting the date month This function is not available if your vehicle is equipped with the COMAND system and navigation module gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Time Date submenu gt Press button JA or Re repeatedly until the message Date Set month appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the month setting Date Set month fs30 2005 gt Press button ES or E to set the month Ls Setting the date day This function is not available if your vehicle is equipped with the COMAND system and navigation mo
566. ystem available today can totally eliminate injuries and fatalities The deployment of the air bags temporarily releases a small amount of dust from the air bags This dust however is neither injurious to your health nor does it indicate a fire in the vehicle The dust might cause some tem porary breathing difficulty for people with asthma or other breathing trouble To avoid this you may wish to get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so If you have any breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the vehicle after the air bag inflates then get fresh air by opening a window or door Warning AN To reduce the risk of injury when the front air bags inflate it is very important for the driver and front passenger to always be in a properly seated position and to wear their respective seat belt For maximum protection in the event of a collision always be in normal seated position with your back against the seat backrest Fasten your seat belt and make sure it is properly positioned on your body gt page 51 Since the air bag inflates with considerable speed and force a proper seating and hands on steering wheel position will help to keep you at a safe distance from the air bag Occupants who are unbelted out of position or too close to the air bag can be seriously injured or killed by an air bag as it inflates with great force in the blink of an eye e Sit properly belted in a nearly upright position with y

Mercedes-Benz 2003 C 320 Sport Automobile User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents